Manual Reparatie Massey Ferguson-8400

Massey Ferguson 8400
Workshop service manual

n° 3378647M2
CONTENTS
01 - Introduction - Specifications
03 - Engine
05 - Gearbox
06 - Rear axle
07 - Power take off
08 - Front axle
09 - Hydraulics
10 - Electrical equipment
11 - Electronics
12 - Cab and equipment
AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France September 2005
H
Massey Ferguson 8400
September 2005 AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France
¤ H
Introduction - Specifications
01 - Introduction - Specifications
CONTENTS
01A01 - Introduction
Massey Ferguson 8400 Contents - i
¤ H
Introduction - Specifications
Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 8400
¤ H
Introduction
01A01 - Introduction
CONTENTS
A . Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Ground speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . General dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
F . Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G . Retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
H . Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 01A01.1
¤ H
Introduction
01A01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
Introduction
Tractor safety features may be impaired if non-genuine

A . Using the manual parts are fitted.
Legislation in certain countries prohibits the fitting of
General parts that do not comply with the tractor manufac-
The purpose of this manual is to assist Dealers and turer’s specifications. Torque wrench setting figures
Agents in the efficient installation, maintenance and given in the Workshop Service Manual must be strictly
repair of AGCO equipment. Carrying out the proce- adhered to. Locking devices must be fitted where
dures as detailed, together with the use of special specified. If the efficiency of a locking device is
tools where appropriate, will enable the operations to impaired during removal, it must be replaced.
be completed within the time stated in the Repair Time The tractor warranty may be invalidated if non-genuine
Schedule. AGCO parts are fitted. All AGCO replacement parts
have the full backing of the manufacturer’s warranty.
AGCO Dealers and Agents are required to supply only
Page numbering genuine service parts.
The present manual is divided into chapters and
sections, and each page is numbered with the
following information:
Example: 10A01.1
10 = Chapter
A = Section
01 = Sequence number within the section
1 = Page number within the section
The issue number is indicated at the bottom of the page.
Use
For quick reference, each chapter starts with a table of
contents, listing the various sections included in that
chapter.
Meaning of references
(..) : identification of parts and components
Amendments
Amended pages will be issued carrying the same page
number as the former pages; only the issue number
and date will be changed.
Former pages should be destroyed.
Service tools
Where the use of a service tool is necessary to carry
out an operation, the tool reference is mentioned
following the relevant instruction.
Drawings for locally made tools are given in the final
sections of the relevant chapters.
Repairs and replacements

When parts have to be replaced, it is essential that only
genuine AGCO parts are used.
The following points are of particular importance when
carrying out repairs and fitting replacement parts and
accessories.
¤ H
Introduction
Automated power yes

B . General characteristics take-off
Front power take-off no

8450 model
Front axle
Engine Model AG 210 (750/522): 15.75
ISO (CV)power 215 Front / Rear axle 1.348
synchro ratio
ISO power (Kw) 158
Type fixed
Trademark SISU EEM
Rotational direction anti-clockwise
Type 74ETA
Number of clutch discs 6
Number of cylinders / 6 / 7.4
Cylinder capacity (L) Fender (4WD) optional
Turbocharger yes 2-wheel drive no
Intercooler Air / air Front linkage (optional) 3.5 T
Injection pump Bosch VP44 Hydraulics
Fan Viscostatic 152 l/min Closed Centre yes
Alternator 150 A Orbitrol steering unit OSPDF 80/240
Transmission Steering (volume cc) 80 (first pump) and 240 (second pump)
Model DYNA VT ML 200 Brake master cylinder power-assisted
Clutch / Reverse shuttle Gearbox with continuous variation, direction Hydraulic trailer brake optional (*)
reverse under load
Pneumatic trailer brake no
Ranges-speeds Continuous speed variation from 0 to 40 kph in
forward and reverse position (speed limited to 30, Auxiliary spool valves 5 electrohydraulic (2 SMS)
35, or 40 kph depending on country) (maximum number)
Rear axle Couplers decompression
Model HA 200 Electronics
Drive units Epicyclic Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 4
Wheel shaft Ø 110 Instrument panel DCC2
Reduction ratio 8.25 Linkage calculator Auto5
Brake discs per trumpet 6 Draft sensors 2

housing
Sensor capacity 9T
Parking brake ParkLock
Datatronic 3 optional
Differential lock multidisc
Dual control (front and optional
Reduction ratio of bevel 3.58 rear)
gear / differential
TIC without draft sensor optional
Linkage
Fieldstar no
Stabilisers telescopic
Cab
Perforated bar optional
Suspension optional
3-point linkage type 3 or 3.2, hook or ball type (*)
Rear view mirrors manual (standard) or electrical (optional)
Clevis pin-adjusting or quick-adjusting scale
Air conditioning manual (standard) or automatic (optional)
Automatic clevis pin-adjusting or quick-adjusting scale
Standard bonnet tilting
Hitch eye bolt eye bolt or automatic hook (*)
Standard roof standard
Swinging drawbar standard
High-visibility roof no
Roller swinging optional
drawbar Reference (*): according to country
Power take-off
Type Interchangeable shaft
540/1000 standard
540E/1000 optional
Power take-off brake mechanical
Proportional PTO no
¤ H
Introduction
8460model Front power take-off no
Front axle
Model AG 210 (750/522): 15.75

Engine
Front / Rear axle 1.348
ISO (CV)power 235 synchro ratio
ISO power (Kw) 173 Type fixed
Trademark SISU EEM Rotational direction anti-clockwise
Type 74 ETA Number of clutch discs 6
Number of cylinders / 6 / 7.4 Fender (4WD) optional

Cylinder capacity
2WD no
Turbocharger yes
Front linkage (optional) 3.5 T
Intercooler Air / air
Hydraulics
Injection pump Bosch VP44
152 l/min Closed Centre yes
Fan Viscostatic
Orbitrol steering unit OSPDF 80/240
Alternator 150 A
Steering (volume cc) 80 (first pump) and 240 (second pump)
Transmission
Brake master cylinder power-assisted
Model DYNA VT ML 200
Hydraulic trailer brake optional (*)
Clutch / Reverse shuttle Gearbox with continuous variation, direction
reverse under load Pneumatic trailer brake no
Ranges-speeds Continuous speed variation from 0 to 40 kph in Auxiliary spool valves 5 electrohydraulic (2 SMS)
forward and reverse position (speed limited to 30, (maximum number)
35, or 40 kph depending on country)
Couplers decompression
Rear axle
Electronics
Model HA200
Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 4
Drive units Epicyclic
Instrument panel DCC2
Wheel shaft Ø 110
Linkage calculator Auto5
Reduction ratio 8.25
Draft sensors 2
Brake discs per trumpet 6
Sensor capacity 9T
housing
Datatronic optional
rear)
Reduction ratio of bevel 3.58
gear / differential
Fieldstar no
Linkage
Cab
Suspension optional
Reference (*): according to country
drawbar
Power take-off
540/1000 standard
540E/1000 optional
Proportional PTO no
Automated power yes

take-off
¤ H
Introduction
Front axle
Model AG 280 (760/521): 16.8

Engine
Type 84ETA Number of clutch discs 6

Cylinder capacity
2WD no
Turbocharger yes
Front linkage (optional) 5T
Hydraulics
Fan Viscostatic
Alternator 150 A
Transmission
Rear axle
Electronics
Model HA260
Wheel shaft Ø 110
Reduction ratio 9.2
Draft sensors 2
Sensor capacity 9T
housing
Datatronic optional
rear)
gear / differential
Fieldstar no
Linkage
Cab
Suspension optional
drawbar
Power take-off
540/1000 standard
540E/1000 optional
Proportional PTO no
Automated power yes

take-off
¤ H
Introduction
Front axle
Model AG 280 (760/521): 16.8

Engine
Type 84 ETA Number of clutch discs 6

Cylinder capacity
2WD no
Turbocharger yes
Front linkage (optional) 5T
Hydraulics
Fan Viscostatic
Alternator 150 A
Transmission
Rear axle
Electronics
Model HA260
Wheel shaft Ø 110
Reduction ratio 9.2
Draft sensors 2
Sensor capacity 9T
housing
Datatronic optional
rear)
gear / differential
Fieldstar no
Linkage
Cab
Suspension optional
drawbar
Power take-off
540/1000 standard
540E/1000 optional
Proportional PTO no
Automated power yes

take-off
¤ H
Introduction
C . Ground speeds
Range Forward Reverse

Tortoise kph 0 - 32 0 - 20
Field speeds mph 0 - 20 0 - 12.4
Hare kph 0 - 40 0 - 40
Road speeds mph 0 - 25 0 - 25
kph 40 40 kph
32 kph
kph 20
MA-01-06003A 0
Fig. 1
NOTE: Speeds are limited as required by legislation in force in the relevant countries. Speed is limited electroni-
cally.
¤ H
Introduction
D . General dimensions
Wheels with steel flange
The various track settings are obtained by changing the
position of the rim in relation to the disc or by reversing
the wheels.
NOTE: Ensure a sufficient gap remains between the
tyres and the inside of the fenders. If the wheels are
reversed, transfer them to opposite sides of the
tractor.
On refitting, tighten the nuts progressively according
to the tightening torque table (chapter 6).
TABLE OF REAR WHEEL TRACK VALUES in mm
D E
Rear Axle
MA-01-06004A
D = wheel offset 75 mm (2.95 in)

E = wheel disc thickness 15 mm (0.59 in)
Disc facing inwards (min. - max.) Disc facing outwards (min. – max.)
HA 200/260
8450 to 8480 (Short straight 1699 (66.9) - 1996 (78.6) 2029 (79.9) - 2326 (91.6)
shaft)
¤ H
Introduction
Wheels with cast iron disc
TABLE OF REAR WHEEL TRACK VALUES in mm
D E
DNF 12017-12
A C
Rear Axle
B D
MA-01-06005A
D = wheel offset 75 mm (2.95 in)

E = wheel disc thickness 15 mm (0.59 in)
Disc facing inwards (min. - max.) Disc facing outwards (min. – max.)
8450 to 8480 HA 200/260 A - 1485 (58.5) - 1781 (70.1) C - 1815 (71.5) - 2111 (83.1)
8450 to 8480 HA 200/260 B - 1959 (77.1) - 2256 (88.8) D - 2289 (90.1) - 2586 (101.8)
¤ H
Introduction
Attachment points and dimensions
4445,11
1089,87 952
211,3 512 1551,5
128,41 17 885
190
8 15 16
6 7 0
21 22
4
1 5
2
3 14
-! !
Z 9 18 20
Y 10 11 13
12 19
Dimensions in relation to point 0
X
REFERENCE DIMENSIONS (mm) REFERENCE DIMENSIONS (mm)

0 = Engine axis x y z 0 = Engine axis x y z
1 M 20 -1831.54 +/-193.504 -157.14 12 M 20 -848.64 +/-193.504 -89.98
2 M 20 -1875.9 +/-193.504 -185.17 13 M 20 -118.89 +/-193.504 -176
3 M 20 -1873.89 +/-193.504 -265.14 14 M 20 -747.07 +/-193.504 -87.13
4 M 20 -1636.6 +/-193.504 -151.24 15 M 20 -247.86 +/-308.504 18.15
5 M 20 -1377.98 +/-193.504 -112.08 16 M 20 -120.9 +/-308.504 -21.34
6 M 20 -1303.05 +/-193.504 -111.19 17 M 20 -118.89 +/-308.504 -59.63
7 M 20 -1253.07 +/-193.504 -109.93 18 M 20 -245.85 +/-308.504 -61.83
8 M 20 -961.67 +/-193.504 -57.25 19 M 20 -243.3 +/-308.504 -163.39
9 M 20 -947.97 +/-193.504 -181.11 20 M 20 -116.34 +/-308.504 -160.2
10 M 20 -950.21 +/-193.504 92.24 21 M 20 1718.33 +/-775 -35
11 M 20 -846.41 +/-193.504 -178.55 22 M 20 1878.33 +/-775 -35
Fig. 2
¤ H
Introduction
E . Capacities
Types Models Capacities

Engine oil 8450 19 L
8460 / 8470 / 8480 20 L
Auxiliary hydraulics 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 90 L / 100 L
Clutch hydraulics 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 0.6 L
Transmission oil 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 85 L
Rear final drive unit 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 2 x 13 L
Front axle 8450 / 8460 14.8 L

8470 / 8480 16 L
Front final drive unit 8450 / 8460 2 x 1.7 L

8470 / 8480 2 x 2.7 L
Engine cooling 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 34 L
Fuel tank 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 350 L
Additional tank 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 250 L
Windshield washer 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 4L
Air conditioning 8450 / 8460 / 8470 / 8480 1,550 grams
¤ H
Introduction
F . Conversion tables POWER

multiply by
ps x 0.9863 hp
LENGTH
hp x 1.0139 ps
multiply by
kW x 1.3410 hp
mm x 0.0394 in
hp x 0.7457 kW
in x 25.400 mm
m x 3.2808 ft TORQUE
ft x 0.3048 m multiply by
km x 0.6214 mile Nm x 0.738 lbf ft
mile x 1.6093 km lbf ft x 1.356 Nm
AREA PRESSURE
multiply by multiply by
mm² x 0.0015 in² bar x 14.504 lbf/in²
in² x 645.16 mm² lbf/in² x 0.0690 bar
m² x 10.764 ft²
ft² x 0.0929 m² SPEED
ha x 2.4711 acre multiply by
acre x 0.4047 ha km/h x 0.6214 mph
mph x 1.6093 km/h
VOLUME
multiply by WEIGHT
cm3 x 0.06102 in3 multiply by
in3 x 16.387 cm3 g x 0.0353 oz

oz x 28.350 g
m3 x 35.315 ft3
kg x 2.2046 lb
ft3 x 0.0283 m3
lb x 0.4536 kg
kg x 0.00098 UK ton
CAPACITY
UK ton x 1016.1 kg
multiply by
t x 0.9842 UK ton
ml x 0.0351 fl oz
UK ton x 1.016 t
fl oz x 28.413 ml
t x 1.1023 US ton
l x 0.2200 gal
US ton x 0.9072 t
gal x 4.5640 l
l x 0.2640 US gal
TEMPERATURE
US gal x 3.7850 l
°C °C x 1.8 + 32 °F
gal x 1.2010 US gal
°F (°F - 32)/1.8 °C
US gal x 0.8330 gal
¤ H
Introduction
- for cylindrical fittings, apply the product on the

G . Retaining compounds and two mating faces using a clean brush.
sealing products - for mating faces, apply a bead to one of the two
faces, circling the holes, and then tighten as
The Loctite compounds mentioned in this manual are quickly as possible.
referred to by their industrial name.
For repair purposes, use their commercial names or NOTE:
the corresponding AGCO references listed in the
following table: a) Do not use too much of the compound in order to
avoid locking adjacent parts.
b) Do not attempt to retighten after 5 minutes of
Loctite industrial Description curing, in order to avoid breaking the film of
name name compound.
270 Stud lock c) If the ambient temperature is less than +10°C, and
to ensure quicker setting of Loctite compounds,
242 Lock and Seal (except SILICOMET), use LOCTITE T 747 activator on
Silicone AS 310 Clear silicone at least one of the two parts. Excess sealant outside
the joint will not harden (anaerobic curing of the
5910 black silicone compound – i.e. curing takes place only in absence of
Blacktite
trumpet sealant oxygen).
Formajoint
510 mating face sealant
Masterjoint Grease
Unijoint When grease is used in components which are in
518 mating face sealant
Masterjoint contact with transmission oil, use grease which is
miscible with oil to avoid clogging the hydraulic filters.
NOTE: use the product “Form A gasket 2” when Use grease: "Amber Technical" grease supplied by:
sealing between plastic material and cast iron (or WITCO company, 76320 Saint-Pierre des Elfes,
steel). France.
These products can be ordered from the following

address:
Henkel Loctite France S.A.
10, avenue Eugène Gazeau
BP 40090
F-60304 Senlis Cedex, FRANCE
Application method for Loctite products

1. Remove all traces of previous sealants and corro-
sion
- mechanically: wire brush or emery cloth
- chemically: "DECAPLOC 88"
Leave the product to take effect and then wipe
clean.
2. Degrease the components with dry solvent

- preferably, use “Super Solvant Sec LOCTITE
706”.
3. Allow the solvents to evaporate
4. Apply the recommended type of LOCTITE product

to the parts:
- for blind tapped holes, apply a quantity of the
product to the last threads at the bottom of the
hole.
¤ H
Introduction
H . Tightening torques
Use the tightening torques for screws and nuts as indi-
cated in the tables:
- 1 and 2 for metric threads
- 3 and 4 for inch-system threads
When a specific torque is required, it is stated in the

text.
Tables 1 and 3 indicate the nomal tightening torque
values to apply to threaded zinc-plated elements, with
normal nuts, with coarse or fine threads, with or
without a flat washer or lockwasher, and weldable
nuts more than 0.8 d high.
Tables 2 and 4 indicate the reduced tightening torque
values to apply to threaded elements in assemblies
with zinc-plated self-locking locknuts, phos-
phate-coated nuts and screws, thin nuts, waldable
nuts less than 0.8 d high.
These values are to be applied to dry assemblies. If the

threads are oiled, reduce the tightening torques.
NOTE: Read the tensile grade on the screw head to

determine the corresponding tightening torque.
Example:
¤ H
Introduction
Table 1: Tightening torque values. Zinc-plated metric threads

Tensile grade Tensile grade
Nominal ISO 8.8 (SAE 5, BS S) ISO 10.9 (SAE 8, BS V)

dimension d Torque Nm Torque Nm
Min Max Min Max
M3 1.3 1.7 1 2.4
M4 3.1 4.1 4 5.7
M5 6 8 8 11.5
M6 10 14 14 20
M8 25 35 36 46
M10 50 70 72 96
M12 90 120 120 160
M16 200 260 300 400
M20 420 560 600 800
M24 720 960 1000 1300
M30 1400 1800 2100 2800
M36 2500 3300 3600 4800
Table 2: Reduced tightening torque values. Metric threads

Nominal ISO 8.8 (SAE 5, BS S) ISO 10.9 (SAE 8, BS V)

Min Max Min Max
M3 1 1.4 1 1.9
M4 2.5 3.3 3 4.6
M5 4.8 6.4 6 9.2
M6 8 11 12 16
M8 20 28 29 37
M10 40 56 57 77
M12 72 96 100 130
M16 160 210 240 320
M20 340 450 480 640
M24 570 770 800 1040
M30 1100 1400 1700 2200
M36 2000 2600 2900 3800
¤ H
Introduction
Table 3: Tightening torque values. Zinc-plated inch system threads

Nominal SAE 5 (ISO 8.8, BS S) SAE 8 (ISO 10.9, BS V)

Min Max Min Max
#6 1.8 2.4 2 3.3
#8 3.4 4.4 4 6.3
#10 4.7 6.3 6 8.9
1/4 11 15 16 22
5/16 22 30 31 43
3/8 39 53 55 75
7/16 64 86 90 120
1/2 100 130 140 180
5/8 200 260 280 370
3/4 350 460 490 660
7/8 560 760 800 1060
1 840 1120 1200 1600
1 1/8 1050 1390 1700 2200
1 1/4 1500 2000 2400 3200
1 1/2 2600 3400 4100 5400
Table 4: Reduced tightening torque values. Inch-system threads

Nominal SAE 5 (ISO 8.8, BS S) SAE 8 (ISO 10.9, BS V)

Min Max Min Max
#6 1.5 1.9 2 2.6
#8 2.7 3.5 3 5
#10 3.8 5 5 7.1
1/4 8.8 12 13 18
5/16 18 24 25 34
3/8 31 42 44 60
7/16 51 69 72 96
1/2 80 104 110 140
5/8 160 210 220 300
3/4 280 370 390 530
7/8 450 610 640 850
1 670 900 960 1280
1 1/8 8400 1100 1360 1760
1 1/4 1200 1600 1920 2560
1 1/2 2100 2700 3280 4320
¤ H
Introduction
¤ H
Engine
03 - Engine
CONTENTS
03A01 - Sisu engine - General
¤ H
Engine
¤ H
Sisu engine - General
03A01 - Sisu engine - General
CONTENTS
A . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Specifications and standards concerning fuel, oil and coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
¤ H
¤ H
A . Introduction
This section only provides general information about
Sisu engines used on this tractor series.
B . Specifications and standards

concerning fuel, oil and coolant
The engines fitted on this tractor series comply with
standards concerning emissions imposed by the
authorities. (EU97/68/EC Stage 2 and EPA 40 CFR 89
Tier 2).
The quality of fluids used in these engines as well as
the servicing schedule must be respected in order to
keep pollution emission levels low and to maintain the
tractor good performance during its whole life.
Fuel quality:
The fuel must comply with standard DIN EN 590 and
with the following specifications:
Density (at 15°C): 0.82 to 0.84 Kg/dm3
Viscosity (at 40°C): 2 to 4.5 mm2/s
Cetane index: min. 51
Sulphur content: max. 0.005 p-%
Water content: max. 200 mg/kg
Oil quality:
The oil used must comply with standard API CH-4.
Coolant quality:
The coolant used must comply with standard
ASTM D 3306. It must be composed of pure water
and ethylene/propylene glycol antifreeze agent in the
following proportions:
40 - 60% water
40 - 60% antifreeze agent
The ideal ratio is 50% water to 50% antifreeze agent.
¤ H
C . Main characteristics
Model 8450
Engine type SISU 74 ETA
Number of cylinders 6
Bore 108
Stroke 134
Capacity 7.4
Compression ratio 17.5/1
Compression pressure (kPa) 2000 / 3500
Allowable compression deviation between cylinders (kPa) 350
Output at 2,200 rpm ch (kw) ISO 215 (158)
Maximum torque (Nm) 925
at speed (rpm) 1500
Idle speed 800
Nominal speed 2200
Maximum speed at no load 2350
Pre- / Post-heating yes
Wet cylinder sleeves yes
Weight (kg) 520
Injection pump
Trademark and type Bosch VP44
Rotation Clockwise
Static timing angle (degrees) 26°
Engine position TDC
Engine check angle (degrees) pin
Injection order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Lift pump Electric
Injectors
Trademark Stanadyne
Code M33877
Nozzle holder
Nozzle 5 ports
New and servicing setting (bar) 278
Miscellaneous
Suction system Intercooler air/air turbocompressor
(no wastegate)
Minimum boost pressure at 2,200 rpm at full load (bar) 1.2
Number of valves per cylinder 2
Valve spring simple
Valve seat insert (Inlet / Exhaust) yes / yes
Inlet / Exhaust valve angle 35° / 45°
Inlet / Exhaust valve tip clearance (mm) 0.35 / 0.35
Oil cooler yes
Number of temperature switches 2
Opening temperature (start/full) 83°C
Fan Vistronic
Piston cooling nozzle yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter (microns) prefilter (30) + filter (5)
¤ H
Model 8460
Bore 108
Stroke 134
Capacity 7.4
at speed (rpm) 1500
Idle speed 800
Nominal speed 2200
Weight (kg) 520
Injection pump
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Lift pump Electric
Injectors
Trademark Stanadyne
Code M33877
Nozzle holder
Nozzle 5 ports
Miscellaneous
(no wastegate)
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Fan Vistronic
Oil filter 1
¤ H
Model 8470
Bore 111
Stroke 145
Capacity 8.4
at speed (rpm) 1100
Idle speed 800
Nominal speed 2200
Weight (kg) 660
Injection pump
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Lift pump Electric
Injectors
Trademark Stanadyne
Code M33877
Nozzle holder
Nozzle 5 ports
Miscellaneous
(no wastegate)
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Fan Vistronic
Oil filter 1
¤ H
Model 8480
Bore 111
Stroke 145
Capacity 8.4
at speed (rpm) 1500
Idle speed 800
Nominal speed 2200
Weight (kg) 660
Injection pump
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Lift pump Electric
Injectors
Trademark Stanadyne
Code M33877
Nozzle holder
Nozzle 5 ports
Miscellaneous
(no wastegate)
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Fan Vistronic
Oil filter 1
¤ H
¤ H
Gearbox
05 - Gearbox
CONTENTS
05A01 - General - Dyna VT Operation
05B01 - DYNA VT hydraulics
05C01 - Replacing the DYNA VT unit
¤ H
Gearbox
¤ H
General - Dyna VT Operation
05A01 - General - Dyna VT Operation
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Dyna VT transmission operating diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C . Operation and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
¤ H
¤ H
Two different pressures are present in the system.

A . General
• Low pressure for the Dyna VT transmission control
Operating principle of the DYNA VT trans- and auxiliary pressure for rear PTO clutch, differential
mission block and universal joint brake. The measuring point
The Dyna VT transmission is a continuously variable of this pressure is approximately 18 bars.
transmission in both forward and reverse positions. • High pressure in the Dyna VT transmission. Pressure
Hare/Tortoise range switching with synchronisation is measuring point, approximately 500 + 20 bars.
incorporated into the transmission. The Tortoise range The oil filter clogging is monitored by a pressure switch
allows ground speeds of 0 to 32 kph. The Hare range according to the transmission oil temperature. When
allows ground speeds of 0 to 50 kph (according to this temperature is lower than 50°C, oil filter clogging
country), and the maximum standard speed is elec- is not monitored.
tronically limited to 40 kph. The Tortoise range is Cooled transmission oil inlet into the high pressure
intended for heavy traction work at low speeds of less circuit is performed in alternation by two non-return
than 12 kph. The Hare range is intended for road valves. Hot transmission oil outlet from the high pres-
driving (transport). At 50 kph, the transmission ratio is sure circuit occurs through the pressure relief valve.
controlled electronically according to engine speed.
The high pressure circuit comprises : a variable
Power transmission can be hydrostatic OR mechanical
displacement pump and a hydrostatic motor, two
or hydrostatic AND mechanical. In simple terms, we
non-return valves, two high pressure limiting valves,
can state :
one pressure relief valve, one coupler function sole-
- Slow forward position = Power transmission: noid valve, one clutch function controlled valve and
majority = hydrostatic / minority = mechanical one check connector. The pump and motor screw
- Fast forward position = Power transmission: cylinders are controlled by two 4/3 spool valves. These
minority = hydrostatic / majority = mechanical. 4/3 spool valves are mechanically controlled by the
For detailed explanations, see the transmission oper- cam channel drive shaft. Rotation of the drive shaft is
ating diagram. initiated, according to the need, by the control unit
which thus defines the hydraulic capacity and hence
the hydraulic power.
Power transmission hydrostatic circuit The variable displacement pump and hydrostatic
motor pivot proportionally. In backup position, the
The Dyna VT transmission unit is flexible suspended in screw shaft is manually activated from the driver’s cab.
the transmission housing. This latter also serves as an In limp home position, the transmission automatically
oil tank for the hydrostatic transmission. blocks at approximately 30 kph after engine start-up. If
Filling: OilTerrac Extra or Terrac Tractran 9/Fluid 9, or the clutch pedal, parking brake or neutral switch are
any other oil complying with standard CMS M1143 or used, the high pressure circuit is automatically
CMS M1144. unloaded by means of two high pressure limiters. The
The lube oil pump sucks oil through the suction coupler function is controlled by the pressure limiter.
strainer. The temperature sensor monitors the trans-
mission oil temperature. In brief, if the transmission oil
is cold, little oil passes through the cooler and most
goes through the by-pass valve. This valve opens at a
differential pressure of approximately 3.5 bars. The
hydraulic oil temperature is monitored by the tempera-
ture sensor. The service pump supplies the system
pressure to the Dyna VT control spool valves and
comfort control solenoid valves. The system pressure
of approximately 18 bars is limited by a pres-
sure-limiting valve with throttling port.
¤ H
The control unit (Fig. 1)
The control unit drives the cam channel drive shaft,

which changes the Dyna VT transmission ratio. The
control unit comprises the following elements :
• Limp home operation control (required in the event
of electronic control failure).
• Coupling of the incremental rotational angle sensor
with a digital resolution of 8,000 pulses per revolu-
tion.
• Epicyclic gear train transmission i = 192: 1 (screw
shaft motor)
• 12 VDC electric motor, 0.4 to 7 amps, vacuum
control unit 4,500 rpm
• Friction clutch 2.5 to 3.5 Nm, using the limp home
operation socket wrench, 4 to 5 Nm.
Fig. 1
Following ignition, the control unit searches for the

reference point (approximate neutral point between
forward and reverse operation).
Sensors
Engine sensor (TR23) (Fig. 2): measures engine
speed. This sensor measures engine speed. If it fails,
only the limp home operation can be used.
Fig. 2
Summing shaft (TR19) and drive pinion (TR11) Hall

sensor: measures engine speed or rate and recog-
nises the rotational direction (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
¤ H
High pressure sensor (TR17) transmits the instanta-

neous oil pressure in the high pressure oil circuit to the
electronic system (Fig. 4).
TR17
Fig. 4
Throttle pedal sensor (CAB 44) (Fig. 5): transmits

the position of the throttle pedal to the electronic
system and compares it to the engine speed. This
position sensor is used for load control.
Fig. 5
Clutch pedal progressivity sensor (CAB 12) (Fig. 6):

electronically monitors clutch pedal travel.
Fig. 6
¤ H
Hare / Tortoise range position sensor (TR8) (Fig. 7):

electronically monitors the range selector switch posi-
tion.
Fig. 7
Temperature sensor (TR12) (Fig. 8): monitors trans-

mission oil temperature. Temperatures greater than
110°C are stored with an error code.
Fig. 8
HP filter clogging sensor (TR13) (Fig. 9): monitors

the clogging of the high pressure filter.
Fig. 9
¤ H
¤ H
diagrams
2
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b

1 A: Planet carrier
Driven by the engine
B: Ring gear
Drives the hydrostatic pump
B . Dyna VT transmission operating
C: Pinion gear
3
D: Sun gear pinion
Drives the summing shaft
4 4
A: Transmission of mechanical force
B: Transmission of hydrostatic force
C: Power take-off drive
5 D: Front axle drive
1 : Epicyclic gear train

2 : Hydrostatic pump
3 : Summing shaft
4 : Hydrostatic motor
5 : Range shifting
Epicyclic gear train / Power distribution
Fig. 10
05A01.7
ENGINE STARTED, TRACTOR AT STANDSTILL
¤ H
05A01.8
Dynamic stop
2

1
• The engine drives the planet

carrier (A)
• The ring gear (B) turns, driving the
3 pump (2) without any flow
• The hydrostatic motors 4 do not
turn
• The sun gear (D) does not turn as
it is blocked by the tractor wheels
4 4 via the rear axle bevel gear
Fig. 11

¤ H
99% TRANSMISSION OF HYDROSTATIC POWER
1% TRANSMISSION OF MECHANICAL POWER
Start-up

1 B: Transmission of hydrostatic force
• The pump (2) tilts and supplies

flow to the motors (4)
• The motors (4) drive the rear axle
• The sun gear starts to turn and
3 the ring gear speed decreases
4 4
Fig. 12
05A01.9
¤ H
05A01.10
2 Average ground speed
1 A: Transmission of mechanical force
B : Transmission of hydrostatic force

• The pump (2) angle increases

• The pump flow increases and the
3 angle of the motors (4) decreases
• The sun gear speed increases,
increasing the bevel gear speed
• The planet carrier speed is
constant
4 4 • The ring gear speed decreases
Fig. 13

¤ H
REDUCED ENGINE SPEED
Transport

1
B : Transmission of hydrostatic force
• The angle of the motors (4) is 0°

3 and the flow from the pump is
blocked
• The pump (2) is thus blocked
stationary, as is the ring gear
4 • The planet carrier turns
4
• The sun gear turns, driving the
bevel gear on its own
Fig. 14
05A01.11
AVERAGE SPEED
¤ H
Reverse
THE GEAR RING ROTATES FASTER THAN THE ENGINE
05A01.12
2
1
• The pump (2) is tilted at the oppo-

3 site angle, so the flow is reversed
• The motors (4) turn in the opposite
direction
• The sun gear thus turns in the
4 opposite direction to the planet
4 carrier and so also drives the bevel
gear in the opposite direction
• The ring gear speed increases
Fig. 15

Architecture of the hydrostatic components
For conventional hydrostatic components, the rota-

tional angle only reaches 30°.
Example of a conventional variable displacement
pump with axial pistons.
Piston travel
Angular travel
Cylinder block
Fig. 16
This system, on the other hand, proposes hydrostatic

components specially designed to provide a 45° rota-
tional angle.
Example of a special variable displacement pump with
axial pistons. This means :
• Higher intrinsic yield of hydrostatic components with
respect to conventional components.
• A 45° rotational angle offers the possibility of
increasing the ground speed scope, resulting in a
decrease in the number of required mechanical
ranges.
Fig. 17
¤ H
C . Operation and use
1 2
Start-up
10 15
Switch on the ignition. The TC 2.10 and DC 2.10 (2.00 5 20
being the software version installed in the tractor)

RPM x 100
symbols flash on the instrument panel right-hand 0 25
screen (Fig. 18). A

A B
HYDR OIL 85°C

95°C
100°C
95 % 60°C
110°C
540 KPH
750 MPH
1000 RPM
A A
A B A B
540 KPH 540 KPH

750 MPH 750 MPH
1000 RPM 1000 RPM
MA-05-04290A Fig. 18
Fully press down the clutch pedal (Fig. 19).
Fig. 19
The left-hand lever (reverse shuttle) should be in the

neutral position (Fig. 20). Start the engine and release
the clutch pedal.
Fig. 20
¤ H
Selecting movement and direction
The Dyna VT transmission possesses a user interface

and a specific display screen. The power shuttle lever
(Fig. 21) controls direction of travel, and speed
increase and decrease.
Set the left-hand lever to the desired direction of 2
movement, the corresponding symbol comes on the
relevant screen. When the tractor is in movement,
each change of direction is achieved with the left-hand
lever (Fig. 21). 1
(1) Neutral position
(2) Forward position
(3) Reverse position
3
To set the tractor in motion (forward or reverse), adapt
the transmission ratio with the right-hand lever, or the
plus and minus buttons of the reverse shuttle lever,
depending on the desired speed. During tractor move-
Fig. 21
ment, if the clutch pedal is activated, the transmission
ratio is decreased until speed is zero.
The armrest lever (Fig. 22), with no neutral or Park-

Lock, also controls speed increase and decrease
depending on the direction of movement.
Fig. 22
¤ H
Lever mode and pedal mode

At start-up, the tractor is always in lever mode,
transmission control is performed with the lever
only (Fig. 24).
To activate the various modes (lever, pedal...), use

button (1) (Fig. 24) with the throttle pedal released. The
status of the selected mode is visible on the DOT
MATRIX screen (Fig. 23 and Fig. 26)
1- In pedal mode, the transmission is exclusively

controlled by the pedal. To preset the maximum
speed, press the clutch pedal to neutral position,
then activate the armrest lever (Fig. 22) or the
left-hand lever in forward position (Fig. 21) to 1
increase or decrease the value displayed on the DOT
MATRIX screen (Fig. 26). Engine speed is electroni- Fig. 24
cally adjusted to the transmission speed. Two vari-
ants may be selected when in pedal mode :
1-1. POWER MODE. This is the max. speed at the

max. engine speed (no programmed max. engine
speed).
1-2. ECO MODE. This is the max. speed at the
engine speed of 1,800 rpm (in this mode, 1,800
rpm is the max. engine speed).
2- In lever mode, the speed depends on the move-

ment on the lever on armrest (Fig. 22).
3- A third mode may be available, the self-propelled

mode. In this mode, the user sets the engine speed 2
with the A and B memories and forward motion is
controlled by the throttle pedal and the hand throttle
lever (2) (Fig. 25) or the armrest speed lever (Fig. 22).
Fig. 25
Lever mode Fig. 23
Pedal mode Max. speed Fig. 26
¤ H
Increasing and decreasing speed
To increase or decrease speed, both levers can be

used. The left-hand lever (Fig. 27) adjusts speed by
increments of 0.1 to 2 kph, depending on the duration
of lever pressure.
Fig. 27
The right-hand lever (Fig. 28) makes adjusting the

transmission ratio easier thanks to its progressive
action.When the ratio decreases, the tractor stops at 0
kph (dynamic stop).
Fig. 28
Adjusting the speed throttle lever

The travel of the right-hand armrest lever possesses
increments that vary with the position of this latter. SLOT 3
There are 3 types of increment (Fig. 29):
• 0.03 to 0.5 during the slot 1 or slot 4 SLOT 2
• 1 during slot 2 or slot 5
SLOT 1
• 2 during slot 3 or slot 6
NOTE: If speed regulation is active, pressing the
SLOT 4
lever automatically deactivates it.
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
Fig. 29
¤ H
Hare / Tortoise range

The Dyna VT transmission possesses 2 gear ranges.
Each range is limited:
Gear range (in kph)

Tortoise Hare
Display
KPH KPH
MA-05-04143A MA-05-04142A
Fig. 30 Fig. 31
B
Fig. 32
Forward 0 to 32 0 to 40
Reverse 0 to 20 0 to 40
A button (B) on the right-hand console (Fig. 32) is used

for shifting Hare/Tortoise range. When the tractor is in
movement, shifting can only be performed from
Tortoise to Hare. For shifting from Hare to Tortoise, the
left-hand lever (Fig. 27) must be in the neutral position
or the clutch pedal depressed.
Memorising SV1 and SV2
Speed regulator SV1 and SV2
The ground speed is kept constant.

The “speed regulator” function enables the user to
store a ground speed and to recall it easily.
Two independent memory keys (SV1 and SV2) are Fig. 33
available (Fig. 33). This allows two speeds to be
memorised (e.g.: working speed and transport speed).
The memorised speeds are displayed to the right of
the Dot Matrix screen (Fig. 34) (A) and (B). When the
“speed regulator” is used, the screen display is as in D
Fig. 34. A
“SV1” activation indicator (D)
“SV2” activation indicator (E)
E B
Fig. 34
¤ H
Preset speeds using the SV1 and SV2 potentiome- Adjusting speed regula-
ters (Fig. 35) tors
After having called up the “speed regulator” menu, the
ground speed can be adjusted using the SV1 and SV2
potentiometers. The adjusted values are automatically
stored and remain in memory even after the tractor is
turned off.
NOTE: It is also possible to change the stored speed
when the tractor is driving with an activated "regulated"
speed.
It is possible to switch from one memory to the other
simply by pressing the SV1 and SV2 buttons (Fig. 33).
If buttons SV1 or SV2 (Fig. 33) are pressed down for
more than 3 seconds, the current speed is memorised
and replaces the previous stored value.
The "speed regulator" can only be activated if the
following conditions have been met : Fig. 35
• Clutch pedal not activated
• The tractor is in movement
• Engine speed greater than 1,100 rpm Supervisor icon
If these conditions are not met the "speed regulator"
function is deactivated and the instantaneous trans-
mission ratio is maintained, with no subsequent
control. Start-up with the “speed regulator” function is
not possible. Stored speeds can be activated in both
directions of movement.
“Speed regulator” control ceases when:
• The drive lever is used
• The foot brake or the engine brake is used
• Engine speed drops below 1,100 rpm
• The neutral switch is activated
• The driver switches from Tortoise to Hare.
Fig. 36
¤ H
Engine underspeed supervisor

This supervisor is used to limit the drop in engine Adjusting the underspeed
speed and to adapt it to engine output. When oper- supervisor
ating at the engine maximum output, the driver must
constantly adapt the tractor speed with the controls in
order to remain within the appropriate power range.
Permanent comparison is performed between the
specified output speed (position of the throttle pedal)
and the engine speed.
The underspeed supervisor is automatically triggered
when the engine speed drops under the effect of a
load. The supervisor value is set by means of the
potentiometer located on the right-hand console
(Fig. 37). When the engine underspeed supervisor is
active, an icon is displayed on the left-hand screen
(Fig. 36). Control is activated only if the engine speed
drops by more than 180 rpm. Fig. 37
Potentiometer set to 10:

The ground speed decreases to maintain a constant
engine speed.
Potentiometer set to 40:

The engine speed increases to maintain a constant
ground speed.
Potentiometer set between 10 and 40:

Combination of the two previous explanations.
¤ H
Clutch-coupler function (CLUTCH)
Clutch function
Although the Dyna VT transmission has neither
forward clutch nor coupler, the tractor possesses a
clutch pedal.
The clutch pedal is used for dosing the traction effort
(in a similar manner to conventional clutch slipping).
When an obstacle appears suddenly, the tractor can be
rapidly stopped, just like a conventional tractor, by
pressing the clutch and brake pedals.
Coupler function
Traction power is limited at low engine speed thanks
to a pressure relief valve located on the transmission
hydrostatic loop.
In connection with engine speed, the coupler function
is achieved by modulating the pressure in the hydro-
static circuit. Thus, the coupler function replaces the
Fig. 38
measured action of a clutch pedal.
Coupler function under traction

The coupler function enters into action as soon as
engine speed drops below 1,400 rpm. Pressure drops
in the hydrostatic loop in proportion to the drop in
engine speed.
Just like a coupler, the function limits engine overload
and avoids stalling.
The coupler function can be validated with the DOT
MATRIX (Fig. 38).
NOTE: to activate (Fig. 38) or deactivate (Fig. 39) the

coupler function, press the OK key for 5 seconds.
The coupler function is "ON" by default at

start-up whatever the status when the tractor
engine is stopped. Fig. 39
¤ H
Fast reversing
When changing the direction of movement, the tractor
decreases to a halt, then accelerates in the opposite
direction. Reversing is not possible if the following
functions are active :
• underspeed supervisor
• speed regulator
• turbo clutch function
If the clutch pedal is pressed during fast reversing, a
temporary stop may occur. B
Setting restart speeds when shifting A

To activate the preset values, press the clutch pedal,
the tractor icon ((A) Fig. 40) flashes. A desired value
can be set with the reverse shuttle lever (Fig. 41). Posi-
tion 2 (+ or -) sets the forward value (B), position 3 (+ C
or -) sets the reverse value (C).
Preset values vary according to the Hare/Tortoise
range position. They are stored when the engine is Fig. 40
turned off. The preset speed is obtained at an engine
speed of 1,800 rpm. If the preset values are set to 0.2,
reversal will occur at the same forward and reverse
speeds.
NOTE: In all cases, the driver can activate dynamic stop

by placing the left-hand lever in the “2 to 1” or “3 to 1” 2
positions.
Fig. 41
¤ H
Using the DOT MATRIX screen A B
The DOT MATRIX screen is initialised at tractor

start-up (Fig. 42).
To display the various menus, press the right-hand
lever buttons (Fig. 44) and follow the instructions in the
table on the following page.
A: DOT MATRIX screen (Fig. 42)

B: Right-hand lever (Fig. 44)
Fig. 43
Fig. 44
Fig. 42
¤ H
Screens Access Function

Auxiliary oil level screen
Displays the filling level of the auxiliary oil
tank (0-100%):
- 100% full tank
HYDR OIL - 50% warning threshold.
Ignition before engine start When the auxiliary oil tank level drops
95 % (ignition key on +ACC position) below 50%, it is automatically displayed
MA-05-04291A every 4 minutes (press ESC to return to the
main screen).
If the sensor is defective, the ERROR
message is displayed instead of the filling
level
Start-up screen
Tractor start-up Displays the restart speeds, the SV1 and
SV2 speeds, engine supervisor, PTO,
pedal or lever mode.
Work screen
1430 1160 To display from the start-up Displays memorised engine speeds, PTO
0 RPM screen speed, actual wheel slip rate, lever mode,
0% pedal mode (power or eco), self-propelled
Sv 1 2,6 mode and SV1 and SV2 speeds.
MA-05-04292A
To display from the start-up Reverse shuttle sensitivity

screen Allows to adjust the response time when
shifting direction of travel
To increase or decrease The delay begins when the reverse shuttle
4 the value lever is activated. If the delay is authorised,
Delay No
-
MA-05-04032A
+ declutching takes place 5 seconds after
Allows a delay (5 seconds) to be the lever is pulled. If not authorised,
OK authorised or not when reversing declutching takes place as soon as the
direction of travel. lever is activated.
To display from the start-up
screen Pedal mode sensitivity screen
MODE
To increase or decrease Used to adjust acceleration (+) and
+ 4 deceleration (-) sensitivity in pedal mode
- 2 the value
operation.
- +
MA-05-04293A
To display from the start-up Fuel used screen

screen Consumption indicator :
Press 5 seconds to reset - 0 Quantity of fuel consumed since last
OK reset.
- T: total fuel consumed. This value cannot
be modified or reset.
¤ H

To display from the previous
screen
Press to enter the settings Wheel slip screen (optional).
OK menu The symbol appears
Enables the max. allowable slip to be
To set the required wheel defined and displays the current wheel slip
slip percentage value setting.
Allows to exit the settings
ESC screen

screen
Press to enter the menus Joystick setting menu (1/2)
OK This menu allows to adjust the flow rate
To select one of the displayed values of each spool valve controlled by
flow rate values or timing the Joystick. If the Joystick is locked
(padlock displayed on screen) press the
To modify displayed flow armrest ON/OFF button.
rate values
When timing is selected, it is

possible to display the type of
timing (value or infinite) Joystick setting menu (2/2)
To adjust the timing value This menu allows to activate or deactivate
timing, and can be adjusted from 0 to 60
seconds or to infinite mode.
Allows to exit the settings
ESC screen and validate settings
Headland 2 screen (if Datatronic 3 not

installed)
This menu allows to adjust the engine
Allows to activate the mode or speed when changing linkage status (work
OK validate the values or transport). The operating conditions are:
Used to shift from one line -ON mode
to another -power shuttle lever out of neutral
-tractor moving.
Allows to set the seconds value - When the linkage transport mode is
of the displayed time selected, engine speed B is activated after
the preset time.
- When the linkage working mode is
selected, engine speed A is activated after
the preset time.
screen Headland 1 screen
EEM-SV
SV1 A ON To activate or deactivate This menu is used to vary the engine
SV2 B ON one of the two functions speed during activation of SV1 and SV2
A B memorised ground speeds.
MA-05-04294A

screen Clutch - coupler screen
Press 5 seconds to switch from Displays whether the clutch- coupler
OK On to OFF fonction is on or off.
¤ H

To display from the previous Linkage and spool valves menu
screen This menu allows to give priority to the
To modify displayed auxiliary spool valves over the linkage, and
linkage and spool valve vice versa.
flow rate values Maximum linkage value: 100
Minimum spool valve value 0
Minimum linkage value: 20
Maximum spool valve value: 80
screen Error code screen
Displays all tractor error codes. Each error
code is displayed for 4 seconds in a loop.

screen
Brightness screen
To increase or decrease
the value Setting screen brightness

screen
Contrast screen
To increase or decrease
the value Setting screen contrast
IMPORTANT : When the engine is stopped, all DOT MATRIX functions except the coupler function (CLUTCH)
shift to OFF position.
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
05B01 - DYNA VT hydraulics
CONTENTS
A . Forward / Reverse high pressure relief valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Scavenging valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Control spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . DYNA VT hydraulic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
E . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 05B01.1
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
05B01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
A . Forward / Reverse high pressure

relief valves
General
The purpose of the high pressure relief valves is to
regulate the increase in HP pressure. They protect the
transmission elements (hydrostatic motors and pump).
PH PH (4V4/ 4V5)
2V4 Ø1
ES PH (4V4/ 4V5)
ES ES PH
2V6
Ø1 2V3
PH
ES PH (4V4/ 4V5)
PH
A B C
MA-05-04146A
Fig. 1
the spool that is more powerful than the force of the
A = Coupler and clutch functions inactive: Pressure spring. The spool moves to the right, bringing PH into
identical in both chambers. The spool is held in closed contact with ES (booster).
position by the spring.
C = HP pressure is limited by the clutch and coupler
B = Coupler and clutch functions active: the pressure spools.
drop caused by the restrictor (nozzle) applies a force to
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Replacing Forward / Reverse HP pressure

relief valves
1. Drain the transmission oil

2. Loosen the 2 plugs with hexagonal heads located
under the transmission housing. (Fig. 2)
3. Use a wrench to remove the high pressure relief
valves.
NOTE:
V = Forward high pressure relief valve
R = Reverse high pressure relief valve.
Fig. 2
The high pressure relief valve is a controlled pressure

relief valve (Fig. 3)
Adjustment pressure when new: R500 + 20 bar.
Adjustment pressure after several hours: 480 ± 20 bar.
Only replace O’rings if they are damaged. Do not move
the thrust collar. Tighten the pressure relief valve to a
torque of
250 + 20 Nm
Fig. 3
REMARK: Fill the transmission oil at an external filling

station. (AGCO ref.: AGO2)
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
B . Scavenging valve
This valve allows to “flush” the oil in the hydrostatic
loop.
Operation (Fig. 4)
Pressure in A, B: max. 500 bar.

Pressure in T: max. 50 bar
Opening pressure: delta p = 7 bar between A and B
Fig. 4
Transmission at neutral (Fig. 5)
pA = pB, delta p < 7 bar

The spool is held in “middle” position by the spring.
The two channels (A, B) are closed.
Fig. 5
“Pulling” phase (Fig. 6)

pA > pB, delta p > 7 bar
The spool moves upwards via control port XA.
Channel B communicates with T. The hot oil coming
from the low pressure side B can therefore be
“flushed” and sent by the cooler via port T.
Fig. 6
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
“Pushing” phase (Fig. 7)
pA > pB, delta p > 7 bar

The spool moves downwards via control port XB.
Channel A communicates with T. The hot oil coming
from the low pressure side A can therefore be
“flushed” and sent by the cooler via port T.
Fig. 7
Disassembling the scavenging valve

(Fig. 8)
1. Drain the transmission oil.

2. Remove the plug (arrow Fig. 8) located under the
transmission housing.
3. Use a wrench to remove the scavenging valve.
Fig. 8
Fig. 9 :
Only replace O’rings if they are damaged. Do not move
the thrust collars. The thrust collars are positioned
facing each other. Tighten the scavenging valve to a
torque of 200 + 10 Nm.
REMARK: The new scavenging valve with a seal groove
(arrow Fig. 9) is provided as a replacement. Tighten to
the required torques:
250 + 20 Nm
4. Fill the transmission oil at an external filling station.

(Ref. AGO2).
Fig. 9
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
C . Control spool valve

Pressure relief valve - 4V4 / Y004 coupler
function
The coupler function valve (4V4) regulates the increase in hydrostatic pressure (PH) in proportion to the engine
speed. Due to this component the coupler effect is simulated. The coupler function valve is fitted to the control
block where the hydrostatic loop PH and tank return junction is located. If this junction is not closed, the pressure
in the hydrostatic loop cannot increase, and the tractor does not reach its maximum pulling power. The junction
between the hydrostatic loop PH and tank is closed by the coupler function valve (4V4).
Fig. 10
The coupler function valve is controlled by the electronic control unit. The strength of the current depends on the
engine speed, and changes as shown by the following table :
Engine speed in rpm Current supplied at A Maximum PH in bar Remark
800 0 0 Transmission at neutral
800 approx. 0.46 78 Transmission "active"
1200 1.23 105
from 1400 1.71 500
In order for the pressure to increase in the HP loop, it is necessary to maintain the electrical supply and the tight-
ness of the coupler function valve.
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
The tighness of the valve seal can be ensured by a

mechanical lock mechanism.
5. Move the control lever (see arrow Fig. 11)
Fig. 11
6. Or tighten the internal Allen screw.
Fig. 12
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Pressure relief valve 4V5 - clutch function tank return channel. This results in a drop in pressure
(interruption of the pulling effort) in the hydrostatic
The clutch function valve is fitted to the control block loop, proportional to how far in the clutch pedal is
where the PH hydrostatic loop and tank return junction pressed (comparable to a mechanical forward clutch).
is located. The clutch function valve also allows to limit
Clutch pedal pressed in fully, High pressure PH =
the maximum pressure PH in the 500 bar (± 20 bar)
0 bar.
hydrostatic loop. Due to the clutch function valve,
when the clutch pedal is not activated, the junction The maximum pressure can be achieved in the
between the hydrostatic loop and tank return is closed. hydrostatic loop only when the clutch valve (4V5)
By moving the clutch pedal, the clutch function valve is functioning perfectly.
opens and the hydrostatic loop communicates with the
Fig. 13
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Checking the control block - Coupler function (4V4 / Y004)

- Clutch function (4V5)
When the following conditions are met, the coupler
If maximum pressure is not reached when measuring
function valve allows the pressure in the hydrostatic
the HP pressure, the transmission module may be
loop to increase :
defective, but it is also possible that the internal seal
tightness of the control block is the cause of the - Engine speed higher than 1400 rpm (PWM - Signal)
problem. To be sure that it is necessary to disassemble - Limp home mode activated
the transmission module, it is recommended to first - Valve locked mechanically (tighten the internal
check the seal tightness of the spool valve block (trans- Allen screw or move the lever).
mission control). The clutch function valve is closed (increase in HP
The pressure in the hydrostatic loop can only increase pressure possible) when the clutch pedal is not acti-
if the pressure relief valve seals are tight. vated.
Fig. 14
The tightness of the 2 pressure relief valves (4V4 / 4V5) can be controlled by the T union.
Fig. 15
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Checking the hydrostatic loop in the

control block
DANGER: Chock the tractor (HP pressure

measurement).
7. Remove the right-hand rear wheel and its protec-

tive guard located behind it
8. Remove the T union.
9. Fit a test pressure gauge to measure pressures
higher than 500 bar at the PH union.
Fig. 16
Checking procedure :
10. Start the engine.

11. Activate the limp home mode by pressing in the
clutch pedal fully and pressing on the button
(Fig. 17).
12. Apply the handbrake.
Fig. 17
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
13. Use the limp home mode lever to start the trans-
mission (Fig. 18).
Fig. 18
PH T union Possible causes

250 bar No oil flow to the T union Transmission module error (shuttle valve, pressure pipe
union).
=>Remove the module.
250 bar Oil flows from the T union Coupler function valve (4V4) or clutch function valve
(4V5) not tightly sealed.
=> Change the valve.
Checking the clutch function valve (4V4)
14. Mechanically lock the valve (tighten the internal

Allen screw (Fig. 12) or move the lever (Fig. 11))
PH T union Possible causes

250 bar Oil flows from the T union Clutch function valve (4V5) not tightly sealed
=> Change the valve
500 bar Oil flows from the T union, but the Electrically check the coupler function valve
pressure is not constant => Change the valve if faulty
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
D . DYNA VT hydraulic tests

Supply pressure measurements
Fig. 19
Reference Reference
Measuring Measuring
on Description on Description
points points
component component
M1 KV Cooler upstream pressure M11 ZWK PTO clutch pressure
750 rpm PTO selector
M2 SM Lubricating pressure M13 750
pressure
M3 AS Flushing pressure M14 VR Front axle clutch pressure
M4 ES Booster pressure M15 DS Differential lock pressure
1000 rpm PTO selector
M5 PU Service pump pressure M16 1000
pressure
Transmission system
M6 P M17 Brake service pressure
pressure
Tortoise range shifting Rear axle beam lubricating
M7 I M18
pressure pressure
M8 II Hare range shifting pressure M19 Reverse position HP pressure
M9 PH High pressure (HP) M21 Front PTO clutch pressure
Oil leak on clutch function
Rear axle beam and braking
M10 PHA M22 T spool valve / coupler function
system pressure
solenoid valve
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Precautions to be taken during the pressure measure- On right-hand side, in the middle of the tractor :
ments: 5. Remove right-hand rear wheel and its protective
The oil temperature must be between 35 and 45°C guard.
IMPORTANT: When measuring the transmission pres- 6. Connect a test pressure gauge. Measure the pres-
sure, raise all wheels of the tractor to prevent acci- sures set out below according to the different
dents. engine speeds (see settings table below)
- PU Pressure (M5). Pressure measuring point
1. Set transmission ratio (Hi/Lo) to speed of 0. located between the service pump and the pres-
2. Release the handbrake. sure filter (Fig. 19)
3. Engage the front axle. - P Pressure (M6) System pressure downstream
of pressure filter (Fig. 19).
4. Differential lock and PTO clutch are not engaged.
- ES booster pressure (Fig. 19)
- AS flushing or discharge pressure
- SM transmission lubricating pressure (Fig. 19).
Set values for pressure measurement (in bar)

Engine speeds PU (M5) P (M6) ES (M4) AS (M3) SM (M2)
800 25 ±2 25 ±2 16 ±2 9 ±2 1.4 ±0.2
1200 26 ±2 25.5 ±2 19 ±2 11.5 ±2 2.2 ±0.3
1600 27 ±2 26 ±2 20 ±2 13 ±2 3.6 ±0.5
2000 28 ±2 27 ±2 23 ±2 15 ±2 5 ±0.5
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
High pressure (HP) measurements
DANGER: High pressure measurements

must never exceed a maximum of 5 seconds, to
prevent the oil from heating.
Preliminary operations:
Engage hare range and set the starting speed to
maximum, or transmission to limp home mode (do
not turn the control unit by more than 15° in order to
avoid heating the oil).
Measuring points Engine speed Value in bar

New assembly 500 + 20
PH 1600 Old assembly
500 - 40
NOTE: Load the hydrostatic loop at maximum for 5

seconds before taking the following measurements.

P 1600 26 ±2
ES 1600 13 ±2
AS 1600 12 ±2
SM 1600 1.6 ±0.4
Shifting pressure measurements

In Hare or Tortoise range 1600 26 ±2
NOTE: Alternately supply solenoid valves 1 (4V1) and 2

(4V2) with a 12 V (DC) supply
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Rear PTO, differential lock and front axle

clutch solenoid valve measurement
NOTE: The unit is located on the rear axle housing,

behind the spool valves. Access is limited, so great
care must be taken.
Fig. 20
Measuring points Description

M10 Rear axle beam, brakes and front PTO system pressure
M11 Rear PTO clutch
M13 750 rpm PTO selector pressure
M14 Front axle clutch
M15 Differential lock
M17 Braking system pressure
M18 Rear axle beam lubricating pressure
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
NOTE: Run the engine at 1200 rpm. Simultaneously

check the pressure at unions M10 and M18 (SM).
Shifting status of hydraulic System pressure M10 in Lubricating pressure M18

Measuring points
parts bar in bar
Power take-off - On / Off M11 18 ± 0.2 2 ± 0.3
Differential lock - On / Off M15 18 ± 0.2 2 ± 0.3
Front axle - On / Off M14 18 ± 0.2 2,1 ± 0.3
Single wheel braking M17 18 ± 0.2 1,6 ± 0.3
Activation of locked brake pedal M17 18 ± 0.2 1,2 ± 0.3
In order to check the rear PTO, it is also possible to

measure pressure levels at the unions located at the
rear right- and left-hand sides of the PTO housing.
1 = Rear PTO clutch

(M12-1.5 union)
2 = Rear axle beam lubricating pressure
(M10-1 union)
3+4 = 750 or 540 speed selection
(M10-1 union)
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Pressure tests on DYNA VT transmission
8400 series tractors

Dealer number Customer Chassis number :
Engine number :
Putting into
service :
Total service
hours:
Recommendation: the measurements should be taken with all four wheels raised. Risk of accident!!!
Measuring condition: transmission oil temperature range 35-45°C
I. Supply pressure measurements
Specified value / bar Measure-
Measuring point Engine speed rpm Measurement Tolerance Remarks
ment in bar
PU 800 25 +2
1200 126 +2
1600 27 +2
2000 28 +2
P 800 25 +2
1200 25,5 +2
1600 26 +2
2000 27 +2
ES 800 16 ±2
1200 19 ±2
1600 20 ±2
2000 23 ±2
AS 800 9 ±2
1200 11,5 ±2
1600 13 ±2
2000 15 ±2
SM 800 1,4 ±0,2
1200 2,2 ±0,3
1600 3,6 ±0,5
2000 5 ±0,5
II. High pressure measurements. Pressure measurements in forward speed and in reverse speed, maximum measurement time 5 seconds
ment in bar
Forward / reverse 1600 New = 500 +20
PH Used = 500 -40
P 26 +2
ES 13 ±2
AS 12 ±2
SM 1,6 ±0,4
III. Ranges 1 and 2 shift measurement. Solenoid valves 1 and 2 supplied alternately by 12 VDC
ment in bar
I 1600 26 ±2
II 1600 26 ±2
Date: Signature:
AGCO September 2004
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Summary table of the high pressure

values
HP measurement Pressure in bar Measurement Pressure in bar

PH 500 + 20 P 26+ 2
PH 500 + 20 ES 13 + 2
PH 500 + 20 AS 12 ± 2
PH 500 + 20 SM 1,6 ± 0,4
Diagram showing the pressure check points on the valve block
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Service pump P High pressure PH
Speed limitation solenoid valve
Clutch function
controlled valve
Hare/Tortoise supply pressure

Solenoid valves
Tortoise range Hare range
HP Pressure
sensor
Coupler function sole-
noid valve Fig. 23
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
Valve housing with test connections
Lubricating pressure (SM) Booster pressure (ES)
Service pump
relief valve (50 b)
Booster valve (6.5 b)
Oil
cooler
bypass
valve
Flushing valve (6 b)
Service pressure (PU)

Flushing pressure (AS)
temperature (°C) Lubricating pres-
sure valve (6.5 b)
Fig. 24
¤ H
DYNA VT hydraulics
E . Service tools
1. Tool available in AGCO network
AG02 - External filling station (Fig. 25)
MA-05-04158A
Fig. 25
¤ H
Replacing the DYNA VT unit
05C01 - Replacing the DYNA VT unit
CONTENTS
A . Desassembling the Dyna VT module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Assembling the Dyna VT module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 05C01.1
¤ H
05C01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
A . Desassembling the Dyna VT

module
1. Drain the transmission oil (approx. 65l.)
2. Disassemble the cab.
DANGER: Before disconnecting the

pipes, it is necessary to release the pressure in
the brake accumulator by pumping on the
pedals.
3. Remove the unions after emptying, taking the

precautions necessary to prevent any dirty parti-
cles from entering the air conditioning circuit
ADVICE: It is recommended to raise the

cab slightly before splitting it.
4. Pinch the heating pipes closed to avoid draining

the circuit.
5. Attach the cab to a suitable hoisting system and lift
it off.
CAUTION: Take care not to damage the

roof cap.
6. Disconnect the cables and hydraulic unions, taking

care to mark them.
7. Remove the spool valve block.
CAUTION: Mark all parts at disas-

sembly.
8. Hoist and remove the cab.
9. Remove the accumulator assembly.
Fig. 1
¤ H
10. Move the range selector to neutral.

11. Take off the limp home console.
Fig. 2
12. Disconnect the connector.

13. Remove the control unit.
Fig. 3
14. Take off the pressure filter housing. Recover the oil
that flows out.
Fig. 4
¤ H
15. Remove the electrical connectors and hydraulic

pipes.
16. Remove the valve block.
Fig. 5
17. Disconnect the connectors, the clutch vent line

and the hydraulic pipes.
18. Remove the valve block.
Fig. 6
19. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove

the summing shaft sensor.
Fig. 7
¤ H
20. Remove the pipe support and strapping.

21. Unscrew the cover screws.
22. Raise the cover using the M10 eye-bolt.
Fig. 8
23. Unscrew the locking screw and take out the

control shaft.
Fig. 9
24. Remove the retainer circlips and push the hoses

inwards.
25. Disconnect the high pressure hoses.
Fig. 10
¤ H
26. Remove the 3 circlips and push the hoses inwards.
Fig. 11
27. Remove the hydraulic pipes (supply pressure of

auxiliary functions).
Fig. 12
28. Take off the drive shaft circlip.

29. Push the shaft backwards.
Fig. 13
¤ H
30. Unscrew the 3 M8 screws from the planet carrier.

31. Push the shaft backwards.
Fig. 14
32. Remove the drive pinion circlip.

33. Push the circlip, washer and socket towards the
drive pinion, as indicated by the arrow.
Fig. 15
34. Swivel the hydrostatic motors and the pump

inwards using a lever.
Fig. 16
¤ H
35. Unscrew the 2 nuts (see arrows) located on the

left and right.
Fig. 17
36. Unscrew the upper M12 locking screw.

37. On the inner surface of the gearbox housing,
unscrew the 2 closing plugs.
38. Recover the oil.
39. Unscrew the 2 locking screws on the lower shaft.
Fig. 18
40. Install lifting tackle.

41. Slightly raise the hydraulic module, ensuring the
lifting tackle remains under a certain level of
tension.
Fig. 19
¤ H
42. Using a slide hammer puller on the M20 threads,

extract the flexible suspension shafts.
Fig. 20
43. Take the transmission module carefully out of the

gearbox housing using the lifting tackle.
44. Stay alert in case other parts move.
DANGER: Do not stand under heavy

loads.
Fig. 21
¤ H
B . Assembling the Dyna VT module
CAUTION: Before reassembling, all compo-

nents, mating faces and grooves must be clean.
Any rust, mud or water must be removed.
45. Raise the transmission block with lifting tackle,
after securing it.
46. Move the range selector (Hare / Tortoise) (arrow
Fig. 22) to “Neutral” (middle position).
Fig. 22
47. Clean any oil or seal fragments from the transmis-

sion housing mating face.
48. Move the range selector finger (see arrow) to
“Neutral”. (middle position).
Fig. 23
If necessary:
49. Fit the circlip and washer on the shoulder of the
drive pinion.
50. Push the socket onto the drive pinion.
51. Fit the flange on the link shaft (PTO drive) and fit
the link shaft.
Fig. 24
¤ H
52. Fit the transmission module in the transmission

housing. Stay alert in case other parts move.
53. Fit the two shafts into the bores of the transmis-
sion housing and transmission module.
NOTE: The two shafts are of different lengths; the
longer one is fitted at the base of the gearbox.
Fig. 25
54. Check the sockets (flexible) for wear, and fit new
sockets if necessary.
55. Insert the sockets home into the bores.
Fig. 26
56. Fit the ring, with the bore turned towards the flex-
ible socket.
57. Tighten the M20 nut.
58. Carry out the same assembly operation on the
three other threads.
Fig. 27
¤ H
59. Tighten the four M20 nuts to a torque of:
250 Nm
NOTE: When tightening, hold the opposite nut still.
60. Unhook the lifting tackle.
Fig. 28
61. Install a planet gear of the power transmission

epicyclic gear train turned upwards.
62. Centre the transmission module. The distance
between the ring gear and the transmission
housing must be identical on either side.
Fig. 29
63. Tighten the 4 locking screws to a torque of:
86 Nm
64. Install 2 closing plugs fitted with new seals under

the transmission housing.
65. Test the correct operating of Hare / Tortoise range
shifting (check finger positioning).
Fig. 30
¤ H
66. Turn the transmission module until a tooth of the

disc, intended for the Hall sensor, can be seen at
the middle of the bore. (arrow Fig. 31).
Fig. 31
67. Smear the mating face of the Hall sensor with

sealing product (ref. X903.050.553) (non-hard-
ening) and insert the sensor into its housing.
68. Tighten the attachment screws to a torque of:
25 Nm
69. Reconnect the electrical connector.

NOTE: If the Hall sensor is being reused, insert 2
strips of paper 0.9 mm thick into the Hall sensor
groove (these strips ensure centring).
Fig. 32
70. Swivel the hydrostatic motors to their stop (45°).
Fig. 33
¤ H
71. Pull the drive pinion socket forwards to release the

groove from the circlip. Insert the circlip into the
groove.
NOTE: If the socket does not engage, chock a front
wheel and turn it until the socket is engaged.
Fig. 34
72. Fit the flange on the epicyclic gear train. Tighten

the M8 screws to a torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 35
73. Insert the hydraulic hoses into the bores on the

front right-hand side of the transmission housing.
74. Secure the hoses using circlips (opening facing
downwards).
- 1 = short blue hose (flushing)

- 2 = long blue hose (boosting)
- 3 = black hose (lubricating)
Fig. 36
¤ H
At the front on top of the transmission housing:

75. Fit the ring in the groove of the shaft.
76. Push the shaft forwards. Install the washer.
77. Fit the circlip in the pinion groove.
Fig. 37
78. Fit the hydraulic pipe (supply pressure of auxiliary

functions).
Fig. 38
79. Insert the pressure pipes in the bores in the

right-hand side of the transmission housing.
- 1 = supply pressure hydraulic hose

- 2 = Hare range shifting
- 3 = ground speed limiting
- 4 = Tortoise range shifting
- 5 = Regulating valves (tilting)
- 6 = High pressure for forward clutch and
coupler function.
Fig. 39
¤ H
80. Attach the hydraulic pipes using circlips.
Fig. 40
81. Screw 2 M8 threaded rods into the transmission

housing.
82. Fit new O’rings.
83. Stick seals in the block using grease.
84. Fit the control block.
85. Tighten the attachment screw (from the inside to
the outside) to a torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 41
86. Connect the connectors, clutch function bleed pipe

and hydraulic pipes.
- 4V1 = Hare range solenoid valve

- 4V2 = Tortoise range solenoid valve
- 4V4 = Coupler function solenoid valve
- 4V3 = Ground speed limiting solenoid valve
Fig. 42
¤ H
87. Screw 2 M8 threaded rods into the transmission

housing. Fit new seals.
88. Fit new seals with grease in the valve block.
89. Install the block and tighten the screws, starting
with the inside screws to the following torque:
25 Nm
90. Connect the connectors and hydraulic pipes.
Fig. 43
91. Fit new O’rings with grease and attach the pres-
sure filter, tightening the screws to the following
torque:
25 Nm
92. Connect the connector.
Fig. 44
93. If necessary, smear the lip seal with a mixture of

white spirit and water (1:1) and fit it home. Fill the
lip seals 2/3 full with grease.
94. Fit the control shaft.
Fig. 45
¤ H
95. Turn the shaft until the locking screw thread can be
seen.
NOTE: Smear the thread of the Allen screw with
plastic binder (LOCTITE) (Ref. X 903.050.084) and
tighten the screw to the following torque:
25 Nm
Fig. 46
96. Fit the intermediate coupler with the two bosses

(see arrows) pointing to the control unit.
Fig. 47
97. Fit the pre-assembled control unit on the transmis-

sion housing.
98. Tighten the M8 cylindrical screws to a torque of:
25 Nm
99. Reconnect the electrical connector.
Fig. 48
¤ H
100.Unscrew the plug marked PU.

101.Connect the filling station (Fig. 49).
NOTE: Using the external filling station it is possible
to avoid dry operation of the hydrostatic pump and
hydrostatic motor.
102.Be sure to comply with the oil quantity and type
(see chapter 1).
NOTE: During the filling process, swivel the hydro-

static pumps and motors.
Ensure the hydraulic unions are completely sealed.
Fill the transmission oil with a filling station.
MA-05-04158A
Fig. 49
103.Smear the mating face of the transmission

housing with sealing product (Ref. X903.050.074).
104.Fit the cover.
105.Tighten the M12 screws to a torque of:
86 Nm
106.Fit the pipe support.

107.Refit the cab. Fig. 50
108.Reassemble all hydraulic unions as marked at
disassembly.
109.Refit the spool valve support.
110.Reconnect all electrical connections as marked at
disassembly.
111.Connect the heating pipes.
112.Connect the air conditioning pipes.
113.Check the levels of the various liquids.
¤ H
C . Service tools
1. Tool available in AGCO network
AG02 - External filling station (Fig. 51)
MA-05-04158A
Fig. 51
¤ H
¤ H
Rear axle
06 - Rear axle
CONTENTS
06B01 - Final drive units
06C01 - Braking unit
¤ H
Rear axle
¤ H
Final drive units
06B01 - Final drive units
CONTENTS
A . Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing a rear axle drive unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C . Refitting a rear axle drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D . Disassembling a rear axle drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Reassembling a rear axle drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
F . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
¤ H
Final drive units
¤ H
Final drive units
A . Généralités
The rear axle final drive units have a separate lubrica-
tion system to the rear axle. Tightness between the
two parts is ensured by a double lip seal.
The brakes are multidisc (6 discs with friction lining and
6 intermediate plates per final drive unit).
They operate via a braking mechanism activated by a
brake cylinder and a control lever.
86 N.m 120 N.m
350 N.m
D
A
MA-06-04227A
Fig. 1
Adjusting the bearings:
Preload the taper roller bearings (A, B) using shim (C) so that the rotational resistance torque increases from 4 to
6 Nm (without spi seal).
Planet carrier axial clearance:
Specified clearance: 0.2 to 0.5 mm (there must be axial clearance!)
¤ H
Final drive units
Fig. 2
¤ H
Final drive units
Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Ring gear 20 Threaded rod M12 x 165-10.9
2 Planet gear 21 Nut M12-10
3 Pin 23 Locking screw M30 x 1.5
4 Circlip 24 Joint d’étanchéité
5 Needle bearing cage 25 Ring
10 Allen screw 26 Shim
11 Plate 27 Taper roller bearing
12 Pin 28 Taper roller bearing
14 Planet carrier 29 Snap ring
15 Drive unit housing 30 Spi seal
16 Joint d’étanchéité 31 Rear axle shaft
17 Magnetic plug 32 Wheel stud
18 Allen screw M12 x 160-10.9 35 Shaft
¤ H
Final drive units
Fig. 3
¤ H
Final drive units

1 Ring gear 21 Nut M12-10
2 Planet gear 23 Locking screw M30 x 1.5
3 Pin 24 Joint d’étanchéité
4 Circlip 25 Ring
5 Needle bearing cage 26 Shim
10 Allen screw 27 Taper roller bearing
11 Plate 28 Taper roller bearing
12 Pin 29 O’ring
14 Planet carrier 30 Spi seal
15 Drive unit housing 31 Rear axle shaft
16 Joint d’étanchéité 33 O’ring
17 Magnetic plug 35 Shaft
18 Allen screw M12 x 160-10.9 40 Spacer
19 Cylindrical screw 41 Cover
20 Threaded rod M12-165 -10.9 42 Allen screw
¤ H
Final drive units
Page left blank intentionally
¤ H
Final drive units
Cross-section of a drive unit
32 30 29 28 27 26 25 11 12 10 4 18 5 2 1 3 4 35
31 15 16 17 14
MA-06-04210A
Fig. 4
¤ H
Final drive units
¤ H
Final drive units
B . Removing a rear axle drive unit

The following must be carried out before
disassembling
1. Drain the transmission.
2. Drain the drive units.
3. It is necessary to remove a cab support to extract
a drive unit.
4. Remove the rear wheels and securely chock the
tractor.
5. Remove obstructive protective guards.
6. Remove the hitch stabiliser (Arrow Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
7. Remove cab suspension supports ( Fig. 2)

8. Remove other parts which might obstruct disas-
sembly.
Fig. 2
¤ H
Final drive units
9. Support the drive unit in a secure manner using a

suitable lifting device. Remove the drive unit
housing attachment parts (Fig. 3).
10. In place of the 2 two CHC screws, screw in 2
threaded screws to release the rear axle drive unit.
Fig. 3
11. Remove the drive unit.
Fig. 4
¤ H
Final drive units
C . Refitting a rear axle drive unit

12. Clean the mating surface between the rear axle
and the drive unit, and smear with a sealing
product (Ref. X903-050-074).
Fig. 5
13. Fit the drive unit with a suitable lifting device.
Fig. 6
14. Fit and tighten diametrically opposed screws (18

and 21) to a torque of:
120 Nm
15. Carry out operations (6 to 10) in reverse order.
Fig. 7
¤ H
Final drive units
D . Disassembling a rear axle drive

unit
NOTE: The operations described apply to a standard
drive unit. Adjustment and reconditioning are identical
for long shaft drive units.
Remove the rear axle drive unit (see § B)
16. Unscrew the cylindrical screws (19) by about

10 mm and knock out the ring gear (1) with a
mallet.
17. Remove ring gear (1).
Fig. 8
18. Unscrew the Allen screw (10) and remove the

planet carrier.
IMPORTANT: The screw (10) is stuck at assembly.
Fig. 9
If necessary:
19. Remove the circlips (4).
20. Take out the pins (3).
21. Remove the planet gears (2)
22. Replace any defective parts.
Fig. 10
¤ H
Final drive units
23. Fit the planet gears (2).

24. Fit the pins (3).
25. Fit the circlips (4).
Fig. 11
Preloading the axle shaft:

26. Fit one or two shims (ref. X 534.739.501) (indi-
vidual thickness: 1 mm) on the bearing of the axle
shaft (31).
27. Fit the planet carrier.
NOTE: If no shims are available, a locally made

tightening socket can be used to preload the axle
shaft bearing.
Fig. 12
28. Pretighten the journal of the axle shaft using the

Allen screw (10).
29. Remove the planet carrier (14) again.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn the axle shaft (31).
Fig. 13
¤ H
Final drive units
30. Take out the split ring (25) from the groove in the
axle shaft (31).
31. Take off the shims.
32. Take out the cotter pin.
Fig. 14
33. Insert the protective plug X 899.980.157 on the

end of the axle shaft.
34. Fit the planet carrier.
Fig. 15
35. Fit a locally made mounting handle (see Fig. 16) to

the axle shaft (31).
36. Drive out the axle shaft (31) onto a metal block.
Fig. 16
¤ H
Final drive units
37. Take the internal ring out of the taper roller bearing
(28) using extractor X 899.980.159.
38. Next, extract the spi seal (30).
Fig. 17
¤ H
Final drive units
E . Reassembling a rear axle drive

unit
Important: Before reassembling, all components,
mating faces and grooves must be clean. Any rust,
mud or water must be removed.
If necessary:
39. Fit home the external ring of the taper roller
bearing (28).
40. Fit the snap ring (29) into the groove.
41. On the opposite side, fit home the external ring of
the taper roller bearing.
Fig. 18
42. Heat the internal ring of the taper roller bearing (28)
to approximately 80°C and install it in the drive unit
housing (15).
43. Smear the outside of the new spi seal (30) with
sealing product X 903.051.711, clean the inside
with a mixture of white spirit and water (1:1) and fit
it home.
Fig. 19
44. Before the internal ring cools, fit home the shaft
(31) using locally made handles (see Fig. 20).
Fig. 20
¤ H
Final drive units
45. Turn the housing (15) upside down.

46. Heat the internal ring of the taper roller bearing (27)
to approximately 80°C and fit it home.
47. Smear the axle shaft journal with transmission oil.
Fig. 21
48. Support the housing (15). The axle shaft journal
clearance should be minimal.
49. Fit the torque gauge (ref. X 899.980.150).
50. Measure and note down the rotational strength of
the sealing ring. Example: 5.0 Nm
51. Select a thickness of shims (26) to allow tight

assembly of the split ring (25).
Fig. 22
NOTE: Wherever possible, fit shims (26) so that the
shim 1.0 mm thick is on the split ring (25) side.
Fig. 23
¤ H
Final drive units
52. Fit two shims (Ref. X 534.739.501) (individual

thickness: 1 mm) on the axle shaft (31).
53. Refit the planet carrier and tighten home.
The resistance of the bearing at the axle shaft
journal should increase slightly.
NOTE: If bearing resistance does not increase, take
off the planet carrier again and fit new shims (26)
under the split ring (25), see Fig. 23, then preload
the axle shaft journal again.
Fig. 24
54. Tap the journal on either side with a mallet to

reduce the load on it.
55. Remove the planet carrier again.
56. Select the thickness of shims (26) to allow
assembly of the split ring (25) by tapping lightly
with a hammer.
57. Fit the cotter pin (ref. 12) in the axle shaft (31).
Fig. 25
58. Smear the thread of the Allen screw (10) with
plastic binder (Ref. W 903.050.084) and tighten to
the following torque:
350 Nm
59. Tap the journal on either side with a mallet to

reduce the load on it.
Fig. 26
¤ H
Final drive units
60. Measure and note down the rotational resistance

of the sealing ring and journal using the torque
wrench X 899.980.150.
Specified value: 4.0 to 6.0 Nm (bearing / journal)
plus rotational resistance (sealing ring Fig. 22) e.g.
5.0 Nm.
Correct any non-conformity by fitting new shims
(26) (see Fig. 23 and Fig. 25).
Fig. 27
61. Check the axial clearance of the planet carrier (14)

using two levers.
62. Specified value: 0.2 to 0.5 mm axial clearance.
NOTE: there must be axial clearance.
Fig. 28
Depending on which parts were disassembled

(Fig. 10):
Assembling planet gears:
63. Fit the snap ring in the socket groove and fit the
socket (arrow) home in the planet gear (2) until the
snap ring is held in place.
NOTE: It is not possible to remove the socket
(arrow).
Fig. 29
¤ H
Final drive units
64. With grease, stick the 19 bearings of the bearing

set (5) in the planet gear (2).
65. With grease, stick the ring of the bearing set (5) in
the planet gear (2).
66. Carry out the same assembly operation on the
opposite side of the planet gear (2).
Fig. 30
67. Install the circlips (4) in the groove of the planet

carrier (14).
Fig. 31
68. Insert the preassembled planet gear (2).

69. Insert the pin (3) and fit home the circlip (4) in the
groove of the planet carrier (14).
Fig. 32
¤ H
Final drive units
70. Clean the mating face and smear with sealing

product X 903.050.074.
Fig. 33
71. Install the ring gear with internal teething (1).

72. Tighten the cylindrical screws (19) to a torque of:
86 Nm
73. Refit the drive unit on the rear axle (see § C).
Fig. 34
¤ H
Final drive units
F . Service tools
Section under construction.
¤ H
Braking unit
06C01 - Braking unit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Disassembling the rear axle brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Reassembling the rear axle brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Disassembling a wheel brake cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Reassembling a wheel brake cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Bleeding the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
¤ H
Braking unit
¤ H
Braking unit
piston, activated by the brake pedal, or by the control

A . General lever, activated by the ParkLock ram. When the brake
is released, minimum clearance is maintained by the
On MF 8400 series tractors, the brake cylinders are control plate springs.
fitted on the rear axle housing. The brakes are sealed
The brake discs are lubricated by an oil flow. This oil
against the final drive units by a seal (12).
flow comes from the distribution block, and directs oil
The braking unit comprises a control plate, discs and between the discs, where it lubricates the braking
intermediate plates. The control plate is pushed apart surfaces when they are not in use, and cools the
by the control rod, forcing the discs against the inter- brakes when they are in use.
mediate plates which are splined together by 4 pins
(7). The control rod is activated either by the brake
Exploded view of rear axle braking unit
Fig. 1
¤ H
Braking unit
Exploded view parts list

1 Bearing flange 12 Spi seal
2 Bearing flange 16 Control disc
3 O’ring 17 Ball
4 Screw M12x40-10.9 18 Spring
7 Pin 19 Dowel pin
8 O’ring 20 Disc
9 Brake plate 21 Intermediate plate
10 Shaft 23 Loctite X903.050.074
11 Allen screw M12 x 160-10.9
¤ H
Braking unit
B . Disassembling the rear axle

brakes
1. Remove the drive unit (see chapter 6).
2. Remove the corresponding wheel brake cylinder.
3. Take out the shaft (10).
4. Unscrew the Allen screws from the brake plate (9).
Fig. 2
5. Take off the brake plate (9) using the impact

extractor (Ref. X899.980.053).
6. Remove the discs and intermediate plates.
Fig. 3
7. Take off the control disc (16) and the other discs
and intermediate plates.
8. Take out the pin (7).
9. Disassemble the other side in the same way.
Fig. 4
¤ H
Braking unit
C . Reassembling the rear axle

brakes
IMPORTANT: Check the wear and grooves of the discs.
Oil the brake discs before fitting them.
10. Fit the discs. Start with an intermediate plate

(external blade ref. 21), then a disc with lining
(internal blade ref. 20), with the larger drilled hole
(see arrow Fig. 5) turned downwards (for easier
insertion of the shaft (10)).
Fig. 5
11. Fit the intermediate plate (21), then a disc (20),

with the larger drilled hole turned downwards
(arrow Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
12. Fit a disc (20) with the larger drilled hole turned
downwards (arrow Fig. 7) on the control disc (16).
The control pin (arrow Fig. 7) should be turned
upwards towards the brake cylinder.
13. Fit an intermediate plate (21) on the pin of the
control disc (16).
14. Insert the set of discs positioned as described.
Fig. 7
¤ H
Braking unit
15. Next, fit a disc (20 Fig. 8) with the larger drilled hole
facing downwards (arrow) on the control disc (16).
16. Fit the intermediate plate (21) on the pin (see
arrow) of the control disc (16).
Fig. 8
17. Fit a disc (20 Fig. 9) with the larger drilled hole
turned downwards (arrow).
18. Next fit an intermediate plate (21) on the pins (7).
Fig. 9
19. Fit a disc (20 Fig. 10) with the larger drilled hole
turned downwards (arrow).
20. Next fit an intermediate plate (21) on the pins (7).
Fig. 10
¤ H
Braking unit
21. Smear the outside of a new spi seal (12) with a

mixture of water and white spirit and fit it home in
the centre of the brake plate (9). The seal lips must
be turned towards the oil pressure chambers.
22. Smear new O’rings (8) with grease and fit them in
the groove of the brake plate (9). The oil channels
(arrow Fig. 11) of the brake plate must be turned
downwards at assembly.
Fig. 11
23. Refit the brake plate (9) fitted as described above.

Check the position of the oil channels.
24. Tighten diametrically opposed screws to a torque
of:
120 Nm
Fig. 12
25. Fill the lips of the spi seal (12) 2/3 full with grease.
26. Full insert the shaft (10).
IMPORTANT: When fitting home the shaft, it should
make a noise as it hits its stop. If no noise is heard,
the last disc may not have been fitted.
27. Refit the drive unit.
Fig. 13
¤ H
Braking unit
D . Disassembling a wheel brake

cylinder
28. Remove the "ParkLock" parking brake controls.
Fig. 14
29. Disconnect the hydraulic control pipe.
Fig. 15
30. Remove the bleed pipe.
Fig. 16
¤ H
Braking unit
31. Loosen and remove the attachment screws from

the upper part of the wheel brake cylinder.
Fig. 17
32. Remove the upper part of the wheel brake

cylinder.
NOTE: When raising the upper part, ensure the
return spring does not fall out.
Fig. 18
33. Loosen and remove the 3 CHC screws from the

lower part of the wheel brake cylinder.
Fig. 19
¤ H
Braking unit
34. Remove the lower part of the wheel brake

cylinder.
NOTE: Take care not to drop the brake control lever
into the reducer.
Fig. 20
35. Remove the control arm retaining screw.
Fig. 21
36. Mark the position of the control arm in relation to

the pin, then remove the control arm and plastic
ring.
Fig. 22
¤ H
Braking unit
37. Remove the pusher piston.
Fig. 23
38. Take out the pin and the second plastic ring.
Fig. 24
39. Remove and discard the lip seals.
Fig. 25
¤ H
Braking unit
40. Remove and discard the O’rings.
Fig. 26
41. Remove the piston and discard the lip seals.

(arrows Fig. 27).
42. Clean, degrease and check all components;

replace any defective parts.
NOTE: It is strongly advised to carry out the same
operation for each wheel cylinder.
Fig. 27
¤ H
Braking unit
E . Reassembling a wheel brake

cylinder
IMPORTANT: Before reassembly, all components,
43. Fit new seals on the piston.

NOTE: Ensure seals are positioned correctly, with the
wider lips turned towards the outside of the piston
(Fig. 28).
Fig. 28
44. Smear the lip seals with miscible grease, then fit
the brake piston in its housing.
Fig. 29
45. Fit new lip seals smeared with miscible grease in

the brake cylinder body.
Fig. 30
¤ H
Braking unit
46. Fit new O’rings smeared with miscible grease on

the brake cylinder body.
Fig. 31
47. Insert the control pin fitted with its plastic washer.
Fig. 32
48. Fit the control arm as marked at disassembly.
Fig. 33
¤ H
Braking unit
49. Fit the control arm retaining screw.
Fig. 34
50. Install a new O'ring (arrow Fig. 35).
Fig. 35
51. Fit the control piston.
Fig. 36
¤ H
Braking unit
52. Fit the reversing lever on the control piston, and fill
the assembling ball joint with miscible grease.
(arrow Fig. 37).
Fig. 37
53. Insert the control pin fitted with its plastic washer.
Fig. 38
54. Tighten the CHC screws to a torque of:
69 Nm
Fig. 39
¤ H
Braking unit
55. Fit the piston return spring.
Fig. 40
56. Install the brake piston cover, fitted with its piston.
Fig. 41
57. Insert and tighten the attachment screws to a

torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 42
¤ H
Braking unit
58. Refit the bleed pipe.
Fig. 43
59. Reconnect the hydraulic pipe.
Fig. 44
60. Refit the “ParkLock” parking brake controls.

61. Bleed the brake circuit. See "Bleeding the brakes"
paragraph.
Fig. 45
¤ H
Braking unit
F . Bleeding the brakes

Section under construction.
¤ H
Power take off
07 - Power take off
CONTENTS
07A01 - Rear PTO
07B01 - Assembling and disassembling the rear PTO
¤ H
Power take off
¤ H
Rear PTO
07A01 - Rear PTO
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
¤ H
Rear PTO
¤ H
Rear PTO
A . General
PTO clutch - exploded view
Fig. 1
Ref. Description Ref. Description

1 Shim 21 Allen screw
2 Taper roller bearings 22 Grower washer
3 Clutch cover 23 Bush
4 Cylindrical screw 25 Pinion
5 Shim 28 Taper roller bearing
6 Internal blade holder 29 Nozzle
8 Shim 30 Locking half-rings
9 Spring washer 31 Circlip
10 Set of blades (11-12) 32 O’ring
11 Disc 35 Shaft
12 Intermediate plate 36 Taper roller bearing
13 Piston 37 Ring with rectangular section
14 Ring 38 Grub screw
16 Lip seal 39 Nozzle
18 Plate 40 Sensor
19 Lip seal 42 Shaft
20 Brake disc
¤ H
Rear PTO
Rear PTO drive - exploded view
Fig. 2

101 Taper roller bearing 121 Circlip
102 Shim 122 Washer
104 Clutch body 123 Taper roller bearing
105 Roller 124 Shim
107 Circlip 125 Grub screw
108 Washer 126 Spi seal
109 Needle bearing cage 127 O’ring
110 Spacer 128 Bearing cover
112 Circlip 129 Cylindrical screw
113 Taper roller bearing 132 Spacer
114 Circlip 133 Threaded stud M10 x 50 - 10.9
115 Allen screw 134 Nut M10-10
116 Stop 135 PTO guard
118 Pinion (1000 rpm) 137 End-fitting
118A Pinion (540 or 750 rpm) 139 Sensor
120 Shaft 140 Allen screw
¤ H
Rear PTO
Rear PTO control - exploded view
Fig. 3

201 Stirrup 216 Allen screw
202 Hexagonal nut 217 Rams
203 Stud 218 O’ring
205 Allen screw 219 Compact seal
206 Hexagonal nut 220 Compact seal
207 Spacer pipe 221 Spring
210 Hexagonal nut 222 Piston
211 Hexagonal nut 224 Piston
212 Washer 225 Allen screw
213 Hexagonal nut 226 Rams
214 Roller 226 Rams
¤ H
Rear PTO
Rear PTO cover - exploded view
Fig. 4

301 Rear axle housing 311 Closing plug
303 Seal 315 Dowel pin
304 Cover 316 Housing cover
305 Allen screw 317 Screw M18 x 90 - 10.9
307 Closing plug 318 Screw M18 x 110 -10.9
308 Sealing ring 319 Threaded stud M18 x 130 - 10.9
309 Closing plug 322 Sealing ring
310 Sealing ring 325 Cylindrical screw
¤ H
Rear PTO
Cross-section view of rear PTO
Fig. 5
¤ H
Rear PTO
¤ H
Assembling and disassembling the rear PTO
07B01 - Assembling and disassembling the rear PTO
CONTENTS
A . Disassembling the power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Reassembling the power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
¤ H
¤ H
A . Disassembling the power

take-off
Preparation
1. Lower the rear linkage.
2. Drain the transmission oil.
3. Remove the trailer linkage (depending on equip-
ment).
4. Mark and remove the PTO connector TR9 (arrow
Fig. 1).
5. Mark and remove the PTO connector TR10 (arrow
Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
6. Unscrew all attachment screws.

7. Take the silicone out of the threaded bores and
tighten 2 screws M12 (arrows Fig. 2)
8. Support the cover using a lifting tool and push it
back using the two screws.
Fig. 2
9. Take off the rear PTO transmission cover.

IMPORTANT: Take care of the adjustment shims
(arrow Fig. 3), which are used to adjust the
bearing clearance.
Fig. 3
¤ H
10. Push back the clutch cover (3) using 2 disc screws
M10.
Fig. 4
11. Remove the nozzle (29).
Fig. 5
12. Fit the compression tool (ref. X899.980.145) and

compress the clutch.
13. Extract the locking half-rings (30).
14. Release the clutch.
15. Remove the disc carrier and the set of discs (10).
Fig. 6
¤ H
16. Remove the adjustment shims (8), the set of

Belleville washers (9) and the ring (14).
Fig. 7
17. Remove the piston (13).
Fig. 8
18. Remove a screws (21) and take off the blade (18).
Fig. 9
¤ H
19. Take off the circlip (31) and remove the brake disc
(20).
Fig. 10
20. Take off the brake disc.
Fig. 11
21. Extract the bearing (101) using an extractor.

22. Take out the washer.
Fig. 12
¤ H
23. Unscrew the nuts (210 and 211).

24. Note the values of the nuts (210 and 211) if
required.
25. Remove the stops (116).
26. Take out the control mechanism.
Fig. 13
27. Remove the pinions (118) and (118a).
Fig. 14
28. Take out the shaft (35).

29. If required, take off the external rings of the
bearing.
Fig. 15
¤ H
30. If necessary, remove the ram (217) and / or (226).
Fig. 16
31. Take off the circlip (107), washer (108) and pinions.
Fig. 17
32. Remove the circlip (112).

33. Release the pinion (118).
Fig. 18
¤ H
B . Reassembling the power take-off
IMPORTANT: Before reassembling, all components,

34. Fit home the bearing (113) in the pinion (118a) and
lock with the circlip (114), then fit the pinion (118)
to its stop.
Fig. 19
35. Fit the circlip (112) on the opposite side.
Fig. 20
36. Fit home the internal ring of the bearing (123) on

the shaft (120).
37. Position the washer (122).
38. Fit the circlip (121).
39. Smear the 2 grub screws (25) with plastic binder
(ref. X 903.050.084) and tighten them until the
internal ring of the bearing (123) reaches its stop.
The washer (122) must be fitted home.
Fig. 21
¤ H
40. Fit the 1st needle bearing cage (109), the spacer
(110) and the 2nd needle bearing cage (109) on the
shaft (120).
41. Fit the shaft (120).
42. Position the washer (108).
Fig. 22
44. Fit new seals (219) in the ram (217).

45. Fit a new O’ring (218) in the groove of the ram
(217). Smear the oil tight seals with miscible
grease.
46. Insert the piston (222) and spring (221) as indicated
in the ram (217).
NOTE: The oil tight seal (219) is comprised of 2
parts: an O’ring on the outside and a piston strip
guide on the inside.
Fig. 23
47. Fit new seals (220) in the ram (226).

48. Fit a new O’ring (218) in the groove of the ram
(226).
49. Smear the oil tight seals with miscible grease.
50. Insert the piston (224) and spring (221) as indicated
in the ram (226).
NOTE: The oil tight seal (219) is comprised of 2
parts: an O’ring on the outside and a piston strip
guide on the inside.
Fig. 24
¤ H
51. Fit the rams (217 and 226).

52. Smear the thread of the screws (216 and 225) with
plastic binder (ref. X 903.050.084) and tighten the
screws to the following torque:
49 Nm
53. Refit the hydraulic pipes which have been

removed in the housing cover (316).
Fig. 25
54. If the housing is fitted with a new cover (316),

screw the nozzle (29) to its stop in the threaded
bore.
55. Fit home the external ring of the bearing (36).
Fig. 26
56. Smear 2 new rings (37) with miscible grease and

install and lock them in the grooves of the shaft
(35).
57. Fit home the internal ring of the bearing (36).
58. When assembling a new shaft (35), smear the
thread of the threaded stud (38) with plastic binder
(ref. X 903.050.084), and screw to its stop.
59. Tighten the nozzle (29) to its stop.
Fig. 27
¤ H
60. Fit the pre-assembled shaft (35) in the housing

cover (316). If required, fit compensating shims
(124) and fit home the external ring of the bearing
(123).
Fig. 28
61. Fit the pair of ring gears and the pinion (25).
Fig. 29
Pre-assembling the stirrup

62. Smear the thread of the screws (205) with plastic
binder (ref. X 903 050 084).
63. Fit spacers (207) and rollers (214).
64. Tighten nuts (206).
Fig. 30
¤ H
65. Insert the rollers (105) into the clutch body (104).
binder (ref. X 903 050 084).
67. Fit the stirrup tight to an identical distance, then
loosen each screw (203) by 1/6 of a turn and lock
them in this position.
Fig. 31
68. Screw the nuts (ref. 210, 211 and 213) onto the
rods of the pistons (222, 224).
69. Fit the washers (212) with their chamfer turned
upwards.
Fig. 32
70. Fit the pre-assembled stirrup (201).

71. Fit the washers (212) with their chamfer turned
downwards.
72. Unscrew the nuts (210 and 211).
Fig. 33
¤ H

binder (ref. X 903 050 084).
74. Fit the stops (116) and lock the screws (115).
Fig. 34
NOTE: The following must be carried out before setting

stirrup travel:
75. The oblong hole in the stirrup (201) must be turned
towards the ram (226).
76. Screw and lock the nuts (211, 210) to their stop.
Fig. 35
77. Screw a locally made eye nut M12 onto the piston
rod of the ram (217). Using a lifting tool, pull hard
on the piston rod. (Coupling at 750 or 540 rpm).
78. Check the clearance of the clutch body (104).
Specified value: 0.1 to 0.2 mm clearance.
Fig. 36
¤ H
If outside the specified clearance:

79. Adjust with nuts M12 (top and bottom) until clear-
ance of 0.1 to 0.2 mm is obtained.
Fig. 37
80. Take off the lifting tool and unscrew the eye nut
M12.
Fig. 38
81. Push the piston rod of the ram (226) fully in using
a clamp, until the nuts (213) and at their stop.
(Lifting limit, 1000 rpm position).
82. Check the clearance of the clutch body (104).
Specified value: 0.1 to 0.2 mm clearance.
Fig. 39
¤ H
If outside the specified clearance:

83. Adjust the nuts (213) until clearance of 0.1 to 0.2
mm is obtained.
Fig. 40
84. Take off the clamp.

85. The coupling shifts to "Neutral" position.
86. The 750 or 540 and 1000 rpm ring gears should be
able to turn freely.
87. The upward and downward free travel of the
coupling should be identical.
88. If not, readjust the coupling.
Fig. 41
89. Fit the shim (102).

90. Fit the internal ring of the bearing (101) up against
the shaft (120).
Fig. 42
¤ H
91. Fit the pinion (25).

92. Smear a new O’ring with miscible grease and fit it
in the groove of the shaft (35).
93. Check the brake disc (20) for wear. If necessary, fit
a new brake disc (20).
Fig. 43

95. Smear a new lip seal (19) with miscible grease and
fit it in the brake disc groove, with the seal lips
turned towards the oil chamber.
Fig. 44
96. Fit the blade (18).

97. Smear the thread of the screw (21) with Loctite
(ref. X 903 054 084), and fit the Grower washer (22)
and socket (23).
98. Tighten the screw.
Fig. 45
¤ H
99. Smear a new lip seal (16) with miscible grease and
fit it in the inner groove of the piston, with the seal
lips turned towards the oil chamber.
Fig. 46
100.Fit the pre-assembled piston (13).

101.Fit the ring (14).
Fig. 47
102.Fit 5 Belleville washers (9) with the large external

diameters facing each other, and the compen-
sating shims (8).
NOTE: The external diameter of the first Belleville

washer (9) should be turned towards the ring (14)
of the piston (13). If required, for example if
compensating shims (8) are lost, set the preload of
the Belleville washer set (9).
Fig. 48
¤ H
Setting the preload of Belleville washer set

103.Remove the shim (5) from the internal disc carrier
(6).
104.Smear the thread of the screw (4) with plastic
binder (Ref. X 903 050 084) and tighten.
Fig. 49
105.Fit home the pre-assembled ring carrier (6).

106.Measure and note the distance between the disc
carrier (6) and the end of the shaft (35). Example:
23.2 mm.
Fig. 50
107.Fit the compression tool (ref. X 899 980 145) and

compress the set of Belleville washers (9).
108.Fit the locking half-rings (30).
109.If the locking half-rings (30) are chamfered on just
one side, the chamfered side must face the disc
carrier (6).
110.Remove the compression tool (ref. X 899 980 145)
Fig. 51
¤ H
111.Measure and note the distance between the disc

carrier (6) and the end of the shaft (35). Example:
25.8 mm.
If the washer set gives compensating clearance
of approximately 2.5 mm when completely
compressed, the preload is correct.
112.If not, correct it with compensating shims.
Fig. 52
Installing the set of discs (10) on the disc

carrier (6)
For references, see Fig. 1 of the “General” paragraph 3 2 3
in the “Rear power take-off” section.
113.Start with an external blade.
114.Next alternate with an internal blade (11). Each
internal blade (11) should be fitted in respect to the
narrow slot (pos. 2 Fig. 53) while the wide slot
(pos. 3 Fig. 53) should be positioned either side
alternately.
NOTE: Total number of discs: 7 external discs (12)
and 6 internal discs (11).
MA-07-04226A
Fig. 53
115.Fit the disc carrier (6) together with the set of

Belleville washers (9).
Fig. 54
¤ H
116.Fit the compression tool (ref. X 899 980 145).

117.Compress the clutch.
118.Fit the locking half-rings (30). If the locking
half-rings are chamfered on just one side, the
chamfered side must face the disc carrier (6).
NOTE: If the disc carrier (6) does not fit into place,
fit it without the set of discs (10) and mark the
teeth.
Fig. 55
119.Push the set of discs home, ensuring it is correctly

centred.
120.Measure the distance (uncoupling clearance) using
laminated shims.
Specified values: 1.75 to 3.50 mm
121.If the minimum distance of 1.75 mm is not
obtained, the discs are wrapped.
122.Fit a new set of discs (10).
Fig. 56
123.Smear the thread of the nozzle (29) with plastic

binder (ref. X 903 050 084).
124.Tighten the nozzle (29) to a torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 57
¤ H
125.If necessary, fit the bearing (28) to its stop with its
closed part facing upwards into the interior of the
clutch cover (3).
Fig. 58
126.Fit the bearing (2) up against the clutch cover (3).
Fig. 59
127.Adjust the position of the external discs (12) and fit

the clutch cover (3) to its stop.
Fig. 60
¤ H
128.Fit compensating shims (1) on the bearing (2).

129.Measure and note the distance between the
mating faces. For example: 178.6 mm.
Fig. 61
The distance between the flange face and the mating

face of the journal is written in white on the top part of
the rear axle housing.
Example: 178.71.
The distance between the journal of the bearing (2) and
the flange face of the housing cover should be less
than 0.1 to 0.2 mm, as the written value indicates.
This means that the journal clearance must be 0.1
to 0.2 mm.
If not, correct it with compensating shims (1).
Fig. 62
The distance between the flange face and the mating

face of the journal of the lower shaft is written in white
on the lower part of the rear axle housing.
Example: 148.75.
NOTE: This value is not necessary in case of repair,
because a dial gauge must be used to measure the
bearing clearance. Check the bearing clearance of the
lower shaft (120).
Fig. 63
¤ H
130.Fit the compensating shims (1) in the upper bore.

131.Smear 4 new O’rings with miscible grease and fit
them at the position of the oil pressure pipes
(arrows Fig. 64).
Fig. 64
132.Clean the housing mating face.

133.Check the 2 locating pins are fitted correctly
(arrows Fig. 65).
134.Smear the mating face with sealing product (ref. X
903.050.074).
Fig. 65
135.Carefully raise the housing cover and fit it on the

rear axle housing.
Fig. 66
¤ H
136.Tighten the M18 screws and nuts to a torque of:
400 Nm
Fig. 67
If necessary:
137.Smear the outside of a new shaft sealing ring (126)
with a thin layer of sealing product (ref. X
903.051.711), and insert it until it comes into light
contact with the cover (128), the seal lips turned
towards the oil chamber.
Depth approximately 5 mm.
138.Fill the lip seals 2/3 full with miscible grease.
Fig. 68
139.Fit the corresponding compensating shims (124).

140.Smear new O’rings (127) with miscible grease and
fit them in the groove of the cover (128).
141.Smear the thread of the screws (129) with plastic
binder (ref. X 903.050.084) and tighten.
Fig. 69
¤ H
142.Rotate the shaft (120) 10 times.

143.Fit a dial gauge.
144.Push in the shaft (120) once and note the clearance
value J2 (Fig. 71).
Fig. 70
145.Rotate the shaft (120) 10 times.

146.Fit a dial gauge.
147.Pull once on the shaft (120) and note the clearance J1
value J1 (Fig. 72).
J2
Total clearance J = J1+ J2.
0.02 mm < J < 0.07 mm
148.If not, correct it with compensating shims (124).
MA-07-04148A
Fig. 71
Fig. 72
¤ H
PTO end-fitting with 6 x 1’ 3/8" splines

Also compatible:
NOTE: The PTO end-fitting has 4 drive holes for the
PTO sensor (arrow Fig. 73).
Fig. 73
149.Fit the end-fitting (137).

150.Fit the spacer (132).
Fig. 74
151.Lock the end-fitting (137 with a screw M16 (arrow

Fig. 75) (for easier assembly).
152.Tighten the nuts (134) (M0-10) to a torque of:
69 Nm
153.Top up the transmission oil level (see Operator

Instruction Book).
Fig. 75
¤ H
¤ H
Front axle
08 - Front axle
CONTENTS
08E01 - 4-wheel drive clutch
08E02 - Universal joint shaft brake
¤ H
Front axle
¤ H
4-wheel drive clutch
08E01 - 4-wheel drive clutch
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Disassembling the 4WD clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Reassembling the 4WD clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 08E01.1
¤ H
08E01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
A . General B . Operation
The front axle clutch assembly is fitted in the lower Declutching
part of the gearbox. The transmission module must be
removed in order to gain access to the 4WD clutch. It The 4WD solenoid valve sends the 17 bar pressure
comprises: into the shaft (5) via a channel drilled in the gearbox
housing.
- a shaft (5) turning on two ball bearings fitted in the
bore of the unit housing, The pressure moves the piston washer (20) which
presses against the spring washers (17) via the piston
- a hydraulic clutch assembly integral with the rotating
(18), thus releasing the discs (30).
gear (15),
The disc carrier (9) integral with the shaft no longer
- a disc carrier (9) centred on the shaft by needle bear-
turns.
ings, which drives the clutch discs.
The helical gear (15) is constantly meshed to the idling Clutching

gear on the drive pinion. When the pressure is cut-off, the spring washers are
released and push the piston and piston washer
assembly, which compresses the discs (30), allowing
the disc carrier (9) integral with the shaft to turn.
4WD clutch - exploded view
17
6
21
5
23
9
6
41 30 2
43 1
7
3
32 12
40
33 8
42 10 14
31
28
44
26
25 11
15
27
16
17
36 18
19
37 35 22 20 Fig. 1
MA-05-04240A
¤ H
Legend

1 Cover 22 Lip seal
2 Circlip 23 Thrust plate
3 Bearing 25 Clutch cover
5 Shaft 26 Pin
6 Screw 27 Washer
7 Ring with rectangular section 28 Circlip
8 Ring with rectangular section 30 External disc
9 Disc carrier 31 Internal disc
10 Oil seal 32 Thrust plate
11 Snap ring 33 Circlip
12 Needle bearing cage 35 Protective guard
14 Circlip 36 Screw
15 Pinion 37 Washer
16 Drive pinion 39 Bearing
17 Set of spring washers 40 Spi seal
18 Piston 41 Bearing
19 Lip seal 42 Washer shim
20 Piston washer 43 Circlip
21 O’ring 44 O’ring
¤ H
Cross-section view of 4WD clutch
1 2
6 7
3 7
9 14
15 10
5 12
16 18
17 19
8 21
8 22
23 20
30 25
32 31
26 33
35 28
27
MA-05-04241A
Fig. 2
¤ H
¤ H
Overall view
35 32 30 23 8 8 17 16 15 9 3 6 1
26
28
27
33 31 25 20 22 21 19 18 12 10 14 7 7 2
MA-08-04001A
Fig. 3
¤ H
¤ H
C . Disassembling the 4WD clutch

The following operations must first be carried out:
1. Drain the transmission oil (approx. 65 litres).
2. Remove the universal joint shaft.
3. Remove brake pipes and hydraulic pipes which
obstruct access.
4. Remove the transmission unit.
NOTE: For easier reading, the work is carried out on
a scale model.
5. Remove the suction pipe (Fig. 4).

6. Remove M8 screws and take out the retaining
washer.
Fig. 4
7. Extract the suction pipe from the filter housing.
Fig. 5
8. Take off the closing plate.

9. Take out the suction filter.
Fig. 6
¤ H
10. Take the housing out of the suction filter. (Specific

locally made tool).
Fig. 7
11. Specific locally made tool.
Fig. 8
12. Remove the drive pinion speed sensor.
Fig. 9
¤ H
13. Pull the shaft (5) backwards.
CAUTION: When the shaft has been

removed, the front axle drive clutch is no longer
controlled. There is a risk of injury.
Fig. 10
14. Extract the whole front axle drive clutch along with
its guard. (35)
Fig. 11
15. Fit a stirrup (locally made). Using a press,

compress the spring washer set assembly (17)
until the circlip (2) is released.
Fig. 12
¤ H
16. Remove the circlip (2) and carefully release the

load exerted by the press.
Fig. 13
17. Extract the pinion (15).
Fig. 14
18. Remove the set of spring washers (17).
Fig. 15
¤ H
19. Take out the piston (18), the piston washer (20)
and the thrust plate (23).
Fig. 16
20. Remove the set of discs (30-31), the thrust plate

(32) and the disc carrier (9).
Fig. 17
21. Discard the O’ring (21) and the lip seal (19).
Fig. 18
¤ H
D . Reassembling the 4WD clutch

22. Fit the disc carrier (9) with a new O'ring (21) and a
new lip seal (19).
NOTE: Grease the O’ring (21) and lip seal (19). The
lip seal groove is directed to the oil chamber (arrow
Fig. 19).
Fig. 19
23. Fit the disc carrier (9) in the clutch cover (25).
24. Fit the thrust plate (32). The groove should face the
clutch cover (25) (arrow Fig. 20).
Fig. 20
25. Starting with an internal disc (31), assemble the set

of discs.
26. Oil the internal discs.
27. Fit the internal discs (31) and external discs (30)
alternately.
Fig. 21
¤ H
28. Fit the thrust plate (23). The groove (arrow Fig. 22)
should face the internal disc (30).
Fig. 22
29. Fit a new lip seal (22) on the piston washer (20).
NOTE: Grease the lip seal (22). The lip seal groove
should be turned towards to the oil chamber
(arrow Fig. 23).
Fig. 23
30. Fit the piston washer (20) in the piston (18). Posi-
tion it correctly (arrow Fig. 24).
Fig. 24
¤ H
31. Fit the piston (18) fitted with the washer (20).
Fig. 25
32. Fit the set of spring washers.
Fig. 26
33. Fit pinion (15).
Fig. 27
¤ H
34. Install the shaft (5) in the centre of the front axle
drive clutch.
Fig. 28
35. Fit the front axle clutch with its shaft (5) under a
press.
Fig. 29
36. Using a locally made stirrup, and the press,

compress the set of spring washers (17).
Fig. 30
¤ H
38. Fit the assembled front axle clutch and hold it in

place with a shim.
Fig. 31
39. Grease and fit the 4 rings with rectangular sections

(arrows Fig. 32) in the grooves of shaft (5). Offset
the openings in relation to one another.
NOTE: Screw the threaded rods (6) into the shaft (5)
after smearing the shaft thread with binder (Ref.
X903.050.091):
The shaft thread must be completely free of
grease.
Allow the binder to harden for 12 hours.
Fig. 32
40. Fit the shaft (5), remove the shim and fit the guard
(35).
NOTE: The bearing (32) must not be damaged.
Engage the shaft carefully.
Fig. 33
¤ H
41. Fit the suction filter housing.

42. Fit the suction pipe fitted with a new seal (Pos. A
Fig. 34) in the suction filter housing.
Fig. 34
43. Grease and fit new seals.
Fig. 35
44. Fit the retaining washer in the groove.

45. Tighten M8 screw.
Fig. 36
¤ H
46. Fit the closing plate with a new seal.
Fig. 37
47. Fit the drive pinion speed sensor with a sealing

product (Ref. X 903.050.553)
48. Refit the transmission unit.
49. Refit brake pipes and hydraulic pipes which
obstruct access.
50. Refit the universal joint shaft.
51. Fill transmission with hydraulic oil. (See “Filling the
gearbox” section).
Fig. 38
¤ H
E . Service tools
Under development.
¤ H
¤ H
Universal joint shaft brake
08E02 - Universal joint shaft brake
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Disassembling the universal joint shaft brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Reassembling the universal joint shaft brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Disassembling the universal joint shaft brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Reassembling the universal joint shaft brake control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
¤ H
¤ H
A . General
On MF 8400 series tractors, the universal joint shaft
brake comprises 6 discs and 6 intermediate plates,
distributed on either side of a mechanism and acti-
vated by a control piston and a pin. The control piston
is located on the right-hand side of the gearbox.
The brake piston pushes the control rod, which acti-
vates the brake plate. This then moves apart, and
compresses the discs against the intermediate plates,
which are splined together by pins (14).
When released, the control plate springs ensure
minimum clearance between the brake discs.
Lubrication is ensured by an external hydraulic pipe
coming from the lubricating circuit.
¤ H
Exploded view of the universal joint shaft brake
Fig. 1

1 Shaft 12 Intermediate plate
3 Flange 14 pin
4 Dowel pin 16 Universal joint shaft brake control piston
5 Allen screw 17 Control rod
7 Brake plate 22 Seal
8 Ball 23 Cylindrical screw
9 Spring 25 Stud
10 Dowel pin 26 Nut
11 Disc
¤ H
Cross-section view of the universal joint shaft

brake
Fig. 2
¤ H
B . Disassembling the universal joint

shaft brake
The following operations must first be carried out:

1. Drain the transmission oil (approx. 65 litres).
2. Split the tractor between the clutch housing and
transmission housing. See chapter 2.
3. Remove the universal joint shaft.
NOTE: For easier reading, the work is carried out on a

scale model.
References are relative to Fig. 1.
4. Remove the suction filter of the variable displace-

ment pump, if it obstructs disassembly. Fig. 3
(depending on model)
5. Take off the internal leak pipe and deflector.
Fig. 4
6. Remove the lubricating oil pipe.
Fig. 5
¤ H
7. Remove the control piston of the universal joint

shaft brake (16).
Fig. 6
8. Take off the sleeve.
Fig. 7
9. Remove the screws from the flange (5).

10. Push out the flange (3) with two M8 screws.
IMPORTANT: When pushing out the flange, the
drive shaft must not leave its seat.
Fig. 8
¤ H
11. Take off the flange (3), discs (11), intermediate

plates (12) and brake plate (7).
Fig. 9
¤ H
C . Reassembling the universal joint

shaft brake
IMPORTANT: Before reassembly, all components,
12. Fit the studs (4).
Fig. 10
13. Starting with an intermediate plate (12), fit 3 inter-

mediate plates (12) and three discs (11) alternately.
1. The first intermediate plate is fitted in position A.
IMPORTANT: Use new intermediate plates (12) and
new discs (11).
Oil the discs before assembly.
Fig. 11
2. The second intermediate plate is fitted in posi-
tion B, and so on alternately.
Fig. 12
¤ H
14. Fit the brake plate (7). The control pin (arrow) must
be opposite the drilled hole (arrow).
Fig. 13
15. Fit the control piston of the brake (16) with a new
seal (22).
Fig. 14
16. Assemble the activating corner correctly as shown

(arrow) on the brake plate (7).
Fig. 15
¤ H
17. Fit the remaining discs (11) and intermediate plates

(12).
Fig. 16
18. Clean the mating face of the cover and smear with
sealing product (ref. X 903.050.074).
19. Fit the flange (3) and tighten the screws (5) to a
torque of:
50 Nm
Fig. 17
20. Check the axial clearance of the universal joint

shaft with a dial gauge.
Specified value: 0.3 + 0.1mm
Fig. 18
¤ H
21. If outside the specified value, correct the clearance

with compensating shims.
Fig. 19
22. Fit the lubricating pipe, return pipe and deflector.
Fig. 20
23. Fit a new suction filter.
Fig. 21
¤ H
24. Grease and install a new O’ring.

25. Insert the sleeve on the shaft (1).
Fig. 22
Adjusting the brake control piston:

26. Unscrew the locknut.
27. Tighten the adjustment rod with a torque wrench
(or the corresponding torque gauge, ref. X
899.980.151); to a torque of:
4 to 5 Nm
Fig. 23
28. Unscrew the rod by 3.6 turns and lock it in this

position.
29. Assemble the tractor between the clutch housing
and transmission housing.
30. Refit the universal joint shaft.
31. Fill up the transmission oil.
Fig. 24
¤ H
D . Disassembling the universal joint

shaft brake control
32. Remove the hydraulic pipe.
Fig. 25
33. Loosen and remove the brake cylinder attachment

screws.
Fig. 26
34. Remove the brake cylinder and control rod.

35. Discard the paper gasket.
Fig. 27
¤ H
E . Reassembling the universal joint

shaft brake control
36. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and brake
cylinder.
37. Smear the control lever ball joint with miscible
grease.
38. Fit the control rod in the brake cylinder.
39. Oil and fit a new paper gasket.
Fig. 28
40. Fit the control rod / brake cylinder assembly in the

gearbox housing.
Fig. 29
41. Fit and tighten the brake cylinder attachment

screws.
42. Reconnect the hydraulic pipe.
43. Bleed the brake. See "Bleeding the brakes" para-
graph.
Fig. 30
¤ H
¤ H
Hydraulics
09 - Hydraulics
CONTENTS
09A01 - Description of the circuit
09B01 - Illustrated diagram
09C01 - Hydraulic legends and diagrams
09D01 - Layout of components
09E01 - Trailer braking and ParkLock
09F01 - Auxiliary spool valves
09G01 - Lift control valve
09H01 - Load Sensing hydrostatic steering
09I01 - Main braking circuit
09J01 - Disassembling and reassembling the pumps
09K01 - Auxiliary hydraulics tests
¤ H
Hydraulics
¤ H
Description of the circuit
09A01 - Description of the circuit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Characteristics of the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
¤ H
¤ H
A . General
The hydraulic system on MF 8400 tractors is of closed
centre with flow rate and pressure control. It
comprises two separate high and low pressure circuits
supplied respectively by a variable displacement pump
and a fixed displacement pump.
¤ H
Parts list (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

(1) 19cc fixed displacement pump
(2) 60cc variable displacement pump
(3) Steering priority valve
(4) Steering spool valve
(5) Steering ram
(6) 300 µm strainer
(7) 450 µm strainer
(8) 10 µm filter
(9) Cooler
(10) By pass (5 bar)
(11) Distribution block
(12) 200 bar pressure relief valve
(13) Braking circuit priority valve
(14) Trailer braking valve
(15) Trailer brake control proportional solenoid valve
(16) Trailer brake control safety solenoid valve
(17) LS signal breaker solenoid valve
(18) Make and break valve (braking circuit load)
(19) Auxiliary spool valves assembly
(20) Lift control spool valve
(21) Lift rams
(22) Accumulator (ParkLock circuit)
(23) Accumulator (braking circuit)
(24) ParkLock
(25) ParkLock lever
(26) ParkLock ram
(27) Tractor braking valve
(28) Brake pedals
(29) Rear brakes
(30) Pressure sensor
(31) Front axle shaft brake
(32) Front axle shaft braking valve
(33) Pump (18 bar transmission circuit)
(34) Pressure reversing solenoid valve
(35) Pressure switches
(36) Trailer brake coupler
¤ H
25
26 27
19
24 34 29
28
21
22
20
30
17 23
18 31
13
10
32
35
16
9
36
5 12
15
3 14 11
33
1
2 8
7
MA-09-03627A
Fig. 1
¤ H
27
3
4
8
7
1
6
2
31
18
23
17
22
16
25 15
11
26 14
19 13
20 12
10
29
High pressure circuit

29
Cooling system
Braking circuit 32
Tank return
Load Sensing
Suction 34
MA-09-03628A 21
Fig. 2
¤ H
Description of the circuits Trailer braking valve

The trailer braking valve block includes a priority valve
(13) which directs the flow giving priority to the trailer
“Open centre” steering circuit
braking valve (14) and the make and break valve (18).
The steering circuit is supplied by the fixed displace- Trailer brake pressure is proportional to the control
ment pump (1), which sucks via a hose from the pressure increased by a factor of 8 or 9. For “XFR”
hydraulic tank. The pump discharge is directed to a control pressure of 10 bar, the pressure at the trailer
priority valve (3) which ensures priority of the Orbitrol brakes “FR” is 80 to 90 bar.
(4) and sends excess flow to the distribution block (11),
then to the cooling circuit (9). A valve (10) located in the
distribution block is fitted parallel to the cooler (9). This Operation of the priority valve
valve prevents the differential pressure exceeding ∆P
5 bar at the cooler outlets; however, when starting the Reducing the flow rate to the auxiliaries and
tractor in cold weather, the pressure on the return filter reducing pressure
can reach 4.5 bar, which means that the maximum
pressure on the cooler supply is 4.5 + 5 = 9.5 bar. The When the maximum pump flow rate is used by the
maximum flow rate of this circuit is provided by the auxiliary parts, the valve reduces the flow to these
fixed displacement pump. parts to direct flow to the trailer brake when the brakes
are activated. Pressure “Paux” remains constant.
Distribution circuit of the Load Sensing
circuit variable displacement pump Maintaining flow rate to the auxiliaries
The Load Sensing circuit is supplied by the variable When the flow rate used is less than the maximum
displacement pump (2), which sucks via a hose from pump output, the brake valve controller can be
the hydraulic tank. The pump discharge is directed to adjusted so that the flow rate regulator corrects pump
the distribution block (11) by a hose. When the tractor capacity. Flow rate to the auxiliaries is maintained,
is being operated but the hydraulic controls are not pressure "Paux" becomes equal to the highest useful
used (auxiliary spool valves, brake system), the pres- pressure of the circuit, and the spool valve pressure is
sure in the discharge circuit of the variable displace- maintained by the auxiliary spool valve pressure
ment pump is 18 bar ± 2 and the pump flow rate is balance.
equal to the control leak of the pressure and flow rate
regulation. When a hydraulic control is activated, the
Load Sensing line controls the flow rate regulation and
the pump (2) changes capacity to maintain a ∆P of
14 bar between the discharge pressure and useful
pressure.
¤ H
Characteristics of distribution block (Fig 3)

B . Characteristics of the compo-
nents Description of the distribution block and
trailer braking valve functions
Characteristics of the pumps To ensure the tractor hydraulic components are kept
supplied:
“Open centre circuit” steering circuit pump
- Linkage
- DANFOSS SNP2/19 gear pump
- Auxiliary spool valves
- 19cc fixed capacity
- Cooling
- Maximum pressure: 210 bar
- Trailer braking valve
- Maximum rotational speed : 3000 rpm
- Suction pressure: 0.8 to 3 bar.
Excess flow that is not used by the steering unit is redi-
- Gear ratio: 67/58 rected to the distribution block, then to the hydraulic
- Pump flow rate with different engine speeds: cooler. The distribution block is fitted with a safety
by-pass valve (10) for the cooler.
Engine speed pump flow rate in pump rotation A 230 bar safety valve (12) protects the variable
rpm l/min in rpm displacement pump. The hydraulic distribution of this
pump is ensured by the circuit selectors (S) on the
nominal 2200 48 2541 Load Sensing line and by the bypass circuits of the
min. 850 19 982 pressure line on this block.
The block containing the trailer braking valve flanges
max. 2350 52 2715 on the distribution block. It consists of the following:
- a priority valve (13)
- the trailer braking valve (14)
Load Sensing circuit variable displacement - the make and break valve (18)
pump - the control solenoid valves (15) and (16) of the
- DANFOSS Frame J60 variable displacement pump trailer braking valve (14)
- Maximum pump capacity: 60cc - the LS signal breaker solenoid valve (17)
- Maximum pressure: 400 bar The trailer braking valve (14) and make and break valve
- Maximum rotational speed : 3120 rpm (18) have priority on all functions supplied by the Load
- Nominal pressure: 310 bar Sensing variable displacement pump.
- Suction pressure: 0.8 bar All tank returns are directed to the distribution block; in
this way all returns are filtered into the tank. A valve (C)
- Regulation: DFR type pressure-flow rate regulator is fitted on the “Open Centre circuit” return line to
- Differential pressure ∆P at flow regulator: 14 bar avoid possible overloads in the variable displacement
- “Stand-by” flow cancellation pressure: 18 bar ± 2 pump return.
- Flow cancellation pressure: 200 bar ± 10
- Gear ratio: 67/58
- Pump flow rate with different engine speeds:
Engine speed pump flow rate in pump rotation

rpm l/min in rpm
nominal 2200 152 2541
min. 850 59 982
max. 2350 163 2715
¤ H
¤ H
ParkLock TRAILER
BRAKING VALVE
13 14 10
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
6 7 8
FS

135 bar
T P AUX
A1 22 bar P OPT
P
P DIR
A2
F2
X OPT
X AUX
2
1
T OPT
230 bar
Tx
T AUX
Px
T DIR
Diagram of the distribution block and trailer braking valve assembly
AC
FR Pp
5 bar
TC
15 16 11 Pp
Pp
T
PPp
9
12
MA-09-03578A 3 5 4
Fig 3
09A01.9
ParkLock function of the block Characteristics of the braking block

The make and break valve (18) maintains pressure in elements
the accumulators (22) and (23) between 135 and 165
Priority valve (13)
bar. The pressure of the accumulator (22) supplies the
ram of the ParkLock (26) to release the tractor brakes. It ensures priority to the trailer braking valve (14) and
The accumulator (23) is used for the tractor braking the make and break valve (18) to load the accumulators
circuit. (22) and (23); excess flow is sent to the linkage spool
When the accumulator pressure drops below 135 bar valve and auxiliary spool valves.
the make and break valve (18) status changes, the
Load Sensing line sends a message to the pump regu-
lation to increase its capacity and loads the accumula- Make and break valve (18)
tors.
The make and break valve allows the accumulators
A time delay relay activated when the starter is
(22) and (23) to remain loaded to operate the ParkLock
switched on allows the solenoid valve (17) to break the
(26) and tractor braking valve (27) respectively.
LS signal when the tractor is started. If the signal is not
broken when the engine is started, the pressure Opening pressure: 135 bar
needed by the make and break valve would require the Cut-out pressure: 165 bar
pump to regulate an excessive pressure level that Accumulator supply flow rate: 5 l/min
would overload the starter.
When powered, the solenoid valve (34) of the Park-
Lock function allows the valve chamber of the Park- Trailer braking valve
Lock (26) to communicate with the accumulator (22) to
release the tractor brakes. The pressure reversing Valve proportional to trailer braking pressure “FR”
valve (24) is activated by the lever (25) located in the between 10 and 150 bar depending on the control
cab. It allows the pressure in the valve (26) to be pressure regulated by the proportional solenoid valve
released when the lever (25) is activated. It also main- (15).
tains the pressure in the ParkLock valve at 120 bar. The maximum trailer braking valve pressure is
between: 140 bar < max. "FR" < 150 bar.
- Valve brake flow rate > 50 l/min
Trailer braking valve function - Maximum control pressure: 30 bar
- Control pressure to obtain maximum trailer
The trailer braking valve (14) is controlled by the
brake pressure in FR: 17 bar
proportional solenoid valve (15) or the solenoid valve
(16). The trailer braking line is linked to the tank when - Hysteresis < 10%
the valve is not controlled; when the tractor brakes are
activated, pressure builds in the pilot flow housing of
the trailer braking valve and the trailer braking line
communicates with the pump supply. The control
pressure and trailer brake pressure are proportional
until the pressure reaches 150 bar. The proportional
solenoid valve (15) is controlled by the Autotronic 5
according to the signal received by a pressure sensor
located on the front brake control. The proportional
solenoid valve (15) is supplied with 18 bar pressure
(hydraulic transmission circuit) and controls the trailer
braking valve between 0 and 17 bar, depending on the
signal received. The solenoid valve (16) ensures the
trailer braking valve (14) is controlled when the emer-
gency handbrake (lever 25) is activated, if the ParkLock
switch on the reverse shuttle lever is not engaged. A
circuit selector allows the trailer braking valve to be
controlled by one of the two solenoid valves.
¤ H
Control proportional solenoid valve of the Pressure switch

trailer braking valve (15) The pressure switch signals a fault in the charging of
The control proportional solenoid valve of the trailer the accumulators. An indicator light or buzzer alerts the
braking valve is supplied with pressure between 30 user in case of a brake valve supply pressure fault.
and 18 bar by the transmission hydraulic circuit in Px.
The return in Tx is to the transmission hydraulic circuit Contact opening pressure: 105 bar
tank.
Voltage supply: 12 V
Maximum current: 2000 mA
Maximum pressure in P: 30 bar
Control safety solenoid valve of the trailer

braking valve (16)
Control solenoid valve (34) of the ParkLock

ram pressure reversing valve
Flow rate: 5 l/min. with ∆P = 5 bar
Pressure reversing valve (24)

The pressure reversing valve ensures the emergency
brake function, and allows pressure in the pressure
reducing ram to reduce gradually from 120 to 0 bar. It
also ensures limits pressure in the ram to 120 bar, as
the supply pressure of this valve is between 135 and
165 bar.
Solenoid valve (17) to break LS signal when

tractor is started
This solenoid valve is controlled by a time delay relay
with:
- Solenoid valve supply on the starter supply
- Solenoid valve circuit broken 5 seconds after starter
circuit has been cut.
¤ H
Characteristics of hydraulic tank and filter Characteristics of pump suction strainers

The pump suction strainers are located in the hydraulic
tank, and their purpose is to prevent possible pollution
Return filter, by-pass and clogging indicator
of the pumps when topping up the tank, or when filling
light
the tank after draining.
The return filter is fitted to the upper part of the tank, For the Open Centre:
and collects return flow coming from the variable
- Filter element surface: 720 cm²
displacement pump and fixed displacement pump.
- Filter size: 300 µm
When the tractor is operated without the hydraulic
controls being activated, the capacity setting of the
variable displacement pump is equal to the regulation For the Load Sensing circuit:
leaks. These leaks are collected by the pump drain and - Filter element surface: 800 cm²
are sent straight to the tank without passing through - Filter size: 450 µm
the return filter; only the fixed displacement pump flow
rate is collected by the return filter.
If the engine runs at 2,200 rpm, with a maximum flow
rate from the variable displacement pump circuit, the Auxiliary spool valves and lift control valve
flow rate collected by the return is: (Fig 4, Fig 5 and Fig. 6)
152 + 48 = 200 l/min. Characteristics of auxiliary spool valves
Maximum flow through filter: Qmax = 200 l/min
The hydraulic auxiliary spool valve set can have
Filter size: 10 µm ß15 > 100
different configurations, and can comprise 4, 5 or 6
By-pass setting: 5 bar. electronically controlled spool valves.
The by-pass is included in the filter element, and is
replaced each time the element is changed.
Spool valve operation is controlled by the electronics,
The clogging indicator light located on the filter head allowing for the following functions:
informs the operator of the clogging level of the filter
- infinite and time delay : the spool valve is main-
element; it includes the following features:
tained in open position, regardless of the pres-
- Contact closing pressure: 3 bar ± 0.4 sure.
- Electrical protection: IP67 - ZF: zero leak or anti-return controlled valve on
- Operating temperature: -30°C to +100 °C port B (2) of the spool valve to maintain a load in
- Connection: Deutsch DT 04-2P the chamber supplied by port B.
- Maximum voltage: 42 Volt - Floating: spool (1) position or ports A and B on T
are linked by moving the joystick forward.
The temperature probe is located at the bottom of the - Flow rate adjustment in % : using the on-board
hydraulic tank, and it has the following functions: computer, flow rate can be adjusted either from
P to A or from P to B.
- It cuts the clogging signal when the tempera-
ture in the tank is lower than 20°C.
- Its buzzer warns the operator when the temper-
ature in the tank exceeds 95°C.
- The tank oil level is displayed on the DCC2 for a
few seconds when the engine is started. An
electronic gauge located in the spacer that
serves as a tank sends information to the
DCC2. The level can be checked at any time on
a DOT MATRIX screen.
¤ H
Diagram of an electronically controlled spool valve with anti-return valve on port B
1 2
B
A
R LS P X Rx
MA-09-04038A 4 3
Fig 4
The spool valves are fitted with pressure balances

(3 Fig 4). The role of these balances is to regulate the
flow rate, depending on the load.
When using 2 hydraulic functions simultaneously, the
pump locks depending on which function has the
higher demand, the balance of the spool valve with the
lowest pressure operates at reduced pressure and
creates a ∆P of the difference between use pressure
and pump pressure. The flow rate used by this spool
valve remains stable regardless of other functions
used, provided that the pump capacity is adequate.
The flow rate is adjusted by the spool (1); the elec-
tronics adjust the spool opening depending on the flow
rate percentage required.
¤ H
Diagram of closing plate with supply to control solenoid valves of the electronically controlled spool
valves
X3
P3
R P X Rx
MA-09-04044A 3 2
Fig 5
The solenoid valve (1 Fig 5) located on the closing plate

allows pressure to be maintained between 21 and 24
bar to control the electrohydraulic spool valves.
The control solenoid valves located in each spool valve
then use this pressure to move the spools of the spool
valves (1 Fig 4). Lines X and Rx direct the pressure to
the control solenoid valves.
The filter (2 Fig 5) secures the entire pollution control
section and the valve (3 Fig 5) protects the Rx control
line governing possible overloads on the R lines or
return lines of other applications.
General characteristics of electronically

controlled spool valves
The following data are for a viscosity of 35 cst for a
spool valve with anti-return valves in A and B:
- Maximum flow rate: 100 l/min.
- ∆P in spool valve from P to A or B: 14 bar at
80 l/min.
- ∆P in spool valve from B to R: 10 bar below
80 l/min.
- ∆P in spool valve from A to R: 7 bar below
80 l/min.
- ∆P from control to pressure balance: 7 bar at
80 l/min.
¤ H
Diagram of the lift control valve

2 4 1 5
R LS P X Rx
R1
MA-09-04040A 6 3 Fig. 6
Characteristics of lift control valve (Fig. 6)

The lift control valve comprises 2 electronically
controlled proportional valves: one valve (1) for lifting
and the other valve (2) for lowering.
The pressure balance (3) allows to control the flow rate
to the lift rams when used simultaneously with other
hydraulic components.
The valve (4) maintains the load in the ram chambers
when the lift valve is not used.
The pressure relief valve (5) is set at 225 bar, and limits
the pressure in the lift ram chambers in case of heavy
shocks to the lift arms.
The circuit selector (6) informs the Load Sensing pump
of pressure and flow rate requirements.
Lift control valve specifications

The following data are given for a viscosity of 35 cst.
- Maximum flow rate: 100l/min.
- ∆P in spool valve from P to A: to be set below
90 l/min.
- ∆P in spool valve from A to R1: 22 bar below
90 l/min.
¤ H
Steering unit
OSPFD 80/240 steering unit
Diagram of the OSPFD 80/240 steering unit
1 8 7 3
160 bar
LS
P DIR
MA-09-03577A
2 4 6 5
Fig 7
Characteristics of the steering unit

OSPFD 80/240 (Fig 7)
- Shock valves (1 et 2) setting:
225 -245 bar
- Supply valve (3) setting:
155 - 160 bar
- Steering unit (5) capacity:
240 cc / rev.
- Steering unit (8) capacity:
80 cc / rev.
- Supply valve (6) setting: 10 bar
- Torque of spool valve return to neutral springs
(4): 1.5 daN
The specified number of steering wheel turns from
stop-to-stop is 4.7 revs.
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
09B01 - Illustrated diagram
CONTENTS
A . Auxiliary hydraulics illustrated diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
A . Auxiliary hydraulics illustrated

diagram
Parts list (Fig. 1)
(1) Auxiliary hydraulic pumps / Orbitrol priority valve
assembly
(2) Orbitrol
(3) Priority block / trailer braking valve assembly
(4) 18 bar circuit hydraulic pump
(5) ParkLock and ParkLock accumulators
(6) Main brake master cylinders
(7) Rear brakes
(8) Front brake
(9) Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves and lift spool valve
(10) Connectors to add spool valves
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
X aux
P aux
T aux
B
A
B
A
10
5
7 3
P 3/4
T 3/4
B
X SUS P SUS T SUS A
LS 3/8
FS
B
135 bar P SUS
T P AUX
A
A1 P OPT
22 bar
P
P DIR
A2 9
F2 X OPT
X AUX B
X SUS
A
230 bar T OPT

T SUS
Tx T AUX
Px T DIR
AC
LS PV
Pp
FR
5 bar
Pp TC
Pp B
Pp T
A
PPp
8 OSPFD 80/240
T
160 bar
LS
4
P DIR
7 bar
60 cc 19 cc
1 1
90
2
A B 90
180
1 2 2
3 A 1
3 B 1
MA-09-03585A
180
2
Fig. 1
¤ H
Illustrated diagram
¤ H
Hydraulic legends and diagrams
09C01 - Hydraulic legends and diagrams
CONTENTS
A . Legend of transmission hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Legend of auxiliary hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Transmission hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Auxiliary hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
¤ H
¤ H
A . Legend of transmission hydrau-

lics diagram
Component Description
Different circuits
1 Valve block (boosting / lubricating)
2 Hydrostatic loop
3 Adjustment
4 Transmission control unit
5 Rear axle beam brakes
6 Solenoid valve block on rear axle beam
7 Front power take-off
Pumps
1P1 Service pump
1P2 Lubricating pump
2P1 Hydrostatic pump
Drive components
2A1 Hydrostatic motor
2A2 Hydrostatic motor
3A1 Piston for setting the hydrostatic pump displacement
3A2 Piston for setting the hydrostatic motor displacement
3A3 Ground speed limiter in limp home mode
4A1 Forward range selector
5A1 Right-hand brake cylinder
5A2 Left-hand brake cylinder
5A3 Universal joint shaft brake
6A1 Rear PTO clutch
6A2 540 (or 750) rpm PTO selector piston (depending on equipment fit)
6A3 1000 rpm PTO selector piston
6A4 Front axle clutch
6A5 Rear axle differential lock
6A6 1000 rpm PTO selector piston
6A7 Front axle differential lock
7A1 Front PTO clutch
7A2 Front PTO brake
Sensors
1S1 Transmission oil temperature sensor
1S2 Pressure filter clogging switch
4S1 HP loop pressure sensor
¤ H
Other components
1Z1 Suction filter with bypass
1Z2 Pressure filter with bypass
1Z3 Transmission oil cooler
1Z4 Transmission lubrication
3Z1 Actuator shaft
3Z2 Actuator unit
4Z1 Clutch pedal with sensor cylinder
4Z2 Accumulator
5Z1 Brake pedal with master brake cylinder
5Z2 Rear PTO lubrication
5Z3 Differential and right-hand brake lubrication
5Z4 Differential and left-hand brake lubrication
5Z5 Universal joint brake lubrication
Valves (or spool valves / solenoid valves)
1V1 Cooler bypass valve
1V2 Flushing pressure relief valve
1V3 Booster pressure relief valve
1V4 Lubricating pressure relief valve
1V5 Service pump pressure relief valve
1V6 Servocircuit pressure relief valve
2V1 Forward booster non-return valve
2V2 Reverse booster non-return valve
2V3 Forward high-pressure relief valve
2V4 Reverse high-pressure relief valve
2V5 Scavenging valve
2V6 Shuttle valve
3V1 Hydrostatic pump spool valve
3V2 Hydrostatic motor spool valve
4V1 Hare range solenoid valve
4V2 Tortoise range solenoid valve
4V3 Ground speed limiting solenoid valve
4V4 Coupler function solenoid valve
4V5 Clutch function spool valve
4V6 Rear axle pressure relief spool valve
5V1 Cooling oil valve, right-hand brake
5V2 Cooling oil valve, left-hand brake
5V4 Universal joint brake control valve
5V5 Cooling oil valve, universal joint brake
¤ H
5V6 Brake distribution spool valve
6V1 Rear PTO clutch solenoid valve
6V3 540 (or 750) rpm PTO control solenoid valve (depending on equipment fit)
6V4 Front axle clutch solenoid valve
6V5 Differential lock solenoid valve
6V6 1000 rpm PTO control solenoid valve
7V1 Front PTO clutch solenoid valve
7V2 Front PTO brake solenoid valve
Measuring points
M1 Pressure upstream of cooler
M2 Lubricating pressure
M3 Flushing pressure
M4 Booster pressure
M5 Service pump pressure
M6 Transmission system pressure
M7 Range 1 (Tortoise) shifting pressure
M8 Range 2 (Hare) shifting pressure
M9 High pressure
M10 Rear axle beam and braking system pressure
M11 PTO clutch pressure
M13 540 (or 750) rpm PTO selector pressure (depending on equipment fit)
M14 Front axle clutch pressure
M15 Differential lock pressure
M17 Brake service pressure
M18 Brake service pressure
M21 Front PTO clutch pressure
M22 Oil leak from clutch or coupler function valve
¤ H
B . Legend of auxiliary hydraulics

diagram
1 Distribution block
2 Trailer braking valve (according to equipment fit)
3 Steering unit
4 Braking unit
5 ParkLock
6 Variable displacement pump
7 Auxiliary pump
8 Filtration
9 Oil cooler
10 Pressure relief valve
11 Pressure connectors
12 Auxiliary spool valve
16 Auxiliary spool valve + front linkage
17 Auxiliary spool valve + auto hitch
18 Lift control valve
19 Spool valve closing plate
20 Front linkage valves
21 Auto hitch valves
22 Rear brakes
23 Front brake
¤ H
C . Transmission hydraulics diagram
7A1 7A2
5Z2 6A1 6A3 1000 750 6A6 6A5
6A7
5A1 5A2
M21
7V1 7V2
5V6 5V4 6V1 6V4 6V3 6V6 6V5
7
5V3
5 6
M17 M18 M11 M10 M14 M13 M16 M15
4Z2
V=0.3l
4S1
I M9 (PH) M22
p=10bar
M6 (P) M7 M8
P
4V5 4V4
p=18bar
4V6 4V3 4V1 4V2
4Z1 5Z1 Ø 0.3
4Z3
4
1Z4 5Z5 5A3

3Z2
3A3
3Z1
M
(SM)
M2 p=25bar 3V2
3V1
1V6 4A1
1S2
Ø 2% Ø 2% Ø 3% Ø 3%
p=7bar p=5bar
p=3.5bar
1V1
3A1 3A2
1V2 1V3 p=50bar
10µ 3
1Z3
1Z2 p=7bar
p=6.5bar p=6.5bar 1V5 2V4
M1
1 2P1
Ø 1%
2V5
2V1 p=0-500bar
1P2 M3 M4 M5
T 2V6 6A4
U 2V3
p=10bar
(AS) (ES) 14 cc 1P1
1S1
223 cc 223 cc 223 cc
1V4
23.4 cc 2V2 Ø 1% 2A1 2A2
p=0-500bar
p=0.25bar
1Z1 2
200µ 15µ
Fig. 1
MA-07-04147A
¤ H
¤ H
D . Auxiliary hydraulics diagram
11
X aux
P 3/4
P aux
T 3/4
T aux
LS 3/8
2 1 B
A
5 12
X SUS P SUS T SUS
22
B
A
FS 13
135 bar P SUS
T P AUX
A1 P OPT
22 bar
P
B
P DIR A
A2
10
F2 X OPT
14
X AUX
X SUS
4 230 bar T OPT

T SUS B
Tx T AUX
Px
A
T DIR
AC
LS PV
Pp
FR
15
5 bar
Pp TC
Pp
9
Pp T
PPp
B
A
16
OSPFD 80/240
B
T A
23
160 bar
LS
17
P DIR
7 bar
7 18
60 cc 19 cc
3 6
19
8
125µ 125µ
15µ
21 1
90˚
1
MA-09-03579A A B 90˚
180˚
3 A 1
2 2
3 B 1
180˚
2
20 Fig. 2
¤ H
¤ H
Layout of components
09D01 - Layout of components
CONTENTS
A . Main components of the hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of hydraulic circuit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09D01.1
¤ H
09D01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
A . Main components of the

hydraulic circuit
Reference
Components Layout
(Fig. 1)
1 Variable displacement pump
2 Fixed displacement pump
In the cast iron tank housing
3 Steering priority valve
4 Suction strainer
5 Clogging sensor
6 Temperature sensor In the sheet metal tank
7 Tank return filter
8 Distribution block On top of the rear axle
9 High pressure relief-valve On the distribution block
10 Braking valve On top of the rear axle
11 Trailer brake control proportional solenoid valve
12 Trailer brake control safety solenoid valve In the braking valve block
13 Pressure switches
14 ParkLock
On top of the rear axle
15 Accumulators
16 Pressure reverse valve control solenoid valve In the ParkLock unit
17 Load sensing signal breaker solenoid valve In the braking valve block
18 Rear brakes In the rear axle
19 Front brake In the transmission housing
20 Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves
On top of the rear axle
21 Lift control valve
22 Brake master cylinder At the front of the cab
23 Trailer brake pressure sensor On the master cylinder
24 PTO, front axle, differential solenoid valves On top of the rear axle
25 Transmission control components
On the right-hand side of the
26 High pressure filter
gearbox
27 18 bar circuit hydraulic pump
¤ H
¤ H
B . Layout of hydraulic circuit

components
23 22
18
24
25 27
26
1 2 3 5 6 7
16
19
17
11
15 13
8 12
14 10 9
MA-09-03580A
20
21
Fig. 1
¤ H
¤ H
Trailer braking and ParkLock
09E01 - Trailer braking and ParkLock
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Distribution block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Diagram of the trailer brake and ParkLock assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Braking valve and ParkLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Priority valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Trailer brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
G . ParkLock operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H . Removing and refitting the distribution block and spool valve support. . . . . . . . . 18
I . Removing and refitting the distribution block and braking block - ParkLock . . . . 20
J . Removing and refitting the ParkLock ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
K . Tractor Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
¤ H
¤ H
A . General
MF 8400 series tractors are fitted with a trailer braking
system and an electrohydraulic ParkLock (parking
brake) controlled by the Autotronic 5.
The two systems are assembled in a hydraulic unit
(1 Fig. 1) located above the gearbox and are supplied
by the variable displacement pump of the tractor auxil-
iary hydraulics circuit. The priority of these safety func-
tions is ensured by the priority block (2 Fig. 1) which
also ensures distribution of the hydraulic flow to the
various hydraulic functions of the tractor (linkage, auxil-
iary spool valves).
Fig. 1
¤ H
B . Distribution block
Identification of ports
(Ppv) Supply (high pressure hydraulic pump)
(Paux) Auxiliary and lift spool valves supply
(Popt) Supply (to optional unions)
(Psus) Suspended front axle supply
(T) Return to main tank
(Taux) Auxiliary spool valves return
(Topt) Optional unions return
(Tsus) Front suspension linkage spool valves return (if fitted)
(Xaux) Load Sensing line - auxiliary and linkage spool valves
(Xopt) Load Sensing line - optional unions
(Xsus) Load Sensing line - front suspension (if fitted)
(LSpv) Main Load Sensing line to pump
(Tdir) Steering circuit return (Orbitrol excess flow)
(AC) To cooler
(TC) Cooler return
(PpPPV) Pressure connector (high pressure hydraulic pump)
(PpT) Pressure connector (tank return)
(PpLS) Pressure connector (Load Sensing line)
(PpAC) Pressure connector (cooler)
(1) Pressure relief valve (210 bar)
¤ H
Front* Left-hand side*
Back* Right-hand side*
* orientation as compared with the tractor direction travel Fig. 2
¤ H
Functions of the distribution block

The distribution block allows hydraulic flows to be
directed to the different elements of the circuit T opt
210 bar
depending on the priorities and the requirements of T sus
these elements. T aux
Tdir
AC
Pressure relief valve
PpAC
5 bar
A safety valve (1 Fig. 2) is fitted to the distribution
block and limits the auxiliary hydraulic circuit pressure TC
to 210 bar maximum. A pressure connector

(PpPPV Fig. 2) located on the block allows the safety 1
valve setting to be checked.
T
Cooling
Excess flow from the steering circuit is directed to the MA-09-03588A
distribution block via (Tdir), then to the cooler located Fig. 3
at the front of the tractor. A 5 bar by-pass valve is fitted
parallel to the cooling system to avoid overloading the
cooler. A pressure connector (PpAC) fitted to the block
allows the pressure of the cooling system to be
checked.
Tank return
All circuit returns are centralised on the distribution
block and return to the tank via a single hose (T Fig. 2).
NOTE: In order to avoid increasing the cooling system
pressure due to the high pressure circuit return, a
non-return valve is located on the cooler return
(1 Fig. 3).
¤ H
C . Diagram of the trailer brake and

ParkLock assembly
135 bar P SUS

A1 P AUX
22 bar P OPT
A2
F2
X OPT
X AUX
X SUS
210 bar T OPT

T SUS
Tx T AUX
Px T DIR
AC
PpAC
5 bar
FR TC
PpT
T
PpLS
PpPpv
LSpv
Ppv
MA-09-03632A Fig. 4
¤ H
D . Braking valve and ParkLock

(A1) Accumulator and ParkLock
(A2) Accumulator
(F2) To brake master cylinder
(Fr) Trailer braking coupler
(Px) Transmission 18 bar hydraulic circuit
(Tx) Tank return
(1) Trailer braking valve control proportional solenoid

valve
(2) Trailer brake control safety solenoid valve
(3) LS line breaker solenoid valve (starting aid)
NOTE: Tractors not fitted with trailer braking are fitted

with the same block. Only the channels from the block
to the coupler are plugged.
Characteristics of the accumulators (A1)

and (A2)
- Volume: 0.75 l
- Gas used: nitrogen
- Load pressure:
• A1 Accumulator (ParkLock): 108 bar
• A2 Accumulator (tractor braking): 44 bar
¤ H
Front* Left-hand side*
Back* Right-hand side*
* orientation as compared with the tractor direction travel

Fig. 5
¤ H
Parts list (Fig. 6)

E . Priority valve
(1) Trailer braking valve
The trailer braking and ParkLock block comprises a (2) Trailer brake control proportional solenoid valve
priority valve (4 Fig. 6). This valve is a proportional (3) Trailer brake control safety solenoid valve
valve that ensures minimum flow of 50 l/min to the (4) Priority valve
priority elements (trailer brake, ParkLock). (5) Trailer brake coupler
(6) To ParkLock
(7) To tractor braking spool valve
(8) Transmission 18 bar circuit
135 bar
6 A1 22 bar
4
A2
2
7 F2
Tx
8 Px
FR
5
MA-09-03582A
3
Fig. 6
¤ H
F . Trailer brake operation

General (Fig. 6)
The trailer braking valve (1) is controlled by the
Autotronic 5. The calculator receives pressure data
from the tractor braking circuit, and controls the
braking valve (1) via a proportional solenoid valve (2).
The trailer braking valve (1) can also be controlled by a
safety solenoid valve (3). A circuit selector allows the
valve to be controlled by one of the two solenoid
valves. The valve is controlled on the transmission
18 bar circuit, the pressure being supplied by a fixed
displacement pump located on the gearbox.
NOTE: The safety solenoid valve (3) supplies the trailer

braking valve when it is not powered. It is switched on
when the tractor is started.
NOTE: When the emergency handbrake (lever
6 Fig. 11) is applied, the safety solenoid valve (3)
returns to standby position and the trailer brake is
supplied.
Neutral position
When the tractor brakes are not activated, the control
solenoid valve (2) is at neutral. The safety solenoid
valve (3) is powered. The braking valve (1) is not
controlled. The trailer braking coupler communicates
with the tank.
¤ H
Braking position (Fig. 7)

When the brakes are activated, the Autotronic 5
controls the proportional valve (2) depending on the
pressure measured by the sensor located at the
braking spool valve on the tractor front axle braking
circuit (TR34).
When braking, the proportional solenoid valve (2)
controls the trailer braking valve with pressure Px. The
braking valve (1) connects line FR with the high pres-
sure circuit.
The control pressure and trailer brake pressure FR are
proportional until trailer braking pressure reaches
150 bar.
Control circuit
High pressure circuit
135 bar
A1 22 bar
4
A2
2
F2
1
Tx
Px
TR34
FR
5
MA-09-03583A
Fig. 7
¤ H
G . ParkLock operation
General
The ParkLock is an electrohydraulic system used for
the parking brake. It can also be used as an emergency
1
handbrake in the relevant circumstances. It comprises
a ram (1 Fig. 8) mechanically connected to the tractor
brakes. The ParkLock ram comprises two springs
which activate the brakes. These are released by the
hydraulic pressure applied to the ram.
The ram comprises two helical springs, a hydraulic
piston and a cable mechanism linked to the brakes.
When the pressure in the ram chamber is neutral, the
springs activate the brakes; when the chamber is pres-
surised, the piston compresses the springs to release
the brakes.
The assembly is controlled by an Autotronic 5 type
electronic calculator (see chapter 11).
The ram is supplied by a circuit comprising an accumu-
lator (3) maintained at 135 - 165 bar pressure by the
make and break valve (4). For safety reasons, two pres-
sure switches (5) are fitted on the make and break
circuit to detect any circuit failure (Fig. 9).
DANGER: The ParkLock ram must under no

MA-09-03611A
circumstances be disassembled. The springs in the
ParkLock ram are constantly compressed and can
cause serious injury to the operator.
Fig. 8
¤ H
Parts list (Fig. 9 to Fig. 12)

(1) ParkLock ram
(2) Accumulator (tractor braking circuit)
(4) Make and break valve
(5) Pressure switches
(6) Emergency handbrake lever
(7) Solenoid valve
(8) Pressure reversing valve
(9) Priority valve
(10) LS line breaker solenoid valve
(11) ParkLock button
(P) Valve supply
(T) Tank return
(X) To ram
1 FS
T
X
P
7
8
4 10 9
135 bar
A1 22 bar
2 A2
MA-09-03589A
F2
Fig. 9
¤ H
Use
Parking brake (A Fig. 13)
The ParkLock is usually activated by the button located
under the reverse shuttle lever to the left of the
steering wheel (11 Fig. 10). When activated, the
button controls the solenoid valve (7 Fig. 9) via the
calculator. When the solenoid valve is supplied, it
connects the ram chamber with the tank, and the Park-
Lock is engaged. When the operator activates the
button (11) to disengage the ParkLock, the solenoid
valve is no longer supplied. The ram receives the pres-
sure, the springs are compressed and the brakes are
released.
Emergency handbrake (B Fig. 13)

Fig. 10
In case of emergency, the ParkLock can be activated
by the lever (6) located to the left of the driver's seat in
the cab. The lever acts mechanically on a proportional
spool valve (8) which connects the ram chamber with
the tank return and activates the brakes.
When using the emergency handbrake, the trailer
brake is also supplied by the safety solenoid valve
(3 Fig. 7).
To use the emergency handbrake, see the Operator
Instruction Book.
Fig. 11
8 6
T
T
P
P
X X
7
MA-09-03633A
Fig. 12
¤ H
button ON (A Fig. 13) button OFF lever ON (B Fig. 13) lever OFF
(ParkLock engaged) (ParkLock disengaged) (ParkLock engaged) (ParkLock disengaged)
Solenoid valve
0V 12 V 12 V 12 V
(7)
Trailer braking
safety solenoid 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V
valve (3 Fig. 6)
11
6
A B 6
FS
1 FS
1
T T
X X
P P
P P
7 8
MA-09-03590A
Fig. 13
¤ H
Make and break valve

The make and break circuit is located in the braking 4 9
block. It is supplied by a priority valve in the braking
circuit (9 Fig. 14).
The make and break valve maintains the pressure in
the two accumulators between 135 and 165 bar.
One accumulator is used for the ParkLock; the other 135 bar
for the tractor braking circuit.
Parklock 22 bar
Valve opening (Fig. 14)

When the accumulator pressure drops below 135 bar,
the valve opens to load the circuit. The spool connects
the ParkLock Load Sensing line with the pump flow so
that the pump can increase the flow rate as required to
load the accumulators.
MA-09-03591A
Fig. 14
Valve closing (Fig. 15)
When the pressure reaches 165 bar, the pressure
shifts the spool. In this position, the ParkLock Load
Sensing line connects with the tank to release pres-
sure in the Load Sensing line and reduce the pump 4 9
flow rate.
A non-return valve (A) maintains the pressure in the
ParkLock circuit. A
135 bar
Starting aid solenoid valve (10)

Parklock 22 bar
A solenoid valve (10 Fig. 16) is fitted to the ParkLock

Load Sensing line. When the tractor is started, the
solenoid valve closes the ParkLock LS line so that the
pump is not is operating at full flow rate, thus helping
the engine to start. This solenoid valve is controlled by
acting on the starter.
MA-09-03592A
Fig. 15
10
135 bar
Parklock 22 bar
MA-09-03593A
Fig. 16
¤ H
H . Removing and refitting the distri-

bution block and spool valve
support
Preliminary operations
DANGER: Before carrying out any work on

the distribution block, its pressure must be bled as
follows:
- Stop the engine.
- Release the rear brake bleed screws.
- Press down the brake pedals half way without
releasing, until the effort on the pedals reduces
slightly.
Fig. 17
- Tighten the bleed screws again.
1. Chock the wheels of the tractor. Fit stands under

the rear axle. Take off the rear wheels of the
tractor.
2. Sling the cab.
CAUTION: Ensure the tractor doors and

rear window are closed when hitching the
slings.
3. Take off the front and rear cab supports.
4. Mark and disconnect the electrical harnesses and
hydraulic hoses.
5. Using a hoist, remove the cab.
6. Disconnect and remove the supply pipes of the
Dromone hitch and front linkage if fitted (Fig. 17).
7. Remove the trailer electrical socket and the Dual
Control connector (if fitted). Pass the harnesses Fig. 18
through the slots (1) in the support (Fig. 18).
8. Take off the 3rd point linkage support.
9. Mark and disconnect the harnesses:
- of the lift control valve,
- of the spool valves,
- of the solenoid valves.
10. Mark and disconnect the hoses:
- of the lift rams
- of the spool valve leak recovery tanks.
¤ H
11. Mark and disconnect the following hoses on the

distribution block:
- high flow rate pump supply,
- tank return,
- cooler supply and return,
- 18 bar circuit supply and return (trailer brake
control),
- to the ParkLock and braking accumulators,
- to the tractor braking valve,
- from the steering pump (excess flow).
Removing the support

12. Take out the two Allen screws (1 Fig. 19) located
at the rear of the spool valve couplers.
13. Remove the two locknuts (2 Fig. 20).
14. Sling the support assembly with the distribution Fig. 19
block and auxiliary spool valves.
15. Take out the two lower attachment screws from
the support.
16. Using a hoist, raise the assembly and remove it.
Refitting the support

17. Using a hoist or a suitable lifting tool, fit the
support, distribution block and spool valve
assembly on the transmission and fit the two
lower attachments screws on the support.
18. Lower the hoist and refit the assembly on its
support. Fit the two locknuts (2 Fig. 20).
19. Refit the two Allen screws (1 Fig. 19).
Final operations Fig. 20

20. Carry out the operations 11 to 1 in reverse order.
21. Refit the tractor wheels and take out the stands.
23. Bleed the tractor and trailer brakes (see chapter 9).
24. Check the operation of the hydraulic circuit.
Fig. 21
¤ H
I . Removing and refitting the distri-

bution block and braking block -
ParkLock
Removal
25. Remove the distribution block and spool valve
support (see § H).
26. Take off the hoses connected to the small cham-
bers of the linkage rams (Fig. 22).
27. Disconnect the supply, return and Load Sensing
pipes from the optional unions (2 Fig. 18).
28. Remove the supply pipe from the trailer brake (3
Fig. 18).
29. Disconnect the supply, return and Load Sensing
pipes (P, T and LS respectively Fig. 23) from the
spool valves. MA-09-03651A Fig. 22
30. Remove the lift control valve return pipe (Fig. 24).
31. Remove the attachment screws from the distribu-
tion block.
Refitting
32. Refit the distribution block on the support plate. Fit
the attachment screws.
34. Refit the distribution block and spool valve support
(see § H).
Fig. 23
Fig. 24
¤ H
J . Removing and refitting the Park-

Lock ram
DANGER: The ParkLock ram must under no

circumstances be disassembled. The springs in the
ParkLock ram are constantly compressed and can
cause serious injury to the operator.
DANGER: Care must be taken when

removing the ParkLock ram. Ensure that noone
activates the ParkLock during the ram removal or
refitting operations.
Fig. 25
35. Park the tractor on a flat surface. Chock the rear
wheels of the tractor.
DANGER: As the tractor has no parking

brake during this operation, the tractor wheels
must be chocked correctly to keep the tractor
completely stationary.
36. With the engine running, disengage the ParkLock.

37. Disconnect the position sensor harness (11)
(Fig. 25).
38. Take out the two attachment screws and remove
the support plate of the position sensor (11)
(Fig. 26). Fig. 26
39. Remove the cotter pin and take out the pin (8)
(Fig. 27).
Fig. 27
¤ H
40. Engage the ParkLock to release the pressure in the

ram (6). Ensure that it disengages correctly from
the lever (1).
DANGER: Keep your hands clear from the

ram.
41. Stop the engine.

42. Release the pressure in the high pressure circuit
(see following procedure).
Depressurizing the high pressure circuit
DANGER: Before carrying out any work on Fig. 28

the ParkLock, its circuit pressure must be bled as
follows:
- Stop the engine.
- Release the rear brake bleed screws.
- Press down the brake pedals half way without
releasing, until the effort on the pedals reduces
slightly.
- Tighten the bleed screws again.
CAUTION: Do not restart the engine while

the ram hose is disconnected.
Removing the ram

43. Disconnect the supply hose from the ParkLock
ram.
44. Remove the attachment screws from the ram (10).
45. Remove the ram (6).
¤ H
Refitting the ram and adjusting the Park- 51. Fit the locknut (5) on the threaded rod of the ram.
Lock ram rod linkage (Fig. 29) Fit the clevis (4) and adjust it to insert the pin (8) in
the clevis (4) and lever (1), while maintaining
46. Before refitting the ram, check that distance X distance X.
between the lever (1) and the housing of the 52. Fit a new cotter pin in the pin (8). Tighten the
linkage pin (2) is between 4 and 5 mm. If not, locknut (5).
adjust the length of the right- and left-hand swivel
53. Refit the support plate of the position sensor (11).
arms (3) to obtain this value.
54. Bleed the braking circuit. Check the correct opera-
47. Remove the clevis (4) and the locknut (5) from the
tion of the ParkLock, braking and the tractor high
ram rod.
pressure circuit.
48. Assemble the ram (6) on its support (7).
49. Connect the ram supply hose.
50. Start the engine. Move the ParkLock switch
(11 Fig. 10) located under the reverse shuttle lever
to "ParkLock engaged" position, then to "ParkLock
disengaged" position.
DANGER: Keep your hands clear from the

ram.
8
9
4
5
2
X
6 5 4 11
12
13
7 10 3 1
MA-09-03634A
Fig. 29
¤ H
K . Tractor Towing
During certain tractor breakdowns (engine unable to
start, hydraulic system failure, etc.) the ParkLock stays
on and automatically brakes the tractor rear wheels.
To tow the tractor, the brakes must be released as
follows:
- Chock the wheels of the tractor.
NOTE:The tractor transmission must be in neutral.
- Loosen the locknut (13) (Fig. 29).
- Take out the screw (12) and remove the protective
spacer (14).
- Refit the screw. Tighten the screw until it is in
contact with the lever (1).
- Retighten the screw by 6 turns.
MA-09-03920A-MF
Fig. 30
12 12
14 14
MA-09-03921A
Fig. 31
1 0mm 12
x5
12
14
MA-09-03922A
Fig. 32
¤ H
Auxiliary spool valves
09F01 - Auxiliary spool valves
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of components and identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Spool valve operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
E . Removing and refitting hydraulic couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Removing and refitting the auxiliary spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09F01.1
¤ H
09F01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
The spool valves are located above the rear axle. They
A . General are stacked on top of one another, with the lift control
spool valve under the auxiliary spool valves. The
MF 8400 series tractors may be fitted with a maximum assembly includes internal channels to distribute the
of four to six spool valves. The spool valves are all elec- flow to the different stages.
trohydraulic.
Under the assembly, a closing plate is fitted with a
pressure relief valve to control the spool valves and
Description of the components acts as a plug to the various channels.
The SB23LS - EHS BOSCH spool valves that control Above the assembly, an additional stage receives
the supply to the hydraulic couplers comprise two connections to the distribution block.
parts:
Hydraulic part
See operation below.
Electrohydraulic part comprising:

- an ON / OFF solenoid valve and a 3-way pressure
relief valve located on the end plate of the distribu-
tion block
- a pilot valve fitted in the electrohydraulic unit.
This section only deals with the hydraulic part. For the
electronic part, see Chapter 11.
The electrohydraulically controlled SB23LS EHS spool
valves operate in a Closed Centre circuit. They are
supplied with high pressure, high flow rate oil from the
priority block.
If no priority function is activated, all flow is directed to
the spool valves. When certain priority functions are
activated, the excess flow then remains available for
the auxiliary spool valves.
The adjustment of the flow rate, expressed as a
percentage, may be displayed on the onboard
computer (Datatronic) by the operator (see chapter 11
- Electronics).
The electrohydraulic spool valves have a floating posi-
tion, time delay and zero leak valve on port B.
The main spool of the spool valve directs oil towards
the outlet ports A or B.
The spool valves consist of both electronic and
hydraulic components, the latter containing spools and
valves.
Some elements cannot be repaired as spare parts.
¤ H
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Auxiliary and lift control spool valves assembly
(2) Upper oil manifold
(3) Optional auxiliary spool valve 6
(4) Optional auxiliary spool valve 5
(5) Auxiliary spool valves 1 to 4
2
(7) Lower closing plate with pressure relief valve
Spool valve control

1
The spool valves are controlled either by the Joystick
(1 Fig. 1) (2 spool valves) or by the levers (2 Fig. 1)
located on the right-hand console in the cab 4 spool
valves).
MA-09-03616A Fig. 1
The electrohydraulic spool valve parameters can be set
via the Datatronic 3 (if installed) or the DOT MATRIX
(Joystick only).
See the “Electronics” chapter for further information.
¤ H
3
241
MA-09-03601A
Fig. 2
¤ H
Configuration of spool valves depending

on the tractor hydraulic equipment
Spool valve colour code

Equipment
Red Green Black Yellow
Dromone hook
FRONT LINKAGE
FRONT LINKAGE
Front / rear Dual
Control
FRONT LINKAGE
Front push-pull
FRONT LINKAGE
Front push-pull
Front / rear Dual
Control
FRONT LINKAGE
Dromone hook
Dromone hook
Rear Dual Control
FRONT LINKAGE
Dromone hook
Front push-pull
FRONT LINKAGE
Dromone hook
Front push-pull
Front / rear Dual
Control
NOTE: The spool valve arrangement is the same

regardless of the number of spool valves fitted.
¤ H
Correspondence between spool valves

and couplers (Fig. 3)
MA-09-03595A
5 6
3 4
1 2
MA-03596A
Fig. 3
¤ H
B . Layout of components and iden- P LS T

tification of ports
Ports on spool valve (Fig. 4) and oil manifold
(Fig. 5)
P High pressure inlet from variable displacement
pump via the distribution block
T Return to tank via the distribution block
LS Signal to pump Load Sensing pump regulator via
the distribution block A B
Ports on spool valve (Fig. 4)

A Spool valve A outlet to corresponding hydraulic
coupler
B Spool valve B outlet to corresponding hydraulic
coupler MA-09-03603A Fig. 4
P
LS
T
MA-09-03604A
Fig. 5
¤ H
C . Spool valve operation

The electrohydraulically controlled spool valves use P
pressurised oil (21 - 24 bar) to move the spool.
A pressure relief valve (10 Fig. 6) located in the spool 10
valve assembly creates this control pressure.
8
(1) Main valve spool
(2) Electrohydraulic unit T
(3) Return spring LS
(4) Piston P
(5) Pilot valve R
(6) Digital electronic system Rx
(7) Displacement sensor
(8) Solenoid valve
(9) 3-way pressure relief valve
(10) Pressure relief valve block X3 9
(P) Pressure
(R) Return FP
Operation of the pressure relief MA-09-03602A
valve (7 Fig. 6) X3
When the ON - OFF solenoid valve (8) located on end FP : Filter
plate (7) is open, the flow from the pump is directed to X3 : Location of diagnostics connector
the 3-way pressure relief valve (9) (Fig. 6). R : Pilot valve supply
The latter supplies the pilot valve (5) (Fig. 7) with a Rx : Pilot valve return
pressure of 21 to 24 bar via a pressure balancing valve. P : Pressure
The channels R (supply) and Rx (return) direct oil under T : Tank return
21 - 24 bar pressure to the pilot valves, which control LS : Load Sensing line
the position of the spool via the piston (4) (Fig. 7).
The pilot valve receives a signal from the digital device Fig. 6
(6) and moves the main spool (1) according to the infor-
mation received from the Joystick or lever.
The digital device is informed of the position of the
main spool by a displacement sensor (7) (Fig. 7).
The pilot valve and the digital device are housed in the
unit (2) (Fig. 7) fixed on the end of the spool valve.
NOTE: Channels P and R are connected to the auxiliary

spool valve.
Fig. 7
¤ H
Operation of the auxiliary spool valve

(Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)
When spool (1) is moved electrohydraulically upwards
by the pilot valve (5) (Fig. 7), high pressure oil pene-
trates via channel P, passes through restrictor C and
grooves D. It is then directed to channel E, where it D E
pushes ball (2) and enters chamber F. Simultaneously,
the ramp on the spool raises valve (3) and oil flows via P
port B.
Port A is supplied by moving spool (1) downwards. R
A
LS
MA-09-03605A
Fig. 8
¤ H
3
B
MA-09-03606A
Fig. 9
¤ H
D . Diagram
Parts list (Fig. 10)
(2) Upper oil manifold
(5) Auxiliary spool valves
(7) Lower closing plate with pressure relief valve
¤ H
X aux 2
P aux
P LS T T aux
Rx R B
A
B
A
Rx R
MA-09-03607A
Fig. 10
¤ H
E . Removing and refitting hydraulic

couplers
1. Disconnect the channels from the optional unions
(2) marked P, T, LS and D (Fig. 11). Repeat the
operation for the trailer brake (3).
2. Remove the support plate from the trailer electrical
socket.
Removing the hydraulic couplers

3. Mark the channels between the distribution block
and the hydraulic couplers.
4. Disconnect and remove the channels between the
distribution block and the hydraulic couplers. Fig. 11
5. Disconnect and remove the leak recovery tank
channels.
If the couplers must be separated, carry out operation

6.
8
6. Unscrew the cap nuts (8). Remove the upper plate
(6) and coupler stages (4) (Fig. 12).
NOTE: The O’rings (5) inserted between each stage 7
are used for the leak recovery circuit.
7. Remove the screws (9). Take off:
- the leak recovery tank supports (10) with the 6
threaded rods (7) if the couplers have been previ-
ously removed.
- the complete coupler blocks (4) fitted on the
plate (10).
4
10
11
MA-09-03609A
Fig. 12
¤ H
Refitting the hydraulic couplers

8. Carry out operations 5 to 7 in reverse order.
9. Refit the pipes between the couplers and distribu-
tion block as marked at operation 3.
F . Removing and refitting the auxil-

iary spool valves
Removing the auxiliary spool valves
10. Take off the support plate from the distribution
block / spool valve assembly (see Trailer braking
and ParkLock section in Chapter 9).
11. Take off the coupler assemblies (see § E).
12. Remove the hydraulic supply pipes, Load Sensing
pipes and return pipes on the upper plate of the MA-09-03612A Fig. 13
spool valve block (Fig. 13).
13. Disconnect the supply hoses from the lift rams.
Remove the lift control spool valve return pipe
(Fig. 13).
14. Unscrew and remove the three spool valve block
attachment nuts and their washers.
15. Mark the order the different spool valve stages, lift
control valve and closing plates are arranged.
16. Separate the distribution block components.
Discard the O’rings inserted between the
elements.
¤ H
Refitting the distribution block

17. Clean and check the condition of each spool valve
and ensure no ports are blocked.
18. Lightly smear the end of the rod threads (Fig. 14)
with Loctite 241 or equivalent. Screw the threaded
rods into the upper closing plate (manifold). 241
19. Clean the mating faces between each distribution
block element.
20. Check the presence of new O’rings (J Fig. 15)
between each element.
21. On a workbench, assemble the distribution block
elements vertically to ensure the correct posi-
tioning of the seals. Stack the elements in the
order noted at operation 15.
22. Fit the distribution block on the support. Fit and
tighten the three attachment nuts with their MA-09-03657A
washers. Fig. 14
23. Reconnect the supply hoses to the lift rams. Refit
the spool valve return pipe.
24. Refit the supply pipes, Load Sensing pipes and
return pipes on the upper plate of the spool valve
block (Fig. 13). J
25. Refit the coupler assembly (see § E).
26. Refit the support plate on the distribution block /
spool valve assembly (see Trailer braking and
ParLock section in Chapter 9).
MA-09-03652A
Fig. 15
¤ H
Lift control valve
09G01 - Lift control valve
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of components and identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Removing - Refitting the distribution block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E . Neutral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
F . Lifting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G . Lowering position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
H . Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09G01.1
¤ H
Lift control valve
09G01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
Lift control valve
A . General
The function of the lift control valve is to regulate the
oil flow to and from the lift rams according to the
signals transmitted by the ELC calculator.
This spool valve contains an LS port for the Load
Sensing system. This control port allows the spool
valve to send pressure information to the priority block.
This spool valve is made up of elements themselves
comprising spools and valves. Some of the elements
cannot be repaired as spare parts.
¤ H
Lift control valve
B . Layout of components and iden-

tification of ports
The Bosch lift control valve is made up by two parts:
The hydraulic part (spool valve) (Fig. 1)

(1) Non-return valve, maintaining the oil in the rams
(2) Spool valve assembly used in the lowering phase
(4) Control spool valve
(5) Flow regulating spool valve
(6) Shock valve
(9) Flow regulating spool spring
(10) Control spool spring
(11) Spool valve assembly spring
The electrical part (solenoid valves) (Fig. 1)

(7) Lowering solenoid valve
(8) Lifting solenoid valve
NOTE: To determine whether a fault is hydraulic or

electrical, press the push-buttons at the ends of the
solenoid valves; this eliminates the electronic effect of
the lift function.
Fig. 1
¤ H
Lift control valve
C . Removing - Refitting the distribu-
Because the lift control valve and auxiliary spool valves tion block
are stacked together, they share supply, return and LS
signal pipes. To carry out the removal - refitting of the distribution
block (lift control valve and auxiliary spool valves), see
(12) High pressure supply from the pump via the the “Auxiliary spool valves” section.
priority block
(13) Load Sensing signal to priority block
(15) Auxiliary spool valve tank return
(16) HP ram supply
(17) Lift control valve tank return
NOTE: The lift rams used are double acting. The small
chambers (ram rod side) are connected respectively to
the tank return and cooling system.
12 13 15
16
MA-09-03597A
17
Fig. 2
¤ H
Lift control valve
D . Diagram
T X P
1
B
A
B
A
MA-09-03594A
Tr
1 Upper closing plate

2 First hydraulic spool valve
3 Last hydraulic spool valve
4 Lift control spool valve
5 Lower closing plate
P Pump
T Return to auxiliary spool valve tank
X Load Sensing circuit
Tr Return to lift control valve tank
Fig. 3
¤ H
Lift control valve
E . Neutral position
When the engine is not running and the spool valve is
in the neutral position, the control spool (4) and the
spool valve assembly (2) are maintained respectively
by the springs (10) and (11).
The flow rate control valve (5) is pushed to the left by
the spring (9).
With the engine running and the spool valve on
standby, no pressure data is transmitted to the priority
block. The LS line communicates with the return.
Fig. 4
¤ H
Lift control valve
The movement of the flow regulating spool valve is

F . Lifting position dampened by the volume of oil present in chamber d.
As soon as the pressure on the valve (1) is greater than
When the Lift solenoid valve (8) is activated, the
that in the rams, the lifting arms rise.
control spool (4) is moved to the right.
The LS line is connected with the output line (16) to the
The LS pressure data is transmitted to the upper face
lift rams, thus informing the priority block.
of the flow regulating spool valve (5) (on the spring (9)
side) and moves the spool downwards or towards the If the pressure in the rams is too high (shocks received
left thus directing the oil flow to the control spool and by the lifting arm), the valve (6) opens and the excess
the non-return valve (1). pressure is directed to the return.
Fig. 5
¤ H
Lift control valve
G . Lowering position
When the solenoid valve (7) is activated to lower the
lift arms, the spool valve assembly (2) allows the oil
coming from the rams to flow into the return.
The LS pressure data is transmitted to the face of the
flow regulating spool valve (5) (spring (9) side) and on
the priority block.
H . Assembly procedure
To assemble the distribution block (lift control valve
and auxiliary spool valves), see “Auxiliary spool valves”
section.
Fig. 6
¤ H
Lift control valve
¤ H
Load Sensing hydrostatic steering
09H01 - Load Sensing hydrostatic steering
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . The Load Sensing principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Orbitrol operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Disassembling and reassembling the Orbitrol steering unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
E . Removing - refitting and disassembling - reassembling the steering ram . . . . . . . 15
F . Steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
G . Removing and refitting the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
H . Removing and refitting the control lever assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
I . Removing and refitting the column tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
J . Removing and refitting the column locking up mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
K . Disassembling the lower bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09H01.1
¤ H
09H01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
A . General
The steering system used on tractors fitted with a
DYNA VT transmission and closed centre hydraulics is
dynamic, and there is no mechanical link between the
steering wheel and the steering ram.
Its control principle is of the "Load Sensing" type.
The system comprises the following main compo-
nents:
- a pressurised oil supply, from a fixed displacement
pump via a priority valve,
- an Orbitrol steering unit: OSPDF 80/240 LS Dynamic
4WD with closed centre, by-pass mounted on trac-
tors fitted with a 4WD Dana AG210 or AG280 front
axle.
- a double acting steering ram fitted to the 4WD front
axle.
The Orbitrol is supplied by a fixed flow rate pump via a

priority block. The priority block is controlled by the
steering unit Load Sensing line, and directs priority oil
flow to the steering circuit; excess flow is redirected to
the distribution block then to the cooling circuit. When
steering remains in neutral, all pump flow is directed to
the cooling system.
When the steering wheel is turned, the necessary flow

of oil is directed to the corresponding side of the
steering ram. The other side of the ram is connected
to the tank return ports.
In case of engine breakdown or fixed displacement

pump failure, the Orbitrol acts as a hand-operated
pump so that the steering can be controlled. This obvi-
ously requires a much greater effort to be applied to
the steering wheel.
¤ H
Description of the Orbitrol steering unit

The Orbitrol comprises a selector spool valve, a spring
centred supply sleeve and a drive shaft linked to the
steering column. It has five hydraulic ports:
- pressure
- return to the selector cover
- two supplies to the steering ram
- Load Sensing
The circuit is protected by a safety valve and two shock
valves as well as two suction valves.
The Orbitrol OSPDF 80/240 comprises twin stator

rotors (5)(8) of different capacities.
Specifications:
- Shock valves (1)(2) setting: 225 -245 bar
- Supply valve (3) setting: 155 -160 bar
- Steering unit (5) capacity: 240 cm3 / turn
- Steering unit (8) capacity: 80 cm3 / turn
- Supply valve (6) setting: 10 bar
- Return to neutral springs torque (4): 1.5 daNm
1 8 7 3
T
160 bar
LS
P DIR
MA-09-03577A
2 4 6 5 Fig. 1
¤ H
B . The Load Sensing principle

Orbitrol steering unit
The Load Sensing port is either connected with the
tank when the steering is in neutral position, or
connected with the pressure supply line as soon as the
steering wheel is turned. The Load Sensing line
communicates with the pump priority valve. The
standby pressure to the Orbitrol supply (on standby) is
12.5 bar.
¤ H
Steering unit parts list (Fig. 2, Fig. 3)

(1) Lip seal
(2) Centring springs
(3) Bush
(4) O’ring
(5) Cotter pin
(6) Sleeve
(7) Spool valve
(8) O’ring
(9) Link shaft
(10) O’ring
(11) Plate
(12) O’ring
(13) Plate
(14) O’ring
(15) Spacer
(16) O’ring
(17) O’ring
(18) Integrated spool
(19) Spool body
(20) Seals
(21) O’ring
(22) Washer
(23) Needle bearing
(24) Washer
(25) Relief valve
(26) Block
(27) Rotor (gear type 80 cm3)
(28) Stator (gear type 80 cm3)
(29) O’ring
(30) Stator (gear type 240 cm3)
(31) Rotor (gear type 240 cm3)
(32) Plate
(33) Spring
(34) O’ring
(35) Closing plate
(36) Screw
(37) Shock valves
(38) Non-return valve
(39) Spacers
(40) Non-return valve
(41) Suction valve
(42) Cotter pin
¤ H
Overall view
1 21
2 22
3 23
4 24
6 25
9 26
10 27
11 28
12 29
13 30
14 31
15 32
16 33
17 34
18 35
19 36
20 MA-09-03641A
Fig. 2
¤ H
Exploded view
37
37
1
41
39
4
22
23
24
25 3
5
26
40 6
38
15 8
12 7
28
9 29
10 2
11
27
14
13
31
30
33
16
32
17
19
18
42
34
MA-09-03642A 35
20
36
Fig. 3
¤ H
C . Orbitrol operation
Neutral position (engine running) (Fig. 4)
In this position the spool valve (7) is centred in relation
to the sleeve (6) by the springs (2). The channels P1 -
L - R are not supplied.
The flow from the fixed displacement pump is directed
to the cooling system by priority valve B.
Two shock valves and two suction valves are located

in ports L and R of the steering unit. The shock valves
protect the circuit between the two steering ram
chambers and the steering unit from shocks to the
front wheels.
The suction valves allow the oil released by the shock
valves to flow from the right-hand channel to the
left-hand channel, or vice versa.
L R
T P1
P LS
B
MA-09-03613A
P High flow rate supply from the fixed flow T Tank return
rate pump L Steering ram left-hand supply
B Steering priority valve R Steering ram right-hand supply
LS Pilot flow
P1 Supply to the metering devices Fig. 4
¤ H
Steering on lock position (engine running) A one-way valve is screwed into the steering unit
(Fig. 5) supply port.
This valve prevents excessive pressure exerted to the
Any action on the steering wheel (left or right) front wheels from being transmitted to the pump
produces an angular offset of the spool valve (7) and when the steering lock is applied. If the pressure in the
opens the Orbitrol closed circuit. steering circuit becomes too high, the relief valve (25)
located inside the steering unit is activated and the
A control pressure allows the necessary flow to be excess pressure is directed towards channel T.
supplied, via the priority valve B, to the Orbitrol and
metering devices (27)(31) and (28)(30). The rotors
(27)(31) are driven in rotation and discharge a quantity
of oil proportional to the degree of rotation towards the
rams. The rotation of rotors (27)(31) is equal to that of
the steering wheel.
Depending on the direction of rotation, the flow of oil
from the rotors is sent to one side or the other of the
ram.
L R
T P1
P LS
B
MA-09-03614A
LS Pilot flow
¤ H
Manual steering (engine stopped) (Fig. 4)

When the pump is no longer providing pressure or
when the pressure is too low, the rotors (27)(31) are no
longer hydraulically driven. Steering is no longer power
assisted.
In this case, action on the steering wheel compresses
the centring springs (2). The angular clearance
between the pin (5) and sleeve (6) is cancelled and the
metering devices (rotor and stator) and mechanically
driven. The oil returning from the rams passes through
the non-return valve (38) and supplies the metering
device.
The pressure generated is proportional to the torque
applied to the steering wheel. A great effort is there-
fore required to turn the wheel in order to steer the
tractor.
L R
T P1
P LS
B
MA-09-03614A
LS Pilot flow
¤ H
D . Disassembling and reassembling

the Orbitrol steering unit
Disassembly
1. Remove the steering unit from the tractor.
2. Place the steering unit in a vice fitted with plastic
jaws.
3. Mark the location of screws (36). Remove the
screws (36) and seals (20).
4. Take off the closing plate (35), the O'ring (34), the
body (19), the integrated spool (18) and spring (33).
5. Remove the O'ring (17). Locate the position of
plate (32) and remove it.
2
6. Remove the O'ring (16). Remove stator (30) and MA-09-03619A
rotor (31). Remove the O'ring (14).

7. Mark and remove plate (13). Fig. 7
8. Remove spacer (15), stator (28), rotor (27). Mark
and remove plate (11). Remove the O'ring (10).
9. Take out the splined link shaft (9).
10. Unscrew the threaded bush and recover the ball
from the non-return valve (38).
11. Take out the two axle pins and the balls from the
suction valves (41) of the steering unit.
12. Extract the sleeve (6) and spool valve (7) assembly
by pushing it out while checking that the pin (5) lies
along the horizontal axis.
13. Take out washers (22)(24), the needle bearing (23)
and bush (3) from the sleeve / spool valve
assembly. Remove the pin (5), and the centring
springs (2) by pressing on one of their ends.
Remove the sleeve (6) from the spool valve (7).
14. Unscrew the plug from the relief valve (25). Using
an 8 mm Allen wrench, disassemble the threaded
bush and remove the seal, the spring and the valve
(the crimped seat cannot be removed).
15. Unscrew the two plugs from the shock valves (37)
and remove the seals. Using a 6 mm Allen wrench,
disassemble the threaded bushes and take out the
springs and balls (the crimped seats cannot be
removed).
16. Extract the sealing ring (1) and O'ring (21).
17. Disassemble the non-return valve (40).
¤ H
Reassembly
18. Check and clean the components. Replace any
defective parts. Lubricate the components with
clean transmission oil.
9 27
19. Reassemble the non-return valve (40).
20. Fit seal (1), O'ring (21) and the bush. 31
21. Place the valve balls and springs in the recesses of
the shock valves (37). Screw in the threaded
bushes, fit the seals and tighten the plugs.
22. Fit the valve and spring in the recesses of the relief
valve (25), and screw in the threaded bush. Fit the
seal and tighten the plug to a torque of 40 - 60 Nm.
23. Insert the spool valve (6) into the sleeve (7). Posi-
tion the centring springs (2) according to Fig. 7 and C
insert the pin (5).
24. Position the bush (3) on the sleeve and spool valve MA-09-03620A
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly Fig. 8

in the steering unit.
25. Fit washers (22)(24), with the chamfer of washer
(24) turned towards the centring springs (2) and
inserting needle bearing (23) between them.
26. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in the
steering unit by oscillating it slightly. Check that 27
the pin (5) is held horizontally.
27. Fit the two valve balls and the two pins in the 31
recesses of the suction valves (41).
28. Fit the valve ball in the recess of the non-return
valve (38) and screw in the threaded bush.
29. Position the splined link shaft (9).
30. Fit the O'ring (10) and the plate (11).
31. Fit the rotor (27) so that the two concave depres-
sions “C” lie along the axis of the slot in the 5
splined link shaft (9) (Fig. 8).
32. Fit the O'rings (12)(29) on the stator (28). MA-09-03618A
33. Fit the stator (28) by turning it slightly without Fig. 9

moving the rotor (27) so that it fixing holes align
with those of the steering unit. Position the spacer
(15) and plate (13).
NOTE: The rotor (27) and the pin (5) must be in the
position shown in Fig. 9.
34. Refit rotor (31) on the spacer (15) so that the two
depressions “C” lie in the axis of the slot of splined
shaft (9) (Fig. 8).
¤ H
35. Place the O'rings (14)(16) on the stator (30). Fit and
move it with an angular movement so that the
fixing holes align with those provided in the
steering unit.
NOTE: The rotor (31) and the pin (5) must be in the
position indicated (Fig. 9).
36. Refit plate (32) in the position marked at disas-
sembly.
37. Check that the bore of body (19) and the rim of
spool (18) are not scratched.
38. Check that the spool moves normally in the body.
39. Slide the spool fitted with its oil tightness compo-
nents into the body. Fit O'rings (17)(34) and spring
(33).
40. Refit the cover plate (35).
41. Refit the new seals (20) and screws (36) as marked
at disassembly.
42. Tighten opposing screws to a torque of 35 Nm.
43. Using a test bench or a suitable fixture, check the
steering unit operation. Refit the steering unit on
the tractor.
44. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic unions.
¤ H
E . Removing - refitting and disas-

sembling - reassembling the
steering ram
Removal
45. Disconnect and block off the hose feed pipes to
the ram, carefully identifying their positions.
46. Drive out the steering ball joints (1 Fig. 10) using a
suitable extractor.
47. Take out the screws (2) from the ram and remove
it.
Refitting
48. Refit the ram. Fit and tighten screws (2) to
180 - 200 Nm after lightly smearing the thread
with Loctite 270 or equivalent.
49. Fix the steering ball joints. Tighten the nuts (4) to
115 - 130 Nm and lock them with new pins.
50. Reconnect the hose feed pipes in the positions
identified during disassembly.
51. Fit the wheel(s) and tighten the nuts to a torque of
400 - 450 Nm.
4 3
5
2
MA-09-03617A
1
Fig. 10
¤ H
Disassembly
52. Release and remove the ball joints (5) (Fig. 10).
53. Take off the lock rings (5) using a suitable locally
made tool, while simultaneously turning the guide
rings (3) (Fig. 11).
54. Take out the piston rod (6) from cylinder (4).
55. Discard all the seals (sealing ring, O'rings, dust
guards and lock rings).
Reassembly
56. Clean the components. Replace any defective
parts.
Remark
- Check the condition of the internal bore of the
cylinder and the operational parts of the piston
rod. Systematically discard all scratched compo-
nents that may affect the oil tightness of the
steering mechanism.
57. Lubricate the O'rings, bushes and internal bore
with clean transmission oil.
58. Fit the relevant seals on the piston rod (6) and the
guide bushes (3).
59. Slide the piston rod fitted with its seals in the
cylinder bore.
60. Fit the guide bushes at each end of the cylinder,
taking care not to damage the lip of the sealing
rings.
61. Position the machined groove of each guide bush
opposite the cylinder groove. Turn the guide
bushes while simultaneously slipping in the lock
rings.
62. Tighten and lock the ball joints (7) (Fig. 10) to a
torque of 120 - 150 Nm, the threads previously Fig. 11
smeared with Loctite 270 or equivalent.
63. Refit the steering ram on the tractor.
64. Check the ram supply and tightness.
Final operation
65. Carry out a road test on the steering system.
¤ H
F . Steering column
The steering column assembly comprises two parts:
- the fixed lower part composed of a pipe and a body
foot
- the mobile upper part composed of a pipe with a
welded stirrup, as well as a unit holding the steering
wheel height and tilt adjustment systems.
Operation
Height adjustment
When the control lever (4) is moved upwards, the T rod
makes the lever (6) pivot, lowering the arm (20). The
screw (5) integral with the arm presses against the
brake plate, freeing it and allowing the upper part of
the steering column to move. The spring (3) returns
the lever (4) to position.
Tilt adjustment
When the control lever (4) is moved downwards, press
the T rod which pushes against the end of the notched
lever (9)(10), freeing it from the steering rack (11)(12)
and allowing the upper part of the unit (17) to tilt.
Two silent blocks (24) absorb shocks to the tilt stop of
the upper part of the column.
The two return springs (25) and (26) facilitate steering
wheel positioning.
¤ H
Steering column parts list (Fig. 12, Fig. 13)

(1) Washer
(2) Washer
(3) Spring
(4) Control lever
(5) Adjusting screw
(6) Lever
(7) Spring
(8) Boot
(9) Notched lever
(10) Notched lever
(11) Steering rack
(12) Steering rack
(13) Screw
(14) Nut
(15) Pin
(16) Nuts
(17) Column articulated housing
(18) Nuts
(19) Column fixed housing
(20) Arm
(21) Nut
(22) Pin
(23) Bushes
(24) Silent blocks
(25) Spring
(26) Spring
¤ H
Overall view
16
4 17 4
24
12
11 14
T
T 13
9
9 15 10
10
7 1
1
6
19
6
20
20
3
18
3
5
5
21
MA-09-03646A
Fig. 12
¤ H
Exploded view
11
12
13
14
7
15
9
24
4
10
6
26
20
T
5
21 25 2 1 22
23 19
MA-09-03645A
Fig. 13
¤ H
G . Removing and refitting the

steering column 3
Removal
2
66. Using the lever located to the right under the
steering wheel, pull the steering column as far as
possible towards the driver.
67. Take off the steering wheel and the instrument
panel lower cover (1). Disconnect the connectors
of the reverse shuttle, wiper control unit and DOT
MATRIX keyboard (if fitted).
68. If there is not sufficient access space, also take out
the upper cover (2) and instrument panel (3)
(Fig. 14).
1
69. Remove the 4 attachment screws fixing the MA-09-03643A
column base to the cab support. Fig. 14

70. Take off the column assembly.
Refitting
I . Removing and refitting the
71. Check all steering column positions function
correctly.
column tilt mechanism
72. Lightly smear the shaft (29) splines with Anti-Seize
grease or equivalent.
Removal
73. Carry out the operations 67 to 70 in reverse order. 81. Remove the steering column. Carry out operations
NOTE: Tighten the steering wheel nut to a torque 66 to 70.
of 57 - 78 Nm. 82. Remove the half housings around the steering
74. Check the correct operation of the electrical equip- column. Take off the reverse shuttle control,
ment, reverse shuttle lever, ParkLock, etc. lighting switch and DOT MATRIX keyboard (if
fitted).
83. Remove and discard the retaining washers (1)(2).
H . Removing and refitting the Remove the spring (3) and lever (4) with the boot
control lever assembly (8) and lever (6).
84. Press on the notched levers (9)(10) to compress
Removal the spring (7). Take off the nuts (14). Take off the
steering racks (11) and (12).
75. Remove the steering column. Carry out operations 85. Drive out the pin (15). Remove the notched levers
66 to 70. (9)(10) and the spring (7).
76. Remove the half housings around the steering
column. Take off the reverse shuttle control,
lighting switch and DOT MATRIX keyboard (if
fitted).
77. Remove and discard the retaining washers (1)(2).
Remove the spring (3) and lever (4) with the boot
(8) and lever (6).
Refitting
78. Refit the levers (6) and (4) and spring (3). Refit the
retaining washers (1)(2).
79. Adjust the lever (6) so the T rod touches the
notched levers (9)(10).
80. Carry out operation 76 in reverse and proceed to
operations 71 to 74.
¤ H
Refitting
86. Carry out operation 85 in reverse order.
87. Compress the spring (7). Fit the steering racks (11)
and (12). Fit and tighten the screws (14) greased
with Loctite 241.
88. Refit the lever (4), T rod and spring (3). Refit the
retaining washers (1)(2).
89. Adjust the lever (4) so that the T rod comes into
contact with the notched levers (11) and (12).
90. Carry out operation 82 in reverse and proceed to
operations 71 to 74.
17 16
J . Removing and refitting the

column locking up mechanism
Removal 19
91. Remove the steering column. Carry out operations
66 to 70. 18
92. Remove the half housings around the steering
column.
93. Carry out operations 82 to 85.
94. Take out the adjusting screw (5) (3mm Allen key).
95. Disassemble the nuts (16) and their respective
screws, and separate the upper articulated part
(17) of the column.
96. Disassemble the nuts (18) and their respective
screws, and separate the lower part (19) of the MA-09-03644A
column.
97. Remove the arm (20) and brake plate and nut (21).
Refitting
Fig. 15
99. Fit and adjust the screw (5).
100.Refit the tilt adjustment mechanism (operations
86 to 90).
¤ H
Reassembly
K . Disassembling the lower bush
115.Refit the bush (23).
Disassembling the bush (23 Fig. 13) 116.Refit the arm (20) and brake plate and nut (21).
101.Using the lever located to the right under the 117.Assemble the lower part (19) of the column. Reas-
steering wheel, pull the steering column as far as semble the nuts (18) and their respective screws.
possible towards the driver. 118.Assemble the upper articulated part (17) of the
102.Take off the steering wheel and the instrument column. Reassemble the nuts (16) and their
panel lower cover (1). Disconnect the connectors respective screws.
of the reverse shuttle, wiper control unit and DOT 119.Refit the notched levers (9)(10) and spring and fit
MATRIX keyboard (if fitted). the pin (15).
103.If there is not sufficient access space, also take 120.Compress the spring (7). Fit the steering racks (11)
out the upper cover (2) and instrument panel (3) and (12). Fit and tighten the screws (14) greased
(Fig. 14). with Loctite 241.
104.Remove the 4 attachment screws fixing the 121.Refit the lever (4), T rod and spring (3). Refit the
column base to the cab support. retaining washers (1)(2).
105.Take off the column assembly. 122.Adjust the lever (4) so that the T rod comes into
106.Remove the half housings around the steering contact with the notched levers (11) and (12).
column. Take off the reverse shuttle control, 123.Refit the reverse shuttle control, lighting switch
lighting switch and DOT MATRIX keyboard (if and DOT MATRIX keyboard (if fitted). Refit the half
fitted). housings around the steering column.
107.Remove and discard the retaining washers (1)(2). 124.Check all steering column positions function
Remove the spring (3) and lever (4) with the boot correctly.
(8) and lever (6). 125.Lightly smear the shaft (29) splines with Anti-Seize
108.Press on the notched levers (9)(10) to compress grease or equivalent.
the spring (7). Take off the nuts (14). Take off the 126.Carry out the operations 67 to 70 in reverse order.
steering racks (11) and (12). 127.Refit the column assembly.
109.Drive out the pin (15). Remove the notched levers 128.Fit the 4 attachment screws fixing the column
(9)(10) and the spring (7). base to the cab support. Tighten the screws to a
110.Take out the adjusting screw (5) (3mm Allen key). torque of 57 - 78 Nm.
111.Disassemble the nuts (16) and their respective 129.Refit the removed covers and instrument panel (if
screws, and separate the upper articulated part disassembled).
(17) of the column. 130.Check the operation of electrical equipment,
112.Disassemble the nuts (18) and their respective reverse shuttle lever, ParkLock, etc.
screws, and separate the lower part (19) of the
column.
113.Remove the arm (20) and brake plate and nut (21).
114.Extract the bush (23) from the housing (19).
¤ H
¤ H
Main braking circuit
09I01 - Main braking circuit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Braking valve control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Relations between the different tractor braking circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Rear brake cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Removing the universal joint shaft brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Bleeding the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09I01.1
¤ H
09I01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
Characteristics of braking components

A . General
Braking valve
Tractors with a DYNA VT transmission are fitted with a - Braking pressure: 0 to 70 bar.
hydraulic braking system operating on the high pres-
- Working travel: 16 mm
sure auxiliary circuit for the rear brakes and on the
transmission low pressure circuit for the front axle
shaft brake. Rear brakes
They are both controlled by a braking valve activated by - Piston diameter: 50.8 mm
two pedals that can operate coupled or uncoupled. - Piston stroke: 3.7 mm
The braking valve, located at the front of the pedal,
- Maximum volume used by piston: 12.25 cm3 on
receives and directs pressure to the various compo-
each side
nents. It controls:
- The right- and left-hand brakes located under the rear
axle, and operating simultaneously or separately, Front brakes
- the front axle shaft brake control, - Piston diameter: 62 mm
- the trailer brake control via a pressure sensor located - Piston stroke: 6.1 mm
on the valve. - Rear brake / front brake pressure ratio: 2.04 bar
- Maximum braking pressure: 18 bar
Rear brakes
Located in the rear axle, the two disc brakes are inde-
pendent. Each brake is controlled hydraulically by a
cylinder, or mechanically by the ParkLock ram.
The braking valve is supplied by the make and break
valve located under the distribution block with an accu-
mulator that maintains a pressure reserve of 135 - 165
bar (see "Trailer braking and ParkLock” section).
The braking valve includes a pressure relief valve (0-70
bar). The pressure is distributed to the brake by two
spools located on either side of the pressure relief
valve.
Front axle shaft brake

The front axle brake is located at the front of the
gearbox. It is a hydraulically controlled multidisc brake.
The main braking valve controls a power-assisted
braking valve which operates the front brake under a
18 bar max. pressure (transmission low pressure
circuit).
Trailer brake
The trailer brake is controlled electro-hydraulically. A
pressure sensor informs the Autotronic 5 calculator of
the pressure in the braking circuit. This then activates
a proportional solenoid valve that controls the trailer
brake valve via the transmission 18 bar circuit (see
“Trailer braking and ParkLock” section).
¤ H
B . Braking valve control

(1) Main braking valve block
(2) Braking pressure regulator 11
(3) Left-hand brake control
(4) Right-hand brake control 1
(5) Pedals
(6) Bearing
(7) Bearing
(8) Bearing
(9) Bearing
(10) Sensor
(11) Spring
Identification of ports (Fig. 2)

(P) High pressure supply 8
(T) Tank return
(X) Control of front axle shaft brake and trailer brake
pressure sensor
(F1) Left-hand brake supply
(F2) Right-hand brake supply
Braking control
5 1
The pedals are pressed against the braking valve rods
via bearings (6) (7) (8) (9).
Each pedal simultaneously controls the pressure regu-
lator (2 Fig. 2) and corresponding spool valve (3) or (4).
7
6
9
8
10
MA-09-03623
Fig. 1
¤ H
3 2 4
MA-09-03622A
Fig. 2
¤ H
Action on tractor brakes

C . Relations between the different
tractor braking circuits Pedals coupled
When one of the two pedals (BP1) and (BP2) is acti-
The braking circuits of the rear axle, front axle and vated, the pressure regulator located in the braking
trailer are hydraulically or electrically linked. These valve regulates the pressure coming from the make
circuits must react simultaneously to a single action on and break valve (CD) and accumulator (AC2). The
the brake pedals. braking valve then distributes this pressure to the rear
brakes (BR1) and (BR2).
Parts list (Fig. 3) Simultaneaously, the braking valve sends a pressure
signal to the spool valve (FD) and pressure sensor (M).
The spool valve (FD) controls the front axle brake (BF)
(P1) High pressure variable displacement with pressure from the pump (P2) (transmission 18 bar
pump circuit).
The sensor (M) allows the Autotronic 5 to control the
(P2) Transmission low pressure hydraulic
trailer brake via the proportional solenoid valve (EV)
pump
(see “Trailer braking and ParkLock” section).
(PB) Trailer brake and ParkLock priority
valve Pedals uncoupled
(CD) Make and break valve If the driver presses on just one pedal, this acts on the
(TV) Trailer braking valve braking valve pressure regulator and on a brake spool
valve. The pressure is directed to the corresponding
(BV) Tractor braking valve brake.
(EV) Trailer brake control proportional The “&” valve in the braking block ensures no pres-
solenoid valve sure signal is supplied to the spool valve (FD) or sensor
(M). The front brake (BF) and trailer brake (TB) are only
(AC1) Accumulator (ParkLock) activated when both brake pedals are simultaneously
(AC2) Accumulator (rear brakes) activated.
(TB) Trailer brake
“&” Valve
(BR1) Rear brake
The “&” valve (7 Fig. 4) is fitted in the braking block. It
(BR2) Rear brake allows pressure to be supplied to the trailer brake and
front brake only if the two pedals are activated.
(BP1) Pedal
The pressure directed to the rear left- and right-hand
(BP2) Pedal brakes must be identical to enable operation of the
(M) Pressure sensor front brake and trailer brake.
(FD) Front brake control valve

(BF) Front brake
(AUX) To non-priority components
(AUTO 5) Autotronic 5 calculator
(PARKLOCK) ParkLock assembly (ram and control)
¤ H
Tractor braking principle
BF
P2
FD
M
BP1
BP2
BR2
BV
AUTO 5
BR1
AC2
EV
AC1
CD
Parklock
TV
PB
TB
AUX
Electrical connection
High pressure
Control circuit
P1
MA-09-03621A
Fig. 3
¤ H
D . Diagram
Parts list (Fig. 4)
(1) Tractor braking valve
(2) Pressure relief spool
(3) Right-hand brake spool
(4) Left-hand brake spool
(5) Right-hand brake
(6) Left-hand brake
(7) & Valve
(8) Accumulator (braking circuit)
(10) Transmission low pressure circuit pump
(11) Front axle shaft brake control spool
(M1) Braking circuit load pressure switch
(M2) Braking circuit load pressure switch
(TR 34) Trailer braking pressure sensor
(A) Trailer brake control
(B) To ParkLock
(C) Braking circuit supply pressure from make and
break valve (135 - 165 bar)
¤ H
M1 M2
C
8
4
7
1
12
2
11
TR 34
3
5 10 A
MA-09-03625A
Fig. 4
¤ H
E . Rear brake cylinders

The rear brake cylinders are located on the rear axle,
beside the trumpet housings.
Description (Fig. 7)
The rear axle braking system consists of a brake
cylinder (1), a piston (2), and a rod (5) that acts on an
assembly (3) comprised of discs (6) and intermediate
plates (7) (see chapter 6). The brake disc assembly is
fitted before the final drive unit (4) in the rear trumpet
housing.
The piston acts on the rod (5) whose triangular end
allows the two intermediate plates (9) and (10) to
swivel in relation to each other. When swivelling, the
intermediate plates (9) and (10) are kept separate by MA-09-03636A Fig. 5
balls (8). Return springs (18) restore the intermediate
plates (9) and (10) to position when the brakes are
released.
The port (16) is linked to the bleed circuit by a pipe (see
§ G).
Operation
Braking can be activated hydraulically (brake pedals) or
mechanically (ParkLock).
Pedal braking
The braking pressure (coming from the braking valve)
arrives at the cylinder via the port (14) (Fig. 7). The 11
piston (2) is forced down by the pressure, driving down
the lower part of the piston (17) and rod (5) and acti- 5 17
vates the braking mechanism.
MA-09-03637A
Mechanical braking (ParkLock) Fig. 6

When the brakes are activated by the ParkLock ram,
the levers (18) activate the cams (11 Fig. 6). As they
rotate they drive the lower part of the pistons (17) and
rod (5) and activate the braking mechanism.
When the lower part of the piston (17) has lowered,
the spring (15) keeps the upper part of the piston (2) at
the top of the cylinder.
¤ H
4
5
2
1
18
10
3
9
11
14
16
2
1
13
15
17
MA-09-03635A
Fig. 7
¤ H
F . Removing the universal joint

shaft brake
The front axle shaft brake is located at the front of the
gearbox.
19
Operation
The front axle shaft brake operates in a similar manner
to the rear brakes. A piston (20 Fig. 8) pushes a rod
(21) with a triangular end. The triangular part allows
two intermediate plates (22 Fig. 9) to swivel in relation
to each other, while they are held apart by balls (23).
20
21
MA-09-03638A
Fig. 8
¤ H
26
22
19
25
21
23
MA-09-03639A 24
24
26
25
MA-09-03640A
23 22
Fig. 9
¤ H
G . Bleeding the brakes

2
The tractor brakes are bled through bleed
plugs (Fig. 10) located at the rear right-hand side of the
tractor beside the auxiliary spool valves:
1
(2) Rear left-hand brake
(3) Rear right-hand brake 3
The trailer brake is bled through the bleed plug located

on top of the distribution block (Fig. 11).
NOTE: The brakes must be bled every 1200 hours, or

when working on the braking circuit.
Bleeding method MA-09-03624A

Fig. 10
2. Open the right-hand (3), left-hand (2) and front (1)
bleed plugs (Fig. 10).
3. Press moderately on the coupled brake pedals,
with pedal travel of approximately 20 mm.
NOTE: Never press the pedals down more than 25
mm when the bleed plugs are open. A jet of oil
under pressure will spurt out of the bleed plugs.
4. Let the air bleed out at the plugs.
5. Close the plugs again when the fluid coming out no
longer shows any trace of foam or air bubbles.
Release the pedals.
6. Open the bleed plug on the trailer brake valve
(Fig. 11).
7. Repeat the operations 3 to 5.
8. Check the oil levels in the auxiliary hydraulics and MA-09-03626A
gearbox.
Fig. 11
¤ H
Disassembling and reassembling the pumps
09J01 - Disassembling and reassembling the pumps
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Disassembling the steering pump and the variable displacement pump . . . . . . . . 8
C . Reassembling the steering pump and the variable displacement pump . . . . . . . . 16
D . Disassembling the service pump (18 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
E . Reassembling the service pump (18 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
F . Disassembling the lubricating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
G . Reassembling the lubricating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09J01.1
¤ H
09J01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
The variable displacement pump has maximum

A . General capacity of 60cc, and a 400 bar maximum pressure.
The gear ratio is 67/58. Drive is transmitted directly to
The steering pump is fitted at the end of the variable the gearbox by a gear train. The pump is fitted to the
displacement pump. It is a 19cc fixed displacement gearbox housing by two HM 12 screws.
pump, with a 120 bar maximum pressure and a gear
The service pump (18 bar) is a 14cc fixed displacement
ratio of 67/58. It is fitted to the variable displacement
pump fitted to the gearbox housing, and is driven by a
pump by two CHC M8 screws. It rotates around a
gear train.
coupling sleeve.
The lubricating pump is a fixed displacement pump. It
is a gear pump and is fitted to the same drive pinion as
the service pump. It’s capacity is 23.4cc.
Diagram of the variable displacement pump and steering pump
86 N.m
50 N.m
25 N.m
Variable displacement pump
VD pump control
Steering pump
Priority block
MA-09-04107A
Fig. 1
¤ H
Exploded view of the variable displacement pump.
14
15
16
17
18
19 10
9
8
13
7
6
12
5
11
4
3
20 2
21 1
22 26
23 25
24 Fig. 2
MA-09-04133A

2 Flange 15 Union
3 Screw 16 O’ring
4 Hose 17 Elbow union
5 Gasket 18 Hose
6 Plug 19 Screw
7 O’ring 20 Flange
8 Washer 21 O’ring
9 Rigid pipe 22 Collar
10 Screw 23 Hose
12 Union 25 Screw
13 Rigid pipe 26 Washer
¤ H
Exploded view of the steering pump

27
28
29
30
31
32
50
47
46
49
48 45
44
33
43
34
42
35
41
36
40
37
39
38
Fig. 3
MA-09-04134A

27 Screw 40 Union
28 Union plate 41 Seal
29 Hose 42 Union
30 Union 43 Rigid pipe
31 Screw 44 Union
33 Hose 46 Washer
34 Union 47 Screw
36 O’ring 49 Union
37 Union 50 Hose
38 Strainer
39 Seal
¤ H
Exploded view of the service pump (18 bar)
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
MA-09-04135A
Fig. 4

51 Screw 60 Cover
52 Rigid pipe 61 Catchdog
53 Union 62 O’ring
54 Screw 63 Hydraulic pump
55 Union 64 O’ring
56 O’ring 65 Insert
57 O’ring 66 Screw
58 Screw 67 Screw
59 O’ring
¤ H
Exploded view of the lubricating pump
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
MA-09-04136A
84
Fig. 5

68 Key 77 Suction filter
69 Washer 78 O’ring
70 Screw 79 Circlip
71 Screw 80 Pipe
73 O’ring 82 Pump
74 Filter 83 Drive pinion
75 Screw 84 Circlip
76 Cover
¤ H
B . Disassembling the steering

pump and the variable displacement
pump
NOTE: The pumps are removed and refitted through
the spacer hole, but to improve visibility the photos
show a scale model without an engine and with the
spacer removed in certain cases.
The references in the text refer to the following figures
(Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
1. Chock the tractor and take off the rear right-hand
wheel.
2. Remove the exhaust system.
3. Take off the right-hand protective guards. Fig. 6
4. Take off the protective guard over the right-hand
footstep.
5. Remove the right-hand footstep.
6. Drain and remove the fuel tank.
7. Drain the hydraulic oil.
8. Remove the protective housings that might
obstruct access.
9. Disconnect the hydraulic pipes connected to the
tank (Fig. 6 and Fig. 7).
Fig. 7
10. Disconnect the hose (33) from the steering pump

priority block.
Fig. 8
¤ H
11. Take out the attachment screws (10) from the

hydraulic pressure pipe of the variable displace-
ment pump.
Fig. 9
12. Take out the tank attachment screws.
Fig. 10
13. Remove the oil tank.
Fig. 11
¤ H
14. Take out the rigid pipe (9) through the port, then
disassemble it.
Fig. 12
15. Remove the hose (50) from the steering pump

priority block.
Fig. 13

union plate (28).
Fig. 14
¤ H
17. Gently remove the plate from the spacer, and

disassemble the hydraulic union from the priority
block.
Fig. 15
18. Remove the “Load Sensing” control pipe from the

variable displacement pump.
Fig. 16
19. Disconnect the hose (33) from the steering pump

priority block.
Fig. 17
¤ H
20. Loosen the collar (22), then disconnect the variable

displacement pump suction hose (23).
Fig. 18
21. Take off the rigid pipe (43) fitted with its strainer
(38).
NOTE: Access to the union is limited, so a 41 mm
pipe wrench is recommended.
Fig. 19
22. Remove the union (44) from the pump.
Fig. 20
¤ H

steering pump.
Fig. 21
24. Remove the steering pump.

25. Discard the O’ring.
Fig. 22
26. Remove the coupling sleeve.
Fig. 23
¤ H
27. Loosen and take out the screws (3), then remove
the pressure union of the variable displacement
pump.
NOTE: Access is limited, so a 10 mm multipurpose
wrench is recommended.
Fig. 24
28. Remove the return rigid pipe (13) to the variable

displacement pump tank.
NOTE: Access is limited, so a 27 mm pipe wrench
is recommended.
Fig. 25
29. Remove the screws (25) from the variable

displacement pump flange.
NOTE: Access is limited, so an 18 mm offset pipe
socket is recommended.
Fig. 26
¤ H
30. Support the variable displacement pump across

the housing with a wooden shim, and pull the
pump away of the gear teeth.
Fig. 27
31. Take the pump out of the spacer;

32. Discard the paper gasket.
NOTE: It is recommended to turn the suction
channel of the pump upwards and to remove an
attachment stud from the tank to extract the pump
more easily.
Fig. 28
¤ H
C . Reassembling the steering pump

and the variable displacement pump
33. Grease and fit new seals.
34. Screw two M12 guide studs into M12 screw holes
to assist pump assembly.
35. Insert the variable displacement pump into the
spacer and slide it onto the studs.
NOTE: A wooden shim can be fitted to assist pump
positioning.
36. Take out the guide studs and attach the pump Fig. 29
using the two M12 attachment screws (25).
37. Tighten the M12 screws (25) to a torque of:
86 Nm
38. Fit the return rigid pipe (13) to the variable displace- Fig. 30
ment pump tank.
NOTE: Access is limited, so a 27 mm pipe wrench
is recommended.
Fig. 31
¤ H
39. Fit the variable displacement pump pressure hose

(4).
40. Tighten the screws (3) to a torque of:
50 Nm
Fig. 32
41. Fit the coupling sleeve of the two pumps.
Fig. 33
42. Fit a new O’ring on the steering pump centring

diameter, and fit the steering pump in its housing.
Fig. 34
¤ H
43. Fit and tighten the steering pump screws (47) to a

torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 35
44. Fit the steering pump union (44).
Fig. 36
45. Fit the steering pump rigid pipe (43) fitted with its
strainer (38).
Fig. 37
¤ H
46. Connect the hose (23) on the variable displace-

ment pump suction channel, and tighten the collar
(22).
Fig. 38
47. Attach the hose (33) on the steering pump priority

block.
Fig. 39
48. Fit the elbow (17) on the variable displacement

pump.
Fig. 40
¤ H
49. Fit the steering pump priority block hose (50) and
tighten the three screws (27) to a torque of:
10 Nm
Fig. 41
50. Fit the hose (50) on the steering pump priority

block.
Fig. 42
51. Take out the pressure hose (4) from the variable
displacement pump through the spacer plug (6),
and connect it to the rigid pipe (9) of the washer (8).
Fig. 43
¤ H
52. Refit the stud if removed when extractng the

pump.
53. Clean the mating faces of the tank and spacer.
54. Smear one of the cleaned surfaces with sealing
product (ref. X903.050.074).
55. Fit the hydraulic tank.
Fig. 44
56. Fit and tighten the tank attachment screws.
Fig. 45
57. Tighten the screws (10) of the washer (8).
Fig. 46
¤ H
58. Fit the hose to the union (30).
Fig. 47
59. Fit the tank hydraulic channels. (Fig. 48 and Fig. 49)
60. Refit the protective housings that were removed.
61. Refit the fuel tank.
62. Refit the footstep.
63. Refit the protective guard over the right-hand foot-
step.
64. Refit the right-hand protective guards.
65. Refit the exhaust system.
66. Top up the hydraulic oil (approximately 65L).
NOTE: The recommended oil quality and quantity
should be respected.
67. Check the operation and tightness of the hydraulic
circuit.
68. Repair any defective elements or seals.
69. Refit the rear right-hand wheel.
Fig. 48
Fig. 49
¤ H
D . Disassembling the service pump

(18 bar)
NOTE: The service pump is removed and refitted
through the spacer hole, but to improve visibility the
photos show a scale model without an engine and with
the spacer removed in certain cases.
The references in the text refer to the following figures
(Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
70. take out the variable displacement pump from the
spacer (see “Disassembling the steering pump
and the variable displacement pump” section).
71. Loosen the screws (54) of the service pump union
(55).
Fig. 50
72. Take out the attachment screw from the union (55)
on the gearbox housing and remove the suction
pipe.
73. Discard the O’rings (56) and (57).
Fig. 51
74. Loosen the rigid pipe of the service pump pressure

pipe and remove the hydraulic pipe (52).
Fig. 52
¤ H
75. Take out the screws (51) from the service pump
and remove the pump.
76. Discard the O’ring (62).
Fig. 53
77. Check the condition of the service pump catchdog

(61) (arrow Fig. 54).
Fig. 54
¤ H
E . Reassembling the service pump

(18 bar)
78. Smear the service pump groove with miscible
grease and fit it with a new O’ring (62).
Fig. 55
79. Remove the insert (65).

80. Discard the O'ring (64).
81. Smear a new O’ring (64) with miscible grease and
fit it in the union flange groove.
Fig. 56
82. Refit the insert (65).

83. Tighten the diametrically opposed screws (66) and
(67) to a torque of:
10 Nm
Fig. 57
¤ H
84. Fit the catchdog (61) on the service pump pin.

NOTE: The service pump drive pin and gearbox
drive pin are at a right angle to each other.
To avoid incorrect refitting, the catchdog is
grooved on the pump side.
Fig. 58
85. Fit the pump in its housing.
86. Insert and tighten the screws (51) to a torque of:
49 Nm
87. Smear the O’rings (56) with miscible grease, and Fig. 59
fit them in the union (55) grooves.
88. Smear the O’ring (57) with miscible grease and fit
it in the suction flange groove.
Fig. 60
¤ H
89. Fit the suction elbow with the flange, and hold it in
position by fitting the attachment screw on the
gearbox. (arrow Fig. 61).
Fig. 61
90. Fit and tighten the screws (54) on the suction

flange.
Fig. 62
91. Fit and tighten the rigid pipe (52).

92. Refit the variable displacement pump. See “Reas-
sembling the steering pump and the variable
displacement pump” section.
Fig. 63
¤ H
F . Disassembling the lubricating

pump
93. Remove the transmission unit. See “Disassem-
bling the Dyna VT module” section.
NOTE: The references in the text refer to the
following figures (Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
94. Take out the screws (75), then remove the cover
(76).
Fig. 64
95. Remove the filter (74).
Fig. 65
96. Loosen the pipe on the pressure filter side.
Fig. 66
¤ H
97. Loosen the pipe on the rear axle side.
Fig. 67
98. Remove the circlip (79) from the suction pipe.
Fig. 68
99. Fit home the suction pipe in the suction filter pipe
to release it from the pump.
Fig. 69
¤ H
100.Loosen and remove the 2 screws (71).
Fig. 70
101.Remove the lubricating pump.
Fig. 71
102.Remove the suction pipe.

103.Discard the O’rings.
Fig. 72
¤ H
104.Take off the pump pinion circlip (84).
Fig. 73
105.Remove the pump pinion (83).
Fig. 74
106.Take off the key (68).

107.Check the pump condition, and replace it if
required.
Fig. 75
¤ H
G . Reassembling the lubricating

pump
mating faces and grooves must be clean. Any mud,
rust or water must be removed.
108.Fit the key (68) in its housing.
Fig. 76
109.Fit the drive pinion (83).
Fig. 77
110.Fit the shaft circlip (84).
Fig. 78
¤ H
111.Fit the pump in its housing in the gearbox. Hold it

in position using 2 screws.
112.Refit the pipe on the pressure filter side and rear
axle side (arrow Fig. 79).
Fig. 79
113.Prepare the suction pipe.

114.Fit the 2 O’rings (81) and circlips (79) as shown in
(Fig. 80).
Fig. 80
115.Fit the side not fitted with the O’ring in the suction
filter pipe (77).
Fig. 81
¤ H
116.Smear the O'ring with miscible grease and fit

home the pipe in the suction pump.
NOTE: The circlip groove on the suction filter pipe
side must be cleared.
Fig. 82
117.Smear it with miscible grease, then slide the O’ring

into its groove.
Fig. 83
118.Fit the circlip in its groove.
Fig. 84
¤ H
119.Fit the pipe into the suction filter until it abuts

against the circlip.
NOTE: The circlip groove on the pump side must
be cleared.
Fig. 85
120.Fit the circlip on the pipe, on the pump side.
Fig. 86
121.Definitively tighten the pump attachment screws

to a torque of:
25 Nm
Fig. 87
¤ H
122.Fit the suction filter (74).
Fig. 88
123.Fit the cover (76) using the 3 screws (75).
Fig. 89
124.Tighten the screws (75) to a torque of:
25 Nm
125.Refit the transmission unit. See “Reassembling

the Dyna VT module” section.
Fig. 90
¤ H
Auxiliary hydraulics tests
09K01 - Auxiliary hydraulics tests
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Steering and cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C . High flow rate auxiliary hydraulic circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 09K01.1
¤ H
09K01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b
¤ H
A . General
Before starting the tests, run the engine at 2000 rpm
The hydraulic system fitted on tractors equipped with to raise the oil temperature to 60 °C (132 °F) minimum.
a DYNA VT transmission is made of two parts: To assist the rise in temperature, connect a flow meter
- the transmission hydraulic circuit to an auxiliary spool valve and limit the flow rate in the
- the auxiliary hydraulic circuit flow meter.
As soon as the oil temperature reaches or exceeds
60°C (132°F), switch off the auxiliary spool valve and
open the flow meter valve to the maximum.
Auxiliary hydraulic circuit
The auxiliary hydraulic circuit comprises two pumps. To carry out the tests indicated in this section, it is
One is a 19cc fixed displacement pump and the other recommended to use the following equipment, avail-
is a 60cc variable displacement pump. able in the AGCO network:
The fixed displacement pump supplies the following - MF 3001: Pressure gauge kit;
components: - MF 3016: 4 - 160 l/min (0.9 - 36 Gal/min) turbine
- the steering spool valve, flow meter kit;
- the cooling system. - MF 3017: Pipe assembly for MF 3016 flow meter;
- 3582045M1: Female diagnostics coupler; If not avail-
The variable displacement pump supplies the able, use equivalent equipment;
following components: - AG01A: Hydraulic measurement and testing instru-
- trailer braking, ment kit (see § D).
- ParkLock circuit,
- auxiliary spool valves, REMINDER: In all cases, ensure the direction of oil flow
- lift control spool valve, is correct in order to avoid any damage to the flow
- optional equipment fitted on the auxiliary spool meter.
valves circuit. Also choose pressure gauges, pipes and unions of
sufficient capacity and strength for the checks to be
carried out.
Both pumps are installed in the cast-iron hydraulic tank
used as a spacer between the gearbox and the engine.
NOTE: It may be necessary to adapt the tests proposed
in this manual according to the function to be tested.
In all cases, ensure that the suitable test equipment is
Transmission hydraulic circuit used. In the case of pressure gauges, always use a
The transmission hydraulic circuit comprises two fixed pressure resistance greater than the pressure of the
displacement pumps. Their displacement is of 14 cc tested function.
and 23.4 cc. They supply:
- 14 cc pump: the transmission control circuit (sole-
noid valves, clutches)
- 23.4 cc pump: the gearbox lubricating and cooling
circuit (hydraulic cooler, lubrication)
For the hydraulic tests concerning the transmission
circuit, see chapter 5.
¤ H
Main functions tested
Pressures (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

Values (bar) Pressure
Ref. Description
min. max. gauge to use
P1 (PpAC) Cooling circuit pressure 5 10 30
P2 Max. steering circuit pressure 160 270
P3 Orbitol shock valve opening pressure - 225 to 245 270
P4 (PpPPV) Variable displacement pump discharge pressure 22 200 270
P5 (PpLS) XLS control line pressure 4 210 30 or 270
P6 Trailer braking pressure 0 140 270
P7 Lift control shock valve opening pressure 225 270
P8 (PpT) Tank return line pressure 0 5 270
Flow rates (Fig. 3)

Values
Ref. Description
(L/min)
Q1 Max. flow rate of the 19cc pump at 2,200 rpm (steering / cooling circuit) 48
Q2 Max. flow rate of the 60cc pump at 2,200 rpm (high flow rate circuit) 140
Q3 Max. flow rate of the trailer brake system at 2,200 rpm 50
Distribution block pressure connectors
Fig. 1
¤ H
Pressure tests
P2
P3
P1
P8
P5
P6
P7
P4
Fig. 2
¤ H
Flow rate tests
Q1
Q2 Q3
Fig. 3
¤ H
B . Steering and cooling circuit

Maximum 19cc pump flow rate
- Connect a flow meter in series with the hydraulic
cooler.
NOTE: The flow meter should be connected using
locally made unions.
NOTE: Check that the flow meter load valve remains
fully open.
- Without turning the steering wheel, check the Q1
max. flow rate.
Engine speed Flow rate (no action on

steering)
1000 19 L/min Fig. 4
2200 48 L/min
Cooling circuit pressure

The cooler is protected by means of a by-pass valve
calibrated to 5 bar. It is fitted in parallel at the level of
the distribution block.
- Connect a pressure gauge (max. 30 bar) to the
“PpAC” diagnostics connector (P1) (Fig. 4) located at
the front of the distribution block.
- Check that the maximum pressure of the
circuit: P1 = max. 10 bar.
¤ H
Maximum steering circuit pressure

- Connect a T union between the steering ram and one
of the ram supply hoses.
- Connect a pressure gauge with a maximum capacity
of approximately 270 bar to the T union (Fig. 5).
- Start the engine.
- Turn the steering wheel to full lock.
- Check that the max. pressure P2 = 160 bar+/-10
Orbitol shock valve pressure

- Connect a T union between a steering ram supply
hose and the ram.
- On the T union, connect a hand calibrating pump
fitted with a 300 bar pressure gauge.
Fig. 5
- With the engine stopped, pump until the Orbitol
shock valve opens.
- Check that the max. pressure P3 = 225 - 245 bar.
Steering circuit leaks

- Run the engine at 1000 rpm.
- Turn the steering on full lock and apply a torque of
4 Nm to the axis of the steering wheel. The wheel
must not turn more than 2 rpm.
If the wheel turns more than 2 rpm, disconnect the
pipes that supply the rams, block the two ports and
then apply the same torque (4 Nm) to the steering
wheel. If it turns at less than 2 rpm, there is a leak at
the level of the ram.
¤ H
C . High flow rate auxiliary hydraulic

circuit
Checking the maximum pump pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of approx-
imately 270 bar to the PpPPV (P4) pressure
connector located to the right of the distribution
block.
- Connect a flow meter to an auxiliary spool valve.
CAUTION: Ensure that supply and return pipes are
connected in the correct direction (Fig. 6) in order to
avoid damaging the flow meter.
- Start the engine.
- Activate the concerned spool valve in fully open posi-
tion.
- Close the flow meter valve until the maximum pres-
sure P4 = 200 +/-5 bar is reached.
Fig. 6
¤ H
Checking the maximum pump flow rate

- Connect a pressure gauge to the PpPPV pressure
connector (P4) located to the right of the distribution
block (Fig. 6).
- As the flow rate per spool valve is limited to approx-
imately 95+/-5 l/min, connect a flow meter to two
auxiliary spool valves.
NOTE: Make a local assembly to connect two spool
valve supplies and two returns to the same flow
meter.
Ensure that suitable unions are used and that the
supplies and returns are connected in the correct direc-
tion.
- Activate the concerned auxiliary spool valves in fully
open position.
- Progressively close the flow meter valve, check the
P4 pressure and corresponding Q2 flow rate.
at 1000 rpm
Q2 flow rate P4 pressure
66 l/min. 110 bar
65 l/min. 130 bar
65 l/min. 150 bar
64 l/min. 170 bar
61 l/min. 190 bar
0 l/min. 195 bar
at 2200 rpm Fig. 7

Q2 flow rate P4 pressure
140 l/min. 110 bar
140 l/min. 130 bar
135 l/min. 150 bar
110 l/min. 170 bar
90 l/min. 190 bar
0 l/min. 195 bar
¤ H
Checking the discharge pressure and XLS

pressure
Definition of pressures
• The discharge pressure (P4) is measured at the vari-
able displacement pump outlet.
• The XLS pressure (P5) is the pressure necessary to
activate the requested function.
• The standby pressure or regulating pressure allows
to maintain a constant differential pressure between
the discharge pressure and the XLS pressure.
• The standby pressure is measured on the pump
discharge pressure connector, with the engine
running and the high pressure functions at rest.
IMPORTANT: In order to avoid damage to the low
capacity pressure gauges used during these tests, do
not activate any high pressure components (auxiliary
spool valve, linkage, trailer brake).
Check
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of approx-
imately 30 bar to the PpLS pressure connector (P5)
located to the left of the distribution block, then a
second pressure gauge with a capacity of approxi-
mately 30 bar to the PpPPV pressure connector (P4)
located to the right of the distribution block (Fig. 8).
- These diagnostics connectors are located on the
distribution block.
NOTE: The PpLS pressure connector (P5) is difficult to
access to. It may be necessary to make a union locally
for connecting the pressure gauge.
P4: Pump discharge pressure
P5: XLS line pressure
- Check P4 and P5. Fig. 8
Engine speed P4 P5
(rpm) (bar) (bar)
1000 22 4
2200 22 4
The P4 discharge pressure must be equal to the P5

XLS flow rate control pressure +18 +/-2 bar.
P4 = P5 + 18+/-2 bar
Note: The XLS pressure can be checked at the same

time as another high pressure function test. Checking
the XLS pressure on the P5 connector allows the Load
Sensing control line to be checked during action on a
high pressure function.
In this case, pressure gauges with a capacity of
approximately 270 bar must be used.
¤ H
Maximum trailer braking pressure

- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of 270 bar
onto the trailer brake coupler (Fig. 9).
- Press down the dual brake pedals.
- Check the pressure reading:
P6 = 140 +/-5 bar at 1,000 rpm and at 2,000 rpm.
Maximum trailer brake flow rate

- Connect a pressure gauge between the trailer
braking coupler and the optional tank return union
(Fig. 10).
- Check that the flow meter load valve is fully open.
- With the engine running, fully press down on the
brake pedals.
Fig. 9
- Check that the maximum trailer brake flow rate
Q3 = 50 l/min.
Fig. 10
¤ H
Checking the SMS management system of

electrohydraulic spool valves
The electrohydraulic spool valves are used to regulate
and store flow rates from the DOT MATRIX control
screen or from the DATATRONIC 3 (according to
option).
This function, along with the Kick out and floating posi-
tion functions, can be checked by connecting a flow
meter to the auxiliary spool valve and a pressure gauge
with a capacity of approximately 270 bar to the PpPPV
pump discharge pressure connector (P4) located to the
right of the distribution block.
The connection is identical to that used for checking
the pump Q2 flow rate (Fig. 11).
The connection allows different functions to be tested:
- Kick out
- floating position
- linkage / spool valve flow rate priority
Fig. 11
¤ H
Checking lift control shock valve opening

pressure
- Stop the tractor engine.
- Connect a manual discharge pump to the unions of
the pipes supplying the lift rams (Fig. 12).
- Check that the pressure P7 = 225 bar
Checking the tank return line pressure

- Connect a pressure gauge to the PpT pressure
connector (P8) located on the front of the distribution
block (Fig. 13).
- Run the engine at 2200 rpm.
- Actuate one or more high pressure circuit compo-
nents (spool valve, linkage, brakes, etc.).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
¤ H
D . Service tools
- AG01A: Hydraulic measurement and testing
instrument kit (Fig. 14).
Fig. 14
¤ H
¤ H
PRESSURE TESTS
X aux
P aux
T aux
B
A
B
A
P 3/4
T 3/4
B
X SUS P SUS T SUS A
LS 3/8
FS
B
135 bar P SUS
T P AUX
A
A1 P OPT
22 bar
P
P DIR
A2
F2 X OPT
X AUX B
X SUS
A
230 bar T OPT

T SUS
Tx T AUX
Px T DIR
AC
LS PV
Pp
FR
P1
5 bar
TC
Pp
Pp B
A
P6 Pp
P8
PPp
T
P5
P4 P7
P2 OSPFD 80/240
160 bar
7 bar
P3
60 cc 19 cc
1 1
90
2
A B 90
180
3 A 1
2 2
3 B 1
180
2
MA-09-03930A
Fig. 15
¤ H
FLOW RATE TESTS

X aux
P aux
T aux
B
A Q2
B
A
P 3/4
T 3/4
B
X SUS P SUS T SUS A
LS 3/8
FS
B
135 bar P SUS
T P AUX
A
A1 P OPT
22 bar
P
P DIR
A2
F2 X OPT
X AUX B
X SUS
A
230 bar T OPT

T SUS
Tx T AUX
Px T DIR
AC
LS PV
Pp
FR
Q1
5 bar
TC
Pp
Pp B
Q3 Pp A
PPp
T
OSPFD 80/240
T
160 bar
LS
P DIR
7 bar
60 cc 19 cc
1 1
90
2
A B 90
180
3 A 1
2 2
3 B 1
180
2
MA-09-03931A
Fig. 16
¤ H
Electrical equipment
10 - Electrical equipment
CONTENTS
10A01 - Fuse box
10A02 - Electrical diagrams
¤ H
Electrical equipment
¤ H
Fuse box
10A01 - Fuse box
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Fuse box for Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Fuse box - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
¤ H
Fuse box
¤ H
Fuse box
A . General
The fuse box elements are named depending on their
function:
F Fuse
SH Shunt (shunts are fuses)
R Relays
The fuses used are of different powers and sizes:
Amperage Size Colour

3 normal
5 min.
7,5 min.
10 min.
10 normal
15 min.
15 normal
20 normal
25 normal
30 normal
40 max.
50 max.
¤ H
Fuse box
SH4 15 min. Road lights (B)

B . Fuse box for Europe SH5 10 min. Dipped lights (B)
SH7 15 normal Direction indicator
Ref. Amp Size Protected function SH11 15 min. Direction indicator
F1 10 min. Front right- and rear left-hand side lights, back- SH13 15 min. Direction indicator
lighting of switches / console / cigarette lighter
SH14 15 min. Direction indicator
F4 10 min. Instrument panel, gearbox / differential / 4WD /
PTO / creeper unit switches R1 Handrail road lights (A)
F5 15 min. Brake lights R2 Fuel booster pump (ECU)
F6 10 min. DynaVT electrical control unit, Headland/SV1/SV2 R3 Electronic injection control unit (ECU)
switches R4 Reversing light (optional)
F7 5 min. Electronic injection control unit (ECU) control R5 Brake lights
relay, reversing lights relay
R6 1st additional ON/OFF spool valve (optional)
F10 25 normal Front work headlights on grille
F11 10 min. Air conditioning compressor R7 2nd additional ON/OFF spool valve (optional)
F12 15 min. Autotronic 4 calculator R8 Handrail dipped lights (A)
F13 7,5 min. Work headlights module R10 Power socket
F14 7,5 min. Electric rear-view mirrors (optional) R11 DynaVT actuator
F16 30 normal Injection pump stop solenoid valve, braking pres- R12 Wiper timer
sure sensor R14 Air conditioning
F17 3 normal Brake switches R15 + ignition on
F18 7,5 min. Linkage, diagnostics, braking circuit pressure R16 Cab suspension (optional)
sensor
R17 Front work headlights
F19 25 normal Pneumatic seat, fuel heater
R18 Rear work headlights
F21 7,5 min. Linkage
R19 Rear fender work headlights
F22 10 min. TOC/BOC switch, ParkLock switch, buzzer,
starter switch, reverse shuttle lever, throttle R20 Footstep work headlights
pedal position sensor, armrest, parameter display
selector switch R21 Left-hand direction indicator
F23 30 normal Cigarette lighter, radio, roof light R24 Right-hand direction indicator
F25 25 normal Hazard warning lights switch R27 Flashing beacon
F26 30 normal Power socket R28 Central direction indicator unit
F28 20 normal Electronic injection control unit (ECU) R29 Air conditioning compressor
F30 15 min. Thermostart electronic injection control unit R31 Front work headlights on grille
(ECU)
F31 15 min. ECU
(A): Tractors with Germany specifications only.
F32 10 min. Electronic injection control unit (ECU)
(B) : All models except tractors with Germany specifi-
F34 15 min. Dipped lights
cations.
F35 7,5 min. Horn
F36 15 min. Road lights
F37 5 min. Clutch safety switch
F38 7,5 min. Front left- and rear right-hand side lights, instru-
ment panel back lighting
F39 20 normal Side / road lights switch on handrails
F40 15 min. Left-hand direction indicator
F41 15 min. 5th auxiliary hydraulic spool valve (optional)
F42 5 min. ECU
F44 15 min. Right-hand direction indicator
F46 15 min. Rear windscreen wiper.
F47 10 min. Radio
F49 50 max. Cab suspension (optional)
F50 50 max. Air conditioning
F51 15 min. Instrument panel
F52 10 min. Power socket
F53 25 normal Front windscreen wiper
F54 30 normal Front work headlights
F55 25 normal Rear work headlights
F56 25 normal Work headlights on rear fenders and/or handrails
F57 30 normal Footstep work headlights
F58 7,5 min. Work headlights module
F59 10 min. Flashing beacon
F60 10 min. + ignition on relay control
F61 25 normal Hazard warning lights
F62 40 max. Autotronic 4 calculator supply
SH2 30 normal Handrail work headlights on fenders
¤ H
Fuse box
R31 X14
X15
RESERVE
BLINK
R29 2 1
2 1
R30 PLAFOND
2 1
R27
BAF2 PILIER
R28
BAF1 2 1
SH3 SH2
X5 BAF3
SH1
BAF4
R20 R19
X3 SH14 SH13
R18
X13 X8
F61
F60 F59 F58
F62
40A R17
F57
X7
10A 10A 7,5A F56
25A
F55
R26
SH11
30A F54
SH12 25A F53

X12 R16
SH10 25A
X9
R24 30A
R25
SH6 SH8 R15
25A
R14 X10
R23
F47
10A R13
R22 F46
F49
15A
50A
F45
7,5A F50
F51 R11
R21 50A
F44
SH7 SH9
15A
F40 15A F42
F41 F43 F48
15A 7,5A 7,5A 15A F52 R12
5A R10
R6 R7 F39 R8 R9
F26 30A
R5 10A
F27 25A F25
25A
X6
20A F28 20A F23 30A
SH5 F33 F24
5A 10A
F38 F34 F32 F29 F21 F22 TB1-B
7,5A 15A 10A 15A 7,5A 10A BAF8
F37 SH4 F31 F30 F19
R4
5A 15A 15A 25A
F36 R1 R2 R3 F18 F17 1 2
15A 3A
7,5A
F35 F16
7,5A 30A
F15
40A
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F11 F12 F13 F14
F7 F8 F9 F10 X11
10A 15A 10A 10A 15A 10A 5A 15A 15A Res 10A 15A 7,5A 7,5A
MA-10-06072A
Fig. 1
¤ H
Fuse box
F59 10 min. Flashing beacon

C . Fuse box - North America F60 10 min. + ignition on relay control
F61 25 normal Hazard warning lights
F62 40 max. Autotronic 4 calculator supply
Ref. Amp Size Protected function SH3 30 normal Work headlights on footsteps and handrails
F1 10 min. Front right- and rear left-hand side lights, back- SH4 15 min. Road lights
lighting of switches / console / cigarette lighter
SH5 10 min. Dipped lights
F2 15 min. Roof direction indicators
F3 10 min. Left-hand fender extension direction indicator
F4 10 min. Instrument panel, gearbox / differential / 4WD /
PTO / creeper unit switches SH10 15 min. Direction indicator
F5 15 min. Brake lights SH12 15 min. Direction indicator
F6 10 min. DynaVT electrical control unit, Headland/SV1/SV2 R2 Fuel booster pump (ECU)
switches R3 Electronic injection control unit (ECU)
F7 5 min. Electronic injection control unit (ECU) control R4 Reversing light (optional)
relay, reversing lights relay
R5 Brake lights
F10 25 normal Front work headlights on grille
R6 1st additional ON/OFF spool valve (optional)
F11 10 min. Air conditioning compressor
F12 15 min. Autotronic 4 calculator R7 2nd additional ON/OFF spool valve (optional)
F13 7,5 min. Work headlights module R10 Power socket
F14 7,5 min. Electric rear-view mirrors (optional) R11 DynaVT actuator
F16 30 normal Injection pump stop solenoid valve, braking pres- R12 Wiper timer
sure sensor R14 Air conditioning
F17 3 normal Brake switches R15 + ignition on
F18 7,5 min. Linkage, diagnostics, braking circuit pressure R16 Cab suspension (optional)
sensor
R17 Front work headlights
F19 25 normal Pneumatic seat, fuel heater
R18 Rear work headlights
F21 7,5 min. Linkage
R19 Rear fender work headlights
F22 10 min. TOC/BOC switch, ParkLock switch, buzzer,
starter switch, reverse shuttle lever, throttle R20 Footstep work headlights
pedal position sensor, armrest, parameter display
selector switch R21 Left-hand direction indicator
F23 30 normal Cigarette lighter, radio, roof light R22 Direction indicator and brake light on left-hand
fender extension
F24 10 min. Right-hand fender extension direction indicator
R23 Direction indicator and brake light on right-hand
F25 25 normal Hazard warning lights switch fender extension
F26 30 normal Power socket R24 Right-hand direction indicator
F28 20 normal Electronic injection control unit (ECU) R25 Right-hand direction indicator on rear fender
F30 15 min. Thermostart electronic injection control unit R26 Left-hand direction indicator on rear fender
(ECU)
R27 Flashing beacon
F31 15 min. ECU
R28 Central direction indicator unit
F32 10 min. Electronic injection control unit (ECU)
R29 Air conditioning compressor
F34 15 min. Dipped lights
R31 Front work headlights on grille
F35 7,5 min. Horn
F36 15 min. Road lights
F37 5 min. Clutch safety switch
F38 7,5 min. Front left- and rear right-hand side light, instru-
ment panel back lighting
F39 20 normal Side / road lights switch on handrails
F40 15 min. Left-hand direction indicator
F41 15 min. 5th auxiliary hydraulic spool valve (optional)
F42 5 min. ECU
F43 7,5 min. Left-hand direction indicator on brake light
F44 15 min. Right-hand direction indicator
F45 7,5 min. Right-hand direction indicator on brake light
F46 15 min. Rear windscreen wiper
F47 10 min. Radio
F49 50 max. Cab suspension (optional)
F50 50 max. Air conditioning
F51 15 min. Instrument panel
F52 10 min. Power socket
F53 25 normal Front windscreen wiper
F54 30 normal Front work headlights
F55 25 normal Rear work headlights
F56 25 normal Work headlights on rear fenders and/or handrails
F57 30 normal Footstep work headlights
F58 7,5 min. Work headlights module
¤ H
Fuse box
R31 X14
X15
RESERVE
BLINK
R29 2 1
2 1
R30 PLAFOND
2 1
R27
BAF2 PILIER
R28
BAF1 2 1
SH3 SH2
X5 BAF3
SH1
BAF4
R20 R19
X3 SH14 SH13
R18
X13 X8
F61
F60 F59 F58
F62
40A R17
F57
X7
10A 10A 7,5A F56
25A
F55
R26
SH11
30A F54
SH12 25A F53

X12 R16
SH10 25A
X9
R24 30A
R25
SH6 SH8 R15
25A
R14 X10
R23
F47
10A R13
R22 F46
F49
15A
50A
F45
7,5A F50
F51 R11
R21 50A
F44
SH7 SH9
15A
F40 15A F42
F41 F43 F48
15A 7,5A 7,5A 15A F52 R12
5A R10
R6 R7 F39 R8 R9
F26 30A
R5 10A
F27 25A F25
25A
X6
20A F28 20A F23 30A
SH5 F33 F24
5A 10A
F38 F34 F32 F29 F21 F22 TB1-B
7,5A 15A 10A 15A 7,5A 10A BAF8
F37 SH4 F31 F30 F19
R4
5A 15A 15A 25A
F36 R1 R2 R3 F18 F17 1 2
15A 3A
7,5A
F35 F16
7,5A 30A
F15
40A
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F11 F12 F13 F14
F7 F8 F9 F10 X11
10A 15A 10A 10A 15A 10A 5A 15A 15A Res 10A 15A 7,5A 7,5A
MA-10-06073A
Fig. 2
¤ H
Fuse box
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
10A02 - Electrical diagrams
CONTENTS
A . Cab equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Engine equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
C . Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
D . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
E . Electronic units supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 2.a 10A02.1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
10A02.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 2.a
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
A . Cab equipment
General power supply of fuse box with cut-out switch ....... 5
General power supply of fuse box without cut-out
switch......................................................................... 6
Right-hand side cigarette lighter ................................ 7
Left-hand side cigarette lighter .................................. 8
Power socket ............................................................. 9
Horn ......................................................................... 10
Front windscreen wiper ........................................... 11
Rear windscreen wiper ............................................ 12
Cab suspension........................................................ 13
Pneumatic seat ........................................................ 14
Radio - Europe (except Germany) ............................ 15
Radio - North America .............................................. 16
Radio - Germany....................................................... 17
Manual air conditioning for standard roof................. 18
Manual air conditioning for high visibility roof .......... 19
Automatic air conditioning........................................ 20
Standard ventilation for standard roof ...................... 21
Standard ventilation for high visibility roof ............... 22
Extreme cold weather air conditioning..................... 23
Electrical rear view mirrors....................................... 24
Door switch.............................................................. 25
Instrument panel controls ........................................ 26
Radar ........................................................................ 27
Fieldstar.................................................................... 28
Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge ................................... 29
Emergency handbrake ............................................. 30
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
General power supply of fuse box with

cut-out switch
2 Fuse box 20
3 Start switch
5 Supply terminal
20 Cut-out switch
25 Starter motor
46 Alternator
FAI 13 Fuse box supply harness
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness
2 + - + - 3A
FAI 137 Battery +12V fuse box supply harness X1 +12V MASSE BAF
FAI 138 Ignition on +12V fuse box supply harness X1.1/MASSE_BAF.1 N 1
1
FAI 139 Instrument panel +ignition on harness
X2 FAI138
X2.1/CAB120.1 R
1
CAB120 1
+12V
CAB120 1
1 X 1 Y
R
CAB120.1/S1.1
FAI139
25
+12V
1 X4 1 X3
S1
+12V ACC
R
R
R
X2.1/CAB34.1
X2.1/CAB33.1
X2.1/CAB32.1
X2.1/CAB21.1
FAI35
1 CAB32 1 CAB34 1 CAB33 1 CAB21

225A
150A
X3.1/CAB22.1 R
1 XX 1
CAB22
S1.1/CAB24.1 M 3
46
1
CAB24
3
CAB121
CAB121.1/S1.1 M S1 S1.1/CAB23.1 M 2
1 1 1
5
CAB121 FAI137 CAB23
1 4
S1.1/CAB25.1 M
1
CAB25
MA-10-06057A
PLUS_CAB.1/CAB121.1 M 5 XXX
X4.1/PLUS_CAB.1 M
1 1
FAI13 PLUS CAB
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
General power supply of fuse box without

cut-out switch
2 Fuse box
3 Start switch
5 Supply terminal
25 Starter motor
46 Alternator 2
FAI 13 Fuse box supply harness +12V + - + -

X1 BAF
X1.1/MASSE_BAF.1 N
1 1
FAI 137 Battery +12V fuse box supply harness
FAI 138 Ignition on +12V fuse box supply harness
X2 FAI138
FAI 139 Instrument panel +ignition on harness
X2.1/CAB120.1 R
1
CAB120 1
+12V AP. CONTACT
CAB120 1
1 X 1 Y
R
25
CAB120.1/S1.1
FAI139
+12V
1 X4 1 X3
S1
+12V ACC
R
R
R
X2.1/CAB34.1
X2.1/CAB33.1
X2.1/CAB32.1
X2.1/CAB21.1
FAI35
1 CAB32 1 CAB34 1 CAB33 1 CAB21

225A
150A
X3.1/CAB22.1 R
1 XX 1
CAB22
46
S1.1/CAB24.1 M 3
1
CAB24
3
CAB121
1 1 CAB121.1/S1.1 M S1 S1.1/CAB23.1 M 2
1
CAB121 CAB23
5
FAI137
1 4
S1.1/CAB25.1 M
1
CAB25
MA-10-06058A
PLUS_CAB.1/CAB121.1 M XXX
X4.1/PLUS_CAB.1 M 1
1
PLUS CAB 5
FAI13
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Right-hand side cigarette lighter

2 Fuse box
18 Cigarette lighter
FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness
N CAB28
CAB03 Road lights switch CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
1 CAB03
2
8 1 2 3
7 4 5 6
BAF9 TB2
8
1 7
2 FAI35 6 +3 +6
2 3 5
4 4
BAF9.5/S2.1 R S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R
5 3 1 2
6 2
M
7 1
4
-7 2 5
8
S3.1/CAB3.5
6
5
9 CAB3
8
10
10
9
11
11
12
12
13
14
13
15
16
14
17
18
BAF9.15/S3.1 M S3
15
16
S3.1/BAF9.17 M
17
18
CAB73 1
F23 N CAB94.1/CAB73.1.1 N
F39 1
F1
BAF12 CAB94 1
1
F1- 10A 2
3
BAF12.4/S6.1 B S6 CAB95.1/S6.1 B
4
5 18
F39 - 20A
2
6
4
7 FAI31 CAB95 1
6
5
8
8
9
10
9
10
11
12
11
13
14
12
15
16
13
S11 S11.1/CAB96.1 M
17
18
14
BAF12.15/S11.1 M
F23 - 30A 15
16 CAB96 1
BAF12.17/S11.1 M
1 17
18
X4
MA-10-06044A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Left-hand side cigarette lighter

2 Fuse box
2
19 Cigarette lighter socket
FAI 15 Roof harness
FAI 124 LST pillar harness
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe
2
F23
BAF12
18
17
1
16
15
2
14
13
3
12
11
4
10
9
5
7
6
5
6
7
3
8
1
9
10
11
12
F23 - 30A 13
14
15 BAF12.15/S7.1 M S11 S11.1/CAB97.1 M
1
16
4 3
X4 17
18 2 1
FAI 31
CAB97 1 2 3 4
1 X1
CAB97 1 2 3 4
N
3 4
CAB103.3/X1.1
1 2
S3.1/R43.1 M S3 S3.1/R2.6 M ROOF2.6/CAB_97.1 M
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
6 5 4 2 2 3 1
1 1
3 2 1 6 4
FAI124 FAI126
R2 ROOF2 CAB103 CAB103
1 1
2 2
R3.6/R10.1 N CAB103.3/ROOF3.6 N
6 6 3 3
R3.5/R10.1 N ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N
5 5 4 4
4 4 5 5
3 3 3 1
6 6 6 5 4
FAI15
2 2 6 4
3 1
2
1 1
3 1 6 5 4
R43 1 6 4
R3 ROOF3
3 2 1
MA-10-06041A
1
R10
R44
N
R44.1/R49.1 N
19 1 1
R49
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Power socket
2 Fuse box
63 Cab interior electrical socket
FAI 70 Cab interior electrical socket harness
FAI31
F26 - 30A X4
6 5 4 2 1 S14.1/BAF12.18 M
3 18 1
FAI70 17
3 2 1 6 5 4 BAF12.16/S14.1 M
16
CAB88 15
14
BAF12.13/CAB88.6 R
6 6 13
CAB88.5/CAB73.2.1 N F52 - 10A
5 5 12
CAB88.4/CAB73.2.1 N
4 4 11
S14.1/CAB88.3 M S14
3 3 10
2 2 9
CAB88.1/S14.1 M X1X5
1 1 8
7
CAB88 1
6
5
4
2 5 3
3
2 4 R10
1 1
18
17
BAF12
3
4
5
16
15
2
14
13
X2
12
11
1
10
9
8
7
5
6
1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1
3
2
1
63 F26
CAB73 2 1 F52
R10
MA-10-06048A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Horn
2 Fuse box
3 Start switch
22 Wiper control unit
55 Horn
2
F53
FAI 13 Fuse box supply harness ENG1
18
17
FAI 17 Fuse box Ground harness 31 31 R15
16
15
55 BAF9
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 30 30 18
14
13
29 29 17
12
1
11
18
17
FAI 129 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness 28 28 16
10
2
16
15
27 27 15 3 2
14
13
B
26 26 14 4
5
6
F35
12
11
25 25 13 5
10
9
BAF10.4/ENG1.28
24 24 12 6
7
23 23 11 7
5
6
22 22 10 8
3
ENG1.28/ENG12.1
21 21 9 9
1
20 20 8 10
F35 - 7.5A
19 19 7 11
18 18 6 12
1 1 17 17 5 13
16 16 4 14
15 15 3 15
1
8
1 ENG11 1 ENG12 14 14 2 16
13 13 FAI35 1 17 FAI35
CAB17.7/BAF9.12
12 12 18
N
R15
11 11 BAF10
FAI129 10 10 30
ENG11.1/ENG9.1
9 9 85 86 13
8 8 12
7 7 87
11
13
7
6 6 BAF8 10
ENG9 5 5 9
4 4 1 8
1 2
3 3 7
2 2 3 6
1 1 31 20
F60 - 10A F53 - 25A 4 5
20 31
30 8 21
21
9
8
19
30 19 9 5 4
10 2 18
ENG1 29
18
7
2
3
10
22
6 BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.3 M
22
23
11
3
4
1
7
6
17
29
28 28
17
6
1
4
11
23
3
12
13
5
15
16 16
15
5
13
12
7 2
24 14 27 27 14 24
25 26 26 25 8 1
9
10 CAB17
1 X4 1 X3 1 X1X5 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
FAI13 I O
+ CAB J klaxon
X4.1/PLUS_CAB.1 R II
1 lave vitre
56b 56a L (10) H

(5) (6) (2)
CAB22
FAI35
X3.1/CAB22.1 B
2
5
1
22
1 4
X1X5.1/MASSE_BAF.1 N
3
N
1 FAI17 MA-10-06040A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Front windscreen wiper

2 Fuse box
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US) 22
FAI 127 US lighting harness
CAB17
CAB41 Front windscreen wiper motor CAB17.1/CAB41.4 B 1 1
LIG23 Windscreen washer pump R15 2 CAB20.2/CAB17.2 B 2 2
BAF7 FAI35 3 3
(4)
56
(3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
11 12 13
F60 - 10A 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
7
30
4 4
6
1
1 CAB41.1/BAF7.2 R 5 5
5
85 86
2
6 6 I O
3 J klaxon
4
X3 BAF7.4/CAB41.1 R 7 7
87 4 II
10
8 8
3
lave vitre
5
CAB17.13/BAF7.6 B 9 9
2
6
10 10
1
8
7 56b 56a L (10) H
11 11 (5) (6) (2)
8 CAB17.12/S9.1 R
2
12 12
9
13 13
4
3
10
1 F53- 25A
6
5
CAB17
8
7
X4
10
9
3 2 1
20 31
6 5 4 CAB41 21
9
8
19
30
10 2 18
R12 22 3 7 29
11 1 17
1 1 23 4 6 28
CAB41.2/CAB17.11 B 12 5 16
30 2 2 13 15
BAF8 24 14 27
3 3 25 26
85 87a 86
1 4 4
2 BAF8.2/CAB41.3 R 5 5
87 3 6 6
4 CAB41.3/BAF8.4 R
1
5 CAB41
X1X5 6 CAB41 31 31
7 30 30
S9.1/BAF8.8 R S9 29 29
8
9 28 28
10 BAF8.10/S9.1 R 1
27 27
CAB20 26 26
2
25 25
1 1 FAI127
2
24 24
2 2
23 23
4
3
CAB20 22 22
6
5
21 21
LIG1.20/CAB20.2 B
8
7
20 20
19 19
10
CAB28
9
18 18
B
CAB41.6/CAB28.1 N 17 17
1 31 20
F60-10A 30
19
8
9
21
16 16
LIG1.20/LIG23.2
18 2 10
29 7 3 22 15 15
17 1 11
F53-25A 28 6 4 23 14 14
16 5 12
27
15
14
13
24
13 13
26 25 12 12
GROUND 11 11
2 1
R15 10 10
LIG3 9 9
LIG23.1/LIG3.1 N 8 8
LIG23 7 7
6 6
R12 1 1
5 5
2 2
4 4
3 3
LIG23 1
2 2
LIG23 1 1
2
FAI36 LIG1 LIG1
MA-10-06042A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Rear windscreen wiper

2 Fuse box
FAI 15 Roof harness
CAB03 Road lights switch 8 1 2 3 R7
R7 Rear windscreen wiper switch
1
4
4
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
FAI124
R21 Rear windscreen wiper motor 7 4 5 6
2
5
5
2
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
BAF3
ROOF2.3/BAF3.14 R
3
3
6
14 14
1 13 13 R7 R7
F46-15A +8 1 +3 4 6
R15 12 12 R7.1/R7.6 B
BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B ROOF2 R2 1 1
X1X5 11 11
30 2 2
10 10 1 1 3 3
9 9 1 2
2 2 4 4
2
1
85 86
8 8 R2.3/R7.5 R
3 3 5 5
4
3
F1-10A 7 7 4 4 6 6
6
5
87
6 6 5 5 7 7
8
7
F60-10A 5 5 S7.1/R7.8 B -7 2 5
6 6 8 8
10
9
4 4
11
12
3 3
14
13
2 2 FAI15
1 1
S7
BAF3
6
4
5
7
R49
1
4
4
1 R7.7/R49.1 N
1
2
5
5
2
R21.4/R49.1 N
3
2
1
X3 18 18
17 17
3
3
B
16 16
M
15 15
R4.6/S7.1
14 14 R4 R4
S3.1/BAF9.17
F39 - 20A 13 13
BAF9.15/S3.1
1 1
3
12 12
1
1 11 11 2 2
10 10 3 3
4
X4
9 9 4 4
8 8 S3 5 5
7 7 6 6
M
6 6 4 4
R21.3/R7.2 B
5 5 3 3
S3.1/CAB3.5
R7.6/R21.2 B
4 4 2 2
FAI35
BAF9.5/S2.1 R
R2.3/R21.1 R
3 3 1 1
18
17
2 2
16
15
2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1 1 R21 R21
14
13
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16
12
11
BAF9 BAF9
10
9
8
R
S2
5
6
CAB3.3/S2.1
4
3
F60-10A CAB3
1
+3 +6
1 1
F46-15A
2 2
3 3
R21
4 4 1 2
R15 5 5
6 6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
7 7
8 8 -7 2 5 MA-10-06055A
F39-20A
CAB3
6
7
4
5
3
6
F1-10A 2
3
8
1
2
5
2
CAB03
4
8
7
1 CAB28
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Cab suspension
2 Fuse box
29 Control unit
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness
CAB108 Suspended cab switch
31 31 29
FAI37
30 30 LIG2
29 29
LIG1.22/LIG2.1 R
28 28 1
LIG1.23/LIG2.2 R
27 27 2
FAI126 LIG3.1/LIG2.3 N
3
26 26
LIG1.25/LIG2.6 B LIG3.1/LIG2.4 N
25 25 4
LIG1.24/LIG2.5 B
24 24 5
LIG_1.23/X9.1 R
23 23 6
LIG_1.22/X9.1 R LIG3.1/LIG2.7 N
22 22 7
X9.1/CAB108.2 R 21 21 8
20 20
19 19
18 18 1 2 3 4
17 17
8 7 6 5
16 16
X1.1/CAB108.7 N 15 15
14 14
CAB108 13 13
CAB108 12 12
1 11 11
+8 3 2 10 10
3 LIG_1.24/CAB108.3 B 9 9
4 8 8
N 1
5 7 7
6 6 6
-7 2
7 5 5
8 LIG_1.25/CAB108.8 B 4 4
3 3
X1 1 2 2
8 1 2 3 31 20 1 1
30
19
8 21
20 31 N
CAB
9
21 8
18 2 10 LIG1 LIG1 9 19
30
1
7 4 5 6 29 7 3 22
10 2 18
17 1 11
22 3 7 29
28 6 4 23
16 5 12
23
11
4
1
6
17
28
LIG3
15 13
12 5 16
27 14 24
13 15
26 25
24 14 27
25 26
X9 1
F49 - 50A X4
2 R16
1
30
85 86
F49-50A X1X5
1
87
R16
X3
MA-10-06014A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Pneumatic seat
2 Fuse box
CAB103 Pneumatic seat adjustment control
CAB103
18
17
16
15
14
13 F19 - 25A X2
BAF12.12/S2.1 R
12 1
BAF12.11/S2.1 R +APC
11
10
9
8
CAB103 7
6
S2.1/CAB103.1 R S2
18
17
1 5
16
15
2 4
14
13
3
12
11
1 2
10
9
1
FAI31
7
2
BAF12
5
6
4
3
2
1
CAB73 2
CAB103.2/CAB73.2.1 N 1
F19
MA-10-06049A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Radio - Europe (except Germany)

2 Fuse box
36 Laser radio F60-10A F47-10A
37 Loudspeaker
F39-20A
FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 36 37 37
R15
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) F1-10A
FAI 124 LST pillar harness F23-30A
FAI 129 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness

FAI 135 Lights module and radio ground harness 2
CAB03 Road lights switch FAI 60 R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
8 8
7
7 7
R22.1/R9.6 N
6 6
5
6
R41.1/R9.5 B
5 5
R9.4/R20.1 N
4 4
3
4
R9.3/R45.1 B S2
3 3 BAF9.5/S2.1 R
2 4 6 8 2 2
1
2
S3.1/BAF9.15 M
1 1
1 3 5 7 S3 S3.1/BAF9.17 M
R9 R9
R8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
R8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FAI 35
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
M
B
CAB03 CAB3
S3.1/R8.7
R8.6/S7.1
+3 +6 F39 - 20A
1
2
CAB3.3/S2.1 R
3
1 2 4
S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5 BAF12
6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N F1- 10A
7 1 1
8 2 2
-7 2 5
3 3
1 CAB28 4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 F23 - 30A 1
8 8
9 9
X4
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
BAF12.15/S11.1 M
FAI 124 15 15
CAB97 FAI 31 16 16 1
S11 BAF12.17/S11.1 M
17 17
S11.1/CAB97.1 M 18 18
1 1 F60 - 10A
ROOF2.6/CAB97.1 M X1-X5
S3 S3.1/R2.6 M 6 2 2
6 BAF12
5 5 3 3
FAI 60 4 4 3 4 4 4
3 3 4 3
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 CAB97 BAF3
2 2 R15
3 2 1 1 1 6 5 4 2 1
1 1 1
30
2 2
R2 ROOF2
3 3
X3
4 4 85 86
87a
5 5
31 31 6 6
31 20 30 30 20 31 7 7
30 8 21 21 8 30 87
19 9 29 29 9 19 8 8
18 2 10 10 2 18
3 2 1 6 5 4 29 7 3 22 28 28 22 3 7 29 9 9
17 1 11 11 1 17
R1 ROOF1 28 6 4 23 27 27 23 4 6 28 10 10
3 2 1 16 5 12 12 5 16
6 5 4 15 13 26 26 13 15 11 11
27 14 24 24 14 27
1 1 26 25 25 25 25 26 12 12
2 2 24 24 13 13
R1.3/R8.4 R ROOF1.3/BAF3.13 R
3 3 23 23 14 14
4 4 22 22
5 5 21 21 BAF3 F47 - 10A
R8.8/R1.6 N R1.6/CAB38.1 N
6 6 20 20
3 3 19 19
2 2 18 18
1 1 17 17
FAI 124 16 16
CAB38 CAB38 15 15
14 14 FAI129
13 13
ENG22
FAI135
3 2 1 12 12
1 2 3 FAI 35
S7 R4.6/S7.1 B BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B 11 11 ENG1.2/ENG22.1 N 1 1 ENG22.1/BAT1.1 N
6 6 1
10 10
5 5
9 9 ENG22 BAT1
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 6
1 1
5 5 MA-10-06054A
3 2 1 6 5 4 4 4
R4 ROOF4
3 3
CAB38.1/ENG1.2 N 2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Radio - North America

2 Fuse box
37 Loudspeaker
F39-20A
FAI 15 Roof harness 37 37
FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 36 R15
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness F1-10A
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US)

F23-30A
FAI 124 LST pillar harness FAI 15
2
FAI 135 Lights module and radio ground harness R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
1 2 3 4
CAB03 Road lights switch R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
R22.1/R9.6 N
4
R41.1/R9.5 B
3
R9.4/R20.1 N
2
R9.3/R45.1 B S2 BAF9.5/S2.1 R
1
S3.1/BAF9.15 M
R9
S3 S3.1/BAF9.17 M
R8 1 2 3 4
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
FAI 35
B
M
1 2 3 4 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
R8.6/S7.1
S3.1/R8.7
CAB03 CAB3
+3 +6 F39 - 20A
1
2
CAB3.3/S2.1 R
3
1 2 4
S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5 BAF12
6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N F1- 10A
7 1 1
8 2 2
-7 2 5 3 3
1 CAB28 4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 F23 - 30A 1
8 8
9 9
X4
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
BAF12.15/S11.1 M
FAI 124 15 15
FAI 31 16 16 1
CAB97 S11 BAF12.17/S11.1 M
17 17
S11.1/CAB97.1 M 18 18
1 1 F60 - 10A
ROOF2.6/CAB97.1 M X1-X5
S3 S3.1/R2.6 M 2 2
6 6 BAF12
5 3 3
5
FAI 60 4 4 3 4 4 4
3 3 4 3
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 CAB97 BAF3
2 2 R15
3 2 1 1 1 6 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
30
2 2
R2 ROOF2
3 3
4 X3
4 85 86
87a
5 5
31 31 6 6
30
31
8
20
21
30 30 20 31 7 7 87
21 8 30
19 9 29 29 9 19 8 8
18 2 10 10 2 18
3 2 1 6 5 4 29 7 3 22 28 28 22 3 7 29 9 9
17 1 11 11 1 17
R1 28 6 4 23 27 27 23 4 6 28 10 10
3 2 1 16 5 12 12 5 16
6 5 4 15 13 26 26 13 15 11 11
27 14 24 24 14 27
1 1 26 25 25 25 25 26 12 12
2 2 24 24 13 13
R1.3/R8.4 R ROOF1.3/BAF3.13 R
3 3 23 23 14 14
4 4 22 22
5 5 CAB38 21 21 BAF3 F47 - 10A
R8.8/R1.6 N R1.6/CAB38.1 N
6 6 20 20
3 3 19 19
ROOF1 2 2 18 18
1 1 17 17
FAI 124 16 16
CAB38 15 15
14 14 FAI129
13 13
3 2 1 ENG22
1 2 3 12 12
S7 R4.6/S7.1 B BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B 11 11 ENG1.2/ENG22.1 N 1 1 ENG22.1/BAT1.1 N
6 6 1
10 10
5 5
9 9 ENG22
4 4 FAI 35 8 8 FAI135 BAT1
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 6
1 1
5 5
3 1 6 5 4 4 4
2 R4 ROOF4 MA-10-06039A
3 3
CAB38.1/ENG1.2 N
2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Radio - Germany
2 Fuse box
37 Loudspeaker F39-20A
FAI 22 Radio harness 36 8 8 37 37
7 7 R15
FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 6
5
6
5
4 4
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 3 3 F1-10A
F007_HP_GAUCHE 0_6MM_BLANC
F008_HP_GAUCHE 0_6MM_NOIR
F005_HP_DROIT 0_6MM_BLANC
2 2
F006_HP_DROIT 0_6MM_NOIR
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) 1 1 2
F23-30A
HP HP
FAI 135 Lights module and radio ground harness R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
FAI 22
CAB03 Road lights switch R41 1 R22 1 R45 1 R20 1
7
R22.1/R9.1 N
4
5
6
R41.1/R9.3 B
3
R9.2/R20.1 N
2
3
4
R9.1/R45.1 B S2 BAF9.5/S2.1 R
1
2 4 6 8
1
2
R9 S3.1/BAF9.15 M
1 3 5 7 FAI 60 S3 S3.1/BAF9.17 M
1 2 3 4
ALIM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
ALIM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FAI 35
2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9
CAB03 CAB3
F003_PLUS_PERMANENT_RADIO 1MM_MARRON
F002_RETRO_ECLAIRAGE_RADIO 0_6MM_BLANC
+3 +6 F39 - 20A
1
2
CAB3.3/S2.1 R
F001_PLUS_ACC_RADIO 1MM_ROUGE
3
FAI 22 1 2 4
S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5 BAF12
6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N F1- 10A
F004_MASSE 1MM_NOIR
7 1 1
8 2 2
-7 2 5
3 3
1 CAB28 4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 F23 - 30A 1
8 8
X4
9 9
1 2 3 4 10 10
R8 1 2 3 4 11 11
12 12
13 13
M
14 14
BAF12.15/S11.1 M
FAI 124 15 15
S3.1/R8.2
16 16 1
CAB97 FAI 31 S11 BAF12.17/S11.1 M
17 17
S11.1/CAB97.1 M 18 18 X1-X5
1 1 F60 - 10A
S3 S3.1/R2.6 M ROOF2.6/CAB97.1 M 2 2
6 6 BAF12
5 3 3
5
FAI 60 4 4 3 4 4 4
3 3 4 3
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 CAB97 BAF3
2 2 R15
3 2 1 1 1 6 5 4 2 1 1 1
1
30
2 2
R2 ROOF2 X3
3 3
4 4
B
85 87a 86
5 5
31 31 6 6
R8.1/S7.1
30
31
8
20
21
30 30 20 31 7 7 87
21 8 30
18
19
2
9
10
29 29 9 19 8 8
10 2 18
3 2 1 6 5 4 29 7 3 22 28 28 22 3 7 29 9 9
17 1 11 11 1 17
R1 ROOF1 28 6 4 23 27 27 23 4 6 28 10 10
3 2 1 16 5 12 12 5 16
6 5 4 15 13 26 26 13 15 11 11
27 14 24 24 14 27
1 1 26 25 25 25 25 26 12 12
2 2 24 24 13 13
R8.3/R1.3 R ROOF1.3/BAF3.13 R
3 3 23 23 14 14
4 4 22 22
5 5 21 21 BAF3 F47 - 10A
R8.4/R1.6 N R1.6/CAB38.1 N
6 6 20 20
3 3 19 19
2 2 18 18
1 1 17 17
FAI 124 16 16
CAB38 CAB38 15 15
14 14 FAI129
13 13 FAI135
1 2 3
3 2 1 FAI 35 12 12
S7 R4.6/S7.1 B BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B 11 11 ENG1.2/ENG22.1 N ENG22.1/BAT1.1 N
6 6 1 1 1
10 10
5 5
9 9 ENG22 ENG22 BAT1
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 6
1 1
5 5 MA-10-06037A
3 1 6 5 4 4 4
2 R4 ROOF4
3 3
CAB38.1/ENG1.2 N
2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Manual air conditioning for standard roof

2 Fuse box
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAI124 ROOF4 R4
FAI 124 LST pillar harness 3 2 1
1 1
6 5 4
2 2
FAI 129 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness 3

4
5
3
4
5
R6
BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B R4.6/S7.1 B S7
2 6 6
ENG13 Compressor electromagnetic clutch
X3 1
ENG14 Air conditioning condenser pressure switch

R6 Air conditioning control BAF3
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 B
2
1
1
1 8 1 2 3
4
3
2
CAB28 7 4 5 6
3
6
F60 - 10A
5
4
FAI15
8
7
5
10
9
6
8 R6
11
12
7
7 R6.1/S7.1 B
14
13
8 +3 +6
1
6 R1.1/R6.2 R
F1- 10A 9 S3.1/CAB3.5 M 2
5 S2.1/R6.3 R
10
4 1 2
CAB3 R1.4/R6.4 B
3
11 4
3
12
R15 13
2 3 4
1 -7 2 5
14
30
BAF9.5/S2.1 R S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R 1 2
CAB3
85 86
BAF9
2
1
87
2
4
3 FAI35
6
5
4
S3
8
5
6
10
9
7
11
12
M
M
8
13
14
9
S3.1/BAF9.17
BAF9.15/S3.1
10
15
16
11
17
18
12 6 5 4
13 3 2 1
3 2 1
14 6 5 4
15 6 6
R14 16 5 5
30
17 4 4
18 3 3
ROOF1.2/X10.1 R R1.2/S2.1 R S2
85 86 2 2
ROOF1.1/X10.1 R
1 1
87
X1X5 ROOF1 R1
F39-20A
1
X10
1
F50-50A
X4
1 +12V
F11 - 10A X2
1 +APC 30
31
8
20
21 21
20
8
31
30
18
19
2
9
10
ENG1 10
9
2
19
18
29 7 3 22 22 3 7 29
17 1 11 11 1 17
28
16
6
5
4
12
23 1 1 23
12
4
5
6
16
28
27
15
14
13
24 2 2 24
13
14
15
27
26 25 25 26
3 3
2
1
4 4
4
3
5 5
6 6
6
5
7 7
8
7
R29
30
BAF1 8 8
10
9
9 9
11
12
1 10 10
85 86
14
13
2 11 11
3 12 12
87
4
BAF1.5/BAF1.6 B
FAI124 13 13
5 14 14
6 15 15
7 16 16
8 BAF1.8/ROOF1.4 B 17 17
FAI35 18 18
FAI129
9
10 19 19
11 20 20
12 CAB38.3/BAF1.12 B ENG1.21/CAB38.3 B 21 21 ENG1.21/ENG14.1 B ENG14.2/ENG13.1 B
3 3
13 2 2 22 22
14 1 1 23 23
24 24
CAB38 CAB38 25 25
26 26
1 1 ENG13 1
27 27
3 2 1 28 28
1 2 3 ENG14 1 2
29 29 1 2
R29 30 30
31 31
ENG1
F50
ENG14 ENG13
R14
F39
MA-10-06050A
F1 F11
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Manual air conditioning for high visibility

roof
2 Fuse box
FAI 59 High visibility roof harness
FAI 124 LST pillar harness R6
1
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe R11
R10
ENG13 Compressor electromagnetic clutch

2
ENG14 Air conditioning condenser pressure switch 30
R15
R6
R6 Air conditioning control 85 86

6
3
5
2
4
1
CAB103
6
3
6
2
5
1
4
3 2 1
6 5 4
R1.4/R6.1
R1.1/R6.2
B
R
1
2
6 3 2 1 3
87 5 5 6 5 4
4
4 4 R6.5/R11.1 N
CAB103.3/X1.1 N CAB103.3/ROOF3.6 N R3.6/R10.1 N 5
3 3 6 6
ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N R3.5/R10.1 N 6
2 2 5 5 R1.2/R6.7 R
7
1 1 4 4
3 3
CAB103 2 2
1 1 7 6 5
FAI126 ROOF3 R3 4 3 2 1
6 5 4
F60 - 10A X3
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 +12V ACC 6 5 4
FAI59
6 6
R14 5 5
30
4 4
3 3
ROOF1.2/X10.1 R
85 86 2 2
ROOF1.1/X10.1 R
1 1
87
X1X5 ROOF1 R1
X10
F50-50A
1
X4
1 +12V
F11 - 10A X2
1 +APC 31 20
21
20 31
30 8 21 8 30
19 9 ENG1 9 19
18 2 10 10 2 18
29 7 3 22 22 3 7 29
17 1 11 11 1 17
28
16
6
5
4
12
23
1 1 23
12
4
5
6
16
28
15 13 13 15
27
26
14 24 2 2 24 14 27
25 25 26
3 3
2
1
FAI124 4 4
4
3
5 5
6
5
6 6
7 7
8
7
R29
30
BAF1 8 8
10
9
9 9
11
12
85 86
1 10 10
14
13
2 11 11
3 12 12
87 4 13 13
BAF1.5/BAF1.6 B
5 14 14
6 15 15
7 16 16
8
BAF1.8/ROOF1.4 B
17 17 FAI129
9
FAI35 18 18
10 CAB38 19 19
11 20 20
CAB38.3/BAF1.12 B 3 3 ENG1.21/CAB38.3 B ENG1.21/ENG14.1 B ENG14.2/ENG13.1 B
12 21 21
13 2 2 22 22
14 1 1 23 23
24 24
CAB38 25 25
26 26 1 1 ENG13 1
3 2 1 27 27
1 3 28 28
2 ENG14 1 2
29 29 1 2
2 R29 30 30
31 31
ENG1
ENG14 ENG13
R15
R14
F39
F50
MA-10-06047A
F1 F11
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Automatic air conditioning

2 Fuse box
34 Automatic air conditioning control unit R34.2/R33.2 B
CAB27.2/ENG2.28 B
CA9 CA10 CA4 ENG2.29/CAB27.1 B
FAI 15 Roof harness

FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 5 1 5 1
CA2 FAI
R33
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 3 2 3 2 1 1
FAI 56 Automatic air conditioning - Instrument panel 5

5 3 2 1
5
5 3 2 1 2 2
harness CA7 1
2 4 1 5 4 3 2 1 CA9 2 4 1 5 4 3 2 1 CA10
2 1 R34
1 2 3 4
2 1
2 1
CAB27
CAB27
2 1
2 1 CA2
1 2 R49 1 2 1 R34 4 3 2 1 CA4
CA1 R33
FAI 57 Automatic air conditioning - Roof harness
CA9.3/CAB38.1 B
3 3
B
R
R
R
R
1
2
CA10.3/R34.1
S1.1/CA10.2
S1.1/CA9.2
S1.1/CA9.5
S1.1/CA10.5
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) 3
4
CA1.5/CA7.1 N
R33.1/R49.1 N
CA3.D/CA4.4 B
CA3.C/CA4.3 B
5
CA3.B/CA4.2 B
CA3.A/CA4.1 B
CA1.6/CA3.F B
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
FAI 124 Pillar harness CA1.7/CA3.D B
B
B
7
8 1 2
CA3.F/CAB27.2
CA3.E/CAB27.1
CA1.9/CA3.C B
9
CA1.10/CA3.H B
FAI 125 Automatic air conditioning adapter harness 10
A
11
B
12
CA3.G/CA2.1 B
C
F
CA3.H/CA2.2 B
13
FAI 126 Cab interior lighting harness (all countries
D
E
14
15 CA3 CA3
16
except US) 17
18
FAI57 A
B
C
A
B
C
FAI56
19

21
22
CA1.21/CA3.G B
D
E
F
D
E
F
CA1 23
CA1.23/CA10.1 B G G
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel 24

25
CA1.24/CA3.B B
CA1.25/CA3.A B
CA9.1/CA1.26 B
H H
26
ENG13 Compressor electromagnetic clutch S1.1/CA1.17
CA1.15/CA6.1
R
M
S1
CA6.3/S1.1 R
3
2
3
2
1 1
CA6.2/CA1.16 B
ENG14 Air conditioning condenser pressure switch X2 CA1.22/CA3.E B CA6 R50 1 2
1 +12V 3
ENG27 Outside temperature sensor BAF1

1 1
ENG1.21/CAB38.1 B S1
1
CAB38 CAB38 CAB38
1
ROOF4 R4
2 CAB38-.1/S1.1 B
3 3 3
F11 - 10A 1 1
4 2 2 6 5 4 1
2 BAF1.5/BAF1.6 R 1 1
2 2 3 2
5 2 1 3 3 6 5 4
3 3 2 1
6 1 2 3
CAB38 4 4
7 5 5
8 BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B R4.6/S7.1 B S7 S7.1/R50.2 B
6 6
9
10
11
B
BAF1.12/CAB38.3 B
12
1 ROOF3 R3
13
FAI124
R6.1/S7.1
14
CAB28 8 3 2 1 1 1 6 5 4
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 B
7 2 2
+3 +6 3 2 1 4
R29 6 6 5 4
3 3
BAF3 S3.1/CAB3.5 M R10 3
5 4 4
CAB3
2
1
30 R3.5/R10.1 N 2
1 4 1 2 5 5 1
CAB3.3/S2.1 R R3.6/R10.1 N
4
3
3 6 6 1
2
FAI35
6
5
3 2
85 86 R6
B
87a 1
8
7
4 8 1 2 3
-7 2 5
5
10
9
FAI15
S2.1/R6.3
6 7 4 5 6 CAB3 ROOF2 R2
11
12
87
7
14
13
8 6 5 4 1 1
3 2 1
2 2
F1- 10A 9 4 3 CAB97 3 4 3 2 1
10 3 3 6 5 4
11 4 4 1 2 4 4
2 1
12 BAF9.5/S2.1 R S2
FAI31 3 3 5 5
S3.1/R2.6 M S3 S3.1/R50.1 M
13 2 2 6 6
S11.1/CAB97.1 M ROOF2.6/CAB97.1 M
14 1 1
CAB103
CAB97
1
6 6
FAI126
3
R15 BAF9 S3 5 5
CAB103.3/ROOF3.5 N
4 4
6
5
1 CAB103.3/X1.1 N CAB103.3/ROOF3.6 N
3 3
7
2
8
30
2 2
3
10
9
6 5 4 1 1 3 2 1 6 6
4
11
12
85 86 5 5
5 3 2 1 6 5 4 BAF1.8/ROOF1.4 B R1.4/R6.4 B
CAB103 4 4
13
14
6
3 3
7 ROOF1.2/X10.1 R R1.2/S2.1 R S2 S2.1/R50.3 R
15
16
M
M
87
2 2
8
17
18
1 1
9 CAB1
S3.1/BAF9.17
10 BAF9.15/S3.1 3 2 1
6 5 4
11 1 ROOF1 R1
3 2 1
2 6 5 4
12
13 3
14 4
F60 - 10A 15 5 ENG1 ENG2
16 6
R14 17 7 1 1 31 31
18 8 2 2 30 30
S2.1/ENG1.27 B S2 ENG2.29/S2.1 B 29
9 3 3 29
ENG2.28/ENG27.1 B 28
10 4 4 28
30 F39 - 20A 27 27
11 5 5
X1X5 12 6 6 FAI129 26 26
25
B
85 86 13 7 7 25
1
14 8 8 24 24
ENG14.2/ENG13.1 B
S2.1/ENG27.2
15 9 9 23 23
87 16 10 10 22 22
B
X10 17 11 11 21 21
18 12 12 20 20
ENG1.21/ENG14.1
F50 - 50A 1 2
1 19 19
19 13 13
20 14 14 1 ENG13 1 18 18
21 FAI35 15 15
1
17
16
17
16
22 16 16 ENG14 1 2
CAB01
X4 23
24
17
18
17
18 ENG27 15
14
15
14
46
24
1
1 +12V 25 19 19 13 13
26 20 20 12 12
S11 CAB38.3/ENG1.21 B 11
27 21 21 ENG27 1 2 11
28 22 22 10 10
29 23 23 9 9
F39-20A
30 24 24 2 1 8 8
31 25 25 7 7
M
BAF12
F50-50A
M
32 26 26 6 6
1
1 CAB1.33/ENG1.27 B 5
33 27 27 5
BAF12.15/S11.1
3
2 4 4
BAF12.17/S11.1
34 28 28
3 3 3
6
5
35 29 29
4 36 30 30
T° 2 2
7
31 20 20 31
5 37 30 8 21
31 31 21 8 30 1 1
analog
10
19 9 9 19 20 31 31 20
9
6 38 29
18
7
2
3
10
22 22
10
3
2
7
18
29
21
9
8
19
30 30
19
8
9
21
17 1 11 11 1 17
ENG2
11
12
10 18
7 39 28
16
6
5
4
12
23
ENG1 23
12
4
5
6
16
28
22 3
2
7 29 29
18
7
2
3
10
22
11 1 17 17 1 11
8 40 15 13 13 15
ENG13
28 6 4 23
13
14
14 24 23 4 6 28
27 24 14 27 5 12
12 5 16 16
26 25 25 26
F23 - 30A 9 41 13 15
27
15
14
13
24
15
16
24 14 27
26 25
10 42 25 26
17
11
18
43
12
ENG14
68
23
45
44
13 45
14 46 CAB-38
15 47
16 48 1 1
17 49 2 2
S1.1/CAB38_.1 B
18 50
51
3 3
FAI125
R14 CAB-38 MA-10-06046A
52
1 X3 53 3 2 1
1 2 3
F1-10A F23-30A 54
+12V ACC 55
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard ventilation for standard roof

2 Fuse box
FAI 15 Roof harness
FAI 124 LST pillar harness 6 5 4 3 2 1
ROOF4 R4 6 5 4
CAB03 Road lights switch FAI124

3 2 1
1
2
1
2
3 3 R6
R6 Ventilation control 2 BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B
4
5
4
5
R4.6/S7.1 B S7
6 6
BAF3
2
1
1
1 8 1 2 3
4
3
2
CAB28 7 4 5 6
3
6
5
4 FAI 15
8
7
5
10
9
6 8 R6
11
12
7 CAB3.7/CAB28.1 B
7 R6.1/S7.1 B
14
13
8 6
+3 +6
1
9 S3.1/CAB3.5 M R1.1/R6.2 R
F1- 10A 5 2
10 4 1 2
CAB03 S2.1/R6.3 R
3
11 CAB3.3/S2.1 R 4
3
12 2
13 3 4
1 -7 2 5
14
BAF9.5/S2.1 R S__2 1 2
CAB3
BAF9
2
1
2 FAI 35
4
3
6
5
4
S3
8
5
6
10
9
7
11
12
M
8
13
14
9
BAF9.15/S3.1
S3.1/BAF9.17
10
15
16
11
17
18
12 6 5 4
13 3 2 1
3 2 1
14 6 5 4
15 6 6
R14 16 5 5
30
17 4 4
18 3 3
ROOF1.2/X10.1 R R1.2/S2.1 R S2
85 86 2 2
ROOF1.1/X10.1 R
1 1
87
X1X5 ROOF1 R1
F39-20A
1
FAI 124
X10
F50-50A
X4
1 +12V
2
X3
1 +ACC
R60
R15
30
85 86
87
R15
F60-10A
R14
F39
F50
MA-10-06052A
F1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard ventilation for high visibility roof

2 Fuse box
R6 Ventilation control
R11
R6
R6
1
R1.1/R6.2 R
2
3
4
R6.5/R11.1 N
5
6
R1.2/R6.7 R
7
2
7 6 5
4 3 2 1
FAI 124 FAI 59

6 5 4
3 2 1
3 2 1
6 5 4
6 6
R14 5 5
30
4 4
3 3
85 86 ROOF1.2/X10.1 R
2 2
ROOF1.1/X10.1 R
1 1
87
X1X5 ROOF1 R1
X10
1
F50-50A
X4
1 +12V
X3
1 +ACC R60
R15
30
85 86
87
R15
2
F60-10A
R14
F50
MA-10-06053A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Extreme cold weather air conditioning

2 Fuse box
43 Manual air conditioning control unit
FAI 15 Roof harness
FAI 124 Pillar harness
R49
R6 Ventilation control
1 R33.1/R49.1 N
R33 Water pump motor
F60-10A
R33
F46-15A
R15
R33/R47
1
2
2
1 2
FAI 15
43
ROOF2 R2
1 1 R34
2 2
ROOF2.3/BAF3.14 R R2.3/R21.1 R R21.1/R34.1 R
3 3 1
R34.2/R33.2 B
4 4 2
FAI124 3 2 1 5 5 6 5 4
5 4
6 6
6 3 1
2
1 R6
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2
BAF3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
F46 - 15A
2
X4
1 +12V R21
1 3 4
2
3 1 2
R15
4
30 F60 - 10A X3
1 +12V ACC
85 86
87
X1X5
1
MA-10-06051A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Electrical rear view mirrors

2 Fuse box
FAI 49 Electric rear view harness
R2
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) FAI 49
R4 R4
FAI 124 Pillar harness 8 8 R1.5/R4.1 B
1 1
R4
7 7 R4.2/S1.1 N
CAB03 Road lights switch 2 2
2
6 6 R2.3/R4.3 R
3 3
+3
5 5 R1.2/R4.4 B
4 4
R1 Rear view mirror adjustment switch
2
4 4 S2.1/R4.5 B
5 5
3 3
R2 Rear view mirror defroster switch 2

1
2
1
5
F39-20A
R4 Right-hand rear viw mirror R2 R2
-7
1
4 1
+8
R5 Left-hand rear view mirror 2 F1-10A
3 2
N
8 1 2 3
F14-7.5A
R2.7/S1.1
7 4 5 6
S1
N
R
B
N
N
R
R
6
R5
6
R40.1/R2.2
R40.3/R2.8
R40.2/S1.1
R2.3/R5.3
R2.2/R1.8
FAI 49
S1.1/R5.2
R1.4/S1.1
5 5
4 4 R10
3 3
ROOF3.5/X1.1 N R3.5/R10.1 N
2 2 1
X1.1/ROOF3.6 N R3.6/R10.1 N R5 R5
1 1
1 1
ROOF3 R3
2 2
3 3
X1 4 4
1 5 5
2 FAI124 ROOF4
B
B
B
BAF3 1 1
S2.1/R5.5
R1.1/R5.4
R1.6/R5.1
2 2 FAI 60 FAI 49
14 14 3 3
F1- 10A 13 13 4 4 5
R40
12 12 5 5
BAF3.11/ROOF4.6 B R4.6/S7.1 B S7 R40.3/S7.1 B 4 1
11 11 6 6 3 3
R49.1/R40.2 N
10 10 2 2
ROOF4 R40.1/ROOF4.1 R 3 2
9 9 1 1 S2
8 8
3
7 7 R40
1
4
6 6
2 1
2
5 5
5
F14 - 7.5A
1 2
2
5
4 4
B
BAF3.3/ROOF4.1 R
3 3
3
2 2
R1.7/S2.1
1 1 3
BAF3
3 R1
18 18 FAI 49
S3.1/BAF9.17 M 1 R49/R12
17 17
16 16 R1 R1 MIRRORS
15 15
M
14 14 1 1
2 2 L R
13 13
BAF9.15/S3.1
12 12 3 3
11 11 4 4
10 10 FAI 35 5 5
9 9 6 6
8 8
CAB03 7 7
7 7 CAB3 8 8
6 6 +3 +6
BAF9.5/S2.1 R S_2 1 1
5 5
4 4 2 2
CAB3.3/S2.1 R
3 3 3 3
4 4 1 2
2 2 S_3 S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5 5 1 2 3 4
1 1
6 6
BAF9 BAF9 7 7 5 6 7 8
8 8 -7 2 5
3
CAB3
F39 - 20A X4 MA-10-06038A
5
2
+12V
1
4
8
1 X2
CAB28
+12V CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Door switch
2 Fuse box
48 Roof light
FAI 15 Roof harness
FAI 124 LST pillar harness BAF12
2
R24 Door switch 2 1
4
2
6
5
3
8
4
10
9
5
11
12
6
13
F23
14
7
15
16
8
17
18
9
10
11
FAI 31
12
F23 - 30A 13
14
BAF12.15/S11.1 M S11 S11.1/CAB97.1 M
1 15
2 16
X4 BAF12.17/S11.1 M
17 4 3
18
2 1
CAB97 1 2 3 4
CAB97 1 2 3 4
R24 1 2
3 4
R24
1
1 2
2
S3.1/R46.1 M S3 S3.1/R2.6 M ROOF2.6/CAB97.1 M
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3 FAI124
FAI 15 6 5 4 2 2 3 1
1 1
3 2 1 6 4
B
R2 ROOF2
R24.2/R11.1 R24.1/R49.1 N
R47.1/R49.1 N
1 R11 1 R46 1 R47

1 R49
48
MA-10-06056A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Instrument panel controls

2 Fuse box
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel
CAB16 DOT MATRIX control keyboard CAB1
CAB31 Display selector switch 1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 2
11
12
FAI35
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F22
20
21
22
23
CAB31
CAB01 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
46
24
1
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40 2 1 CAB31
41 1 2
42
R
43
44
S5.1/CAB31.1
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
CAB1.52/CAB31.2 B 9 7 5 3 1 10
53 10 8 6 4 2 9
54 8
55
56 7 F22 - 10A X2
57 6
58 S5 BAF8.5/S5.1 R
59
5 1 +APC
4
68
23
45
60
61 3
62
63 2
64 1
65
66
67
BAF8
68
MA-10-06045A
CAB15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
5 6 7
CAB16
4
CAB15.1/CAB16.1 B
1 2 3
1
CAB15.4/CAB16.2 B
2
CAB15.5/CAB16.3 B
3
CAB15.7/CAB16.4 B
4
CAB15.6/CAB16.5 B
5
CAB15.2/CAB16.6 B
6
CAB15.3/CAB16.7 B
7
8 CAB16
9
6 5 4 3 2 1 10
7 8 9 10 11 12 11
12
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Radar
2 Fuse box
FAI 129 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness CAB01
1 1
FAI 130 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 2 2
3 3
CAB01
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel 4
5
4
5
6 6
TR27 Radar 7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
S24 CAB1.18/S24.1 B
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
TR31 1 31 20 32 32
20 31
30 8 21
21 8 30 ENG1 19 9
33 33
9 19
10 2 18
29
18
7
2
3
10
22
34 34
22 3 7 29 31 31 17 1 11 35 35
11 1 17
28 6 4 23
23 4 6 28 30 30 16 5 12 36 36
12 5 16
13 15 29 29 27
15
14
13
24 37 37
24 14 27
28
FAI130
26
25 26 28 25
38 38
27 27 39 39
26 26 40 40
ENG10 25 25 41 41
24 24 42 42
1 1 ENG1.23/ENG10.6 B S24.1/ENG1.23 B
45
23
68
23 23 43 43
2 2 22 22 44 44
TR27 3 3 21 21 45 45
4 4 20
TR27.1/TR31.1 N ENG10.5/S1.1 R S7.1/ENG10.5 R S7 20 46 46
1 5 5
TR27.2/ENG10.6 B 19 19 47 47
2 6 6 18
TR27 3
S1.1/TR27.3 R S1
7 7 17
18
17
48
49
48
49
4 8 8 16 16 50 50
9 9
10 10 FAI129 15
14
15 FAI35 51 51
14 52 52
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 11 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 13 53 53
12 11 10 9 8 7 12 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 12 54 54
4 3 2 1 11 11 55 55
ENG10
10 10 56 56
9 9 57 57
ENG1.8/S7.1 R BAF7.7/ENG1.8 B
8 8 58 58
7 7 59 59
6 6 60 60
5 5 61 61
4 4 62 62
3 3 63 63
2 2 64 64
1 1 65 65
66 66
ENG1
24
46
1
67 67
68 68
CAB01
BAF7
10 10
9 9 F16 - 30A X2
8 8
7 7 1
6 6
5 5
4 4 2 +12V
3 3
2 2
1 1
9 7 5 3 1
2 BAF7
10 8 6 4 2
MA-10-06043A
F16-30A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Fieldstar
2 Fuse box
33 Fieldstar terminal
FAI 68 Fieldstar harness
FAI 70 Cab interior electrical socket harness
1 4
33
FS1 LBS+ Fieldstar connector 16
10
5 9
15
22
FS5 23 28
FS2 Fieldstar Com Unit FS5
29
34 37
33
9 9
FS3 RS232 Fieldstar connector 8 8
FS5.7/S7.1 B
FS4 GPS Fieldstar connector 1 4 7
7 7
6 6
2 5 8 5 5 FS4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
3 6 9 4 4
3 3 FS4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 FS2
FS5.2/S6.1 B
2 2
1 1 A A
B
B B P
FS2
S4.1/FS4.31 R
N
E
FS5 C C M D
FS4.7/FS3.4
A F
L C
D D K
B
H
G
E E
F F
G G
FS3 FS4.26/FS3.9 B
H H
9 9
FS4.25/FS3.8 B
8 8 J J
FS4.24/FS3.7 B
7 7 K K
1 4 7 6 6
S7.1/FS3.6 B S7 S7.1/FS4.5 B
L L
S6.1/FS3.5 B S6 S6.1/FS4.6 B
2 5 8 5 5 M M
3 6 9 4 4 N N
S4.1/FS5.1 R
3 3 P P
2 2
R
FS2
M
1 1
FS2.H/S4.1 R
CAB88.6/FS2.F
N
R
FAI 68
N
FS3 FS3
FS2.P/S2.1
S4.1/FS4.37
FS4.36/S3.1
FS2.E/S3.1
FS1
F52 FS1.1/S3.1 N
1 1
FS1
+12V
2 2
3 3
S4.1/FS3.1 R
4 4 3
FS3.2/S3.1 N S4
2 FS1.6/S4.1 R
5 5 2 4
BAF12 FS5.8/S3.1 N 6 6 1
F26 - 30A S3.1/FS1.7 N 9 5
S3 7 7
BAF12.18/S14.1 M FS1.2/S3.1 N
1 18 18 8 8
17 17 FS1.3/S2.1 M 9 9
N
F52 - 10A BAF12.16/S14.1 M S2.1/FS1.4 M
X4 16 16
15 15 FS1
CAB88.5/S3.1
N
14 14 S2
M
13 13
S3.1/CAB88.4
12 12
CAB88.3/S2.1
F26 R10
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8 CAB88 CAB88
2 5 3 FAI 31 CAB88.1/S2.1 M
7 7 S14 S14.1/CAB88.1 M CAB88A.1/CAB88.1 M
R10 1 1 1 1
4
6 6 CAB88A.2/CAB88.2 B
2 2 2 2
1 5 5 S14.1/CAB88.3 M CAB88A.3/CAB88.3 M
3 3 3 3 FAI 70
4 4 CAB73.2.1/CAB88.4 N CAB88A.4/CAB88.4 N
4 4 4 4
3 3 CAB73.2.1/CAB88.5 N CAB88A.5/CAB88.5 N
5 5 5 5
2 2 BAF12.13/CAB88.6 R CAB88A.6/CAB88.6 R
6 6 6 6
1 1
CAB88 CAB88A
BAF12
1 MA-10-06059A
CAB73 2 1
X2
+12V
X1X5
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge

FAI 23 Cab linkage harness
FAI 128 Linkage with DUAL CONTROL harness
TR35
TR35 Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge 31 31
30 30
1 TR31
29 29 FAI128
FAI23 28 28 FAI130
27 27
26 26 TR36
25 25 TR35
24 24 1 1
L14.23/L20.8 B TR36.2/L14.23 B TR36.2/TR35.1 B 1
23 23 2 2
TR35.2/TR31.1 N 2
22 22 3 3
21 21 4 4
20 20
19 19 TR36
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
L14 L14
L20
CAB18
1 1
2 2
FAI31
1 1
3 3 2 2
4 4 3 3
5 5 4 4
6 6 5 5 FAI35
7 7 6 6
8 8 L20.8/CAB18.7 B CAB18.7/CAB10.61 B
7 7
9 9 8 8
10 10
11 11 CAB18
12 12
L20
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB01
CAB01
MA-10-06013A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Emergency handbrake
CAB54 Autotronic 4
TR20 Emergency handbrake switch CAB54
CAB50 20 31
31 20 21 8 30
CAB54 68 68 30 8 21
31 9 19
19 9 31 10 2 18
67 67 18 2 10
30 22 3 7 29
29 7 3 22 30 11 1 17
66 66 17 1 11
29 23 4 6 28
28 6 4 23 29 12 5 16
65 65 16 5 12
28 13 15
15 13 28 24 14 27
64 64 27 14 24
27 25 26
26 25 27
63 63 26 26
62 62 25 25
61 61 24 24
60 60 23 23
59 59 22 22
58 58 21 21
57 57 CAB54.21/CAB50.20 B 20 TR20.3/CAB50.20 B
20
56 56 19 19
55 55 18 18
54 54 17 17
53 53 16 16
52 52 FAI 31 15 15 FAI130
51 51 14 14
50 50 13 13
49 49 12 12
48 48 11 11
47 47 CAB50.10/CAB54.1 N 10 CAB50.10/S2.1 N S2 TR20.4/S2.1 N
10
46 46 9 9
45 45 8 8
44 44 7 7
43 43 6 6
42 42 5 5
41 41 4 4
40 40 3 3
39 39 2 2
38 38 1 1
37 37 4 3 2 1 TR20
36 36 4 3 2 1
CAB50
35 35 4 3 2 1 TR20
34 34
33 33
32 32
31 31 TR20
30 30
29 29
28 28
27 27
26 26
25 25
46
24
24 24
1
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13 MA-10-06066A
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
68
23
45
1 1
CAB54
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
B . Engine equipment
Air filter vacuum sensor ........................................... 33
Fuel gauge ............................................................... 34
Sisu engine power relay........................................... 35
Vistronic ................................................................... 36
Fuel preheater .......................................................... 37
Battery charge and engine start ............................... 38
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Air filter vacuum sensor

24 Air filter vacuum sensor
CAB1 CAB1
46
24
1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
24 5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
ENG1 ENG1 17 17
18 18
1 1 19 19
2 2 20 20
3 3 21 21
4 4 22 22
68
23
45
1 1
23 23
5 5
24 24
6 6
25 25
7 7 26
26
1 ENG15 1 ENG16 8 8 27
27
9 9 28 28
10 10 29 29
11 11 30 30
12 12 31 31
13 13 32 32
33 33
14 14
34 34
15 15
35 35
16 16 36
36
17 17 37
37
18 18 38
ENG39 38
19 19 39 39
ENG15.1/ENG39.1 N ENG1.20/ENG16.1 B CAB1.36/ENG1.20 B 40
1 20 20 40
FAI129 21 21 41 41
22 22 42 42
43
N 23 23 43
44
24 24 44
45 45
25 25 46
26 26 46
47
47
27 27 48
48
28 28 49
49
29 29 50
50
30 30 51
51
31 31 52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
31 20
20 31 56
30 8 21
21 8 30 57 CAB01
19 9
9 19 57
10 2 18 58
18 2 10
22 3 7 29 58
29 7 3 22
11 1 17 59
17 1 11
23 4 6 28 59
28 6 4 23
12 5 16 60
16 5 12
15 60
15 13
13
61
27 14 24
24 14 27
61
26 25
25 26 62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
MA-10-06060A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Fuel gauge
39 DynaVT dipstick
CAB1 CAB1
1 1
FAI 130 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 2 2
46
24
1
3 3
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel FAI 35 4 4
5 5
20 31
6 6 CAB01
21 8 30 7 7
9 19
10 2 18 8 8
22 3 7 29
11 1 17
9 9
23
12
4
5
6
16
28
10 10
13 15 11 11
24 14 27 CAB1.12/ENG1.25 B
25 26 12 12
13 13
14 14
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ENG1
15 15
16 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ENG1 17 17
18 18
19 19
B
20 20
ENG9
ENG1.25/ENG10.1
31 20 21 21
30 8 21
19 9 ENG10.2/ENG9.1 N 22 22
18 2 10 1
29 7 3 22 23 23
17 1 11
28 6 4 23 24 24
16
15
5
13
12
FAI129 25 25
27 14 24
1 2 3 4 5 6
26 26
68
23
45
26 25
12 11 10 9 8 7 27 27
28 28
29 29
ENG10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 30 30
31 31
ENG10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 32
33 33
6 5 4 3 2 1
34 34
7 8 9 10 11 12
35 35
N
36 36
37 37
S3.1/ENG10.2
38 38
39 39
40 40
41 41
42 42
B
43 43
S3
44 44
TR21.1/ENG10.1
N
45 45
FAI130 46 46
TR22.1/S3.1
47 47
48 48
49 49
50 50
51 51
52 52
53 53
1 TR21 1 TR22 54 54
55 55
56 56
57 57
58 58
39 59 59
60 60
61 61
62 62
63 63
64 64
65 65
66 66
67 67
68 68
MA-10-06062A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Sisu engine power relay

2 Fuse box
61 Grid Heater relay
FAI 13 Fuse box supply harness
FAI 17 Fuse box Ground harness 30
31
19
8
20
21
20 31 9
18
17
21 8 30 18 2 10
9 19 29 7 3 22
10 2 18 17 1 11
16
15
22
11
3
1
7
17
29 28 6
5
4
12
23
2
16
18
14
13
23 4 6 28
12
13
5
15
16 ENG2 27
15
14
13
24
26 25
17
12
11
24 14 27
ENG4 Electronic injection harness junction 25 26

1 1 16
10
9
2 2 15
7
3 3 14
5
6
4 4 13
3
2 5 3
5 5 12
1
6 6 11 4 R3
FAI35
7 7 10 1
8 8 9
FAI129 9 9 8
S14 BAF10.7/S14.1 B
10 10 7
11 11 6
BAF10.5/ENG2.12 B
12 12 5
13 13 4
14 14 3
S14.1/ENG2.15 B
15 15 2
16 16 1 F30 - 15A
17 17
18 18 BAF10
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22 FAI13 F42 - 5A
23 23 +CAB
24 24 PLUS_CAB.1/X4.1 R
1 1
25 25
26 26
X4
27 27
B
28 28
ENG2.12/ENG4.7 B
29 29 1 X1X5
ENG2.15/ENG4.15
20 31
21
9
8
19
30 30 30
22
10
3
2
7
18
29 31 31
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
24
13
14
15
27 ENG2 F42
25 26
MASSE_BAF.1/X1.1 N
FAI17 F30
ENG4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
R3
2
1
ENG4
61
FAI129
ENG29_B/ENG25.1 R
ENG29.1/S11.1 M S11 S11.1/ENG32.1 M
1 1
1 ENG25 FAI129 ENG29B F- 225A ENG29 ENG32

1
1 ENG25
MA-10-06061A
+BATT
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Vistronic
FAI 20 Vistronic harness
20
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel 20 31 31

21 8 30 30 8 21
9 19 19 9
10 2 18 31 31 18 2 10 500-2/3W-+/-5%
22 3 7 29 29 7 3 22
11 1 17 30 30 28
17
6
1 11
23
23 4 6 28 4
12 5 16 29 29 16
15
5
13
12
13 15
24 14 27 28 28 27
26
14 24
25 26 25
27 27
26 26 2 1 R1
25 25
B
B
24 24
23 23
R1.1/S2.1
R1.2/S1.1
22 22
FAI35 21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
17 17
16 16
15 15 ENG19
14 14 ENG1.6/ENG19.1 B ENG19.1/S1.1 B S1
1 1
13 13 ENG9.1/ENG19.2 N
2 2
12 12 ENG9.1/ENG19.3 N
3 3
11 11 ENG1.5/ENG19.4 B
4 4
10 10 ENG1.14/ENG19.5 B ENG19.5/S2.1 B S2
5 5
9 9
6 6
8 8
7 7
6 6 FAI129 ENG19
5 5
CAB1 CAB1 4 4
3 3
1 1 2 2
2 2 1 1
ENG1.5/CAB1.3 B
ENG19.3/ENG33.3 N
ENG19.2/ENG33.2 N
ENG19.4/ENG33.4 B
3 3
4 ENG1 ENG1
ENG33.5/S2.1 B
ENG33.1/S1.1 B
4
5 1 ENG9 FAI20
5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9 FAI35
10 10
11 11
12 12 5 4 3 2 1 ENG33
13 13
1 2 3 4 5
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32
CAB01 33 33
34 34
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
39 39
40 40
41 41
46
24
1
42 42
43 43
44 44
45 45
46 46
47 47
48 48
49 49
50 50
51 51
52 52
53 53
54 54
55 55
56 56
57 57
58 58
59 59
60 60
61 61
62 ENG1.6/CAB1.62 B
62
63 63
64 64
65 65
66 CAB1.66/ENG1.14 R
66
67 67
68 68
68
23
45
MA-10-06063A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Fuel preheater
2 Fuse box
ENG20 Fuel preheater
ENG9
ENG20.2/ENG9.1 N
1
ENG20
FAI129
1
2
ENG20
F19
1
31 20 20 31
30 21 21 8 30
19
8
9 9 19
2
18 2 10 10 2 18
29 7 3 22 22 3 7 29
17 1 11 11 1 17
6 23 4 6 28
28 4 23
12 5 16
16 5 12
13 15
15 13
24 14 27
27 14 24
25 26
26 25
ENG1
1 1
2 2
3 3
ENG1.4/ENG20.1 B
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
FAI35 12 12
BAF8 13 13
14 14
F19 - 25A 1
15 15
2
BAF8.3/ENG1.4 B 16 16
+APC 1 3
17 17
4
18 18
X2 5
19 19
6
20 20
7
21 21
8
2
22 22
9
23 23
4
3
10
24 24
6
5
2 25 25
26 26
8
7 27 27
10
9
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
MA-10-06064A
ENG1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Battery charge and engine start

2 Fuse box
3 Start switch
25 Starter motor
32 Safety switch
46 Alternator + -
47 Battery F51
CAB01
FAI 11 BOC - safety switch harness 47
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 2 F16
FAI 129 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness + -

ENG5 Start relay
L8 LS signal breaker solenoid valve
F37 ENG29B.1/ENG25.1 M
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB01 1 ENG25 1 Y
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB01
ENG29B 1 25
68 46
45 24 ENG29B 1
23 1
BAF7.8/CAB1.68 M
ENG1
225A
1 1
FAI 35 2 2
CAB28.1/CAB1.23 N 3 3 FAI 129
1
4 4
5 5 ENG29 1 ENG26
CAB28
6 6
2
7 7 1 1
BAF7.7/ENG1.8 B ENG1.8/S7.1 B S7 ENG29
4
3
BAF7 BAF7 8 8
9 9
6
5
ENG29.1/S11.1 M
B
1 1 10 10
8
7
2 2 11 11
S3.1/ENG26.1
20 31 31 20
10
12 12
9
+12V APC 3 3 21
9
8
19
30 30
19
8
9
21
4 4 22
10
3
2
7
18
29
13 13 18 2 10
29 7 3 22
1 5 5 11 1 17 14 14 17 1 11
23 4 6 28 28 6 4 23 ENG5
6 6 12 5
15
16 15 15 16 5 12
ENG5 86 30
X2 F16 - 30A 13
16 16
15 13
7 7 24
25
14
26
27
27 14 24
ENG1.29/ENG5.1 B
26 25
8 8 17 17 1 1
ENG5.2/ENG9.1 N
9 9 18 18 2 2 2
S11 ENG5.1/S11.1 M
10 10 19 19 3 3 3
S3 ENG5.5/S3.1 B 4
+12V 20 20 5 5
21 21 1
1 BAF10 22 22 ENG5
23 23 85 87
X4 F51 - 15A 18 18
24 24
17 17
25 25
16 16
26 26
15 15
27 27
14 14
2 28 28
13 13 BAF10.2/ENG1.29 B
29 29
12 12
30 30
11 11
1
ENG24
2
31 31
10 10
ENG24.1/S11.1 M 46
4
9 9 ENG1 1
FAI129
8 8 ENG9
6
5
7 7
8
6 6 1
10
5 5 9
11
ENG18
4 4 12
ENG18.1/ENG30.1 B
3 3 1
13
14
32 2 2
15
16
1 1
F37 - 5A
17
18
BAF10
BAF9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 ENG30.2/S7.1 B
2
1 2 1
BAF9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
ENG31.2/ENG9.1 N 2 2 ENG30
S3.1/ENG31.1 B 1 2
SECU1 1 SECU2 1 3 1 1
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
ENG31 ENG31
CAB14.2/SECU2.1
CAB14 18 10 6
16 14 12 8 4 2 FAI130
6 6
5 5
4 4 MA-10-06065A
L8 ENG31.2/L8.2 N
3 3 2
B CAB35.1/CAB14.2 B L8.1/ENG31.1 B
2 2 1
SECU1.1/CAB14.1 B 1
CAB14.1/BAF9.14 B
1 1
CAB35 L8
5 FAI 35 1 2
FAI 11 6 4 CAB14 3 2 1
3 2 1 6 5 4
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
C . Bulb types
Road lights Europe

Lighting Bulb(s) Type
Front road lights and dipped lights on grille
H4
12V / 60W/55W
Road lights and dipped lights on handrails
H4
12V / 60W/55W
Front side lights and direction indicators Direction indicator
12V / 21W
Position
12V / 5W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Side lights / stop lights and rear direction indicators Direction indicator
12V / 21W
Side light / Stop light
12V / 21W/5W
Flashing beacon(s) Flashing beacon
H1
12V / 55W
Reversing light Reversing light
12V / 21W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Work headlights Europe models

Lighting Description Bulb(s) Type
Four front work headlights on grille Single bulb Work headlight
H9
12V/65W
Four front roof headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
Xenon bulb Xenon bulb
GDL D2S / 35W
Two rear roof headlights Double bulbs Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
GDL D2S / 35W
Handrail headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
Fender headlights Single bulb Work headlight
H3
12V / 55W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Footstep headlights Single bulb Work headlight
H3
12V / 55W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Road lights - North America

Lighting Bulb(s) Description
Road lights and dipped lights Headlight
H4
12V / 60W/55W
Front side lights and direction indicators Direction indicator
12V / 21W
Position
12V / 5W
Rear side lights / stop lights and direction indicators with Direction indicator
fender extension (North America)
12V / 21W
Guard extension
12V / 21W
Side light / Stop light
12V / 21W/5W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Roof front direction indicators Direction indicator
12V / 21W
Roof rear direction indicators Direction indicator
12V / 21W
Flashing beacon(s) Flashing beacon
H1
12V / 55W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Work headlights - North America

Four front work headlights on grille Single bulb Work headlight
H9
12V/65W
Two front roof headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
GDL D2S / 35W
Two rear roof headlights Double bulbs Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
GDL D2S / 35W
Handrail headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
Fender headlights Single bulb Work headlight
H3
12V / 55W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Footstep headlights Single bulb Work headlight
H3
12V / 55W
Work headlights - High Visibility model

Two front roof headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3
12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
Two rear roof headlights Single bulb Work headlight H3

12V / 55W
Double bulbs H3
12V / 55W
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
D . Lighting
Instrument panel lighting ......................................... 49
Road lights and dipped lights - Europe..................... 50
Road lights and dipped lights - Germany.................. 51
Side lights - Europe .................................................. 52
High visibility and standard roof side lights .............. 53
Number plate lighting............................................... 54
Number plate lighting for high visibility roof............. 55
Standard roof direction indicator and warning lights -
Europe...................................................................... 56
High visibility roof direction indicator and warning lights
- Europe.................................................................... 57
Standard roof and fender extensions direction indicator
and warning lights - North America.......................... 58
High visibility roof and fender extensions direction indi-
cator and warning lights - North America................. 59
Standard roof direction indicator and warning lights
without fender extensions - North America ............. 60
High visibility roof direction indicator and warning lights
without fender extensions - North America ............. 61
Work headlights module .......................................... 62
Footstep lighting - Europe ........................................ 63
Footstep lighting - North America ............................ 64
Flashing beacons...................................................... 65
Standard roof work headlights ................................. 66
Xenon work headlights for standard roof ................. 67
Work headlights on grille.......................................... 68
Fender and handrail work headlights ....................... 69
Roof work headlights - North America ..................... 70
Xenon roof work headlights - North America ........... 71
Reversing light ......................................................... 72
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Instrument panel lighting

2 Fuse box
CAB03 Road lights switch
CAB28
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N CAB03
1
FAI35 8 1 2 3
7 4 5 6
8
7
6 +3 +6
S3 S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5
4
S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R
2 3 1 2
2
1
-7 2 5
CAB3
R
68
CAB28.1/CAB1.23
67
BAF9
S3.1/BAF9.17
S2.1/BAF9.18
66
4
65
6
5
1 64
63
8
2 62
10
9
61
3 60
11
12
4 59
13
14
58
5 57 46
15
16
68
6 56
45 24
55
17
18
7 54
23 1
8 53
52
9 51
10 50
49
F38 F39 11 Ole Object
48
47
12 46
13 45
44
F38 - 7.5A 14 43
15 42
41
16 40
17 39
R
38
18 37
36
CAB1.24/BAF9.16
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
F39 - 20A 26
25
1 24
23
22
X4 21
20
19
FAI35 18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6 CAB01
5
4
3
2
1
CAB1
MA-10-06031A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Road lights and dipped lights - Europe

2 Fuse box
FAI 35 Instrument panel Dyna VT with EEM harness
FAI 132 LST front headlights harness
ENG6 Right-hand road lights and direction indicators
ENG7 Left-hand road lights and direction indicators 22
13 8
7 1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
6 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
5
4
3
FAI35 2
1
I O
J klaxon
II
CAB17 lave vitre
18
17
18
16
15
17
14
13
L (10) H
12
16 56b 56a
11
10
(5) (6) (2)
9
15
7
14
18
17
5
6
16
15
CROISEMENT
13
3
MASSE
ROUTE
14
13
FAI129 12
1
BAF9
12
11
11
10
9
31 31
10 1
7
30 30
M
5
6
9 2
S4.1/ENG6.3 B 29 29
3
3 8 3
S3.1/ENG6.2 B S_3 ENG8.8/S3.1 B 28 28
1
ENG6
S13.1/CAB17.3
2 8 8 7 4
S4 ENG8.7/S4.1 B 27 27 SH4 F36 - 15A
1 7
6
7
6
26
25
26
25
FAI35 6
5
5
6
68
67
66
ENG6 5 5 4 7 65
ENG7.1/ENG8.4 N 24 24
4 4 3 8 64
ENG8.3/ENG6.1 N 23 23
3 3 2 9 63
22 22 CAB17.6/BAF9.10 B 62
2 2 1 10
21 21 61
1 1 11 60
20 20
ENG1.19/ENG8.8 B ENG1.19/BAF7.10 B BAF10 12 59
19 19 CAB17.5/BAF9.13 B
ENG8 ENG8 13 58
FAI132 ENG1.17/ENG8.7 B
18
17
18
17
BAF10.9/ENG1.17 B 14
BAF9.15/S3.1 M
57
56
15
16 16 55
16 54
15 15 S3.1/BAF9.17 M S3
17 53
14 14 52
18
13 13 51
12 12 50
11 11 S13 49
CROISEMENT
48
MASSE
10 10
ROUTE
SH5 F34 - 10A 47

9 9
ENG8.4/ENG9.1 N
46
ENG8.3/ENG9.1 N
8 8 45
B
7 7 44
43
BAF9.9/CAB1.25
S4.1/ENG7.3 B 6 6
3 42
S3.1/ENG7.2 B 20 31 5 5 41
2
ENG7
21 8 30 31 20
10
9
2
19
18 4 4 30
19
8
9
21 10 40
1 22
11
3
1
7
17
29
3 3 29
18
7
2
3
10
22 9 39
23 4 6 28 17 1 11
12
13
5
15
16
2 2 28
16
6
5
4
12
23
8 38
24 14 27
ENG7 25 26
1 1 27
15
26
14
13
24
7 37
25
36
6 35
ENG1 ENG1 5 34
ENG9 1
4
3
33
32
CAB01
BAF8
31
2 30
2
1 1 29
4
3
2 28
6
5
BAF7 3 27
F39 - 20A 26
8
7
4
25
10
9
5 24
BAF8.6/S13.1 M
6 23
F60 7 22
8 21
20
9
2
19
10
4
3
18
17
6
5
46
24
16
1
8
7
15
10
9
14
13
12
F53 R15
11
10
F60 - 10A 30 9
8
85 86 7
F53 - 25A 6
87
5
4
3
2
R15 1
68
23
45
CAB1
F39 FAI35
8
7
CAB17.4/CAB3.6 B +3 +6
6
S3.1/CAB3.5 M
5
4
SH5 3
1 2
2
F34 X4 X1X5
1
1 1 X3 1
SH4 +12V ACC
CAB3
8 1 2 3
-7 2 5
7 4 5 6
2 2 CAB03
MA-10-06020A
F36
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Road lights and dipped lights - Germany

2 Fuse box
CAB05
FAI 15 Roof harness 1 2
8
7 4
1 2
5
3
6 +8 1 +3
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 3

6
5 2
1
6
5
4
1
2
3
CAB5
1
4 3
2
FAI 35 Dyna VT with EEM instrument panel harness H4 3
2
H4.3/S1.1
R12.5/H4.2
N
B
S1
6 6
R2.5/R12.5 B
3
4
1 2
5 5 5
R12.4/H4.1 B R2.4/R12.4 B
FAI 124 LST pillar harness H4
1 4
3
2
4
3
2
6
7
8 -7 2
1 1
FAI 127 US lighting harness R12 R12
FAI34 FAI15
6 5 4
2 1

3
3 2 1
6 5 4
X1 1
6 6
5 ROOF2.5/BAF3.10 B
5
FAI 132 ML200 front headlights harness 1 2
4
3
4
3
ROOF2.4/BAF3.12 B
N
3 2
FAI127 FAI35
M
6 1
6 1 2

5 2
1 1
CAB103.3/X1.1
5 2 3
4
S3.1/CAB5.2
4 3
B
H4.3/S1.1 N S1 R2 ROOF2
CAB5.3/BAF9.11
3 6 6
R19.5/H4.2 B R2.5/R19.5 B
H4 2
1
R19.4/H4.1 B
5
4
5
4
R2.4/R19.4 B
3 3
CAB05 Handrail road lights switch H4 2
1
2
1 FAI124
6
3
5
2
4
1
13 8
22
7 1
3 2 1
ENG6 Right-hand road lights and direction indicators R19 R19

1 R10
6 5 4
6
3
5
2
4
1
CAB103 1 2 3 4 5 6
13
R3 ROOF3 CAB103 1 2 3 4 5 6
ENG7 Left-hand road lights and direction indicators 1 1
12
11
10
2 2 3 2 1
9
H4 Handrail road lights R37.1/S1.1 N
1 1
R37.1/R10.1 N
R3.5/R10.1 N
3
4
3
4
ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N
6 5 4
8
7 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
5 5 6 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
R37 R37 R3.6/R10.1 N CAB103.3/ROOF3.6 N
6 6 5
4
3
2 I O
BAF3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J klaxon
1
II
R38.1/S1.1 N R10.1/R38.1 N CAB17 lave vitre
1 1
18
17
18
16
15
R38 R38
17
14
13
L (10) H
12
16 56b 56a
11
10
(5) (6) (2)
9
15
18
14
17
5
6
16
15
CROISEMENT
13
3
MASSE
ROUTE
14
13
12
1
BAF9
12
11
11
10
9
31 31
FAI129 10 1
7
30 30
M
5
6
9 2
S4.1/ENG6.3 B 29 29
4
3
3
8 5 3 3
S3.1/ENG6.2 B S3 ENG8.8/S3.1 B 28 28 2
1
ENG6
S13.1/CAB17.3
2 8 8 7 4
1 S4 ENG8.7/S4.1 B
7
27 27 4 R1 F36 - 15A 68
7 6 5
26 26 1 67
6
ENG6 5
6
5
25 25 FAI35 5
4
6
7
66
65
ENG7.1/ENG8.4 N
ENG8.3/ENG6.1 N
4
3
4
3
24
23
24
23
3
2
8
9
64
63
CAB01
22 22 CAB17.6/BAF9.10 B 62
2 2 1 10
21 21 61
1 1 11 60
20 20
ENG1.19/ENG8.8 B ENG1.19/BAF7.10 B BAF10 12 59
ENG8 ENG8 19 19 CAB17.5/BAF9.13 B 58
13
FAI132 ENG1.17/ENG8.7 B
18
17
18
17
BAF10.9/ENG1.17 B 14
BAF9.15/S3.1 M
57
56
15 55
16 16
16 54
15 15 S3.1/BAF9.17 M S3
17 53
14 14 52
18
13 13 51
12 12 50
11 11 5 3
S13 49
CROISEMENT 2
48
MASSE
ROUTE
10 10 R8
4 F34 - 10A 47
9 9
ENG8.4/ENG9.1 N
46
ENG8.3/ENG9.1 N
1
8 8 45
B
7 7 44
43
BAF9.9/CAB1.25
S4.1/ENG7.3 B 6 6
3 42
S3.1/ENG7.2 B 5 5 41
2 20 31
ENG7
20
21
9
8
19
30
4 4 30
31
8 21 10 40
1 22
10
3
2
7
18
29 18
19
2
9
10
9 39
23
11
4
1
6
17
28 3 3 29
17
7
1
3
11
22
12 5 16 28 6 4 23
8 38
13 15
2 2 16 5 12
ENG7 24
25
14
26
27 15 13
7 37
1 1 27
26
14
25
24
36
6 35
ENG1 ENG1 5 34
ENG9 1 4 33
3 BAF8 32
31
2 30
2
1 1 29
4
3
2 28
6
5
BAF7 3 27
F39 - 20A 26
8
7
4
25
10
9
5 24
BAF8.6/S13.1 M
6 23
F60 7 22
8 21
20
2 9
2
19
10
4
3
18
17
6
5
46
24
16
1
8
7
15
10
9
14
13
12
11
F53 R15
10
30 9
F60 - 10A
8
85 86 7
F53 - 25A 6
87
5
4
3
2
R15 1
FAI35
68
23
45
CAB1
F39
R8
8
CAB17.4/CAB3.6 B 7 +3 +6
S3.1/CAB3.5 M 6
5
4
3
2 1 2
F34 X4
1
1 1 X3 1 X1X5
R1
+12V 8 1 2 3 CAB3
-7 2 5
7 4 5 6
2 CAB03
MA-10-06022A
F36
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Side lights - Europe

2 Fuse box
38 Trailer connector - Europe
FAI 35 Dyna VT with EEM instrument panel harness LIG4
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness (all countries except LIG4 LIG4
US) H1
LIG16
1 1
LIG13.1/S7.1 B S7 S7.1/LIG4.2 B
1 2 2
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) 1 2 2 1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1 N
3 3
R12 R12 4 4
FAI 61 Handrail lighting harness (all countries except H1 3
1 1
3 4
US) 1
2
R12.3/H1.2
S1.1/H1.3
B
N S1
2
3
2
3
3
R2.2/R12.3 B
3 1 2
FAI 124 LST pillar harness LIG17
N
LIG17.1/S8.1 B
1
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe 38
R37.1/S1.1
1 2 FAI 37
CAB03 Road lights switch 3 R37 R37
R37.1/R10.1 N
1 1
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights LIG5
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights R10
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights FAI 61

FAI 60 1 LIG3
LIG5
1 1
S8 S8.1/LIG5.2 B 2 2
1
H1 2 1 3 3
1 2 LIG5.4/LIG3.1 N
21
20
8
31
30
4 4
9 19
3 R19 R19 10 2 18
B
B
H1 22
11
3
1
7
17
29 LIG5
1 1 23 4 6 28 3 4
3 12 5 16
LIG1.2/S8.1
1 2 2
LIG1.1/S7.1
13 15
R19.3/H1.2 B R2.1/R19.3 B 24 14 27
1 2
2 3 3 6 5 4
25 26
S1.1/H1.3 N S1
3
3 2 1
N
R38.1/S1.1
1 2 R2 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
3 R38 R38
R10.1/R38.1 N ROOF2 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
1 1
2
B
B
3 2 1
ROOF2.1/CAB103.2
ROOF2.2/CAB103.1
6 5 4 31 20
30 8 21
19 9
18 2 10
29 7 3 22
FAI124 17 1 11
BAF5 BAF5 28 6 4 23
16 5 12
15 13
27 14 24
1 1 26 25
2 2 3 2 1
3 3 6 5 4
4 4
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
2
5 5
6 6
4
7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
8 8
6
5
9 9
6 5 4
7
8
10 10 FAI126
11 11 S3.1/CAB103.1 B 3 1 2
10
2
9
12 12 S2.1/CAB103.2 B
11
13 13
12
14 14
13
14
15 15 BAF5.1/S3.1 B S3 S3.1/LIG1.1 B
16 16 BAF5.2/S2.1 B S2 S2.1/LIG1.2 B
15
16
17 17
F39-20A
18 18
17
18
F38-7.5A
BAF9
1 1 8 1 2 3
CAB03 F1-10A
2 2
3 3 CAB3
F1- 10A 4 7 4 5 6
4
5 BAF9.5/S2.1 R 1 1 +3 +6
5
6 6 2 2
S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R
7 7 3 3
8 8 4 4
S3 S3.1/CAB3.5 M 1 2
9 9 5 5
10 10 6 6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
11 11 7 7
12 12 FAI 35 8 8
-7 2 5
13 13
14 CAB3
14
15 BAF9.15/S3.1 M
15
F39 - 20A 16 16
17 S3.1/BAF9.17 M
17
18 S2.1/BAF9.18 R
18
BAF9
F38 - 7.5A CAB28
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 10 6
1 MA-10-06016A
16 14 12 8 4 2
1 X4
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
High visibility and standard roof side lights

2 Fuse box
42 Trailer connector - North America LIG4
FAI 15 Roof harness 42
LIG4 LIG4
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness H1 6 1

LIG16
LIG16.1/S7.1 B S7 S7.1/LIG4.2 B
1 1
6 1 1 2 2
FAI 35 Dyna VT with EEM instrument panel harness 5 2
R12 R12
5
4
2
3
LIG4.4/LIG3.1 N
3
4
3
4
H1 4 3
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US) 1 1
1 2 2 3 4
R12.3/H1.2 B R2.2/R12.3 B
FAI 124 LST pillar harness 2
3 S1.1/H1.3 N S1
3
4
3
4 1 2
5 5 LIG17
N
6 6 LIG17.1/S8.1 B
1
R37.1/S1.1
CAB03 Road lights switch 1 2 FAI 36
B
3 R37 R37
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights 38
LIG1.1/S7.1
1 1 R37.1/R10.1 N
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights FAI 15 LIG5
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights R10

LIG5 LIG5
FAI 34 1 LIG3
1 1
S8 S8.1/LIG5.2 B
1 2 2
H1 6 1
6 1 3 3
2 31
LIG5.4/LIG3.1 N
5 2
5
21
20
8 30
4 4
9 19
R19 R19 4 3 10 2 18
B
4 3 22 7 29
H1 11
3
1 17
1 1 23 4 6 28 3 4
12 5 16
LIG1.2/S8.1
1 2 2 13 15
R19.3/H1.2 B R2.1/R19.3 B 24 14 27
1 2
2 3 3 6 5 4
25 26
S1.1/H1.3 N S1
3 4 4
5 5 3 2 1
N
6 6
R38.1/S1.1
1 2 R2 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
3 R38 R38
R10.1/R38.1 N R2 1 2 3 4 5 6 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
2 1 1
B
B
3 2 1
ROOF2.1/CAB103.2
ROOF2.2/CAB103.1
6 5 4 31 20
30 8 21
19 9
18 2 10
29 7 3 22
FAI 124 17 1 11
BAF5 BAF5 28
16
6
5
4
12
23
15 13
1 27 14 24
1 1 3 2
26 25
2 2 6 5 4
3 3
4 4
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
2
5 5
6 6
4
7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
8 8
6
5
9 9
6 5 4
7
8
10 10
11 11 S3.1/CAB103.1 B 3 2 1
10 FAI127
9
12 12 S2.1/CAB103.2 B
11
13 13
12
14 14 F39-20A
13
14
15 15 BAF5.1/S3.1 B S3 S3.1/LIG1.1 B
16 16 BAF5.2/S2.1 B S2 S2.1/LIG1.2 B
15
16
17 17
18 18 F38-7.5A
17
18
F1-10A
BAF9 BAF9
1 1 8 1 2 3
2 2
CAB03
F1- 10A 3 3 CAB3 CAB3
7 4 5 6
4 4
BAF9.5/S2.1 R 1 1 +3 +6
5 5
6 6 2 2
S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R
7 7 3 3
8 8 4 4
BAF9.15/S3.1 M S3 S3.1/CAB3.5 M 1 2
9 9 5 5
10 10 6 6
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
11 11 7 7
12 12 FAI 35 8 8 -7 2 5
13 13
14 14
F39 - 20A 15 15
16 16
S3.1/BAF9.17 M 2
17 17
S2.1/BAF9.18 R
18 18
F38 - 7.5A MA-10-06015A

CAB28
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
1 X4
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Number plate lighting

2 Fuse box
58 Number plate lighting
FAI 15 Roof harness
FAI 18 Number plate lighting harness
FAI18
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe 2
CAB03 Road lights switch R34B.1/R29.1 N 58
1
6 5 4
3 1
3 2 1 R34B
F39 - 20A 6 4
F38 - 7.5A FAI124 FAI15

ROOF2 R2
R34A.1/R29.1 B
1
1 1
ROOF2.1/CAB103.2 B R29 R29
3 1
2 2 R34A
3 3 R42.1/R29.1 N
1 1
6 4
4 4 R2.2/R29.2 B
2 2
5 5
6 6 R33B.1/R29.1 N
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103 1 58
1
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103 R33B
2
6 5 4 S3.1/CAB103.1 B
R29.1/R33A.1 B
3 2 1 1
S3 R33A
1 R42
FAI126
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
BAF5.1/S3.1 B
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF5
F38 - 7.5A CAB28 1
FAI35
F39 - 20A
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N 8 CAB03
X4 BAF9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 7
6 +3 +6
5
S2.1/BAF9.18 R S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R 4
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 1 2
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
3
2
8 1 2 3
1 -7 2 5
S3.1/BAF9.17 M S3.1/CAB3.5 M
7 4 5 6
CAB3
BAF9.15/S3.1 M
S3
MA-10-06017A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Number plate lighting for high visibility

roof
2 Fuse box
CAB03 Road lights switch 2 2 1
R41
R41
R41 Number plate light for high visibility roof 6 5 4 1
3 1
R42 Number plate light for high visibility roof 3 1

2
F39 - 20A 6 4
2
F38 - 7.5A FAI124

ROOF2 R2
1 1
ROOF2.1/CAB103.2 B R2.2/R41.2 B
3 1 2 2
6 4
3 3
4 4 R42.2/R41.2 B
5 5
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103 6 6 FAI59
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
R42
R42
R42.1/R11.1 N
1
6 5 4
S3.1/CAB103.1 B R41.4/R11.1 N 2
3 2 1
2 1
S3
FAI126
R11 1 R12 1
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 10 6
16 14 12 8 4 2
BAF5.1/S3.1 B
Ole Object
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF5
2
F38 - 7.5A
CAB28 1
F39 - 20A
FAI35
8 CAB03
CAB3.7/CAB28.1 N
1 X4 TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7
6 +3 +6
5
4
S2.1/BAF9.18 R S2 CAB3.3/S2.1 R 1 2
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
3
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2
8 1 2 3 1
-7 2 5
S3.1/BAF9.17 M S3.1/CAB3.5 M 7 4 5 6 CAB3
BAF9.15/S3.1 M
S3
MA-10-06018A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard roof direction indicator and

warning lights - Europe
2 Fuse box 2 BAF9
1 1
BAF9.1/CAB1.26 B
CAB1.27/BAF9.2 B
2 2
22 Wiper control unit 3
4
3
4
2
5 5
38
4
6
7
6
7
LIG5 LIG4
6
5
8 8
8
9 9
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 4 3 4 3
10
9
10 10
11
12
11 11
12 12
31 31 2 1 2 1
13
14
FAI 35 Dyna VT with EEM instrument panel harness 13 13 21
20 31
30
29
30
29
15
16
8 30
14 14 9 19
15
10 2 18
28 28
17
18
15 22 3 7 29
16
11 1 17 27 27
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness (all countries except 16 23 4 6 28
17
12 5 16 26 26
17 13 15
18
24 14 27 25 25
18 25 26
24 24
US) BAF9 23
22
23
22
R21 21 21 6 1
6 1
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) 2 5 3

20
19
18
20
19
18
LIG21 1 LIG19 1 LIG18 1 LIG5 1 2 3 4 LIG4 1 2 3 4
4
5 2
3
5
4
2
3
4 17 17
N
FAI 61 Handrail lighting harness (all countries except
B
B
1 16 16 LIG3 1 H1
3 3
1 15 15 R12.2/R4.4 B R12.2/H1.1 B
S10.1/LIG5.1
LIG18.1/S9.1
2
S9.1/LIG4.1
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
X-X5
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
2 1
H1
LIG19.1/S10.1
14 14 1 2
US) SH7- Eur

13
12
13
12
1 1
H1.3/S1.1 N
2
3 3
2
R12 R12
11 11
4
10 10
BAF5 9 9
6
5
18 18 8 8
8
7 7
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe 17 17
10
S1
9
6 6 R10.1/R20.1 N S1.1/R37.1 N
16 16 LIG1.5/S10.1 B S10 1 1
11
5 5
12
15 15 LIG1.4/S9.1 B S9
4 4 R37 R37
FAI61
13
14 14
14
CAB01 DCC2 Instrument panel 13 13 3 3
1
15
16
6
12 12 2 2 6 1
5 2
1 1
17
18
11 11 31 20 4 3
5 2
CAB04 Warning switch

30 8 21
10 10
9 9
LIG1 LIG1
29
18
19
7
2
9
3
10
22
FAI37 4 3
8 8 17 1 11 H1
28 6 4 23
SH1- EUR 7 7 16 5 12 3 3
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe 6

5
6
5
BAF5.6/LIG1.5
BAF5.5/LIG1.4
B
B
27
15
26
14
13
25
24
R19.2/R4.2 B
2
1
2
1
R19.2/H_1.1
H1.3/S1.1
B
N
1
2
3
1 2 H1
4 4 3
R19 R19
2
1
3
2
1
FAI126
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights BAF5
6 5 4
CAB103 3 2 1
R10.1/R18.1 N S1.1/R38.1 N S1
3 6 6 6 5 4 1 1
1
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights

2
5 5
R38 R38
X1.1/ROOF3.6 N 4 4
1 3 3
2 2 6 5 4
X1 3 2 1
1 1
5 4
ROOF4 R4 3 2 1
6
CAB103
1 1
R24 2 2
2 5 3 3 3
4 4
4 5 5
BAF3 BAF3 6 6
1
FAI124
1 1
SH9- Eur
2 2 FAI60
3 3
F44-15A
F40-15A
F61-25A
4 4
BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N
5 5 6 R3.6/R10.1 N
ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N 6
6 6 5 R3.5/R10.1 N
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B 5
7 7 4 4
8 8 3 3 R10 1
9 9 2
6 5 4 2 3 2 1
10 10 1 1
11 11 3 2 1 6 5 4
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
12 12
ROOF3 R3
13 13
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 BAF2.6CAB1.29 B
14 14 CAB1
BAF2.8/CAB1.28 B 1 2
1
CAB38 2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 BAF2 3
1
1 1 4
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B CAB38.2/S12.1 B CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
1 1 2 2 5
2 2 3 3 6
CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B
3 3 7
BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B CAB38
4 4 8
5 5
S12.1/BAF2.5 B FAI124 9
6 6 10
BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12 3
7 7 11
8 8 12
13
J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING
14
LCD 15
2
CAB17 16
MICRO-PROCESSOR
1 2 3 +
17
TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
4 5 6 1 18
4
3
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
(4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3 19
3 TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
SH13 SH14 4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6

J1-3
21
J1-17
5 J1-11
J1-15
22
7
68
23
45
O
6 I J TEMPERATURE
(J1-2)
J1-10
DL5
DL4
23
7 II VERDE/VERTE
LUMIERE/LUZ
(J1-18)
CONTACTO
CONTACT
(J1-5)
REF.NTC AGCO
3714264M1
DL1
DL6
24
H-ACTIVE H-ACTIVE DL2
8 J1_6 J1_12
WARNING
(ROJO)
(ROUGE) DL7 DL3 25
(J1-4)
9 L-ACTIVE
26
10
FAI35 11
56b
(5)
56a
(6)
L (10) H
(2)
27
28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17
6
F60 - 10A 33
16 34
5
3
15 35
1 R15
22
4
30 14 36
13
10
37
3
X3
85 86
12 38
2
F53 - 25A 11 39 CAB01
1
8
87
10 40
BAF8 9 41
8 42
1 7 43
2 6 44
3 5 45
4 4 46
F25 - 25A 5 3 47
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M
6 2 48
1 7 CAB4 1 49
8 50
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M CAB105
9 1 51
X4 CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
10 2 52
S12.1/CAB4.3 B
3 53
4 CAB105 54
6
4
1
5
7
5 55
6 56
3
2
1
7 -7 2 5
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B 57
8 58
2 4 6 8 10 59
CAB04 18
60
1 3 5 7 9 8 1 2 3
13
61
7 12 62
7 4 5 6 1 6
63
64
65
66
67 MA-10-06028A
CAB28 68
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N 1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
High visibility roof direction indicator and

warning lights - Europe
2 Fuse box
2
38 Trailer connector - Europe BAF9
BAF9.1/CAB1.26 B
1 1
CAB1.27/BAF9.2 B
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 2
3
4
2
3
4
2
5 5
FAI 35 Dyna VT with EEM instrument panel harness
3
LIG5
4
6 6 LIG4
7 7
6
5
8 8
8
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness (all countries except 9 9 4 3 4 3
10
9
10 10
11
12
11 11 31 31 2 1 2 1
US) 12 12 30 30 38
13
14
13 13 29 29
5 3
15
16
2 14 14 28 28
15 15
17
18
FAI 59 High visibility roof harness 1
4 16
17
16
17
27
26
25
27
26
25
6
5 2
1 6
5
1
2
1 18 18 24 24 4 3 6 6
X-X5
4 3
SH7- Eur 23 23 5 5
BAF9
22 22 4 4 H1
21 21 3 3
R12.2/H1.1 B
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe BAF5

20
19
20
19 LIG21 1 LIG19 1 LIG18 1 LIG5 1 2 3 4 LIG4 1 2 3 4
2
1
2
1
S1.1/H1.3 N
1
2
1 2 H1
2
18 18 3 3
R21 R12
4
18 18 17 17
N
B
B
LIG3 1
N
16 16
B
17 17
6
5
B
16 16 15 15
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
LIG18.1/S9.1
7
LIG19.1/S10.1
15 15 14 14
S10.1/LIG5.1
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
R
S P
S9.1/LIG4.1
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
10
14 14 13 13
9
T N
E D
13 13 12 12
11
12
U M
F A C
12 12 V L 11 11
13
14
11 11
G B
10 10 R10.1/R20.1 N R37.1/S1.1 N S1
W K
1 1
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe
15
16
X J
10 10 H 9 9
9 9 8 8 R20 R37
17
18
8 8 7 7
FAI34
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights SH1- EUR 7
6
5
7
6
5
BAF5.6/LIG1.5
BAF5.5/LIG1.4
B
B
6
5
4
6
5
4
LIG1.5/S10.1
LIG1.4/S9.1 B
B S10
S9
4 4 3 3
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights 3
2
3
2
2
1
2
1
30
31
8
20
21
FAI37
1 1 19 9
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights

18 2 10 1
FAI126 LIG1 LIG1 29
17
7
1
3
11
22
6
6 1
BAF5 28 6 23
5 2
4
16 5 12 5 2
4 3
15 13
24
6 6
27 14
4 3
6 5 4 CAB103 26 25 5 5
4 4 H1
3 2 1 6 6 3 3
5 5 R19.2/H1.1 B
2 2 1
4 4
1
X1.1/ROOF3.6 N 3
1 1 2 1 2 H1
3 S1.1/H1.3 N
3 2 1 3
2 2 R19 R19 3
X1 ROOF4 ROOF4
1 1 6 5 4
1 1
CAB103 ROOF4.2/R19.2 B
2 2
2 5 3 3 3
ROOF4.4/R21.2 B
4 4
4 5 5
BAF3 BAF3 6 6
3 2 1 6 5 4 R10.1/R18.1 N R38.1/S1.1 N S1
1 1
1
SH9- Eur
1 1 FAI124 6 5 4 3 2 1 FAI59
2 2 R18 R38
3 3
F44-15A
F40-15A
F61-25A
4 4
BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N
5 5 6 R3.6/R10.1 N
6 6 5 R3.5/R10.1 N
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B 5
7 7 4 4
8 8 3 3 R10 1
9 9 2
13 11 9 7 5 3 1 6 5 4 2 3 2 1
10 10 1 1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 11 11 3 2 1 6 5 4
12 12 ROOF3 R3
13 13
BAF2.6CAB1.29 B
14 14 CAB1
BAF2.8/CAB1.28 B 1 2
1
CAB38 2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 BAF2 3
1
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1 1
CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
FAI124 4
1 1 2 2 5
2 2 3 3 6
CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B
3 3 7
BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B
4 4 CAB38 8
S12.1/BAF2.5 B
5 5 9
6 6 10
BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12 3
7 7 11
8 8 12
13
J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING
14
LCD 15
2
CAB17 16 31
MICRO-PROCESSOR
1 2 3 +
17
4 5 6 1 TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
18
4
3
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
(4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 31b 53b 53 J
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3
19
30 Sx Dx 53C
3 TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
SH13 SH14 4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6

J1-3
21
J1-17
5 J1-11
J1-15
22
68
23
45
6 I O
J klaxon TEMPERATURE
(J1-2)
J1-10
DL5
DL4
23
7 II VERDE/VERTE
LUMIERE/LUZ
(J1-18)
CONTACTO
CONTACT
(J1-5)
REF.NTC AGCO
3714264M1
DL1
DL6
24
DL2
8 lave vitre J1_6 J1_12
H-ACTIVE
WARNING
H-ACTIVE
(ROJO)
(ROUGE) DL7 DL3 25
9 (J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
26
10 27
FAI35 11 56b 56a L (10) H
(5) (6) (2) 28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17
6
F60 - 10A 33
16 34
5
1 15 3
35
R15
4
30
14 36
X3 13
10
37 CAB01
3
85 86 12 38
22
2
F53 - 25A 11 39
1
8
87
10 40
BAF8 9 41
8 42
1 7 43
2 6 44
3 5 45
4 4 46
F25 - 25A 5 3
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M 47
6 2 48
1 7 CAB4 1 49
8
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M 50
X4 9 1 CAB105
CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
51
10 2
S12.1/CAB4.3 B 52
3 53
4 CAB105 54
6
4
1
5
7
5 55
6 56
3
2
1
7 -7 2 5
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B 57
8 58
2 4 6 8 10 59
CAB04 18
60
13
1 3 5 7 9 8 1 2 3 61
7 12 62
7 4 5 6 1 6
63
64
65
66
67 MA-10-06029A
CAB28 68
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N 1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard roof and fender extensions direc-

tion indicator and warning lights - North
America BAF9.1/CAB1.26 B
2 CAB1.27/BAF9.2 B
2 Fuse box +12 V R13

1 X1-X5 1 X2 42 LIG4
R13.1/R48.1 N
1
LIG5
22 Wiper control unit R13.2/S6.1 B 2 1
2 R13
BAF9
R25
42 Trailer connector - NAO 2
4
5 3 1
2
3
1
2
3
4 3 4 3
1
2 1 2 1 R18
2
4 4
FAI 15 Roof harness
31 20
R
S P 30 8 21 R18.1/R48.1 N
5 5 T N 19 9
1
4
E D 18 2 10
R18.2/S5.1 B
6 6
U
F A C
M 29
17
7
1
3
11
22
2 2 1
R18
6
5
V L 28 6 4 23
7 7 G B 16 5 12
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness

W K 15 13
8
8 8 X
H
J 27
26
14
25
24
9 9
10
9
10 10
11
12
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 11 11
31 31 1
13
14
6
12 12
30 30 5 2
6 1
13 13 6 6
15
16
29 29 5 2
14 14 4 3 5 5
1
28 28
2
2 1 2 1
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US)
17
18
R22 15 15 4 4 4 3 H1
5 3 27 27
4
2
16 16 S6 3 3
4 26 26 R12.2/S6.1 B R12.2/H1.1 B
17 17 2 2 1
6
5
1 25 25
FAI 124 LST pillar harness 18 18

24 24
1 1 2
8
S1.1/H1.3 N 1 2
1 2 1 2 LIG21 1 LIG20 1 1 1 2 3 4 LIG5 1 2 3 4 3
23 23 LIG26 LIG25 LIG19 LIG4
10
R12 R12 H1
9
BAF9
22 22 3
11
12
FAI 127 US lighting harness 21 21
B
N
N
B
B
13
14
20 20
B
B
19 19
FAI36
15
16
S10.1/LIG20.1
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
S9.1/LIG19.1
LIG3.1/LIG26.2
LIG25.2/LIG3.1
LIG26.1/S10.1
18 18
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
LIG25.1/S9.1
LIG5.1/LIG1.3
LIG4.1/LIG1.6
17
18
18 18 17 17
17 17 16 16 R10.1/R20.1 N R37.1/S1.1 N S1
1 1
R21
16 16 15 15
CAB04 Warning switch 15 15 14 14 R37 R37
SH10
2 5 3
4 14 14 13 13 FAI34
1 13 13 12 12 6 1
LIG1-11/LIG30.1 B 6 1
12 12 11 11 5 2
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe 11 11 10 10

LIG1.10/LIG31.1 B 5 2
SH6
4 3 6 6
LIG1.9/BAF5.14 B
10 10 9 9 4 3
LIG1.8/BAF5.12 B 5 5
9 9 8 8
4 4 H1
7
8
7
BAF5.15/LIG1.6 B
7
6
7
6
LIG3
S5 R19.2/S5.1 B
3
2
3
2
R19.2/H_1.1 B 1
F2
F3 6 6 5 5 1
LIG1.9/S9.1 B S9 1 1 2 1 2
5 5 4 4 S__1.1/H_1.3 N 3 H1
3
4
3
BAF5.3/LIG1.3 B
3
2
3
2
LIG1.8/S10.1 B S10
R19 R19 3
2 2 1 1
LIG25 Right-hand fender extension direction indi- 1 1
BAF5 BAF5
FAI127
LIG1 LIG1 LIG31.2/LIG3.1 B
LIG30.2/LIG3.1 B
cator F24 3
6
2
5
1
4
CAB103
6
3
5
2
4
1
LIG31 1 2 LIG30 1 2
R10.1/R18.1 N
1 1
R38.1/S1.1 N S1
1 2
6 6 1 2
R38 R38
LIG26 Left-hand fender extension direction indicator R24 LIG1.10/CAB103.5

LIG1.11/CAB103.4
B
B
5 5
SH12
2 5 3
4 4
4 CAB103.3/X1.1 N 6 5 4
1 3 3
1
6 5 4
LIG30 Additional left-hand direction indicator - NAO X1

2
1
2
1 3 2 1
ROOF4 R4
1 1
3 2 1
R26.1/R42.1
R26.2/R4.5
N
B
R26 c0
1
CAB103 R4.2/S5.1 B 2 2 1
R26
SH8
2 2
LIG31 Additional right-hand direction indicator - NAO BAF3 BAF3
CAB104.2/ROOF4.3
CAB104.1/ROOF4.5
B
B
3
4
3
4
R4.4/S6.1 B
5 5

2 5 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
FAI124 6 6
FAI15 R32
4
4 4 ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N 6 6 R3.6/R10.1 N R32.1/R42.1 N
R13 Front left-hand roof direction indicator 1
5
6
5
6
BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B
ROOF4.3/BAF3.6 B
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B
4
5
4
R3.5/R10.1 N R32.2/R4.3 B
1
2 2 1
R32
7 7 FAI124 3 3
ROOF4.5/BAF3.8 B
R18 Front right-hand roof direction indicator 8

9
10
8
9
10
2
1
2
1
R10 1 R42 1 R48 1
11 11
R26 Rear right-hand roof direction indicator
R23 ROOF3 R3 3 2 1
3 2 1
2 5 3
12 12
6 5 4
4 13 13 6 5 4
1
14 14
R32 Rear left-hand roof direction indicator BAF2.6/CAB1.29

BAF2.8/CAB1.28
B
B
CAB1
1 2
1
2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 BAF2 CAB38 3
1
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B 4
1 1 CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1 1
CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
FAI124 5
2 2 2 2 6
CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B 3 3
3 3 7
BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B
4 4 8
S12.1/BAF2.5 B
5 5 CAB38 9
F44 F40 F61 6 6 3 10
BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12
7 7 11
gauche 8 8 12
droit warning
J3 FLASH 13
PROGRAMING
LCD
14
15
MICRO-PROCESSOR
16
2
CAB17 +
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1 17

1 TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
18
4
3
R28 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-7 3
19
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
1 2 3 3 20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-3
21
4 5 6 5 -
J1-11
J1-15
J1-17
22
68
23
45
7
8
O
6 I J klaxon TEMPERATURE
J1-10
DL5
DL4 23
(J1-2)
7 II LUZ CUADRO CONTACT REF.NTC AGCO
3714264M1
DL6
24
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
8 lave vitre
J1_6 J1_12
(VERDE/VERTE)
H-ACTIVE H-ACTIVE
(ROJO)
DL2
25
WARNING DL7 DL3
v7
9 (J1-4)
L-ACTIVE 26
10 27
56b 56a L (10) H
v8
FAI35 11 (5) (6) (2) 28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17
6
33
1
2
v9
16 34
5
3
15 35
22
4
3
4
14 36
13
10
37
3
6
5
F60 - 10A 12 38
2
11 39
8
7
1
8
10 40
R15 CAB01
BAF8 9 41
10
30
9
8 42
85 86
1 7 43
F53 - 25A 2 6
87
44
3 5 45
4 4 46
5 3 47
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M
6 2 48
7 CAB4 CAB04 1 49
8 50
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M
9 1 CAB105 51
CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
F25 - 25A 10 2 52
S12.1/CAB4.3 B
3 53
4 1
CAB105 54
5 55
6 56
7 -7 2 5
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B 57
8 58
6
4
5
7
59
60
3
2
1
18
1 X4 1 X3 8 1 2 3
13
61
7 12 62
+12 V +12 V 7 4 5 6 1 6
63
64
65
66
67
68
CAB28 MA-10-06026A
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N
1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
High visibility roof and fender extensions

direction indicator and warning lights -
North America BAF9.1/CAB1.26
CAB1.27/BAF9.2
B
B
2 Fuse box + 12V

2
42
1 X1-X5 1 X2
LIG4 LIG5
22 Wiper control unit BAF9
R25
4
5 3 1
2
3
1
2
3
4 3 4 3
6 1 6 1
1
2 1 2 1 5 2 5 2
2
4 4
31 20
R
S P 30 8 21 4 3 6 6
5 5 T N 19 9 4 3
4
E 18 2 10
6 U
D
M 29 7 3 22 5 5
6 F A C 17 1 11
6
4 4
5
V L 28 6 4 23
7 7 G B 16 5 12 H1
W K
3 3
15 13
8
8 8 X
H
J 27
26
14
25
24
R12.2/H1.1 B
9 2 2 1
9
10
9
1 1 2 1 2
10 10 S1.1/H1.3 N H1
11
12
11 3
11
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US) 31 31 R21 R12 3
13
14
12 12 30 30
13 13
15
16
29 29
14 14 28 28
2
2 1 2 1
17
18
R22 15 15 27 27
5 3
4
2
16 16 26 26
4
17 17
6
5
1 25 25
18
FAI 124 LST pillar harness 18 24 24
8
23 23 LIG26 1 2 LIG25 1 2 LIG21 1 LIG20 1 LIG19 1 LIG4 1 2 3 4 LIG5 1 2 3 4
10
9
BAF9 22 22 R37.1/S1.1 N S1
1 1
11
FAI34
12
21 21
FAI 127 US lighting harness 20 20
13
14
R20 R37
19 19 FAI36
N
BAF5
15
16
LIG3 1
N
18 18
N
B
B
N
B
B
17
18
18 18 17 17
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
17 17 16 16
LIG25.2/LIG3.1
S10.1/LIG20.1
S9.1/LIG19.1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
LIG25.1/S9.1
LIG26.1/S10.1
LIG3.1/LIG26.2
16 16 15 15
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
R21
15 15 14 14
SH10
2 5 3
4 14 14 13 13
1 13 13 12 12
12 12 11 11 H1
SH6
LIG1.9/BAF5.14 B 9 9 R19.2/H_1.1 B
10 10 1
9 9 LIG1.8/BAF5.12 B 8 8 1 2
1 2
8 8 7 7
6 6 1 S1 S__1.1/H_1.3 N H1
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights 7 7 BAF5.15/LIG1.6 B 6 6
5 2
6 6 5 2
3 3
F2
4 3
F3 6 6 5 5 5 5
4 4 LIG1.9/S9.1 B S9 4 3
5 5 4 4

3
2
4
3
2
BAF5.3/LIG1.3 B 3
2
1
3
2
1
LIG1.8/S10.1 B S10
LIG4.1/LIG1.6 B
3
2
3
2
LIG5.1/LIG1.3 B 1 1
LIG25 Right-hand fender extension direction indi- 1
BAF5
1 FAI127
LIG1 LIG1
LIG1-11/LIG30.1
LIG1.10/LIG31.1 B
B
LIG31.2/LIG3.1 B
R19 R19
LIG30.2/LIG3.1 B
cator F24 3
6
2
5
1
4
CAB103
6
3
5
2
4
1 LIG31 1 2
LIG30 1 2 1 2
6 6 1 2
LIG1.10/CAB103.5 B
LIG26 Left-hand fender extension direction indicator R24
LIG1.11/CAB103.4 B
5 5
SH12
2 5 3
4 4 R_37.1/S__1.1 N
4 CAB103.3/X1.1 N 1 1
1 3 3
1
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 2
LIG30 Additional left-hand direction indicator - NAO X1 1 1 3 2 1
ROOF4
1
R4
1
6 5 4
R19.2/R4.2 B
R18 R38
CAB103
SH8
CAB104.2/ROOF4.3 B 2 2
LIG31 Additional right-hand direction indicator - NAO BAF3 CAB104.1/ROOF4.5 B

3
4
3
4
R4.4/R21.2 B
5 5

2 5 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
FAI124 FAI124
6 6 FAI59
4
4 4 ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N R3.6/R10.1 N R10.1/R20.1 N
1 BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B 6 6
5 5 ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N R3.5/R10.1 N R10.1/R18.1 N
ROOF4.3/BAF3.6 B 5 5
6 6 4 4
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B
7 7 3 3
ROOF4.5/BAF3.8 B R10 1
8 8 2 2
9 9 1 1
10 10
R23 11 11 ROOF3 R3 6 5 4
3 2 1
2 5 3
12 12
3 2 1
4
13 13 6 5 4
1
14 14
BAF3 BAF2.6/CAB1.29 B CAB1

1 2
BAF2.8/CAB1.28 B
1
2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 CAB38 3
1
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B 4
1 1
CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1 1
CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
FAI124 5
2 2 2 2 6
CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B
3 3 3 3 7
BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B
4 4 8
S12.1/BAF2.5 B CAB38
5 5 9
F44 F40 F61 6 6 3 10
BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12
7 7 11
gauche 8 8 12
droit warning
J3 FLASH 13
BAF2 PROGRAMING
14
LCD
15
MICRO-PROCESSOR
CAB17 16
2
+
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1 17

1 TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
18
4
3
R28 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-7 3
19
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
1 2 3 3 20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-3
21
4 5 6 5 -
J1-11
J1-15
J1-17
22
68
23
45
7
8
O
J1-10
DL5
DL4 23
(J1-2)
3714264M1
DL6
24
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
8 lave vitre
J1_6 J1_12
(VERDE/VERTE)
H-ACTIVE H-ACTIVE
(ROJO)
DL2
25
WARNING DL7 DL3
v7
9 (J1-4)
L-ACTIVE 26
10 27
56b 56a L (10) H
v8
FAI35 11 (5) (6) (2) 28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17
6
33
1
2
v9
16 34
5
15 3
35
4
3
4
14 36
13
10
22 37
3
6
5
12 38
F60 - 10A
2
11 39
8
7
1
8
10 40
R15
BAF8 9 41
10
30
9
8 42
85 86
1 7 43
F53 - 25A 2 6
87
44
3 5 45
4 4 46
5 3 47
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M
6 2 48
7 CAB04 1 49
CAB4
8 50
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M
9 1 CAB105 51
CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
F25 - 25A 10 2 52
S12.1/CAB4.3 B
3 53
4 1
CAB105 54
5 55
6 56
7 -7 2 5
57
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B
8 58 CAB01
6
4
5
7
59
60
3
2
1
18
1 X4 1 X3 8 1 2 3
13
61
7 12 62
+12 V PERMANENT +12 V ACCESSOIRES 7 4 5 6 1 6
63
PERMANENT + 12V + 12V ACCESORIES 64
65
66
67
CAB28 68
MA-10-06025A
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N
1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard roof direction indicator and

warning lights without fender extensions -
North America BAF9.1/CAB1.26
CAB1.27/BAF9.2
B
B
2 Fuse box +12 V 2

R13.1/R48.1 N
R13
1 X1-X5 1 X2 42 LIG4 LIG5 R13.2/S6.1 B

1
2

1
2 R13
BAF9
R25
4
5 3 1
2
3
1
2
3
4 3 4 3
R18
1
2 1 2 1
2
4 4
FAI 15 Roof harness
31 20
R
S P 30 8 21 R18.1/R48.1 N
5 5 19 9
1
4
T N
E D 18 2 10
R18.2/S5.1 B
6 6 U
F A C
M 29
17
7
1
3
11
22
2 2 1
R18
6
5
V L 28 6 4 23
7 7 W
G B
K
16 5 12

15 13
8
8 8 X
H
J 27
26
14
25
24
9 9
10
9
10 10
11
12
11 11
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 31 31
13
14
6 1
12 12
30 30 5 2
6 1
13 13 6 6
15
16
29 29 5 2
14 14 4 3 5 5
17
18
28 28
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US) R22
5 3
15 15
27 27
4 4 4 3
H1
4
2
16 16 S6 3 3
4 26 26 R12.2/S6.1 B R12.2/H1.1 B
17 17 2 2 1
6
5
1 25 25
18 18 1 1
2
8
S1.1/H1.3 N
3 1 2 H1
23 23 LIG21 1 LIG20 1 LIG19 1 LIG4 1 2 3 4 LIG5 1 2 3 4
10
BAF9 R12 R12
9
22 22 3
11
12
21 21 FAI36
N
B
13
14
B
20 20
19 19
15
16
S10.1/LIG20.1
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
S9.1/LIG19.1
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
18 18
LIG5.1/LIG1.3
LIG4.1/LIG1.6
17
18
18 18 17 17
17 17 16 16 R10.1/R20.1 N R37.1/S1.1 N S1
1 1
R21
16 16 15 15
15 15
CAB04 Warning switch 14 14
SH10
5 3
2 R37 R37
4 14 14 13 13 FAI34
1 13 13 12 12 6 1
LIG1-11/LIG30.1 B 6 1
12 12 11 11 5 2

LIG1.10/LIG31.1 B 5 2
SH6
4 3 6 6
LIG1.9/BAF5.14 B
10 10 9 9 4 3
LIG1.8/BAF5.12 B 5 5
9 9 8 8
4 4 H1
7
8
7
BAF5.15/LIG1.6 B
7
6
7
6
LIG3
S5 R19.2/S5.1 B
3
2
3
2
R19.2/H1.1 B
1
F2
F3 6 6 5 5 1 H1
LIG1.9/S9.1 B S9 1 1 2 1 2
5 5 4 4 S1.1/H1.3 N
3
3
4
3
BAF5.3/LIG1.3 B
3
2
3
2
LIG1.8/S10.1 B S10
R19 R19 3
2 2 1 1
LIG30 Additional left-hand direction indicator - NAO 1 1
BAF5 BAF5
FAI127
LIG1 LIG1
LIG31.2/LIG3.1 B
LIG30.2/LIG3.1 B
R10.1/R18.1 N
LIG31 Additional right-hand direction indicator - NAO 3 2 1 6 5 4 R38.1/S1.1 N S1
F24 CAB103 1 1
6 5 4 3 1
2 LIG31 1 2 LIG30 1 2 1 2
6 6 1 2
R38 R38
R24 LIG1.10/CAB103.5 B
5 5
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights LIG1.11/CAB103.4 B
SH12
2 5 3
4 4
4 CAB103.3/X1.1 N 6 5 4
1 3 3
1
6 5 4
2 2 ROOF4 R4 3 2 1 R26 c0
R13 Front left-hand roof direction indicator X1 1
CAB103
1 3 2 1
1
2
1
R4.2/S5.1 B
R26.1/R42.1
R26.2/R4.5
N
B
1
2 2 1
R26
SH8
CAB104.2/ROOF4.3 B 2
3
R18 Front right-hand roof direction indicator BAF3 BAF3
CAB104.1/ROOF4.5 B
4
5
3
4
5
R4.4/S6.1 B
1 1 6 6
FAI124
R26 Rear right-hand roof direction indicator R26
2
4
5 3
2
3
4
2
3
4
FAI124
ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N R3.6/R10.1 N
FAI15
R32.1/R42.1 N
R32
BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B 6 6 1
1
ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N R3.5/R10.1 N R32
R32 Rear left-hand roof direction indicator 5
6
7
5
6
7
ROOF4.3/BAF3.6 B
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B
ROOF4.5/BAF3.8 B
5
4
3
5
4
3
R32.2/R4.3 B
2 2 1
8 8 2 2
9 9 1 1
10 10 R10 1 R42 1 R48 1
R23 11 11 ROOF3 R3 3 2 1
3 2 1
2 5 3
12 12
6 5 4
4
13 13 6 5 4 MASSE
1
14 14
BAF2.6/CAB1.29 B CAB1
1 2
BAF2.8/CAB1.28 B
1
2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 BAF2 CAB38 3
1
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B 4
1 1
CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1 1
CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
FAI124 5
2 2 2 2 6
3 3 CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B 3 3 7
4 4 BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B
S12.1/BAF2.5 B 8
5 5 CAB38 9
F44 F40 F61 6 6 3 10
7 7 BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12
11
8 8 12
droit gauche warning
J3 FLASH
13
PROGRAMING 14
LCD
15
16
MICRO-PROCESSOR
1
2
CAB17 +
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1

17
1 TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2 18
4
3
R28 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-7 3
19
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
1 2 3 3 20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-3
21
4 5 6 5 -
J1-11
J1-15
J1-17
22
68
23
45
7
8
O
J1-10
DL5
DL4 23
(J1-2)
3714264M1
DL6
24
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
8 lave vitre
J1_6 J1_12
(VERDE/VERTE)
H-ACTIVE H-ACTIVE
(ROJO)
DL7 DL3
DL2
25
WARNING
v7
9 (J1-4)
L-ACTIVE 26
10 27
56b 56a L (10) H
v8
FAI35 11 (5) (6) (2) 28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17 33
6
1
2
v9
16 34
5
3
15 35
4
3
4
14 36
22 13 37
10
3
6
5
F60 - 10A 12 38
2
11 39
8
7
1
8
10 40
R15
BAF8 9 41
10
30
9
8 42 CAB01
85 86
1 7 43
F53 - 25A 2 6
87
44
3 5 45
4 4 46
5 3 47
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M
6 2 48
7 CAB4 CAB04 1 49
8 50
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M
9 1 CAB105 51
CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
F25 - 25A 10 2 52
S12.1/CAB4.3 B
3 53
4 1
CAB105 54
5 55
6 56
7 -7 2 5
57
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B
8 58
6
4
5
7
59
60
3
2
1
18
1 1 8 1 2 3
13 61
X4 X3
7 12 62
+12 V +12 V 7 4 5 6 6
63
1
64
65
66
67
68
CAB28
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N
1
MA-10-06024A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
High visibility roof direction indicator and

warning lights without fender extensions -
North America BAF9.1/CAB1.26 B
2 CAB1.27/BAF9.2 B
2 Fuse box +12 V

42
1 X1-X5 1 X2
LIG4 LIG5
22 Wiper control unit BAF9
R25
4
5 3 1
2
3
1
2
3
4 3 4 3
6 1 6 1
1
2 1 2 1 5 2 5 2
2
4 4
31 20
R
S P 30 8 21 4 3
5 5 19 9 6 6 4 3
4
T N
E D 18 2 10
6 6 U
F A C
M 29
17
7
1
3
11
22 5 5
6
5
7 7
V
G B
L 28
16
6
5
4
12
23
4 4 H1
W K

15 13
3 3
8
8 8 X
H
J 27
26
14 24
R12.2/H1.1 B
25
2 2 1
9 9
10
9
1 1 2 1 2
10 10 S1.1/H1.3 N H1
11
12
3
11 11
FAI 36 Fender lighting harness (US) 31 31 R21 R12 3
13
14
12 12
30 30
13 13
15
16
29 29
ETAMAGE
ETAMAGE
ETAMAGE
14 14
17
18
28 28
FAI 59 High visibility roof harness R22
5 3
15 15
27 27
4
2
16 16
4 26 26
17 17
6
5
1 25 25
18 18
8
23 23 LIG21 1 LIG20 1 LIG19 1 LIG4 1 2 3 4 LIG5 1 2 3 4
10
BAF9
FAI36
9
22 22 R37.1/S1.1 N S1
1 1
11
12
21 21
13
14
20 20 R20 R37
19 19 FAI34
N
15
16
LIG3 1
N
18 18
B
17
18
N
18 18 17 17
LIG5.4/LIG3.1
17 17 16 16
S10.1/LIG20.1
S9.1/LIG19.1
LIG4.4/LIG3.1
16 16 15 15
LIG21.1/LIG3.1
R21
15 15 14 14
SH10
2 5 3
4 14 14 13 13
1 13 13 12 12
12 12 11 11 H1
SH6
LIG1.9/BAF5.14 B R19.2/H_1.1 B
10 10 9 9 1
LIG1.8/BAF5.12 B 1 2
9 9 8 8 1 2
6 6 1 S1 S__1.1/H_1.3 N H1
7
8
7
BAF5.15/LIG1.6 B
7
6
7
6
5 2
6 6 5 2
3 3
F2
4 3
F3 6 6 5 5 5 5
LIG1.9/S9.1 B S9 4 3
5 5 4 4 4 4
3
4
3
BAF5.3/LIG1.3 B
3
2
3
2
LIG1.8/S10.1 B S10
LIG4.1/LIG1.6 B
3
2
3
2
2 2 1 1 LIG5.1/LIG1.3 B 1 1
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights 1 1
BAF5 BAF5
FAI127
LIG1 LIG1
LIG1-11/LIG30.1
LIG1.10/LIG31.1 B
B
LIG31.2/LIG3.1 B
R19 R19
LIG30.2/LIG3.1 B
3 2 1 6 5 4
F24 CAB103
6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG31 LIG30 1 2
6 1 2 1 2 1 2
6
R24 LIG1.10/CAB103.5 B
5 5
LIG1.11/CAB103.4 B
SH12
2 5 3
4 4 R_37.1/S__1.1 N
4 CAB103.3/X1.1 N 1 1
1 3 3
1
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 2 ROOF4 R4
X1 1 R18 R38
1 3 2 1 6 5 4
1 1
CAB103 R19.2/R4.2 B
2 2
SH8
CAB104.2/ROOF4.3 B
3 3
R4.4/R21.2 B
BAF3 CAB104.1/ROOF4.5 B 4 4
5 5
1 1 6 6
2 2
FAI124 FAI124 FAI59
R26
2 5 3
3 3
4
4 4 ROOF3.6/CAB103.3 N R3.6/R10.1 N R10.1/R20.1 N
1 BAF3.5/ROOF_4.2 B 6 6
5 5 ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N R3.5/R10.1 N R10.1/R18.1 N
ROOF4.3/BAF3.6 B 5 5
6 6
BAF3.7/ROOF4.4 B 4 4
7 7
ROOF4.5/BAF3.8 B 3 3 1
8 8 R10
2 2
9 9
1 1
10 10
R23 11 11 ROOF3 R3 6 5 4
3 2 1
2 5 3 12 12
4 13 13 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
14 14
BAF3 BAF2.6/CAB1.29 B CAB1

1 2
BAF2.8/CAB1.28 B
1
2
FAI35
46
24
BAF2 CAB38 3
1
BAF2.1/CAB17.9 B 4
1 1
CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1 1
CAB105.4/CAB38.2 B
FAI124 5
2 2 2 2 6
CAB17.8/BAF2.3 B 3
3 3 3 7
BAF2.4/CAB4.5 B
4 4 8
S12.1/BAF2.5 B CAB38
5 5 9
F44 F40 F61 6 6 3 10
BAF2.7/S12.1 B S12
7 7 11
gauche 8 8 12
droit warning
FLASH 13
BAF2 J3
PROGRAMING
LCD
14
15
MICRO-PROCESSOR
16
2
CAB17 +
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1 17

1 TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
18
4
3
R28 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
2 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-7 3
19
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
1 2 3 3 20
6
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16
4 TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-3
21
4 5 6 5 -
J1-11
J1-15
J1-17
22
68
23
45
7
8
O
J1-10
DL5
DL4 23
(J1-2)
3714264M1
DL6
24
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
8 lave vitre
J1_6 J1_12
(VERDE/VERTE)
H-ACTIVE H-ACTIVE
(ROJO)
DL7 DL3
DL2
25
WARNING
v7
9 (J1-4)
L-ACTIVE 26
10 27
56b 56a L (10) H
v8
FAI35 11 (5) (6) (2) 28
12 29
13 30
31
11 12 13
18
7
32
17
6
33
1
2
v9
16 34
5
3
15 35
4
3
4
14 36
13
10
37
22
3
6
5
F60 - 10A 12 38
2
11 39
8
7
1
8
10 40
R15
9 41
10
30
BAF8
9
8 42
85 86
1 7 43
F53 - 25A 2 6
87
44
3 5 45
4 4 46
5 3 47
BAF8.6/S13.1 M S13 S13.1/CAB17.10 M
6 2 48
7 CAB4 CAB04 1 49
8 50
BAF8.7/CAB4.2 M CAB105
9 1 51
CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M +8 3 6
F25 - 25A 10 2 52
S12.1/CAB4.3 B
3 53
4 1
CAB105 54
5 55
6 56
7 -7 2 5
CAB4.6/CAB4.8 B 57
8 58
6
4
5
7
59
60
CAB01
3
2
1
18
1 X4 1 X3 8 1 2 3
13
61
7 12 62
+12 V +12 V 7 4 5 6 1 6
63
64
65
66
67
68
CAB28
CAB4.7/CAB28.1 N
1 MA-10-06023A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Work headlights module

2 Fuse box
FAI 135 Lights module and radio ground harness CAB105
2 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe 14 12 10 8 6 4 2

1 1
CAB105
2 2
14 14 3 3 3
+12V 13 13 4 4
12 12 5 5
F58 - 7.5A CAB105.6/BAF4.10 M
11 11 6 6
1 10 10 7 7
9 9 8 8
FAI 124 9 9
X4 8 8
7 7 10 10
6 6 11 11
S1_ CAB105.12/S1.1 N
5 5 12 12
F13 - 7.5A
4 4 13 13
1 CAB105.5/BAF4.3 R 14 14
3 3
2 2 15 15
+12V X2 1 1 16 16 13 18
17 17 7 12
1 6
BAF4 BAF4 18 18
CAB105
3 2 1
1 2 3
CAB38
31 31 CAB38.1/ENG1.2 N CAB38.1/S1.1 N
30 30 1 1
29 29 2 2
28 28 3 3
27 27 FAI35 F58-7.5A
CAB38
26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23 F13-7.5A
22 22
21 21 20 31
31 20 21 8 30
30 8 21
20 20 9 19
19 9 19 19 10 2 18
18 2 10 22 3 7 29
29 7 3 22 18 18 11 1 17
23 4 6 28
17 1 11 17 17 12 5 16
28 6 4 23
16 5 12 16 16 13 15
15 13 24 14 27
27 14 24
15 15 25 26
26 25 14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
FAI129 6 6 2
5 5
4 4
3 3
ENG22.1/ENG1.2 N
2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
ENG22 BAT1
MA-10-06033A
ENG22.1/BAT1.1 N
1 1 1
ENG22
FAI 135
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Footstep lighting - Europe

2 Fuse box
FAI 130 DynaVT transmission harness
TR29 TR28
TR28 Left-hand footstep lighting
TR29 Right-hand footstep lighting F57 - 30A X4
1 +12V
BAF10.18/ENG1.31 B
18
31 31 17
BAF10.16/ENG1.30 B R20
30 30 16 30
1 29 29 15
1
28 28 14 85 86
2
2 1 TR29 27 27 13
2 2 1 TR28 X1-X5
26 26 12 87
25 25 11
N
1
N
24 24 10
FAI129 23 23 FAI35 9
TR29.2/TR31.1
TR28.2/TR31.1
12 12 22 22 8
11 11 21 21 7
FAI130 10 10 20 20 6
9 9 19 19 5
18
17
8 8 18 18 4
16
15
7 7 17 17 3
6 6 16 16 2
14
13
5 5 15 15 1
ENG10.4/TR29.1 R 4 4 ENG1.31/ENG10.4 B 14 14
12
11
ENG10.3/TR28.1 R 3 3 ENG1.30/ENG10.3 B 13 13 BAF10
10
9
2 2 12 12
1 1 11 11
7
10 10
ENG10 ENG10 9 9
5
6
8 8
7 7
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2
6 6
1
1
12 11 10 9 8 7 7
5 5
8 9 10 11 12
4 4
3 3
2 2 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF4
R
1 1 31 20
S P 30 8 21
19 9
T N
E D 18 2 10 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
U M ENG1 ENG1 29 7 3 22
F A C 17 1 11
6 23 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2
V L 28 4
G B 16 5 12
W K 15 13
X 27 14 24
J
H 26 25
TR31 1
J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING
LCD
2
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

J1-3
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
J1-15
J1-11
TEMPERATURE
J1-10
DL5
DL4 FAI124 R20
(J1-2)
CONTACTO DL6
LUMIERE/LUZ CONTACT REF.NTC AGCO
VERDE/VERTE 3714264M1
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
(ROJO)
J1_6 J1_12 (ROUGE) DL7 DL3
WARNING
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
CAB105
1 F57
CAB105 2
3
4
5
6
7
CAB105.8/BAF4.12 B
3 8
9
10
CAB105.11/BAF4.9 B
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
13 18
7 12
1 6
MA-10-06032A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Footstep lighting - North America

2 Fuse box
FAI 15 Roof harness
TR28 TR29 2
20

R 31
S P
30 8 21
T N 19 9
E D 18 2 10
U M
29 7 3 22
F A C
17 1 11

V L 28 6 4 23
G B
16 5 12
W K
15 13
X
H
J 27 14 24 F57 - 30A X4
26 25
FAI 130 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness 1 +12V
BAF10.18/ENG1.31 B
18
30
31
30
BAF10.16/ENG1.30 B
17
16 30
R20
29 29 15
H2 Left-hand handrail lighting 1

2 1 TR28
1
2 1 TR29
28
27
26
28
27
26
14
13
12
SH3
85
87
86
X1-X5
FAI130 25 25 11
H3 Right-hand handrail lighting 2 2
FAI129
24
23
24
23 FAI35
10
9
1
12 12 22 22 8
TR28 Left-hand footstep lighting 11 11 21 21 7
18
20 20
17
10 10 6
9 9 19 19 5
16
15
TR29 Right-hand footstep lighting 8
7
8
7
18
17
18
17
4
3
14
13
6 6 16 16 2
15 15 1
12
11
5 5
ENG10.4/TR29.1 R ENG1.31/ENG10.4 B 14 14
4 4
10
ENG10.3/TR28.1 R ENG1.30/ENG10.3 B
9
3 3 13 13 BAF10
2 2 12 12
7
1 1 11 11
10 10
5
6
ENG10 ENG10 9 9
3
8 8
7 7
TR28.2/TR18.1
2
TR29.2/TR18.1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 6
6 6
5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7
5 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
4 4
3 3
2 2 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF3 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF4
1 1
ENG1 ENG1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
TR18 1
6 5 4
3 2 1
FAI15 6 5 4 R3 ROOF3 3 2 1
FAI124
1 1
2 2
R3.3/R19.1 B BAF3.2/ROOF3.3 B
R12.1/R3.3 B 3 3 BAF3.1/ROOF3.3 B
4 4
R3.5/R10.1 N ROOF3.5/X1.1 N
5 5
R3.6/R10.1 N X1.1/ROOF3.6 N
6 6
CAB103
FAI127
1 1 X1
R37.1/R10.1 N 2 2
1 CAB103.3/X1.1 N
R10.1/R38.1 N 3 3 1
R10 4 4
5 5
6 6
CAB103
6
5
1
2
6
5
1
2
FAI124
4 3 4 3
3
R19 1 2 3 4 5 6 R38 1 R12 1 2 3 4 5 6 R37 1
R19 1 2 3 4 5 6 R38 1 R12 1 2 3 4 5 6 R37 1

J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING
6 1 B 6 1
LCD
5 2 5 2
R12.1/H2.2
4 3
MICRO-PROCESSOR
4 3
+
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1

SH3
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-7 3
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

J1-3
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
R20
H2.1/S1.1 N S1 R38.1/S1.1 N H2.1/S1.1 N S_1 R37.1/S1.1 N - J1-15
J1-11
H2.2/H3.2 B J1-10 DL4

TEMPERATURE DL5
F57
N
(J1-2)
H2.2/H3.2 B DL6
B
LUZ CUADRO CONTACT REF.NTC AGCO

3714264M1
N
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1

H2.1/S1.1

(VERDE/VERTE) (ROJO)
R19.1/H2.2
J1_6 J1_12 WARNING DL7 DL3

H2.1/S1.1
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
2
CAB105
2 1 H2 2 1 H3 1
2 1 H2 2 1 H3 2
3
4
5
6
3
7
CAB105.8/BAF4.12 B
8
9
10
CAB105.11/BAF4.9 B
11
12
13
14
15
16
H2 H3 17
H2 H3 18
13 18
7 12
1 6
CAB105 MA-10-06019A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Flashing beacons
2 Fuse box
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US)
FAI 124 LST pillar harness R27
R23 Left-hand flashing beacon F59-10A
R39 Right-hand flashing beacon
3
CAB105
J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING
LCD 2
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

J1-3
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
J1-15
J1-11
J1-10 DL4
TEMPERATURE DL5
(J1-2)
CONTACTO DL6
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
(ROJO)
WARNING
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
2
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
13 18
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7 12
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
1 6
BAF4 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
R39
1 1
CAB105.1/BAF4.2 B
2 2
3 3
CAB105.3/BAF4.4 B
4 4
5 5
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
6 6
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
FAI 124 7 7 5 3
2
8 8
9 9 4 R27
10 10 1
11 11
12 12
13 13
R39 14 14
X1-X5
R39.1/R3.4 B
1 BAF4
1
BAF3
1 1
6
6
3
FAI 124 2 2
3 3
5
2
2
4 4
5
FAI 60 ROOF3
R23 5 5
4
1
1 1 6 6
1
2 2 7 7 X4
3 3 8 8 F59 - 10A
ROOF3.4/BAF3.9 B 1
4 4 9 9
5 5 10 10
6 +12V
6 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 11 11 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
R23 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 12 12 9 5 3 1
ROOF3
13 11 7
R23.1/R3.4 B 13 13
1 14 14
BAF3
MA-10-06036A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Standard roof work headlights

2 Fuse box
FAI 15 Roof harness
F55
FAI 124 LST pillar harness F54
CAB105
R18
R14 Front work headlight

X8
R15 Front work headlight
3
J3 FLASH
PROGRAMING X7
R16 Front work headlight LCD
MICRO-PROCESSOR
R17 Front work headlight TOUCHE 4 J1-9
+
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
R27 Rear work headlight TOUCHE 6
TOUCHE 7
J1-7
J1-13
3
4
R17
R28 Rear work headlight TOUCHE 8
TOUCHE 9
J1-8
J1-14
5
6
J1-17
J1-3
J1-16
J1-15
R30 Rear work headlight TEMPERATURE

J1-11
J1-10
DL5
DL4
(J1-2)
CONTACTO DL6
R31 Rear work headlight J1_6 J1_12

VERDE/VERTE
LUMIERE/LUZ
(J1-18)
H-ACTIVE
CONTACT
(J1-5)
H-ACTIVE
REF.NTC AGCO
3714264M1
(ROJO)
(ROUGE)
DL2
DL1
DL7 DL3
WARNING
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 18
7 12
1 6
B
B
R14
CAB105.16/ROOF3.1
ROOF3.2/CAB105.17
R48.1/R14.1 N
1
R14 2
R14.2/S4.1 B
2
F54 - 30A
2
1
4
3
1
2
BAF4 BAF4
6
5
3
4
R17_
5
6
8
7
1 1
R15 30
10
7
8
9
2 2
10
9
R48.1/R15.1 N
11
12
R15 1 3 3 85 86
12
11
R15.2/S4.1 B
14
13
2 4 4
14
13
5 5 87
6 6
1
R48 7 7
2
AV S4 8 8
1 9 9
10 10
CAB105.9/BAF4.11 B
11 11
R16 12 12
R48.1/R16.1 N CAB105.7/BAF4.13 B
13 13
1
R16 R16.2/S4.1 B 14 14 F55 - 25A
2
2
R18
FAI 124 30
R17 85 86
R48.1/R17.1 N
1
R17 S4.1/R17.2 B X7 X7 87
2
R3 R3 ROOF3.1/X7.1 B
1 1
R3.1/S4.1 B
1
1 1
2
R3.2/S1.1 B
2 2
FAI 15 3 3
4 4
5 5 6 5 4
3 2 1
6 6 X8 X8
5 3 2 1
6 4 X8.1/ROOF3.2 B 1 1
R27
R27.1/R42.1 N
R27 1
S1.1/R27.2 B
2
1
1 X1 1 X4
R28
R28.1/R42.1 N MASSE
1 +12V
R28 S1.1/R28.2 B
AR 2
1
R42
S1
1 MA-10-06035A
R30
R30.1/R42.1 N
R30 1
S1.1/R30.2 B
2
1
R31
R42.1/R31.1 N
R31 1
S1.1/R31.2 B
2
1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Xenon work headlights for standard roof

2 Fuse box
F55
FAI 15 Roof harness
F54
FAI 58 Xenon flashing beacon adapter harness 3
CAB105
R18
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe J3 FLASH
3 X8
PROGRAMING X7
PX2 Xenon work headlight LCD
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

R17
J1-3
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
J1-15
J1-11
J1-10
2
DL4
TEMPERATURE DL5
(J1-2)
CONTACTO DL6
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
(ROJO)
WARNING
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 18
7 12
1 6
PX1 1 R14
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R48.1/R14.1 N
B
B
PX2 2 1 1
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B R14.2/S4.1 B
2 2
CAB105.16/ROOF3.1
ROOF3.2/CAB105.17
PX2 1 F54 - 30A
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
3
1
2
BAF4
6
5
3
4
R17_
5
6
8
7
1 1 30
PX1 2 R15
10
7
8
9
2 2
10
9
R48.1/R15.1 N
11
12
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 3 3
1 85 86
12
11
PX2 R15.2/S4.1 B
14
13
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 4 4
2
14
13
5 5 87
PX2 2 6 6
1
1
1
R48
AV 7 7
2
2
FAI 58 S4 8 8
1
9 9
10 10
CAB105.9/BAF4.11 B
11 11
PX1 3 R16 12 12
PX2.2/PX1.1 N CAB105.7/BAF4.13 B
2 1 R48.1/R16.1 N 13 13
PX2 PX2.1/PX1.2 B
1
1 2 R16.2/S4.1 B 14 14 F55 - 25A
2
PX2 3 BAF4
1
1
2
2
R18
1
4
30
FAI 124
5
2
2
5
PX1 4 R17 85 86
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R48.1/R17.1 N
2 1
6
1
3
PX2
6
PX2.1/PX1.2 B S4.1/R17.2 B X7 X7
87
1 2 2
R3 R3 ROOF3.1/X7.1 B
1 1
PX2 4 R3.1/S4.1 B
1
1
1
1 1
2
2
R3.2/S1.1 B
2
2 2
3 3
4 4
FAI 15
5 5
6 6 X8 X8
X8.1/ROOF3.2 B
1 1
PX1 5 R27
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N R27.1/R42.1 N
PX2 1 1
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 2 S1.1/R27.2 B
1 X1 1 X4
PX2 5
1
1
1
2
2
+12V
2
PX1 6 R28
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 1 R28.1/R42.1 N
PX2 1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 2 S1.1/R28.2 B
AR MA-10-06027A
PX2 6
1
1
1
R42
2
2
S1
2
FAI 58 1
PX1 7 R30
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N R30.1/R42.1 N
PX2 1 1
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 2 S1.1/R30.2 B
PX2 7
1
1
1
2
2
2
PX1 8 R31
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 1 R42.1/R31.1 N
PX2 PX2.1/PX1.2 B S1.1/R31.2 B
1 2 2
PX2 8
1
1
1
2
2
2
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Work headlights on grille

2 Fuse box CAB105
FAI 23 Cab linkage harness 3
FAI 31 cab Dyna VT transmission harness 3
FAI 124 LST pillar harness J3 FLASH

PROGRAMING
LCD
FAI 128 Linkage with DUAL CONTROL harness
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
TOUCHE 4 J1-9 1
L14 L14
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
TOUCHE 6 J1-7 3
31 20 TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
20 31
21 8 30 1 1 30
19
8 21
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

9
J1-3
9 19
10 2 18 2 2 29
18
7
2
3
10
22
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
J1-15
22 3 7 29 17
11 1 17 3 3 28 6
1
4
11
23
J1-11
FAI 132 LST front headlights harness

J1-10
23 4 6 28 16 5 12 DL4
12 5 16 4 4 15 13
CONTACTO
TEMPERATURE
(J1-2)
DL6
DL5
13 15 27 14 24 REF.NTC AGCO
24 14 27 5 5 26 25
VERDE/VERTE
LUMIERE/LUZ
(J1-18)
H-ACTIVE
CONTACT
(J1-5)
H-ACTIVE
3714264M1
DL2
DL1
(ROJO)
25 26
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe 6 6 J1_6 J1_12 (ROUGE) DL7 DL3
WARNING
(J1-4)
7
L-ACTIVE
7
8 8
PH1 Work headlights on grille 9 9
10 10 FAI23 L20 L20
PH2 Work headlights on grille 11 11
FAI31 CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
12 12 1 1
PH3 Work headlights on grille FAI128
13
14
13
14
2
3
2
3 CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
13
7
18
12
PH4 Work headlights on grille 3 1 4 1

15
16
15
16
4
5
4
5
4 3 3 4
1 6
4 2 3 2 17 17 6 6 2 1 1 2
18 18 7 7
19 19 8 8
B
B
20 20 9 9 4 4
ENG10.10/TR36.4 R L14.21/TR36.4 R L20.10/L14.21 R CAB97.3/L20.10 R CAB97.3/X15.1 B
BAF1.4/CAB105.13
R
21 21 10 10 3 3
X15.1/CAB105.15
4 4
FAI124
BAF1.2X14.1 R
ENG10.11/TR36.3 R L14.22/TR36.3 R L20.11/L14.22 R CAB97.2/L20.11 R CAB97.2/X15.1 B
3 3 22 22 11 11 2 2
BAF1.1/X14.1
2 2 23 23 12 12 1 1
1 1 24 24
25 25 CAB97 CAB97
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
TR36 TR36 26 26 12 11 10 9 8 7
7 8 9 10 11 12
27 27
28 28
29 29
X15 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF1 X14 1
30 30
31 31
X15 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF1 X14 1
PH1
FAI130 PH1.1/S5.1 B
1
PH1.2/S1.1 N
2 PH1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
1 ENG9
1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7
F10 - 25A
FAI132
12 12
11 11 ENG8 ENG8
PH2
10 10 ENG8.1/ENG9.1 N ENG8.1/S1.1 N
1 1 S5 PH2.1/S5.1 B
9 9 ENG8.2/ENG9.1 N ENG8.2/S2.1 N 1
8 8
2 2 S1 PH2.2/S1.1 N
2
PH2
3 3
7 7 R31
4 4
6 6 ENG10.11/ENG8.5 B ENG8.5/S5.1 B
5 5 1 2
5 5 ENG10.10/ENG8.6 B ENG8.6/S6.1 B
6 6 30
4 4
7 7
3 3
8 8
2 2
R31 1 1
FAI129 85 86
5 8 1 2 3 4
ENG10 ENG10
87
8 7 6 5 PH3
4 1 S6 PH3.1/S6.1 B 1
S2 PH3.2/S2.1 N 2
PH3
1 2
PH4
PH4.1/S6.1
PH4.2/S2.1
B
N
1 PH4
2
2
1 2
1 X1X5 1 X2
F10
MA-10-06034A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Fender and handrail work headlights

2 Fuse box
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness (all countries except
US)
CAB105 SH2-30A
FAI 60 Roof harness (all countries except US) R19
3
FAI 61 Handrail lighting harness (all countries F56-25A
except US) J3 FLASH

3
PROGRAMING

LCD
H2 H3 H2 H3
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
FAI 126 Lighting harness - Europe TOUCHE 4
TOUCHE 5
TOUCHE 6
J1-9
J1-1
J1-7
1
TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe TOUCHE 8
TOUCHE 9
J1-8
J1-14
5
J1-15
J1-17
J1-3
J1-16
2
J1-11
H2 Left-hand handrail lighting VERDE/VERTE

LUMIERE/LUZ
(J1-18)
CONTACTO
CONTACT
(J1-5)
TEMPERATURE
(J1-2)
REF.NTC AGCO
3714264M1
J1-10
DL1
DL6
DL5
DL4
H3 Right-hand handrail lighting

(ROJO)
WARNING
(J1-4)
1
L-ACTIVE
1 1
1
2
H2 1 2 H3 1 2 H2 1 2 2
H3 1 2
LIG13 Right-hand fender work headlight
2 2
2 2
2
2
H2 1 2 H3 1 2 H2 1 2 H3 1 2
LIG14 Left-hand fender work headlight 1
1
1
1 CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
H2_.2/H3_.2 B H2.2/H3.2 B 13 18
N
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7 12
N
N
1 6
N
H2_.1/S1_.1
2
H3.1/S1.1
H3_.1/S1_.1
H2.1/S1.1
FAI61
2
1
4
3
BAF4
6
5
S1 S1
1
2
8
7
1 1
10
3
4
9
N
2 2
11
12
5
6
3 3
R12.1/H2_.2
R19.1/H2.2
R37.1/S1_.1
14
13
7
8
R38.1/S1.1
4 4
10
9
5 5
12
11
6 6
CAB105.10/BAF4.7 B
14
13
7 7
1 2
3
1 2
8 8
3
R37 1 R12 1 2 3 R38 1 R19 1 2 3 9 9
10 10
4
2
6
11 11
2
R37 1 R12 1 2 3 R38 1 R19 1 2 3
3
12 12
5
2
5
2
3
13 13 X4
CAB105.14/BAF4.14 B
1
14 14
4
F56 - 25A
1
3
6
BAF4 1
R10.1/R38.1 N FAI124
FAI60 R3 ROOF3
BAF3 BAF3
1 1
R3.3/R19.1 B BAF3.1/ROOF3.3 B
2 2 1 1
R12.1/R3.3 B BAF3.2/ROOF3.3 B
3 3 2 2
4 4 3 3
R3.5/R10.1 N ROOF3.5/CAB103.3 N 4
5 5 4
R3.6/R10.1 N CAB103.3/ROOF3.6 N 5
6 6 5
6 6
2
1
1
2
7 7 R19_
4
3
3
4
3 2 1 8 8
6
5
5
6
6 5 4 9 9 X1-X5
30
8
7
7
8
R37.1/R10.1 N 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103 10 10
10
10
9
9
11 11 1
11
12
12
11
12 12
14
13
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB103
14
13
1 R10 13 85 86
13 87a
6 5 4 MASSE
14 14
N
3 2 1
SH2 - 30A
LIG1 LIG1 87
X1.1/CAB103.3
1 1
2 2 BAF5
31 20 20 31
21 8
30
19
8
9
21
3 3 9 19
30
18 2 10 10 2 18 1 1
29 7 3 22 4 4 22 3 7 29
17 1 11
23
11
4
1
6
17
28 2 2
28 6 4 23
5 5 12 5 16
16 5 12
13 15 3 3
27
15
14
13
24 6 6 24 14 27
FAI37 26 25
7 7
25 26
X1 1 4 4
2
5 5
1
8 8
4
4
3
6 6
9 9
6
5
5
6
7 7
7
8
8
10 10
8 8
10
10
9
11 11
12
11
11
12
LIG13.2/LIG3.1 N LIG1.12/LIG13.1 B LIG1.12/BAF5.17 B 9 9
12 12
14
13
13
14
LIG14.2/LIG3.1 N LIG1.13/LIG14.1 B LIG1.13/BAF5.18 B 10 10
18
15
13 13
15
16
11 11
16
17
17
18
14 14
12 12
15 15 FAI126 13 13
16 16
LIG3 1 14 14
17 17
1
2 1 LIG14 2 1 LIG13
1
15 15
2
18 18
16 16
19 19
17 17
1
2 1 LIG14 2 1 LIG13 20 20
1
2
18 18
2
21 21
22 22
BAF5
23 23
24 24
25 25 MA-10-06021A
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
LIG14 LIG13
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Roof work headlights - North America

2 Fuse box
FAI 15 Roof harness
F55
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness F54
FAI 124 Pillar Dyna VT harness CAB105

R18
3

X8
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe J3 FLASH 3
PROGRAMING X7
R14 Front work headlight LCD
MICRO-PROCESSOR
R15 Front work headlight TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9
+
TOUCHE 5 J1-1 2
R16 Front work headlight TOUCHE 4/6
TOUCHE 7
J1-7
J1-13
3
4
R17
R17 Front work headlight TOUCHE 8
TOUCHE 9
J1-8
J1-14
5
6
J1-17
J1-3
J1-16
- J1-15
R27 Rear work headlight TEMPERATURE

J1-10
J1-11
DL5
DL4
(J1-2)
R28 Rear work headlight

DL6
3714264M1
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1

(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE 2

CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 18
1
12
6
2
B
B
B
R14
CAB105.16/ROOF3.1
ROOF3.2/CAB105.17
CAB105.4/CAB38.2
R48.1/R14.1 N
1
R14 2
R14.2/S4.1 B
F54 - 30A
2
1
4
3
BAF4
1
2
6
5
3
4
R17_
5
6
8
7
R15 1 1 30
10
7
8
9
2 2
10
9
R48.1/R15.1 N
11
12
R15 1 3 3 85 86
12
11
R15.2/S4.1 B
14
13
2 4 4
14
13
5 5 87
6 6
1
R48 7 7
2
AV S4 8 8
1 9 9
10 10
CAB105.9/BAF4.11 B
11 11
R16
12 12
R48.1/R16.1 N CAB105.7/BAF4.13 B
1 13 13
R16 R16.2/S4.1 B 14 14
2 F55 - 25A
BAF4
2
R18
FAI 124
30
R17 85 86
R48.1/R17.1 N
1
R17 S4.1/R17.2 B X7 X7 87
2
R3 ROOF3.1/X7.1 B
1 1
R3.1/S4.1 B
1
1 1
2
R3.2/S1.1 B
2 2
FAI 15 3 3
4 4
5 5 6 5 4
3 2 1
6 6 X8 X8
5 3 2 1
6 4 X8.1/ROOF3.2 B
R3 1 1
R27 F25 - 25A

R27.1/R42.1 N
R27 1
S1.1/R27.2 B CAB38
2
3 3
CAB38.2/S12.1 B
1
2 2
2
1 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF8 1 X1 1 X4
R28 1 2 3 3 2 1
R28.1/R42.1 N CAB38
1 +12V
R28 S1.1/R28.2 B
AR 2 S12
1
R42
2
S1 CAB04
MA-10-06085A
1 +8 3 6 CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M
1
CAB4.2/BAF8.7 M
R30 2
CAB04.3/S12.1 B
R30.1/R42.1 N 3
R30 1 4
S1.1/R30.2 B 1
2 5
6 FAI35
1
7
-7 2 5 8
R31
R42.1/R31.1 N
CAB04
R31 1
S1.1/R31.2 B 8 1 2 3
2
1
7 4 5 6
2
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Xenon roof work headlights - North

America
F55
2 Fuse box
F54
FAI 15 Roof harness CAB105
R18
FAI 35 Dyna VT Instrument panel with EEM harness 3
FAI 58 Xenon flashing beacon adapter harness 3

X8
J3 FLASH
X7
FAI 124 Pillar Dyna VT harness PROGRAMING
LCD
MICRO-PROCESSOR
+
TOUCHE 4/6 J1-9 1
CAB105 Headlights module - NAO and Europe TOUCHE 5
TOUCHE 4/6
J1-1
J1-7
2
PX2 Xenon work headlight R17

TOUCHE 7 J1-13 4
TOUCHE 8 J1-8 5 J1-16

J1-3
TOUCHE 9 J1-14 6
J1-17
- J1-15
J1-11
J1-10 DL4
TEMPERATURE DL5
(J1-2)
DL6
3714264M1
(J1-18) (J1-5) DL1
(J1-4)
L-ACTIVE
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CAB105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13
7
18
12
2 2
1 6
PX1-1 R14
B
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R48.1/R14.1 N
B
B
CAB105.4/CAB38.2
PX2 2 1 1
PX2.1/PX1.2 B R14.2/S4.1 B
1 2 2
CAB105.16/ROOF3.1
ROOF3.2/CAB105.17
1
PX2-1 F54 - 30A
2
2
2
1
4
3
1
2
BAF4 BAF4
6
5
3
4
R17_
5
6
8
7
1 1
PX1-2 R15 30
10
7
8
9
2 2
10
9
R48.1/R15.1 N
11
12
PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 3 3
2 1 85 86
12
11
PX2 R15.2/S4.1 B
14
13
PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 4 4
1 2
14
13
5 5 87
6 6
1
PX2-2
2
R48
1
7 7
AV
2
2
S4 8 8
1 9 9
FAI 58
10 10
CAB105.9/BAF4.11 B
11 11
PX1-3 R16
12 12
PX2.2/PX1.1 N CAB105.7/BAF4.13 B
R48.1/R16.1 N 13 13
PX2 2 1 1
PX2.1/PX1.2 B R16.2/S4.1 B 14 14
1 2 2 F55 - 25A
1
PX2-3
2
2
1
4
R18
4
FAI 124 30
2
5
5
2
PX1-4 R17 85 86
3
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R48.1/R17.1 N
PX2 2 1 1
6
PX2.1/PX1.2 B S4.1/R17.2 B X7 X7 87
1 2 2
R3 R3 ROOF3.1/X7.1 B 1 1
R3.1/S4.1 B
1
PX2-4
1
1
1 1
2
2
R3.2/S1.1 B
2
2 2
3 3
4 4
FAI 15
5 5
6 6 X8 X8
X8.1/ROOF3.2 B 1 1
F25 - 25A
3 3
CAB38.2/S12.1 B
2 2
PX1-5 R27 1 1
S12
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R27.1/R42.1 N
PX2 2 1 1
CAB38 CAB38
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 2 S1.1/R27.2 B
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF8 1 X1 1 X4
PX2-5
1
1
1
2
2
CAB04 +12V
2
PX1-6 R28 +8 3 6 CAB4.2/BAF8.9 M

1
PX2.2/PX1.1 N R28.1/R42.1 N CAB4.2/BAF8.7 M
2 1 1 2
PX2 PX2.1/PX1.2 B S1.1/R28.2 B CAB04.3/S12.1 B
1 2 2 3
AR 4
1 MA-10-06086A
PX2-6 5 FAI35
1
1
R42
1
2
2
S1 6
2
FAI 58 8 1 2 3
1 7
-7 2 5 8
PX1-7 R30 7 4 5 6
PX2 2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 1
R30.1/R42.1 N CAB04
1 PX2.1/PX1.2 B 2 2 S1.1/R30.2 B
1
PX2-7
1
1
2
2
2
PX1-8 R31
2 PX2.2/PX1.1 N 1 R42.1/R31.1 N
1
PX2 PX2.1/PX1.2 B S1.1/R31.2 B
1 2 2
PX2-8
1
1
1
2
2
2
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Reversing light
2 Fuse box
FAI 31 Cab Dyna VT transmission harness LIG1
FAI 37 Fender lighting harness (all countries except 31 31
US) 30
31
8
20
21
30 30 21
20
8
31
30
19 9 29 29 10
9 19
18
FAI 126 Cab interior lighting harness (all countries

2
18 2 10 22 7 29
3
29
17
7
1
3
11
22
28 28 23
11
4
1
6
17
28
28 6 4 23
except US)
16
16 5 12 27 27 12 5
LIG15
13 15
2 27
15
14
13
24
26 26
24
25
14
26
27
26 25
CAB54 Autotronic 4 calculator 25 25

X1X5 1 24 24
LIG15 Reversing light junction 23 23 LIG15 1 2
22 22 2 1
21 21
B
N
20 20
18 19 19
LIG15.1/S12.1
LIG5.2/LIG3.1
R4
17 18 18
2 5 3
16 FAI126 17 17 FAI37
4
15 16 16
1
14 15 15
13 14 14
12 13 13 1
LIG1.7/BAF5.11 B
11 12 12
10 11 11 LIG3
+12V BAF5.9/CAB81.1 B
F7- 5A 9 10 10
8 9 9
1 7 8 8
S12.1/LIG1.7 B S12
6 7 7
X2 5 6 6
4 2 1 5 5
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
3 4 4
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 2 3 3
1 2 2
CAB81 1 2 3 3 1 1
BAF5
CAB81 1 2 3 LIG1 R4
1 2
3
F7
FAI31
CAB81.1/CAB54.25 B
CAB54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CAB54
68 46
45 24
23 1
MA-10-06030A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
E . Electronic units supply

Autotronic 4 electronic unit supply........................... 75
Datatronic 3 electronic unit supply........................... 76
Autotronic 5 Linkage electronic unit supply ............. 77
Autotronic 5 ParkLock electronic unit supply ........... 78
EEM Sisu electronic unit supply............................... 79
DCC2 supply ............................................................ 80
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Autotronic 4 electronic unit supply

2 Fuse box
FAI 124 Pillar harness
CAB54 Autotronic 4 calculator
CAB54
68 46
45 24
23 1
CAB54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CAB54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
N
M
M
M
M
M
M
CAB97.4/CAB54.28
CAB73.1.1/CAB54.55
FAI 31
S8.1/CAB54.60
S8.1/CAB54.58
S8.1/CAB54.59
S8.1/CAB54.57
S8.1/CAB54.56
CAB54.54/S8.1
3 4 CAB97
1 1
1 2 2 2
3 3
4 4
4 3 CAB73-1 1
CAB97
2 1
R
S8
BAF1.3/CAB97.1
FAI124
2
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
F12
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF1 F62
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 F12 - 15A X2
1 +12V
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16
S8.1/X12.1 M
1 1
X12 X12
MA-10-06067A
F62 - 50A X4 +12V

2 1
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Datatronic 3 electronic unit supply

2 Fuse box
FAI 131 Datatronic 3 harness
CAB112
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
CAB112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
F21-7.5A CAB112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2
F18-7.5A
N
R
S1.1/CAB112.10
S2.1/CAB112.8
L22.7/CAB112.12
FAI131
2
S1
M
18
17
S2
16
15
N
R
L22.3/CAB112.9
14
13
BAF12
12
11
L22.5/S2.1
L22.6/S1.1
18 18
10
9
+12V 17 17 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7
16 16
5
6
15 15
3
14 14
1
13 13 L22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F21 - 7.5A 12 12
11 11 L22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
10 10
BAF12.9/L20.1 M
9 9 12 11 10 9 8 7
S13.1/L22.3 M
S1.1/L22.6 N
X4
S15.1/L22.7 N
L22.5/S7.1 R
F18 - 7.5A 8 8 12 11 10 9 8 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 6
5 5
17 4 4 FAI 31 12 12
16 3 3 11 11
15
18
2 2 10 10 S15
L20.9/CAB73.1.1 N L20.9/S15.1 N
13
14
1 1 9 9
1
11
12
8 8
BAF12
10
FAI 23
9
7 7
X2
8
7
6 6 S7
BAF12.7/L20.5 R S7.1/L20.5 R
6
5
5 5
3
4 4
1
+12V 3 3
L20.2/CAB73.1.1 N S1.1/L20.2 N S_1
2 2
S13.1/L20.1 M S13
1 1
L20 L20
CAB73 1 1
MA-10-06068A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Autotronic 5 Linkage electronic unit supply

2 Fuse box
L13 Autotronic 5 electronic linkage calculator
L13
29 42
15 28
1 14
L13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
L13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
M
N
N
R
R
L13.9/S7.1
L13.15/S1.1
L13.28/S1.1
S13.1/L13.29
L13.14/S7.1
S7.1/L13.42
L13.1/S7.1
S7
S1
S13
M
N
R
2
3
4
FAI 23
L20.1/S13.1
S1.1/L20.2
L20.5/S7.1
6
5
7
8
10
9
11
12
13
14
BAF12
15
16
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L20
17
18
1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L20 2 2
3 3 F18 - 7.5A X2 +12V
4 4
5 5 1
6 6
BAF12.7/L20.5 R
F21-7.5A 7 7
N
8 8
BAF12.9/L20.1 M
9 9 F21 - 7.5A X4 +12V
10 10
L20.2/CAB73_1.1
17
16
11 11 1
15
18
12 12
13
14
F18-7.5A 13 13
FAI 31
11
12
14 14
10
9
15 15
8
7
16 16
6
5
17 17
CAB73 1 1 2
4
2 18 18
2
BAF12
MA-10-06069A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
Autotronic 5 ParkLock electronic unit

supply
2 Fuse box
CAB141 ParkLock electronic calculator (Autotronic 5) CAB141
29 42
15 28
1 14
CAB141 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
CAB141 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
N
R
R
CAB141.29/S13.1 M
CAB141.28/S15.1 N
CAB141.42/S14.1 R
L20.9/CAB73_1.1 N 1
CAB141.15/S15.1
CAB141.14/S14.1
CAB141.1/S7.1
CAB73 1
5 3 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF6
S15 6 4 2
FAI 23
S14 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF6
S13
1 3 5
2 4 6
L20 L20
BAF12 F22 - 10A
S13.1/L20.1 M L20.1/BAF12.9 M
1 1
2 2
S14.1/L20.3 R L20.3/BAF6.2 R 1 1
3 3
4 4 2 2 X2
S7 S7.1/L20.5 R L20.5/BAF12.7 R 3 3 F18 - 7.5A +12V
5 5
6 6 4 4
5 5 1
7 7
8 8 6 6
S15.1/L20.9 N 7 7
2 9 9
10 10 8 8 X4
11 11 9 9 F21 - 7.5A +12V
12 12 10 10
11 11 1
2
F21-7.5A FAI 31 12 12
17
16
13 13
15
18
6
5
13
14
14 14
11
12
11 12
F22-10A 15 15
10
7
6
10
9
2
16 16
5
8
11
12
8
7
10
11 10 9
4
3
17 17
13
14
6
5
2
3
9
4
18 18
15
16
4
2
5
8
2
17
18
12
1
7
6
BAF12
MA-10-06071A
F18-7.5A
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
EEM Sisu electronic unit supply

2 Fuse box
ENG4 Electronic injection harness junction
20 31
21 8 30
9 19
10 2 18
22 3 7 29
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
13 15
24 14 27
25 26
ENG4
FAI129
ENG4
1 1
2 2
S12.1/ENG4.3 M
31 31 3 3
30 4
FAI35 29
30
29 5
4
5
28 28 6 6
27 27 7 7
F28-20A 26 26 8 8
F32-10A 25 9
25 9
21
20
8
31
30
24 24 21
20
8
31
30
10 10
10
9
2
19
18
23 23 10
9
2
19
18
11 11
22 3 7 29
22 22
22 3 7 29
12 12
2 BAF10
23
11
12
4
1
5
6
17
16
28
21 21
23
11
12
4
1
5
6
17
16
28
13 13
F28 - 20A 24
13
14
15
27
20 20 24
13
14
15
27
14 14
18 18 25 26
19 19
25 26
15 15
17 17 18 18 16 16
16 16 17 17 17 17
15 15 16 16 18 18
14 14 15 15 19 19
BAF10.17/ENG2.14 M ENG2.14/S12.1 M S12
13 13 14 14 20 20
BAF10.15/ENG2.13 M ENG2.13/S12.1 M
12 12 13 13 21 21
F32 - 10A
11 11 12 12 22 22
BAF10.10/ENG2.11 M ENG2.11/ENG4.1 M
10 10 11 11 23 23
9 9 10 10 24 24
8 8 9 9 25 25
7 7 8 8 26 26
6 6 7 7 27 27
5 5 6 6 28 28
4 4 5 5 29 29
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
3 3 4 4 30 30
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16
2 2 3 3 31 31
1 1 2 2
1 1 ENG4
BAF10
ENG2 ENG2
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
MA-10-06070A
ENG9 ENG4.4/ENG9.1 N
ENG4.2/ENG9.1 N
1
X4 1
+12V
¤ H
Electrical diagrams
DCC2 supply
2 Fuse box
CAB01
68 46
45 24
23 1
CAB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CAB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
FAI 35
BAF9.3/CAB1.1 R BAF7.8/CAB1.68 M
CAB28
CAB28.1/CAB1.23 N 1
F51-15A
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 8
10 6 4 2
F4-10A
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF7
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1 3 5 7 9
+12V 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16 2 4 6 8 10
F4- 10A
1
X2
F51 - 15A
1
X4 2 2 MA-10-06083A
¤ H
Electronics
11 - Electronics
CONTENTS
11B10 - EEM2 SisuDiesel - Description
GUF101 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Programming
GUF102 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Tests and diagnostics
GUF103 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Error codes
GUF105 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Electrical Diagrams
11C10 - DCC2 - Description
GUF211 - DCC2 (DynaVT) – Programming and setting parameters
GUF213 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Error codes
GUF214 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Calibrations, constants and adjustments
GUF215 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Electrical diagrams
11D10 - Autotronic 4 - Description
GUF401 - AUTOTRONIC 4 - Programming and setting parameters
GUF402 - AUTOTRONIC 4 - Tests and diagnostics
GUF403 - AUTOTRONIC 4 - Error codes
GUF404 - AUTOTRONIC 4 - Calibration
GUF405 - AUTOTRONIC 4 - Electrical diagrams
11E10 - Autotronic 5 - ParkLock - Description
GUF531 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - ParkLock DynaVT - Programming
¤ H
Electronics
GUF532 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - DynaVT ParkLock - Tests and diagnostics
GUF533 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - DynaVT ParkLock - Error codes
GUF535 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - ParkLock DynaVT - Electrical diagrams
11F10 - Autotronic 5 - Linkage - Description
GUF521 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Linkage - Programming and setting parameters
GUF522 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Linkage - Tests and diagnostics - MF6400/7400/8400
GUF523 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Linkage - Error codes - MF6400/7400/8400
GUF524 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Linkage - Calibration and adjustments
GUF525 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Linkage - Electrical diagrams - MF6400/7400/8400
11G10 - Datatronic 3 - Description
GUF601 - DATATRONIC 3 - Programming
GUF604 - DATATRONIC 3 - Calibration and adjustments
GUF605 - DATATRONIC 3 - Electrical diagrams
GUF71 - SMS - JOYSTICK - Setting parameters
GUF72 - SMS - JOYSTICK - Tests and diagnostics
GUF73 - SMS - JOYSTICK - Error codes
GUF74 - SMS - JOYSTICK - Settings
GUF75 - SMS - JOYSTICK - Electrical diagrams - Auto 5 linkage
¤ H
EEM2 SisuDiesel - Description
11B10 - EEM2 SisuDiesel - Description
CONTENTS
A . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Components on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . VP30 electronic injection pump (66ETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . VP44 electronic injection pump (74ETA/84ETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Details of electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
F . Tractor / Engine Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
G . Cab controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
¤ H
¤ H
A . Presentation B . Components on the engine

The main function of the engine electronic control is to Basic diagram (Fig. 1)
continuously adjust and measure the load, quantity of
fuel and rotational speed. Other additional functions Parts list
include the automatic cold start and automatic engine (1) Electronic control unit (ECU)
protection. The electronic control unit receives contin- (2) Coolant temperature sensor
uous signals from sensors that measure different func- (3) Oil pressure sensor
tions in the engine, for example rotational speed, oil (4) Speed sensor
pressure, turbo booster pressure and coolant temper- (5) Intake air manifold heater (Grid Heater)
ature. The control unit receives information via the (6) Grid Heater relay
CAN bus from the injection pump control unit and from (7) Intake air pressure and temperature sensor
the cab concerning engine load requirements. With
(8) Harness fitted to engine
the EEM2 unit it is also possible carry out diagnostics
(9) Fuel pressure sensor
with a large number of codes.
(10) Electric lift pump
(11) Pump control unit (PCU)
(ENG4) SisuDiesel harness / Engine harness junction
Fig. 1
¤ H
Position on the engine
Fig. 2
ECU
ECU (Electronic Control Unit) is the master calculator
of the electronic injection system.
ENGINE SIDE Lift pump control TRACTOR SIDE
SENSOR
Engine speed Grid Heater
and injection control
timing
Error indicator
Air temperature
Coolant Digital outputs

temperature
Oil temperature
Throttle pedal
Oil pressure potentiometer
Digital inputs
Inlet pressure
Engine emergency stop

Engine speed
Voltage supply
Fig. 3
¤ H
C . VP30 electronic injection pump

(66ETA)
4 12 3
13
9
1
10 8 7
4 12 3 15
5 1
13
6
7 8 9 10 11
Fig. 4
MA-11-1010A
¤ H
The Bosch VP30 pump is a rotating injection pump.

It includes a small electronic control unit (PCU) which
only communicates with the ECU via a 500Kb CAN
network.
NOTE: If the pump is sent to a Bosch dealer, it is

IMPERATIVE to fit PLUGS into the inlet and outlet
unions.
Parts list
(1) Fuel quantity solenoid valve
(2) Tank
(4) Pump secondary speed and position sensor
(5) Pressure relief valve
(6) Transfer pump
(7) Timing device solenoid valve
(8) Advance timing variator
(9) Spur ring
(10) Cam plate
(11) Fuel injector
(12) Fuel temperature sensor
(13) Plunger
(15) Transfer pump
Pump filling phase (Fig. 5) 1

When the plunger (13) retracts, the fuel control sole-
noid valve (1) is not supplied. In this case the valve is
open which allows the pump chamber to fill with fuel.
12v n)
0v (off)
MA-11-01011A
13 11
Fig. 5
¤ H
Injection phase (Fig. 6)

As the plunger (13) starts to move forwards, the fuel
control solenoid valve (1) is supplied, which closes the 1
valve. The fuel pressure increases in the chamber. This
forces the fuel out to the injector (11). When the ECU
has calculated that enough fuel has been delivered the
solenoid (1) is no longer supplied. The pressure inside
the pumping chamber drops and injection stops.
MA-11-01012A
13 11
Fig. 6
Advance timing (Fig. 7)

5 6 4
During the advance timing phase, the PWM signal is
decreased, thus reducing the size of the channel in the
valve (7) and therefore the flow of pressurised fuel
through it. This increases the pressure in the advance
timing variator (8) which pushes against the spring and
moves the mechanism to an advanced position.
8
PWM
12v
0v
7 Fig. 7
MA-11-01013A
Timing delay (Fig. 8) 5 6 4

During the timing delay phase, the PWM signal to the
solenoid (7) is increased which widens the channel in
the valve. This allows more fuel to flow through the
solenoid and relieves the pressure in the advance
timing variator (8). The spring pushes back the mecha-
nism and delays injection.
8
PWM
12v
0v
7 Fig. 8
MA-11-01042A
¤ H
D . VP44 electronic injection pump

(74ETA/84ETA)
4 12
6 9 8 7
4 13 3 15
6 10 9 8 5 MA-11-1392A 11 Fig. 9
¤ H
The Bosch VP44 pump is a radial piston injection

pump.
It includes a small electronic control unit (PCU) which
only communicates with the ECU via a 500Kb CAN
network.
NOTE: If the pump is sent to a Bosch dealer, it is

IMPERATIVE to fit PLUGS into the inlet and outlet
unions.
Parts list
(1) Fuel quantity solenoid valve
(2) Tank
(4) Pump secondary speed and position sensor
(5) Spool valve rotor
(6) Transfer pump
(7) Timing device solenoid valve
(8) Advance timing variator
(9) Cam bush
(10) Pistons
(11) Fuel injector
(12) Fuel temperature sensor
(13) Hydraulic head
(15)Transfer pump
Pump filling phase (Fig. 10) 5 13

When the plungers (10) are set apart, the fuel control
solenoid valve (1) is not supplied. In this case the valve
is open, which allows the fuel from the transfer pump 10
to fill the spool valve rotor.
1
12v (on)
0v (off)
MA-11-01393A
Fig. 10
¤ H
Injection phase (Fig. 11)

When the spool valve rotor (5) rotates, the fuel control
solenoid valve (1) is supplied, which closes the valve. 5 13
In this case, the fuel pressure rises in the rotor and the
hydraulic head (13) because the pistons (10) are tight-
10
ened by the cam bush. This forces the fuel out to the
injector (11). When the ECU has calculated that
enough fuel has been delivered the solenoid (1) is no
longer supplied. The pressure inside the spool valve
rotor drops and injection stops. 1
11
MA-11-01394A
Fig. 11
Advance timing (Fig. 12)

During the advance timing phase, the PWM signal is
decreased, thus reducing the size of the channel in the
valve (7) and therefore the flow of pressurised fuel
through it. This increases the pressure in the advance
timing variator (8) which pushes against the spring and
10
moves the mechanism to an advanced position.
9
6
8
PWM
12v
7
0v
MA-11-01395A
Fig. 12
Timing delay (Fig. 13)

During the timing delay phase, the PWM signal to the
solenoid (7) is increased which widens the channel in
the valve. This allows more fuel to flow through the
solenoid and relieves the pressure in the advance 10
timing variator (8). The spring pushes back the mecha-
nism and delays injection.
9
6
8
PWM
12v
7
0v
MA-11-01396A
Fig. 13
¤ H
E . Details of electronic components

Resistance (Ohm)
Out-of-tolerance range, HIGH
Inlet air pressure and temperature sensor
1. Ground
2. Temperature signal
3. +5V
4. Pressure signal
Location: on the inlet manifold, screws M5 / 3.3 Nm.
Characteristics:
Power supply: 5V
Out-of-tolerance range, LOW
Output signal: 0.5V to 4.5V
Temp (°C)
Fig. 15

Fig. 14
Fig. 16
¤ H
Oil pressure sensor (Fig. 17 and Fig. 18) Coolant temperature sensor (Fig. 19)
1. Ground
2. Pressure signal
3. +5V
Location: On the cylinder block, right-hand side
Thread M10 x 1 / 25 Nm
O’ring V6158 71016
Characteristics:
Power supply: 5V
Output signal: 0.5V (0 bar) to 4.5V (10 bar) Resistance (Ohm)
Fig. 17
Temp (°C)
Fig. 19
Fig. 18
¤ H
Grid Heater
Only activated by ECU. There are 2 phases:
- A : Post heating
- B: Pre heating
Fig. 20
Speed sensor (Fig. 21)

1. Ground
2. Rpm signal
3. +12V
Location: On the cylinder block, right-hand side
Screws M8 / 25 Nm, O’ring V6146 01524
Characteristics:
Hall effect
Power supply: 12V
Output signal: 4V to 8V
Fig. 21
¤ H
F . Tractor / Engine Communication
Fig. 22
Parts list:
(CAB44) Throttle pedal potentiometer
(CAB84) A and B memorised speeds activation switch
(CAB85) Memorised speeds + and - adjusting switch
During normal operation, the throttle pedal potentiom-

eter value is read by the DCC2 which sends the infor-
mation to the ECU via the CAN.
The programming and parameter setting of the DCC2
determines the minimum engine speed sent via the
CAN to the ECU.
The hand throttle control is mechanically linked to the
foot pedal.
If a problem occurs on the CAN network, the direct line

to the ECU is used to read the throttle pedal potenti-
ometer value.
NOTE: The throttle pedal potentiometer can be cali-

brated (see GUF 214).
Characteristic:
- Provides linear voltage output (0.5V to 4.5V)
¤ H
G . Cab controls
Engine speed can be controlled in several ways from
the cab:
- Throttle pedal
- Hand throttle control lever
- Memorised speed A (Fig. 23)
A +
- Memorised speed B (Fig. 23)
B -
MA-11-01000A
Fig. 23
Activating memorised speeds

No speed is activated when the engine is started.
However, the ECU will have memorised A and B
speeds before the engine was last switched off.
Memorised speed A is activated by pressing memory A
button A (Fig. 24)
Memorised speed B is activated by pressing memory
button B (Fig. 25)
When the speed is activated:
- It is always possible to shift from one speed to the
other (A to B or B to A)
- It can still be adjusted (see later)
- The speed reduces to idle (no activation) when: R PM
• The activated memory button is pressed MA-11-01003A
• The brake pedals are pressed down
• The throttle pedal is pressed very quickly for a very Fig. 24
short time.
RPM
MA-11-01004A
Fig. 25
¤ H
Memorising engine speeds

- Select the required speed using either:
• The foot throttle control
• The hand throttle control
- Press and hold the desired memory button (A or B)
for 1 or 2 seconds.
- The speed is memorised and activated
A +
- Carry out this procedure for both memories
- The speed is saved even if the ignition is switched
off B -
MA-11-01000A
Fig. 26
Adjusting activated speeds

When the speed is activated, it can be adjusted by
pressing the + or – buttons.
- By holding the + or - button pressed, the engine
speed is increased (or decreased) rapidly. A
- To fine-tune engine speed, press the + or - button
briefly to adjust the speed by 10 rpm.
NOTE: Depending on the different models and equip-

ment, the stored and active speed values are displayed
on the DOT MATRIX screen or on the Datatronic 3.
R PM
MA-11-01003A
Fig. 27
RPM
MA-11-01004A
Fig. 28
¤ H
SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Programming
GUF101 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION -

Programming
CONTENTS
A . Matching serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B . Location of softs for WinEEM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . List of the various engine softs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
WINTEST - Issue 6.b GUF101.1
¤ H
GUF101.2 WINTEST - Issue 6.b
¤ H
- Turn on the ignition key.

- Start Wintest.
- Click on the “Engine” icon
Wintest
DCC2 : 3.02 CLIM : 20.05
AUTO 3 : B20 JOY : 3.6 EHRC : 1.9 DATA : D040911

MA-11-01096A
¤ H
The following screen is displayed:
Electronic injection
+ -
0,00 OFF
14% 70.0 C 22 C 376 kPa
0%
TOTAL
/h xxxx h
Set RATIO : 0
571.0 L 4.10 L/h 101 h
Actual RATIO : 0
Active values 2% 1 400 rpm 1492 rpm

Requested values
2% 1 220 rpm 1500 rpm
0 2600
7K4 NOITISOP
7K4 X A M
7K4 X A M
1
2
1 1
R57
R57
R57
ENG22 1
NIM
TROFFE
NIM
2 1 ENG20 1 ENG21
1MM_NOIR
1
2
31
7
1
3
R51
4
5
6
7
81
21
6
8
9
R051
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9011121314151617181
11
12
13
14
R065
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
R57
CAB34 22
51L
1 W107_ 3MM_ROUGE
23
24
R57
654321
7 8 9 101112 CAB23 CAB33 25
R001
1 W011_5MM_MARRON 1 W108_ 3MM_ROUGE 26
27
28
R051
CAB24 CAB32 CAB35
29
1004N1
1 W0123MM MARRON W109_3MM_ROUGE
R001
1 1 1X2 1
30
R065
X4 31
CAB25 CAB21
W113_3MM_MARRON W110_3MM_ROUGE ENG1
1 1
1004N1
R051
MA-11-01128A
Click on the “SisuDiesel” icon to start the
SisuDiesel diagnostics tool: WinEEM2
NOTE: The WinEEM2 start-up screen may not appear;

in this case, exit Wintest. The WinEEM2 screen will
then be displayed.
¤ H
Click on:
A . Matching serial numbers "Couple Current Pump to ECU"
The ECU must bear the injection pump serial number.

For this reason, after replacing the control unit or injec-
tion pump, the serial numbers must be matched.
On accessing this window:
MA-11-01412A
The operation is complete.
Click on:
"ECU status"
then on:
"Monitoring"
On accessing this second window:
MA-11-01411A
Click on:
"Configurations"
¤ H
B . Location of softs for WinEEM2

On accessing this window:
Click on “Download new software” and select the

required file via the following access path: (C = your
hard drive address containing the Wintest program).
At the end of programming, the transfer pump can be

heard as it starts running.
NOTE: If the ECU programming procedure stops unex-

pectedly, exit the software. This enables you to
resume programming.
¤ H
C . List of the various engine softs
File name Model Detail

6485 up to serial n° N258068
6485-7485_1.hex
6485 7485 up to serial n° N254049
7485 6485 from serial n° N258069
6485-7485_2.hex
7485 from serial n° N254050
6490-7490_1.hex
6490 7490 up to serial n° N344066
7490 6490 from serial n° N342062
6490-7490_2.hex
6495-7495_1.hex
6497_1.hex 6495 6497 up to serial n° N345039
6497
7495
6495-6497-7495_2.hex 7495 from serial n° N348009
6499_1.hex up to serial n° N307025
6499
6499_2.hex from serial n° N307026
8450_1.hex 8450 -
8460_1.hex 8460 -
8470_1.hex 8470 -
8480_1.hex 8480 -
¤ H
¤ H
SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Tests and diagnostics
GUF102 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Tests and

diagnostics
CONTENTS
A . Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
WINTEST - Issue 7.a GUF102.1
¤ H
GUF102.2 WINTEST - Issue 7.a
¤ H
A . Tests and diagnostics

- Start the engine.
- Click on the “Engine” icon
Wintest
DCC2 : 3.02 CLIM : 20.05
AUTO 3 : B20 JOY : 3.6 EHRC : 1.9 DATA : D040911

MA-11-01096A
¤ H
Electronic injection
+ -
0,00 OFF
14% 70.0 C 22 C 376 kPa
0%
TOTAL
/h xxxx h
Set RATIO : 0
571.0 L 4.10 L/h 101 h
Actual RATIO : 0
Active values 2% 1 400 rpm 1492 rpm

Requested values
2% 1 220 rpm 1500 rpm
0 2600
7K4 NOITISOP
7K4 X A M
7K4 X A M
1
2
1 1
R57
R57
R57
ENG22 1
NIM
TROFFE
NIM
2 1 ENG20 1 ENG21
1MM_NOIR
1
2
31
7
1
3
R51
4
5
6
7
81
21
6
8
9
R051
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9011121314151617181
11
12
13
14
R065
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
R57
CAB34 22
51L
1 W107_ 3MM_ROUGE
23
24
R57
654321
7 8 9 101112 CAB23 CAB33 25
R001
1 W011_5MM_MARRON 1 W108_ 3MM_ROUGE 26
27
28
R051
CAB24 CAB32 CAB35
29
1004N1
1 W0123MM MARRON W109_3MM_ROUGE
R001
1 1 1X2 1
30
R065
X4 31
CAB25 CAB21
W113_3MM_MARRON W110_3MM_ROUGE ENG1
1 1
1004N1
R051
MA-11-01128A
Switch for memorised speed A (CAB84) Design ground speed indicated by ground
speed sensor in kph
0,00
- Memorised speed not activated, white Power take-off status

- Memorised speed activated, green
Switch for memorised speed B (CAB85)
Left and right brake pedal switches
- Memorised speed not activated, white

- Memorised speed activated, green
Throttle pedal potentiometer (CAB44)
"+" switch for memorised speed adjustment
0%
- Position in %
- value between 0.5 V minimum and 4.5 V maximum,
"-" switch for memorised speed adjustment set at calibration.
NOTA: for tractors with DynaVT transmission, the
control unit ratio information (TR18) is displayed.
¤ H
Minor warning light, turns red when an error Active values: these are the real values activated by
occurs. the ECU.
Requested values: These are the values required by

Warning light making the engine operate in the DCC2
degraded mode, turns red when the engine is
in degraded mode.
Regulation slope
Cold start indicator light
2%
Engine oil pressure circuit indicator light Set at 2%, regardless of the situation
Torque curve selection (Power boost)

- if the pressure is correct, it is displayed in normal
video.
- The display is red if the pressure is incorrect. 1
- Curve n°2 when the tractor is in Hare range for
Engine load value in % Dynashift
- Curve n°2 when the tractor is in range 3 and 4 for
Dyna-6
14% - Curve n°2 when the tractor speed exceeds 12kph for
DynaVT
Coolant temperature sensor value in °C (2)
- Curve n°2 if ground speed is zero and the PTO clutch
is engaged
- Curve n°1 is used in all other conditions
70.0°C
Vistronic speed in rpm (if fitted)
Intake air manifold temperature sensor value NOTA: The Vistronic is not controlled by the
in °C (7) ECU, but by the DCC2.
220
22°C
- The system may seem slow in terms of reaction
Engine oil pressure sensor value in KPa (3) time, but this is intended to avoid excessive speed
oscillations
376KPa Engine speed sensor value in rpm

Total fuel consumption stored by the ECU
(since engine first putting into service)
1492
571.0 L 0 2600 Progress bar displaying engine
speed range
Instant fuel consumption measured by the
EEM in litres per hour Icon allowing to start SisuDiesel diagnostic
tool: WinEEM2
4.10L/h
Total engine time stored by the ECU (since Icon used to start the Vistronic control tool
first use of engine)
1 engine hour = 1 hour real time
101 h
-
¤ H
Vistronic control tool
- Click on the icon:

Vistronic
820 360
RPM
MA-11-01455A
Current Vistronic speed in rpm
Vistronic speed required by the DCC2

RPM
To control the Vistronic speed in a different manner to

the DCC2 instruction, move the cursor so as to display
the desired speed:
Vistronic
1585
1360 1580
RPM
MA-11-01456A
Considering system operation, this function should be

tested using an engine speed above 1,500 rpm.
Vistronic speed control cursor.
When the value is zero, or when this window
is closed, it is the DCC2 that controls the
1585 Vistronic speed: this is the tractor normal oper-
ating mode.
Significant speed changes can be heard from the
sound made by the engine fan.
CAUTION: Ensure that changing the

Vistronic speed cannot lead to engine heating.
¤ H
SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Error codes
GUF103 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Error codes
CONTENTS
A . Reading error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . List of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . EEM2 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . EEM2 sensor diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
E . EEM2 controller diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
F . Fuel injection pump diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
G . Electrical diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
H . Component characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
¤ H
¤ H
A . Reading error codes

The reading of error codes can be carried out in
2 ways:
- by direct reading of the error code on the DCC2,
- with WinEEM2, which is accessed from Wintest in
the engine diagnostics screen.
Error codes are stored by the ECU.
Reading codes on the DCC2
The user is informed when there is a possible fault by

an error code displayed on the DCC2. A
- Tractor without DOT MATRIX screen (Fig. 1)
To erase the error code, press the display change
control key; this cancels the display (unless there is
a major fault) but does not delete the error from the
ECU memory.
- Tractor with DOT MATRIX screen (Fig. 2)

To erase the error code, press the Escape (ESC) key
on the DOT MATRIX control keyboard; this cancels
the display (unless there is a major fault) but does not
MA-11-01298A
delete the error from the ECU memory.
The “E” of “NumE” indicates an Engine error.
Fig. 1
If several faults occur simultaneously, the corre-
sponding error codes are displayed one after the other
for approximately 4 seconds each.
ERROR
NumE 100
MA-11-01299A
Fig. 2
¤ H
B . List of error codes
Display
Code display
before soft EEM2 error description Page
on DCC2
DCC2 01.06
629 10, Power On self-test error ..................................................................................................... 22
9000 11, Hardware Watchdog ........................................................................................................... 22
620 15, 5 VDC supply error, LOW ( <4.6V)...................................................................................... 23
620 16, 5 VDC supply error, HIGH (> 5.2V).......................................................................................................23
168 17, Battery voltage LOW (< 7.8V)............................................................................................. 23
1136 20, ECU temperature too high > 120×C................................................................................... 24
9200 30, PCU EEPROM CheckSum error ......................................................................................... 24
9201 31, PCU EEPROM hardware error ............................................................................................ 24
9203 32, PCU ADC error.................................................................................................................... 25
9204 33, Pump MAP error ................................................................................................................. 25
9205 34, PCU Internal bus error..........................................................................................................................25
9206 35, PCU Powerstage error ........................................................................................................ 25
9207 37, Pump CAN interface configuration error ..............................................................................................26
9209 39, PCU BIP not recognised ..................................................................................................... 26
9210 40, Solenoid valve final error..................................................................................................... 27
9211 41, Solenoid valve error ............................................................................................................ 27
9212 42, IAT final error ...................................................................................................................... 27
9213 43, PCU Over temperature ....................................................................................................... 27
9214 44, PCU Temperature sensor error........................................................................................... 28
9215 45, PCU Battery voltage measurement .................................................................................... 28
9216 46, Injection timing device error ............................................................................................... 28
9717 47, Injection timing device vibrations ....................................................................................... 29
9218 48, PCU Speed sensor final error ............................................................................................. 29
9219 49, PCU CAN bus final error ..................................................................................................... 29
9220 50, PCU reset while the engine is running (< 6.0V).................................................................... 6
9221 51, PCU connection defective on the CAN................................................................................. 7
9222 52, Emergency shutdown signal (MAB) test error ..................................................................... 7
9223 53, PSG1 signal missing ............................................................................................................. 8
9224 54, Injection control pulse width error ........................................................................................ 8
9225 55, Pump speed deviation .......................................................................................................... 9
9226 56, Pump supply voltage too low (< 6.8V) .................................................................................. 9
9226 57, Pump supply voltage too high (>17.0V) ................................................................................ 9
190 66, Speed sensor error ............................................................................................................. 17
190 94, Overspeed (over 3000 rpm) ................................................................................................ 10
NOTE: Until DCC2 soft version 01.06, the error display was in the right-hand column
¤ H
Display
Code display
before soft EEM2 error description Page
on DCC2
DCC2 01.06
100 95, Oil pressure sensor error .................................................................................................... 18
100 96, Oil pressure sensor error, LOW.......................................................................................... 18
100 97, Oil pressure sensor error, HIGH ......................................................................................... 18
100 98, Oil pressure LOW, warning ................................................................................................ 10
100 99, Oil pressure too LOW, alarm .............................................................................................. 10
102 100, Boost pressure sensor error, LOW................................................................................... 19
102 101, Boost pressure sensor error, HIGH .................................................................................. 19
102 102, Boost pressure LOW ........................................................................................................ 10
110 110, Coolant temperature sensor error, LOW .......................................................................... 20
110 111, Coolant temperature sensor error, HIGH.......................................................................... 20
110 112, Coolant temperature HIGH, warning ................................................................................ 11
110 113, Coolant temperature HIGH, alarm .................................................................................... 11
105 114, Intake manifold temperature sensor error, LOW.............................................................. 21
105 115, Intake manifold temperature sensor error, HIGH ............................................................. 21
105 116, Intake manifold temperature HIGH................................................................................... 12
- 120, Individual cylinder error (not used).................................................................................... 12
97 121, Water in fuel (not used) .................................................................................................... 12
94 122, Fuel pressure LOW........................................................................................................... 13
9227 123, Air in the fuel system........................................................................................................ 13
9006 141, Vehicle CAN off ................................................................................................................ 14
9007 142, CAN pump off................................................................................................................... 15
898 146, Speed requested by the CAN out of range, LOW (< 500 rpm) ........................................ 15
898 147, Speed requested by the CAN out of range, HIGH (> 3000 rpm) ...................................... 15
- 172, Overspeed supervisor failure (not used)........................................................................... 15
9101 173, Power parameters too high .............................................................................................. 16
9102 174, Absolute maximum power not set ................................................................................... 16
9103 175, Injection pump serial number mismatch ........................................................................................... 16
237 176, Invalid ECU source address selected ................................................................................................ 16
9108 177, Test soft expired................................................................................................................................ 16
- 180, Maximum power mismatch.............................................................................................. 17
- 181, Maximum vehicle speed mismatch (not used).................................................................................. 17
- 182, Control system identification mismatch (not used) .......................................................... 17
- 183, Cruise control UI failure (not used) ................................................................................... 17
- 184, Ground speed missing (not used)..................................................................................... 17
NOTE: Until DCC2 soft version 01.06, the error display was in the right-hand column
¤ H
50, PCU reset while the engine is running

C . EEM2 troubleshooting
(< 6.0V)
Initial system check Description
When the power is switched on, observe the correct The supply voltage of the pump control unit drops
operation of the engine oil pressure indicator light on below the allowed voltage limit (< 6.0 V) during opera-
the instrument panel. The engine oil pressure indicator tion. If the supply voltage returns to the allowed
light should be on when the engine is not running. If it voltage range (< 200ms), the engine continues normal
does not turn on, the problem is probably caused by operation. Otherwise the engine will stop. In both
one of the following elements: oil pressure sensor, cases the error code has been stored.
LED, CAN bus or EEM2 controller.
Reaction in the EEM
If the indicator light does not turn on within 4 seconds The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
after switching the ignition on or the light is dim, the vated. There is no fuel injection during the PCU reset
problem is caused by the EEM2 controller supply or time.
one of the following elements: EEM2 controller, oil
pressure switch or CAN bus. Check the following:
Solution
1. Check the battery voltage. If the battery voltage is
below 11.5V, the battery and generator have to be • Check battery condition for too low voltage
inspected and replaced if necessary. (< 11.5V).
2. • Check alternator operation.
• +12VDC supply - EEM2 (fuse 10A) • Check the contacts of wiring between the battery
Measure the voltage from EEM2 pin 70 (+12 VDC) to and the rotary pump for bad contact at a connector
pin 69 (ground). If the voltage is more than 1 V (Fig. 8).
below the battery voltage, check the +12VDC • Measure the voltage from EEM2 pin 48 (+12 VDC) to
EEM2 fuse. pin 46 (ground). If the voltage is more than 1 V below
• +12VDC supply, BOSCH VP (fuse 25A) the battery voltage, check the +12VDC BOSCH VP
fuse.
Measure the voltage from EEM2 pin 48 (+12 VDC) to
pin 46 (ground). If the voltage is more than 1 V
below the battery voltage, check the +12VDC The EEM2 controller provides a power supply to the
BOSCH VP fuse. PCU. If the power supply to the EEM2 controller is
• +12VDC ignition key (fuse 5A) correct, but the PCU power supply is not, a possible
cause is a faulty EEM2 controller. Replace the
Measure the voltage from EEM2 pin 21 (+12 VDC).
controller and connect the current injection pump
If the voltage is more than 1 V below the battery
(serial number) to the new EEM2 controller with the
voltage, check the +12VDC ignition fuse.
EEM2 Service Tool.
NOTE: Error code 50 may be activated if the power
If one or several fuse are blown, replace and switch supply to the EEM2 has been switched off incorrectly.
the power on. If the fuse(s) blows again, check the
• Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller.
wiring from the fuses to the EEM2 pins 70, 48 and 21
for a short circuit to the tractor ground. If no short NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
circuit is found and voltages are correct, the controller used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
is faulty. Replace the controller and couple current pump serial number mismatch.
injection pump (serial number) to the new EEM2 If error code 50 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
the current injection pump (serial number) to the
new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
¤ H
51, PCU connection defective on the CAN 52, Emergency shutdown signal (MAB)
Description test error
The EEM2 controller is not able to communicate with Description
the injection pump. Normally, the engine shutdown is managed by the
CAN bus. If normal shutdown can not be managed by
Reaction in the EEM the CAN bus, the EEM2 controller activates the MAB
emergency shutdown signal which will stop the
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
engine and after a few seconds the EEM2 unit cuts
vated. The “Limp home” function will be activated in
the power supply to the PCU (if the MAB signal has
the injection pump. The engine will run at a constant
been activated). To be sure that the MAB signal is
speed of 1400 rpm with reduced power. If the power
working in emergency situations, the EEM2 tests the
supply is too weak the engine will not start.
MAB line continuously. If the test fails, error code 52 is
stored.
Solution
• Check the CAN bus between the injection pump and Reaction in the EEM
EEM2 controller for a short circuit and ensure the
injection pump is receiving the correct power supply
vated.
(Fig. 8).
• Measure the CAN loop from the EEM2 controller
between pins 44 and 20 (resistance 120 Ohms ± Solution
10%). Disconnect the Bosch VP pump connector • Check the MAB line between the EEM2 controller
first. and the PCU (Pump Control Unit) for broken
• If the CAN bus between the injection pump and contact/wiring (Fig. 8).
EEM2 controller and the power supply are OK, the • Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller.
possible causes are a faulty EEM2 controller or a NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
faulty PCU (Pump control unit). used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
• Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller. pump serial number mismatch.
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is If error code 52 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
pump serial number mismatch. the current injection pump (serial number) to the
If error code 51 disappears, the EEM2 controller has new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. If
been damaged. Replace the controller and connect error code 52 does not disappear when using
the current injection pump (serial number) to the another EEM2 controller, the Bosch VP PCU is
new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. If damaged. Contact the BOSCH service agency.
error code 51 does not disappear when using
another EEM2 controller, the Bosch VP PCU is
damaged. Contact the BOSCH service agency.
¤ H
53, PSG1 signal missing 54, Injection control pulse width error
Description Description
The EEM2 controller cannot communicate correctly The EEM2 controller cannot manage normal shutdown
with the PCU via the CAN bus. This message contains if fuel quantity is zero because of an error in the CAN
important information for engine operation. bus, power supply or PCU.
Reaction in the EEM Reaction in the EEM

The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
vated. The EEM2 controller will activate emergency vated. The EEM2 controller will activate emergency
shutdown. shutdown.
Solution Solution
The probable cause of the problem is a faulty PCU. The probable cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
• Check the CAN bus between the injection pump and • Check the CAN bus between the injection pump and
EEM2 controller for short circuit and ensure the EEM2 controller for a short circuit and the power
injection pump is receiving the correct power supply supply to the injection pump (Fig. 8).
(Fig. 8). • If the CAN bus between the injection pump and
• If the CAN bus between the injection pump and EEM2 controller operate correctly and the power
EEM2 controller are operating correctly and the supply is correct, the possible causes are an EEM2
power supply is correct, the possible causes are an controller error or a PCU (Pump control unit) error.
EEM2 controller error or a PCU (Pump control unit) • Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller.
error. NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
• Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller. used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is pump serial number mismatch.
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of If error code 54 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
pump serial number mismatch. been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
If error code 53 disappears, the EEM2 controller has the current injection pump (serial number) to the
been damaged. Replace the controller and connect new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. If
the current injection pump (serial number) to the error code 54 does not disappear with another EEM2
new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. If controller, the Bosch VP PCU is damaged. Contact
error code 53 does not disappear when using the BOSCH service agency.
another EEM2 controller, the Bosch VP PCU is • Switch the ignition off (5sec.) and back on and start
damaged. Contact the BOSCH service agency. the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start caused by a faulty PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact
the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is the BOSCH service agency.
caused by a faulty PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact
the BOSCH service agency.
¤ H
55, Pump speed deviation 56, Pump supply voltage too low (< 6.8V)
The EEM2 controller has inconsistent speed informa- The supply voltage is too low for the defined time. The
tion between crank speed (detected by Hall sensor engine cannot start.
from the crank shaft) and pump speed (detected inside
the Injection pump). The probable causes for the Reaction in the EEM
problem is the PCU, because if there is an error with a
Hall sensor, there would be a different error code. The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
vated.
Reaction in the EEM
Solution
vated. The EEM2 controller will activate emergency The probable cause of the problem is the voltage drop
shutdown. down during starting.
• Check that battery voltage is not too low (> 11.5V).
Solution • Check alternator operation.
If the error remains active after ignition is switched on:
The probable cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
• check all contacts and fuses and wiring from the
• Test PCU operation with another EEM2 controller.
battery to the EEM2 controller and to the rotary
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is pump for bad contact at a connector or for a short
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of circuit.
pump serial number mismatch.
• Check the supply voltage of the BOSCH VP injection
If error code 55 disappears, the EEM2 controller has pump (Fig. 8).
been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool. If 57, Pump supply voltage too high (>17.0V)
error code 55 does not disappear when using Description
another EEM2 controller, the Bosch VP PCU is
damaged. Contact the BOSCH service agency. Supply voltage is too high for defined time.
• Switch the ignition off (5sec.) and back on and start
the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is Reaction in the EEM
caused by a faulty PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
the BOSCH service agency. vated. The EEM2 controller will switch off the supply
voltage from the PCU and will stop the engine if the
error remains active after 20 seconds.
Solution
• The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
vated. Check the correct operation of the alternator
and charge voltage.
• Check the supply voltage of the BOSCH VP injection
pump (Fig. 8).
¤ H
94, Overspeed (over 3000 rpm) 99, Oil pressure too LOW, alarm
The error is activated if the engine exceeds 3000 rpm Oil pressure drops below the alarm level.
during operation. A possible cause is engine braking at
downhill with the gear ratio too low. Reaction in the EEM
Reaction in the EEM vated. The engine will stop automatically, after
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- 30 seconds. Activation of the stopping procedure can
vated. No fuel injection. The engine will recover after be detected with “ shutdown pending status ” by
returning to normal condition (< 3000 rpm). CAN message. The oil pressure light has been
switched on.
98, Oil pressure LOW, warning
Solution
Description
Find the cause for the low oil pressure indication.
Oil pressure decreases below the allowed limit.
Possible causes:
• Check the oil level and condition.
Reaction in the EEM
• The oil filter is clogged.
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- • Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
vated. The warning can be detected by the CAN
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
message or the oil pressure light.
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 6).
• Check the oil pressure sensor (Fig. 11).
Solution
Find the cause for the low oil pressure indication.
102, Boost pressure LOW
Possible causes:
• Check the oil level and condition. Description
• Check the mechanical condition of the engine. Boost pressure drops below the alarm level.
• The idling speed is too low.
• The oil filter is clogged. Reaction in the EEM
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 6). vated.
• Check the oil pressure sensor (Fig. 11).
Solution
Find the cause for the low boost pressure indication.
Possible causes:
• Check the tightness of the boost pressure pipelines
of the engine.
• Check the condition of the engine turbo charger
• Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
• Check the boost pressure sensor (Fig. 12).
• Check the wiring from the EEM2 controller to the
boost pressure (Fig. 5).
¤ H
112, Coolant temperature HIGH, warning 113, Coolant temperature HIGH, alarm
Coolant temperature exceeds the overheating limit Coolant temperature rises above the alarm level.
value. The warning can be detected by the CAN
message or indicator light. Reaction in the EEM
Reaction in the EEM vated. The engine will stop automatically, after
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- 30 seconds. When the coolant temperature rises
vated. The Engine power will be reduced above this above alarm level, activation of the stopping procedure
limit for prevent overheating of the engine. can be detected with “ shutdown pending status ” by
CAN message. The alarm is activated.
Solution
Find the cause for the overheating. Solution
Possible causes: Find the cause for the overheating.
• Check the coolant level. Possible causes:
• Check the radiator condition. • Check the coolant level.
• Check the mechanical condition of the engine. • Check the radiator condition.
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). • Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 7). • Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
• Check the temperature sensor (Fig. 10). • Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 7).
If the error remains active and the engine temperature • Check the temperature sensor (Fig. 10).
is low: If the error remains active and the engine temperature
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with is low:
another EEM2 controller. • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is another EEM2 controller.
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
pump serial number mismatch. used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
If error code 112 disappears, the EEM2 controller pump serial number mismatch.
has been damaged. Replace the controller and If error code 113 disappears, the EEM2 controller
connect the current injection pump (serial number) has been damaged. Replace the controller and
to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service connect the current injection pump (serial number)
Tool. to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service
Tool.
¤ H
116, Intake manifold temperature HIGH 121, Water in fuel (not used)
Intake manifold temperature rises above the warning Water level in the water separator rises to warning
limit value. This temperature sensor is integrated in the level. Example: condensation water.
boost sensor.
Reaction in the EEM
Reaction in the EEM The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
The error code is stored and the indicator light is activated.
vated. Engine power will be reduced.
Solution
Solution Check the water separator at the bottom of the
Find the cause for the excessive intake manifold prefilter. Drain water from the fuelling system.
temperature. If there is no water in the fuelling system:
Possible causes: • Check the wiring from EEM2 connector to sensor
• Check the condition of the air-cooling system. connector.
(Cleanliness, pressure tightness, etc.) • Check the supply voltage at the water detector
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). sensor connector from pin A (+12V) to pin B (GND).
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 5). • If the power supply to the sensor is correct and there
• Check the temperature sensor (integrated in boost are no breaks or short circuits in wirings -> replace
pressure sensor) (§ H, (7) Intake air temperature the sensor.
sensor).
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
another EEM2 controller.
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
If error code 116 disappears, the EEM2 controller
has been damaged. Replace the controller and
connect the current injection pump (serial number)
to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service
Tool.
120, Individual cylinder error (not used)
¤ H
122, Fuel pressure LOW 123, Air in the fuel system

Fuel feed pressure after filters is too low (less than The EEM2 controller has identified a permanent injec-
0.2 bar) for > 20 seconds. tion pump piston oscillation. The probable cause for
oscillating is an air leak into the fuel. The EEM2
Reaction in the EEM controller activates the default mode to avoid
damaging the internal injection pump.
NOTE: Immediately seek the source of the air in the
vated.
fuel circuit.
Solution
Reaction in the EEM
Check that the lift pump above the filter is running; it The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
should run for one minute after switching the ignition
vated. Engine speed is limited to 1,500 rpm and engine
on.
power decreases.
Possible causes
Solution
• The filter is blocked (impurities, freezing, etc.).
• The probable cause of the problem is an air leak into
• Leak / air in the fuel system.
the fuel at the low pressure side or in the fuel
• Check the fuel level. system. Check the tightness of all of the engine fuel
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 9). supply lines.
• Check the sensor. • Check the tractor supply lines.
• Measure fuel pressure to ensure that the fuel filter
If the lift pump is operating, check: elements or supply lines from the tank are not
• that the filter is not choked (impurities, freezing, clogged. Run the engine slowly for a few seconds.
etc.). When idling, the pressure must be between 1.0 and
• that there is no leak / air in the fuel system. 1.2 bar.
• the fuel level from the tank (maybe gauge is showing • Check the tightness of the main filter and prefilter.
wrong level). • Replace the original metal feed pipe located
between the injection pump and the feed pump with
a transparent hose (rubber / plastic tube) and ensure
If the lift pump is not operating, check:
that there is no air in the fuel. If this is not the case,
• Feed pump fuse. check all feed lines again, along with filter tightness
• Feed pump relay. in one run.
• Feed pump wiring. • If there is no air in the system and error code 42 is
still active, the problem may be due to a failure of the
If the power supply is operating correctly, then the lift Bosch VP injection pump sensor.
pump is damaged and has to be replaced.
¤ H
141, Vehicle CAN off

Description
EEM2 controller is not able to communicate with other
devices on the CAN bus.
NOTE: the EEM2 cannot detect an open circuit (wiring).
Reaction in the EEM

vated. Control requests by the CAN are not active.
Solution
• Check the CAN bus between the EEM2 controller
and the tractor for a short circuit between the CAN
lines (Fig. 8).
• At worst the cause of the problem is an error in the
EEM2 controller or the vehicle controller.
If error code 141 disappears, the EEM2 controller
Tool.
¤ H
142, CAN pump off 146, Speed requested by the CAN out of
Description range, LOW (< 500 rpm)
The EEM2 controller is not able to communicate with Description
the injection pump. Speed requested by the CAN is below 500 rpm.

vated. The EEM2 controller is not able to govern vated. The EEM2 controller will start to use the hard-
engine speed. The “Limp home” function will be acti- wired throttle for speed control. If there is no
vated in the injection pump. The engine will run at a hardwired throttle the engine runs at idle speed.
constant speed of 1400 rpm with reduced power. The
engine will not start if there is no power supply.
Solution
Solution Find the cause for the too low speed request from the
vehicle controller.
• Check the CAN bus between the EEM2 controller
and the injection pump for a short circuit between
the CAN lines. The probable cause of the problem is 147, Speed requested by the CAN out of
a short circuit between the CAN lines. range, HIGH (> 3000 rpm)
At worst, the problem is an error in the EEM2 Description
controller or the PCU (pump control unit).
Speed requested by the CAN is above 3000 rpm.
• Measure the CAN loop from the EEM2 controller
between pins 44 and 20 (resistance 120 Ohms
± 10%). Disconnect the Bosch VP pump connector Reaction in the EEM
first. The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with vated. The EEM2 controller will start to use the hard-
another EEM2 controller. wired throttle for speed control. If there is no
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is hardwired throttle the engine runs at idle speed.
pump serial number mismatch. Solution
If error code 142 disappears, the EEM2 controller Find the cause for the too high speed request from the
vehicle controller.
Tool. Delete the error code. Switch the ignition off 172, Overspeed supervisor failure (not
(5sec.) and back on and start the engine. If the error used)
is still active, the problem is caused by a faulty PCU
(Pump Control unit). Contact the BOSCH service
agency.
¤ H
173, Power parameters too high 175, Injection pump serial number
Description mismatch
Allowed power parameters for application have been Description
exceeded. The power parameters do not match with Injection pump serial number does not match with the
the current EEM2 controller. The error code will be current EEM2 controller.
activated, for example if the wrong application soft-
ware has been downloaded to the EEM2 controller. If
Reaction in the EEM
for example, 143 kW software has been downloaded
into an EEM2 controller, which had 120 kW software The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
inside originally, this error is shown too. vated. The engine will start, but the fuel quantity has
been reduced.
Reaction in the EEM
Solution
vated. The volume of fuel injected is reduced. • Replace the engine EEM2 controller.
• Couple the current injection pump (serial number) to
Solution the new EEM2 controller with the service tool.
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on to see if • If this does not help, replace the EEM2 controller for
the engine.
the error is still active.
If the error is still active, download the correct soft-
ware (for correct horse-power setting) to the EEM2 If a new (spare part) EEM2 controller is fitted, couple
controller with the Service Tool. the current injection pump (serial number) to the new
If this does not help, replace the EEM2 controller for EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
the engine.
176, Invalid ECU source address selected
If a new (spare part) EEM2 controller is fitted, couple
the current injection pump (serial number) to the new
EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
177, Test soft expired
174, Absolute maximum power not set

Description
Absolute maximum power value has not been acti-
vated. Example: wrong software in the EEM2
controller.
Reaction in the EEM

vated. The volume of fuel is reduced.
Solution
This problem cannot be solved on the field. Replace
the EEM2 controller and couple the current injection
pump (serial number) to the new EEM2 controller with
controller with the Service Tool.
¤ H
180, Maximum power mismatch

D . EEM2 sensor diagnostics
Description
Maximum power configuration is not correct for the 66, Speed sensor error
vehicle. Power information between the EEM2 Description
controller and the vehicle controller do not match, for
example the wrong vehicle controller or software for EEM2 cannot recognize correct speed signal from the
application may have been installed. speed sensor.

vated. The engine will start, but the fuel quantity has vated. EEM2 will start to use redundant speed infor-
been reduced. mation from the injection pump and engine speed is
limited to 1800 rpm. Engine power will be reduced and
the injection timing delayed.
Solution
• Replace the engine EEM2 controller. Solution
• Replace the tractor controller.
• Download the correct software in the vehicle/EEM2
controller.
• Check the +12V supply voltage for the speed sensor
(Fig. 4).
181, Maximum vehicle speed mismatch • Check the sensor. Run the engine with the starter
(not used) motor and measure the speed pulses between the
tractor ground and the sensor connector pin 2. The
pulses should be from 0 V to the battery voltage
182, Control system identification (12 V).
mismatch (not used) • Battery voltage may drop down during starting.
• If no pulses are detected replace the damaged
183, Cruise control UI failure (not used) sensor.
184, Ground speed missing (not used) NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
If error code 66 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
¤ H
95, Oil pressure sensor error 97, Oil pressure sensor error, HIGH
Too high voltage from the oil pressure sensor has been The voltage measured by the oil pressure sensor lies
detected (>200 kPa), while the engine is not running. above the normal operating range.
Reaction in the EEM

Reaction in the EEM
vated, the fuel quantity is reduced. Engine protection
Solution in case the high oil pressure is not activated.
NOTE: may cause engine damage, if oil pressure is too
high.
• Check the +5V supply voltage for the sensor.
Solution
• Check the sensor (Fig. 11).
• Replace the damaged sensor. • Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
96, Oil pressure sensor error, LOW
Description • Replace the damaged sensor.
The measured voltages from the oil pressure sensor lie • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
below the normal operating range. another EEM2 controller.
Reaction in the EEM
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- pump serial number mismatch.
vated. Engine power will be reduced. Engine protec- If error code 97 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
tion in case of low oil pressure is not active. been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
NOTE: may cause engine damage, if oil pressure is too the current injection pump (serial number) to the
low. new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
Solution
• Replace the damaged sensor.
¤ H
100, Boost pressure sensor error, LOW 101, Boost pressure sensor error, HIGH
The voltage measured by the boost pressure sensor The voltage measured by the boost pressure sensor
lies above the normal operating range. lies above the normal operating range.

vated. The boost pressure functions are not active. vated. The boost pressure functions are not active.
Solution Solution
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). • Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 5). • Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 5).
• Check the +5V supply voltage for the sensor. • Check the +5V supply voltage for the sensor.
• Check the sensor (Fig. 12). • Check the sensor (Fig. 12).
• Replace the damaged sensor. • Replace the damaged sensor.
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
another EEM2 controller. another EEM2 controller.
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
pump serial number mismatch. pump serial number mismatch.
If error code 100 disappears, the EEM2 controller If error code 101 disappears, the EEM2 controller
has been damaged. Replace the controller and has been damaged. Replace the controller and
connect the current injection pump (serial number) connect the current injection pump (serial number)
to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service
Tool. Tool.
¤ H
110, Coolant temperature sensor error, 111, Coolant temperature sensor error,
LOW HIGH
The signal measured by the coolant temperature The signal measured by the coolant temperature
sensor lies below the normal operating range. sensor lies above the normal operating range.

vated. Engine power will be reduced. Engine protec- vated. The volume of fuel is reduced. Engine protec-
tion and others functions linked to coolant temperature tion and others functions linked to coolant temperature
are not active. For instance overheating protection is are not active. For instance overheating protection is
not active. not active.
NOTA: may cause engine damage if the engine over- NOTE: may cause engine damage if the engine over-
heats. [check that the engine really is overheating, see heats.
error no.111]
Solution
Solution • Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). • Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 7).
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 7). • Check the sensor (Fig. 10).
• Check the sensor (Fig. 10). • Replace the damaged sensor.
• Replace the damaged sensor. • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with another EEM2 controller.
another EEM2 controller. NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of pump serial number mismatch.
pump serial number mismatch. If error code 111 disappears, the EEM2 controller
If error code 110 disappears, the EEM2 controller has been damaged. Replace the controller and
has been damaged. Replace the controller and connect the current injection pump (serial number)
connect the current injection pump (serial number) to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service
to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
Tool.
¤ H
114, Intake manifold temperature sensor 115, Intake manifold temperature sensor
error, LOW error, HIGH
The signal measured by the temperature sensor (inte- The signal measured by the temperature sensor (inte-
grated in the boost pressure sensor) lies below the grated in the boost pressure sensor) lies above the
normal operating range. normal operating range.

vated. Functions linked to intake manifold temperature vated. Functions linked to intake manifold temperature
are not active. are not active.
Solution Solution
• Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation). • Check the contact surfaces of the pins (oxidation).
• Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 5). • Check the sensor wiring (Fig. 5).
• Check the sensor (§ H, (7) Intake air temperature • Check the sensor (§ H, (7) Intake air temperature
sensor). sensor).
• Replace the damaged sensor. • Replace the damaged sensor.
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
another EEM2 controller. another EEM2 controller.
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
used, error code 175 will be activated, because of used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
pump serial number mismatch. pump serial number mismatch.
If error code 114 disappears, the EEM2 controller If error code 115 disappears, the EEM2 controller
has been damaged. Replace the controller and has been damaged. Replace the controller and
connect the current injection pump (serial number) connect the current injection pump (serial number)
to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service
Tool. Tool.
¤ H
11, Hardware Watchdog

E . EEM2 controller diagnostics
Description
10, Power On self-test error There is a failure in the EEM2 program execution
Description caused by a unit failure.
When ignition is switched ON, the EEM2 controller
performs internal system checks. If any of these test Reaction in the EEM
fail, the system reports the Power On self-test error. The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
The engine will not start. vated. The engine will stop immediately and may not
start.
Reaction in the EEM
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- Solution
vated. The engine will not start. • Turn the ignition key off and back on. If the error
code is displayed again, the EEM2 controller has to
Solution be replaced.
• Turn the ignition key off and back on. If the error
code is displayed again, the EEM2 controller has to
be replaced. NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
¤ H
15, 5 VDC supply error, LOW ( <4.6V) 16, 5 VDC supply error, HIGH (> 5.2V)
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttle Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttle
control is too low. control is too high.

vated. The EEM2 controller detects wrong values from vated. The EEM2 controller detects wrong values by
the sensors and throttle control which explains incor- the sensors and throttle control which explains incor-
rect engine operation. rect engine operation.
Solution Solution
The probable cause of the problem is the voltage drop • Check the reference supply lines from EEM2
down, during starting, if the error code remains active controller pin 13 for short circuit to battery voltage.
when the ignition is switched on and the engine is not • If no short circuit is found, the voltage regulator of
running. In this case: the EEM2 controller is faulty.
• Check boost pressure sensor for a short circuit via • Test the current EEM2 controller operation with
supply pin 2 to ground. another EEM2 controller.
• Check foot throttle for a short circuit via supply pin 13 NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is
to ground. used, error code 175 will be activated, because of
• Check reference supply lines for a short circuit to pump serial number mismatch.
ground. If error code 16 disappears, the EEM2 controller has
• Test the current EEM2 controller operation with been damaged. Replace the controller and connect
another EEM2 controller. the current injection pump (serial number) to the
NOTE: If the EEM2 controller from another tractor is new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 Service Tool.
pump serial number mismatch. 17, Battery voltage LOW (< 7.8V)
been damaged. Replace the controller and connect Description
the current injection pump (serial number) to the Supply voltage for EEM2 controller is too low.
Reaction in the EEM
vated.
Solution
The probable cause of the problem is the voltage drop
down, during starting. If error code 17 remains active,
check the following path:
• Check the battery condition for too low voltage.
• Check contacts through the wiring from the battery
to the EEM2 for bad contact at a connector (Fig. 3).
• Check alternator operation.
¤ H
20, ECU temperature too high > 120°C

F . Fuel injection pump diagnostics
Description
Temperature inside EEM2 controller is too high. This 30, PCU EEPROM CheckSum error
can be caused when overheating has stopped the Description
engine and the cooling system does not work; the
temperature may rise inside the EEM2 controller, The cause of the problem is incorrect check sum. At
because there is no cooling airflow. least one eeprom value cannot be read in the pump
control unit. Engine power is reduced due to this error.
Thermocouple operation: from -40°C to 150°C
Reaction in the EEM

Reaction in the EEM
The error code is stored.
vated.
Solution
Solution
• If the error IS STILL ACTIVE: Test the body tempera-
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
ture of the EEM2 controller by touch. If the controller
is not hot, but the error is still active, the EEM2 • Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start
controller has to be replaced. Replace the controller the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a
and connect the current injection pump (serial faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH
number) to the new EEM2 controller with the EEM2 service agency.
Service Tool.
• If the error is NOT ACTIVE anymore, check error 31, PCU EEPROM hardware error
codes 112 and 113. If these error codes are active at
Description
the same time, the problem is probably caused by
engine overheating. You can now ignore this error The cause of the problem is a hardware error. All
code. eeprom values cannot be read in the pump control
unit.
If error code 112 or 113 has not been stored, the
temperature element inside the EEM2 controller may Reaction in the EEM
be defective. Test the current EEM2 controller opera- The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
tion with another EEM2 controller. vated. Engine power will be reduced.
Solution
Replace the controller and connect the current injec- The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
tion pump (serial number) to the new EEM2 controller • Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start
with the EEM2 Service Tool. the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a
faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH
service agency.
¤ H
32, PCU ADC error 34, PCU Internal bus error

Incorrect analog values, for instance battery voltage for The cause of the problem is unit error. The pump
fuel quantity correction. control unit detects and incorrect injection quantity.
Reaction in the EEM

Reaction in the EEM
vated. The EEM2 controller will activate emergency
shutdown.
Solution Solution
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU. The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start • Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start
the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a
faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH
service agency. service agency.
33, Pump MAP error 35, PCU Powerstage error

After power on, the pump control unit checks during a The cause of the problem is a unit error or solenoid
self-test whether a pump MAP has been programmed valve voltage measurement error.
and operates faultlessly.
Reaction in the EEM
vated. The EEM2 controller will activate emergency Solution
shutdown.
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start
Solution the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU. faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start service agency.
the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is a
faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the BOSCH
service agency.
¤ H
37, Pump CAN interface configuration 39, PCU BIP not recognised
error Description
Description The pump control unit cannot recognize the beginning
The EEM2 controller and pump control unit are not of injection pulse. Injection timing and fuel amount are
able to communicate because of wrong configuration, not correct.
error code 33 is also activated. The error code may also
be activated if an unsuitable spare part injection pump Reaction in the EEM
has been installed.
vated.
Reaction in the EEM
The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti- Solution
Possible cause of the problem is a too long/thin power
shutdown.
supply line for the injection pump.
Impedance of the power supply line is too high.
Solution
• Check the contacts through the wiring (Fig. 3).
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU. The EEM2 controller provides a power supply to the
• Contact the BOSCH service agency, if the injection PCU. Measure the voltage from EEM2 pin 48
pump is not suitable for the SisuDiesel engine. (+12 VDC) to pin 46 (ground) of EEM2 connector.
• If the injection pump is correct, delete the error code. NOTE: battery voltage will drop during pre or post
Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on and start heating period.
the engine. If the error remains active, the problem If the power supply to the EEM2 controller is correct,
is a faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact the but PCU power supply is not correct, replace the
BOSCH service agency. controller and couple the current injection pump
(serial number) to the new EEM2 controller with the
Service Tool.
• If wirings and the EEM2 controller are OK, the
problem is a faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit). Contact
¤ H
40, Solenoid valve final error 42, IAT final error

The Pump control unit monitors the solenoid valve IAT is an angular reference for the cam-based control
current and activates the error code when the solenoid of the fuel quantity solenoid valve. If the IAT pulse is
valve is continuously energized. missing then the error code is activated, and fuel injec-
tion will be stopped.
Reaction in the EEM
Reaction in the EEM
vated.
shutdown.
Solution 1
Solution The probable cause of the problem is too low engine
The probable cause of the problem is a faulty solenoid operating speed during starting. Check the tractor
valve or PCU. battery and starter motor condition.
• Contact the BOSCH service agency.
Solution 2
41, Solenoid valve error The probable cause of the problem is an air leak into
the fuel at the low-pressure side or air in the fuel
Description system. At worst, the cause of the problem is an injec-
The Pump control unit monitors the solenoid valve tion pump error.
current and the solenoid valve quick decay voltage. If
both of these variables leave the permitted range then
a solenoid valve error is recognized.
43, PCU Over temperature
Description
Reaction in the EEM The pump control unit recognises over temperature.
vated. Engine power will be reduced (also by the Reaction in the EEM
pump). The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
Solution
The probable cause of the problem is a faulty solenoid Solution
valve pump or PCU. • If other error codes are active (for example 112 or
• Contact the BOSCH service agency. 113), check those errors first.
• Find the cause for the over temperature.
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on: If the
error is still active, the problem is caused by a faulty
PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact the BOSCH
service agency.
¤ H
44, PCU Temperature sensor error 45, PCU Battery voltage measurement
The temperature measurement does not work Battery voltage measurement does not work correctly
correctly inside the injection pump and the pump inside the injection pump and the pump control unit
control unit uses a default value for pump temperature. uses a default value for battery voltage.

vated. Engine power will be reduced. vated.
Solution Solution
The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU. The cause of the problem is a faulty PCU.
• Switch the ignition off (5 sec.) and back on: If the • Switch the ignition off (5sec.) and back on and start
error is still active, the problem is caused by a faulty the engine. If the error is still active, the problem is
PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact the BOSCH caused by a faulty PCU (Pump Control unit). Contact
service agency. the BOSCH service agency.
46, Injection timing device error

Description
There is persistent governor deviation in injection
timing or the oscillating timing device piston.
Reaction in the EEM

Solution
• The probable cause for oscillating is an air leak into
the fuel at the low-pressure side.
• The probable cause for persistent governor deviation
is a wrong pump mounting angle or defective injec-
tion pump.
¤ H
47, Injection timing device vibrations 48, PCU Speed sensor final error
The PCU (pump control unit) has identified a contin- The pump control unit does not recognize reference
uous oscillation of the pump injection timing device pulses sent to the engine top dead center by the
piston. This error code is valid only for the Bosch VP44 engine control unit.
injection pump.
Reaction in the EEM
The error code is stored and the indicator light is activated. Engine power is reduced and injection timing
vated. Engine power will be reduced. delayed.
Solution Solution
The probable cause for oscillating is an air leak into the If error 66 is also active at the same time then check
fuel at the low-pressure side. its cause first.
• Check the tightness of all of the engine fuel supply Next:
lines. • Check “DZG” wiring between the pump and EEM2
• Check the tractor supply lines. controller (Fig. 8).
• Measure fuel pressure to ensure that the fuel filter
elements or supply lines from the fuel system are 49, PCU CAN bus final error
not clogged. Run the engine slowly for a few
seconds. When idling, the pressure must be Description
between 1.0 and 1.2 bar. There is problem at the CAN bus between the pump
• Check the tightness of the main filter and prefilter. control unit and EEM2 controller. The pump control
• Replace the original metal feed pipe located unit continuously indicates no message or an incorrect
between the injection pump and the feed pump with value range in the control message.
a transparent hose (rubber / plastic tube) and ensure
that there is no air in the fuel. If there is some air left Reaction in the EEM
in the fuel, re-check all supply lines and filter tight-
ness. The error code is stored and the indicator light is acti-
shutdown.
Solution
• Check CAN bus wiring between the injection pump
and EEM2 controller (Fig. 8).
At worst, the cause of the problem is the faulty EEM2
controller or Injection pump.
• In case of a faulty PCU (Pump Control Unit), contact
¤ H
G . Electrical diagrams
Electrical supplies
Fig. 3
Speed sensor
Fig. 4
Turbo Boost pressure sensor
Fig. 5
NOTE: To view these electrical diagrams in greater

detail, see GUF105
¤ H
Oil pressure sensor
Fig. 6
Coolant temperature sensor
Fig. 7

detail, see GUF105
¤ H
Bosch VP
NOTE: It is not allowed to make any resistance measurements from the Bosch VP PCU connector
pins! This may destroy the Bosch injection pump!!! Ensure that the Bosch VP PCU connector is
disconnected when measuring wiring!!
Fig. 8

detail, see GUF105
¤ H
Fuel pressure sensor
Fig. 9

detail, see GUF105
Legend
Figure 1: main connector, +12VDC Bosch VP, Power
ground Bosch VP, ignition key input, +12VDC Bosch
VP, Power ground Bosch VP
Figure 2: speed sensor, main connector
Figure 3: turbo pressure, main connector
Figure 4: oil pressure, main connector
Figure 5: coolant temperature, main connector
Figure 6: PCU (pump control unit), main connector,
+12VDC Bosch VP, Power ground Bosch VP
Figure 7: water detector, main connector
Figure 8: fuel pressure, main connector
¤ H
H . Component characteristics
(2) Coolant temperature sensor (Fig. 10)
Temperature (°C) Resistance (ohm)

-50 1000
0 1600
25 2000 Resistance (Ohm)
50 2400
75 2900
100 3400
125 4000
150 4600
Possible error codes

110: low coolant temperature < -40°C (1100 Ohm)
111: high coolant temperature > 125°C (4000 Ohm)
Temperature (°C)
Fig. 10
¤ H
(3) Oil pressure sensor (Fig. 11) (7) Intake air pressure sensor (Fig. 12)
Pressure (kPa) Pressure

Voltage (V) Voltage (V)
bar (kPa) bar (kPa)
0 0 0,5 0,5 50 0,5
1 100 0,9 0,8 80 0,9
2 200 1,3 1,1 110 1,3
3 300 1,7 1,4 140 1,7
4 400 2,1 1,7 170 2,1
5 500 2,5 2 200 2,5
6 600 2,9 2,3 230 2,9
7 700 3,3 2,6 260 3,3
8 800 3,7 2,9 290 3,7
9 900 4,1 3,2 320 4,1
10 1000 4,5 3,5 350 4,5
Possible error codes Possible error codes

96 : Oil pressure sensor error, too low (signal < 0.2V) 100: Pressure sensor error, too low (signal < 0.2V)
97 : Oil pressure sensor error, too high (signal > 4.8V) 101: Pressure sensor error, too high (signal > 4.8V)
98 : Oil pressure low, warning 102: low pressure, warning
99 : Oil pressure low, alarm

Signal out-of-tolerances, HIGH
Signal out-of-tolerances, HIGH
Signal out-of-tolerances, LOW
Signal out-of-tolerances, LOW

Fig. 12
Fig. 11
¤ H
(7) Intake air temperature sensor
Temperature (°C) Resistance (ohm)

-40 39260
-20 13850
0 5500
20 2420
40 1166
60 609
80 340
100 202
120 127
130 102
Possible error codes

100: Temperature sensor error, too low (signal < 0.2V)
101: Temperature sensor error, too high (signal > 4.8V)
102: high temperature, warning
¤ H
SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Electrical Diagrams
GUF105 - SisuDiesel ELECTRONIC INJECTION - Electrical

Diagrams
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . SisuDiesel engine harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Electrical diagrams on the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
¤ H
¤ H
In general, the components or connectors are named

A . General in order to indicate the corresponding elements of the
tractor:
Description AC## Armrest
The harnesses fitted on the tractor allow data to be BAF## Fuse box
exchanged and power to be supplied to the electrical CA## Automatic air conditioning
and electronic systems. CAB## Cab
The tractor is fitted with 3 different types of power ENG## Engine
supply:
FA## Suspended front axle
• +12V Battery (Permanent)
L## Linkage - ParkLock (HA)
• +12V APC (Ignition key ON)
LIG## Lighting
• +12V ACC (Accessories)
R## Linkage and roof
Most harnesses have a maximum of six different wire
ROOF##Roof
colours:
TR## Transmission
- Black: Ground
V# Electrohydraulic spool valve
- Brown: +12V Permanent
X# Round battery cable terminal on fuse box
- Red: +12V APC (Ignition key ON) and Accessories
- White: Information
- Yellow: CAN High
- Green: CAN Low
The CAN network wires (yellow and green) are
twisted together.
- Components with only one connector are identified

by the connector name:
CAB83 - Suspended front axle switch (Fig. 1). CAB83
- Harnesses performing the same funtions have the OFF ON
same colour on the diagram (Fig. 1):

• FAI03 - Dynashift console harness (green)
• FAI48 - DynaVT console harness (green) 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAB83
- All wires can be identified by the pins of the outgoing 7 4 5 6
and incoming connectors of the harness:

R
S2.1/CAB83.2
CAB37 CAB37
CAB37.6/CAB83.1: The wire connects pin 6 of the
7
6
5
8
CAB37 connector to pin 1 of the CAB83 connector FAI 03 FAI 48 1 1

11 10 9
4
2 2
3
- The detail of pins allocation for each connector is

2
3 3
12
1
4 4
shown on the harness side S2
CAB37.6/CAB83.1 B
5
6
5
6
CAB37.7/CAB83.3 B 7 7
- The wire colour is indicated: CAB37.6/CAB83.1 B,
R
8 8
9 9
the wire is white
BAF12.2/S2.1
10 10
11 11
List of colours: 12 12
- N: Black Fig. 1
MA-10-01000A
- M: Brown
- R: Red
- B: White
- J: Yellow
- V: Green
- The splices inside the harnesses are indicated by a
dot and the letter S (S2).
¤ H
Layout
5 Deutsch connectors (31-way) are connected to the
cab:
- 2 on the front panel Fig. 2)
- 3 at the bottom rear right-hand side of the cab ENG1
(Fig. 3).
Fig. 2:
ENG2
All these connectors belong to the engine harness.
ENG2 is dedicated to information concerning the elec-
tronic injection.
Fig. 3:
Always in the following order (regardless of tractor
configuration and options), from left to right: MA-10-01003A
L14 Linkage harness junction Fig. 2

CAB50 Transmission harness junction
LIG1 Lighting harness junction
L14 CAB50 LIG1 +12V MA-10-01002A

Fig. 3
BAF12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
The fuses and relays of the electrical or electronic 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
board (Fig. 4) are indicated by a black mark on their

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
BAF10
locations on the fuse box (2). 1

2
F9- 15A 3
+APC 4
1 5
6
X2 7
8
F48 - 7.5A 9
10
+12V 11
1
12
13
X4 14
15
18
17
16
16
15
17
F48
14
13
18
12
11
10
9
8
7
5
6
2
4
3
2
MA-10-01001A
2 F9 Fig. 4
¤ H
B . SisuDiesel engine harness
SisuDiesel engine harness ......................................... 6
C . Electrical diagrams on the tractor
Electrical power supply .............................................. 9

Controls.................................................................... 11
Grid Heater circuit .................................................... 13
CAN network - all options with Autotronic 3 transmis-
sion calculator .......................................................... 15
sion calculator and Autotronic 5 Park Lock .............. 17
sion calculator and EHRC linkage calculator............. 19
CAN network with Autotronic 4 transmission calcu-
lator and Autotronic 5 linkage calculator .................. 21
¤ H
SisuDiesel engine harness

Parts list
(1) Electronic control unit (ECU)
(2) Coolant temperature sensor
(3) Oil pressure sensor
(4) Speed sensor
(5) Intake manifold air heater (Grid Heater)
(6) Grid Heater relay
(7) Intake air pressure and temperature sensor
(9) Fuel pressure sensor
(10) Electric lift pump
(ENG4) SisuDiesel harness / Engine harness junction
(R2) Lift pump relay in cab
(R3) Grid Heater relay control in cab
¤ H
120R
1 ECU
AMP 967563-1
44
20
43
23
19
45
39
62
16
63
59
11
35
12
14
38
61
33
31
55
13
60
36
37
29
53
30
54
32
50
27
51
28
52
46
48
25
21
22
69
47
70
18
42
66
67
PCU
7
8
5
BOSCH CAN High 1 1
VP1
CAN Low 2 2 AMP 70
VP2 Saab 1-968879-1
3 3
44
20
43
23
19
45
39
62
16
63
59
11
35
12
14
38
61
33
31
55
13
60
36
37
29
53
30
54
32
50
27
51
28
52
46
48
25
21
22
69
47
70
18
42
66
67
1
7
8
5
4 4
MAB 5 5
WD1
WD2
GND
WD3
DO1
CN1
DI11
HT1
VP1
CT1
IGN
DO2
DO3
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
DO4
CN2
FT1
OP3
OP5
VP2
VP3
VP5
VP6
BP1
CT2
OP4
VP4
11
DI1
VP3
FP1
REF
AT
BP2
BP3
DI2
DI3
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI4
S1
S2
S3
S5
S4
1
3
2
4
6 6
Battery -
7 7
VP4 Shunt when CAN
Battery + VP5
DZG 8 8 terminator is used
VP6
9 9
ENG4 R2 R3
1 1 +12V permanent, EEM (fuse F32)
1
AMP 282087-1 2 2 Ground, EEM
2
+12V 3 3
3 3 +12V permanent, Bosch VP (fuse F28)
LP1 3
Ground 2 2
4 4 Ground, Bosch VP
4
M
LP2 5 5 +12V APC (Ignition key ON)

1 1 IGN
6 6 +12V Lift pump control
10 DO1
10 mm 7 7 +12V Grid Heater control
+
DO2
LP2 8 8
DO3
DT-06-3S GH2 9 9
DO4
1 10 10
WD1 DO5
2 11 11
WD2 DO6
3 12 12
WD3 DO7
13 13
DO8
14 14 +12V Lift pump
LP1
15 15 +12V Grid Heater relay
GH1
16 16
REF
17 17
GND
18 18 Foot throttle input
1JO 973 701 A FT1
1 19 19
P 1 HT1
FP1 20 20
DI1
21 21 A
9 DI2
22 22 B
DI3
23 23 +
DI4
24 24 -
DI5
25 25
7 DI6
26 26
BOSCH 1928403112100 DI7
27 27
Ground 1 1 DI11
BP1 28 28
Temp. 2 2 S4
P AT 29 29
+5V 3 3 S5
U BP2 30 30 CAN High
Pressure 4 4 CN1
BP3 31 31 CAN Low
CN2
3
D+ +12V Lift pump (fuse F31)
AMP 282087-1
+5V 3 3
W +12V Grid Heater relay (fuse F30)
P OP3
Signal 2 2 Starter relay
OP4
U Ground 1 1
OP5 +12V Grid Heater
- battery
+ battery
GH1
GH2
AMP 963040-3
6.3 MM
10 MM
1 1
4 MM
5 MM
6 MM
8 MM
6 MM
6 MM
8 MM
T CT1
2 2
CT2
2 6 5
W
D+
B+
B+
B-
B-
AMP 282087-1
+
+12V 3
S1 G M
Signal 2
4 S2
Ground 1
S3
Fig. 5
MA-11-01050B
¤ H
Harness parts list Colour reminder

FAI 01 Engine harness N: Black
FAI 02 Instrument panel harness M: Brown
FAI 03 Console harness R: Red
FAI 04 Cab Autotronic 3 harness B: White
FAI 12 Dynashift armrest harness J: Yellow
FAI 13 Fuse box supply harness V: Green
FAI 17 Fuse box Ground harness
FAI 24 Single linkage harness
FAI 25 Linkage with Dual Control harness
FAI 31 Cab DynaVT transmission harness
FAI 38 SisuDiesel EEM engine harness (GPA40)
FAI 41 DynaVT armrest harness
FAI 46 4 electrohydraulic spool valves harness
FAI 47 ParkLock - Autotronic 5 harness
Component parts list

AC12 Joystick
CA1 Air conditioning control unit
CAB1 Instrument panel (DCC2)
CAB44 Throttle pedal potentiometer
CAB54 Autotronic 4
CAB74 Autotronic 5 - ParkLock
CAB84 Memorised ratios activation switch
CAB85 Memorised ratios adjustment switch
L13 Electronic linkage calculator (ELC)
TR18 Transmission control unit
FS1 Fieldstar LBS+ connector
FS2 Fieldstar terminal
V2 Electrohydraulic spool valve
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
Electrical power supply
20 31
21 8 30
9 19
10 2 18
22 3 7 29
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
13 15
24 14 27
25 26
ENG4
FAI01
ENG4
1 1
2 2
S12.1/ENG4.3 M
31 31 3 3
30 4
FAI02 29
30
29 5
4
5
28 28 6 6
27 27 7 7
F28-20A 26 26 8 8
F32-10A 25 9
25 9
21
20
8
31
30
24 24 21
20
8
31
30
10 10
10
9
2
19
18
23 23 10
9
2
19
18
11 11
22 3 7 29
22 22
22 3 7 29
12 12
2 BAF10
23
11
12
4
1
5
6
17
16
28
21 21
23
11
12
4
1
5
6
17
16
28
13 13
F28 - 20A 24
13
14
15
27
20 20 24
13
14
15
27
14 14
18 18 25 26
19 19
25 26
15 15
17 17 18 18 16 16
16 16 17 17 17 17
15 15 16 16 18 18
14 14 15 15 19 19
BAF10.17/ENG2.14 M ENG2.14/S12.1 M S12
13 13 14 14 20 20
BAF10.15/ENG2.13 M ENG2.13/S12.1 M
12 12 13 13 21 21
F32 - 10A
11 11 12 12 22 22
BAF10.10/ENG2.11 M ENG2.11/ENG4.1 M
10 10 11 11 23 23
9 9 10 10 24 24
8 8 9 9 25 25
7 7 8 8 26 26
6 6 7 7 27 27
5 5 6 6 28 28
4 4 5 5 29 29
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
3 3 4 4 30 30
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16
2 2 3 3 31 31
1 1 2 2
1 1 ENG4
BAF10
ENG2 ENG2
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
MA-10-06070A
ENG9 ENG4.4/ENG9.1 N
ENG4.2/ENG9.1 N
1
X4 1
+12V
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
Controls
18 F31 - 15A X4
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
17
16 1 +12V
15
5 3
14 2
13 4 R2
12 1
11 F30 - 15A
F42 10
9
F31 8
S14 BAF10.7/S14.1 B
7
6
F30 5
4 X1X5
3 1
R3 2 5 3
1 2 F42 - 5A
4 R3
BAF10 1
F22
2
ENG2 ENG2
10
1 1 9
2 2 8
3 3 7 F22 - 10A X2
4 4 6
CAB37.1/ENG2.5 B S5 BAF8.5/S5.1 R +APC
5 5 5 1
CAB37.2/ENG2.6 B 4
6 6
CAB37.3/ENG2.7 B 3
7 7
ENG2.8/CAB37.4 B 2
8 8
S1 S1.1/ENG2.9 R
9 9
CAB37.5/ENG2.10 B 1 2
10 10
BAF8
11 11
BAF10.5/ENG2.12 B
12 12
R2 13 13
9 7 5 3 1
14 14
S14.1/ENG2.15 B 10 8 6 4 2
15 15
BAF10.8/ENG2.16 B
16 16
BAF10.6/ENG2.17 B
ENG 4 17 17
18 18
FAI01 19 19
20 20
ENG2.21/S18.1 B S18
21 21
ENG4 22 22
23 23
1 24 24 68
2 25 25 FAI02 67
66
3 26 26 65
4 27 27 64
S1.1/ENG4.5 R 63
5 28 28
B
ENG2.16/ENG4.6 B 62
R
6 29 29 61
ENG2.12/ENG4.7 B
7 30 30 60
CAB44.3/S18.1
S18.1/CAB1.10
CAB44.2/S5.1
59
8 31 31 58
9 57
10 56
55
11 21
20
8
31
30
31
8
20
21 54
30
19 9
12 10
9
2
19
18
29
18
7
2
3
10
22
53
22 3 7 29
52
13 11 1 17
28 28
17
6
1
4
11
23
51
ENG2.17/ENG4.14 B 23
12
4
5
6
16 16 5 12
14 13 15 15 13
50
ENG2.15/ENG4.15 B 24
25
14
26
27 27
26
14
25
24
49
15
48
16 47
17 46
ENG2.21/ENG4.18 B
18 CAB44 45
44
19 43
20 42
21
ENG2.5/ENG4.21 B 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 41
2 alim 40
ENG2.6/ENG4.22 B 7
22
ENG2.7/ENG4.23 B
8 9 10 11 12
2 2 39
23 3 Us 38
ENG2.8/ENG4.24 B 3 3 1 0V
37
24 CAB37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 36
25 35
30
31
19
8
20
9
21
26 CAB44 34
33
18 2 10 CAB37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
29
17
7
1
3
11
22 27 3 2 1 32
31
28
16
6
5
4
12
23
28
15 13 30
29 CAB1
B
27 14 24
26 25 29
1 2 3 4 5 6
30 12 11 10 9 8 7
28
27
CAB37.5/S6.1
31
FAI03 26
CAB44 25
24
23
22
21
CAB37.1/CAB84.3 B CAB37.4/CAB85.1 B 20
19
18
CAB37.2/CAB84.1 B CAB37.3/CAB85.3 B 17
16
S6.1/CAB84.2 B S6 S2.1/CAB83.2 B 15
14
13
CAB44.1/CAB1.11 B 12
11
10
1 3 8 1 2 3
8 2 9
8
7
7 4 5 6 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB84 7 4 5 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB85 6
68 46
5
45 24 4
23 1 3
EEM EEM 2
1
B A - +
CAB1
A
CAB84 CAB85 MA-11-01207A
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
Grid Heater circuit
31 20
30 8 21
20 31 19 9
18
17
21 8 30 18 2 10
9 19 29 7 3 22
10 2 18 17 1 11
16
15
22
11
3
1
7
17
29 28
16
6
5
4
12
23
2
18
14
13
23 4 6 28
12
13
5
15
16 ENG2 27
15
14
13
24
26 25
17
12
11
24 14 27
25 26
1 1 16
10
9
2 2 15
7
3 3 14
5
6
4 4 13
3
2 5 3
5 5 12
1
6 6 11 4 R3
7 7
FAI02
10 1
8 8 9
FAI01 9 9
S14 BAF10.7/S14.1 B
8
10 10 7
11 11 6
BAF10.5/ENG2.12 B
12 12 5
13 13 4
14 14 3
S14.1/ENG2.15 B
15 15 2
16 16 1 F30 - 15A
17 17
18 18 BAF10
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22 FAI13 F42 - 5A
23 23 +CAB
24 24 PLUS_CAB.1/X4.1 R
1 1
25 25
26 26
X4
27 27
B
28 28
ENG2.12/ENG4.7 B
29 29 1 X1X5
ENG2.15/ENG4.15
20 31
21
9
8
19
30 30 30
22
10
3
2
7
18
29 31 31
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
24
13
14
15
27 ENG2 F42
25 26
MASSE_BAF.1/X1.1 N
F30
ENG4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 FAI17
R3
2
1
ENG4
61
ENG29_B/ENG25.1 R
ENG29.1/S11.1 M S11 S11.1/ENG32.1 M
1 1
1 ENG25 FAI01 ENG29B F- 225A ENG29 FAI01 ENG32

1
1 ENG25
MA-10-06061A
+BATT
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
CAN network - all options with Autotronic 3 transmission calculator
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
CAN network - all options with Autotronic 3 transmission calculator and Autotronic 5 Park Lock
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
CAN network - all options with Autotronic 4 transmission calculator and EHRC linkage calculator
¤ H


AC12 Joystick
CAB54 Autotronic 4
1 Autotronic 3
2 Fuse box
¤ H
CAN network with Autotronic 4 transmission calculator and Autotronic 5 linkage calculator
31 20 20 31
30 8 21 21 8 30
19 9 9 19
18 2 10 10 2 18
29 7 3 22 22 3 7 29
28
17
6
1
4
11
23 23
11
4
1
6
17
28
ENG4
16 5 12 12 5 16
15 13 CAB50 13 15
CAB54 27 14 24
24 14 27
26 25
25 26
31 31
1 1 30 30
2 2 29 29
3 3
CAB54 CAB83.1/CAB54.4 V 28 28
4 4
CAB83.2/CAB54.5 J 27 27
5 5 26 26
6 6 20 31
25 25 21 8 30
7 7 24 24 9 19
8 8 10 2 18
23 23 22 7 29
9 9 3
CAB83 22 22 11 1 17
10 10 23 4 6 28
21 21 12 5 16
11 11 2 1 20 20 13 15
12 12 24 14 27
19 19
13 13 25 26
120 18 18
14 14 17 17
15 15 FAI 31 16 16
V
16
J
16 15 15
17 17
CAB83.2/CAB50.4
CAB83.1/CAB50.7
14 14
18 18 13 13 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ENG4 CA1
19 19 FAI 28
12 12
20 20 34 CA1.1/CA8.1 V
11 11 1
21 21 10 10 2
22 22 9 9 3
23 23 8 8 4
24 24 7 7 5
25 25
S12.1/CAB54.26 V 6 6 6
26 26
CAB54.27/S13.1 J 5 5 7
27 27 4 4 8
28 28 3 3 9
29 29 2 2 10
30 30 1 1 11
31 31 12
32 32
46
24
CAB50 13
1
33 33 CA1.14/CA8.2 J
TR18 14
34 34 15
35 35 16
36 36 17
37 37
FAI 35 FAI 32 18
38 38 CAB18
1
8
19
39 39 S13 S13.1/CAB18.1 J 8 8
1 1 20
40 40 S12 S12.1/CAB18.2 V 7 7
2 2 21
41 41 6 6
FAI 31 3 3 TR18.5/CAB50.7 V 22
42 42 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 4 23
43 43 4 4 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
5 5 24
44 44 4 3 2 1 3 3
6 6 1 2 3 4 TR18.2/CAB50.4 J 25
45 45 2 2
5 6 7 8 7 7 8 7 6 5 26 FAI 57
46 46 1 1
4
8 8
5
47 47
48 48 TR18 TR18
CAB18
49 49
50 50
51 S21 S21.1/CAB18.2 V
51
52 52 S20 S20.1/CAB18.1 J
53 53
54 54
55 55 ENG2
56 56 S20.1/ENG2.1 J ENG2.1/ENG4.30 J
57 57 1 1 AC12 V2 V3 V4 V5
S21.1/ENG2.2 V ENG2.2/ENG4.31 V
58 58 2 2
59 59 3 3
60 60 4 4 AC12 CA8 1 2
61
62
61 5
6
5
6 X X X X
68
23
45
62 7 7
CA8 1 2
63 63 7 7 6 6
20 31
5 6 7
31 20
64 64 21 8 30 8 8 30 8 21 5 5
9 19 19 9
65 65 10 2 18 9 9 18 2 10 4 4
22 3 7 29 29 7 3 22
66 66 11 1 17 10 10 17 1 11 3 3
4
23 4 6 28 28 6 4 23
67 67 12 5 16 11 11 16 5 12 2 2
1 2 3
68 13 15
12 12
15 13
1 1 V2 1 2 3 4 V3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 V5 1 2 3 4
68 27 14 24 V4
1
24 14 27
26 25
25 26 13 13
2
CAB54 14 14 AC12 V2 1 2 3 4 V3 1 2 3 4 V4 1 2 3 4 V5 1 2 3 4
3
15 15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
16 16
4
17 17
J
V
J
V
V
V
J
J
J
18 18
6
FAI 35 19
CA8.2/S3.1
19
S3.1/V5.3
CA8.1/S4.1
S2.1/V5.2
S2.1/V2.2
S2.1/V3.2
S3.1/V3.3
S2.1/V4.2
S3.1/V4.3
7
S3.1/V2.3
CAB1 20 31 31
20
21
FAI 41 30 30
21 FAI 46
V
J
1 1 22 29 29
22
2 2 23 28 28
23
AC12.3/S6.1
S5.1/AC12.4
3 3 24 27 27
24 20
4 4 25
31
26 26 20 31
S3
25 30
19
8 21 21 8 30
5 5 26
9
25 25 9 19
26 18 2 10 10 2 18
CAB1 6 6 27
29 7 3 22
24 24 22 3 7 29
27 17 1 11
11 1 17 S2
7 7 28
28 6 4 23
23 23 23 4 6 28
28 16 5 12
12 5 16
8 8 29
15 13
22 22 13 15
29 27 14 24
24 14 27
9 9 30
26 25
21 21
30 25 26
10 10 31 20 20
31
11 11 19 19
12 12 18 18 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
ENG2
13 13 17 17 V1 V1
S5.1/L14.16 J
14 14 16 16
AC2 S4.1/L14.15 V 1 1
15 15 15 15
CAB1.16/S20.1 J S4 V1.2/S4.1 V 2 2 V1.2/S2.1 V
16 16 14 14
12 12 L14.13/S5.1 J S5 V1.3/S5.1 J 3 3 V1.3/S3.1 J
17 17 FAI 41 13 13
11 11 S4.1/L14.12 V 4 4
18 18 FAI 31 12 12 CAB112
10 10
19 19 11 11 L111
9 9 1 1
20 20 AC2.8/S12.1 V S5.1/AC2.8 V S5 10 10
8 8 FAI 128 2 2
21 21 S13.1/AC2.7 J S6.1/AC2.7 J S6 9 9
7 7 3 3
22 22 8 8
6 6 4 4
23 23 7 7
5 5 5 5
24 24 6 6
J
4 4
V
6 6
J
25 25 6 5 4 3 2
5 5
3 3 1
26 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 4 7 7 7
2 2 7 9 11 12
L13.15/L14.16
8 10 8 8 11 3
L13.34/L14.15
L 22 L 22
L14.12/L22.1
L14.13/L22.2
27 27 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 3 15 8 1
1 1 9 9 12 4
28 28 2 2 L22.1/S4.1 V S4_ S4.1/CAB112.4 V
1 1 10 10 16 9 2
29 29 AC2 1 1 L22.2/S3.1 J S_3 S3.1/CAB112.3 J 13 5
2 2 11 11 10
30 30
3 3 12 12 14 6
31 31 L14 L14
4 4
V
J
32 32
46
24
5 5 CAB112
1
1
7
33 33 S6.1/AC1.12 J 6 5 4 3 2 1
L22.2/S9.1
L22.1/S8.1
6 6
2
5 6
34 34 AC1.11/S5.1 V FAI 131 7 9 10 11 12 CAB112
7 7 8
3
35 35
4
36 36
5
37 37 AC1
1 2
6
38 38 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L111
CAB1.39/S21.1 V S10.1/AC1.12 J L22 L22A
7
39 39 12 12
AC1.11/S9.1 V S8.1/L22A.1 V S8
40 40 11 11 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 L111
41 41 10 10 S9.1/L22A.2 J S9
2 2
42 42 9 9 S3.1/L111.14 J
3 3
43 43 8 8 S4.1/L111.16 V
4 4
44 44 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 5 L111.13/CAB112.6 V
6 6
1
45 45 7
5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 6 6
12 11 10 9 8 7
5 5 S10 FAI 68 L111.12/CAB112.5 J
2
46 46 7 7
3
47 47 4 4
S9 4
3 3
4
48 48 P
FS2.N/S1.1 V
5
1 2 3
49 49 2 2 N
S8.1/FS4.29 V S1.1/FS4.30 V S_1 FS2.M/S1.1 V
6
50 50 1 1 M
FAI 23
7
51 51 L
52 AC1 S5.1/FS2.K J
52 K
53 53 S9.1/FS4.27 J S5.1/FS4.28 J S__5 FS2.J/S5.1 J
S10.1/L13.40 J J
54 54 H
S9.1/L13.39 V
55 55 FAI 68 G
56 56 CAB141.40/S10.1 J FAI 68 F N P
57 57 CAB141.39/S9.1 V E E
M D
58 58 FS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D A
59 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FS2.C/FS1.8 J C
F
59 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L13 CAB141 C L
60 FS1.9/FS2.B V B
G
60 FS4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 FS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B K
61
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L13 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB141 FS1.5/FS2.A B H
61 A J
68
23
45
62 62
63 63 FS2 FS2
64 CAB141 33 FS1
64 L13
65 65
66 66
1 4
67 67 5 9 3
68 68 10 15
16 22 2 4
23 28
CAB1 29 33
34 37
9 1 5
29 42 29 42
15 28 15 28
1 14 1 14
MA-11-01384A
¤ H
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
11C10 - DCC2 - Description
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Allocation of DCC2 pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
A . General TECHstar Dyna VT CAN network
The electronic control circuit of the DynaVTPOWER-

MAXX transmission on 8400DT A series tractors
comprises three main components: the DCC2 (second
generation digital instrument panel), the Autotronic 4
(transmission controller) and the CAN network. These 1 7 10 8 9
components are connected via harnesses, switches,
potentiometers, sensors and solenoid valves.
1
The DCC2 and Autotronic 4 also contain a self-diag- 4
nostic function intended to warn the operator when 6
ESC
the circuit of one of the components is defective or

disconnected. The error code diagnostics help quali-
fied personnel when troubleshooting the various
control components. These codes are displayed on the
DOT MATRIX screen of the DCC2 and may, depending CAN network
on the severity of the breakdown, place the transmis-
sion in neutral or allow it to continue functioning.
Codes are stored in memory and can be later displayed
by qualified personnel to troubleshoot intermittent
problems (see Error codes section).
The DCC2 receives the following information from the 4 2 6 5 3

Autotronic 4 via the CAN network: engine speed,
transmission input and output speeds, Hare / Tortoise
range position, PTO speed, transmission oil tempera- 15
11
7
8
3
1
12 4
ture, transmission oil pressure and filter clogging level. 16
13
14
9
10
5
2
The DCC2 is also connected to all the tractor electronic

calculators as well as to the diagnostics connector (for
programming and setting parameters with Wintest) via
the CAN network (Fig. 1).
The transmission electronic control circuit

(Fig. 1)
7
(1) DCC2 2 5
(2) Autotronic 4 10 3
CAN network 8 6
Location 1 9
Other CAN network connections (Fig. 1)
4
(3) 16-way diagnostics connector
(4) Electronic injection control unit (EEM)
(5) Autotronic 5 electronic linkage calculator
(6) Autotronic 5 ParkLock calculator
(7) Datatronic 3
(8) Joystick
(9) Electrohydraulic spool valves
MA-11-06068A
(10) Automatic air conditioning controller
Fig. 1
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
The DCC2 and Autotronic 4 both control the tractor

functions.
The DCC2 provides the operator with information via
two digital display screens, analog instruments and
warning indicator lights.
3
It also communicates with the Autotronic 4 via the 2
CAN network to inform it of electrical signals from the 1
functions activated by the operator, for example the
clutch pedal and both gear shift levers: the left-hand
FNR lever and the armrest lever, throttle pedal, lever /
pedal mode switch, SV1 and SV2 ground speed
selector encoders and switches, engine underspeed
supervisor, PTO automation switch, the Headland 4
switch and the DOT MATRIX control keys for informa-
tion, for example the clutch-coupler function status
(Fig. 2).
16
Parts list
(1) Vistronic
(2) Buzzer DCC 2
(3) Clutch pedal 15
(4) Right-hand console
(5) Reverse shuttle lever
(6) Armrest
5
(7) Throttle pedal
(8) Air filter vacuum sensor 1 2
14
(9) Main lighting switch 10 15
(10) Auxiliary hydraulics oil filter clogging switch 5 20
(11) Auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature sensor

RPM x 100
0 25
(12) Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge 6 . Sv 1 .

A
A B
AUTO
(13) Speed parameter display selector switch .

Sv 2 .
540
750
1000
KPH
MPH
RPM
(14) DOT MATRIX keyboard

(15) Radar 13
(16) Fuel gauge 1 23
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 45
46 68
12
11
9 10
CAN
MA-11-06044A
Fig. 2
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Vistronic (1)
The DCC2 controls the rotational speed of the Vistronic
depending on the engine temperature it receives from 95°C
the Autotronic 4 via the CAN network. The Vistronic
therefore turns faster or slower in order to maintain a
constant optimum engine temperature (Fig. 3). 85°C 100°C
Note: The °C values in Fig. 3 are indicative values.
They are not displayed on the instrument panel.
The DCC2 measures the rotational speed of the
Vistronic using an embedded sensor.
110°C
60°C
Buzzer (2)
It warns the driver when a fault occurs.
Clutch pedal (3)

The clutch pedal is fitted with three different elements: MA-11-06069A Fig. 3
- a pedal high position (TOC) sensor (A) (Fig. 4),
- a potentiometer that measures clutch pedal travel
(B) (Fig. 4),
- a pedal low position (BOC) sensor (C) (Fig. 4), A
C B
Right-hand console (4)

The DCC2 controls several elements in the right-hand
console:
- the underspeed supervisor (A) (Fig. 5): it allows the
drop in engine speed to be limited when under load.
Its control is directly linked to a potentiometer that
sends a different signal to the DCC2 depending on
user requirements,
- the lever / pedal mode (and self-propelled mode)
selector switch (B) (Fig. 5),
- the SV1 and SV2 encoders (C) (Fig. 5): they allow
pre-setting of SV1 and SV2 grounds speeds,
- the rear PTO automation switch (D) (Fig. 5). MA-11-06070A
Fig. 4
A D
MA-11-06072A-MF-CH
Fig. 5
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Reverse shuttle lever (5)

It is located on the left-hand steering column. The lever
allows:
- the gearbox to be put into neutral position,
- forward or reverse travel to be selected,
- ground speed to be increased or decreased in
forward and reverse positions.
Armrest (6) C
It consists of several elements:
- the Headland switch (A) (Fig. 6),
A
- the SV1 and SV2 switches (B) (Fig. 6),
- the right-hand lever potentiometer (C) (Fig. 6).
The potentiometer allows ground speed acceleration B
and deceleration.
MA-11-06071A-AG-MF
Fig. 6
Throttle pedal (7)
The throttle pedal is directly linked to the potentiom-
eter. This potentiometer sends the DCC2 a signal
proportional to the throttle pedal position. The DCC2
can therefore manage the operation of the underspeed
supervisor and lever / pedal (and self-propelled)
modes.
Air filter vacuum sensor (8)

The air filter vacuum sensor is fitted with a switch that
is activated when the air filter is clogged (excessive
vacuum). When activated, the switch sends a signal to
the DCC2, which turns on an indicator light to warn the
user.
Main lighting switch (9)

When activated, it allows the DCC2 to switch to night
mode (dimmer screen lighting).
Auxiliary hydraulics oil filter clogging switch

(10)
When the auxiliary hydraulics oil filter is clogged, the
switch is activated and sends a signal to the DCC2,
which turns on an indicator light to warn the user.
Auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature sensor

(11)
It measures the auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature
and sends a signal to the DCC2 which turns on an indi-
cator light to warn the user when the temperature is
too high.
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge (12)

It measures the auxiliary hydraulics oil level and
informs the DCC2, which displays the value on the
DOT MATRIX screen.
The gauge consists of a float fitted with a magnet (A)
(Fig. 7) that activates the switches (B) (Fig. 7)
connected in parallel with resistors. The DCC2 there-
fore receives a signal proportional to the tank filling
level.
Speed parameter display selector switch (13) 12 x 20 ohm
The display selector switch allows the user to display

in the DCC2 screen the rear PTO speed, engine speed, A
ground speed, daily engine hours and total engine
hours.
DOT MATRIX keyboard (14)

It is located to the right of the steering column. The
keyboard allows access to the various DCC2 menus
displayed on the DOT MATRIX screen (left-hand
screen).
4 x 60 ohm
B
Radar (15) (optional)
The radar allows actual tractor ground speed to be
displayed when below 25 kph. Above 25 kph, design
speed is displayed.
Fuel gauge (16)

It transmits a signal to the DCC2 depending on the 20 ohm
level of fuel in the tank. The DCC2 then activates a

pointer on the instrument panel (Fig. 8) to allow the
user to view the contents of the tank. MA-11-06073A
Fig. 7
MA-11-06074A
Fig. 8
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
B . Description
The DCC2 is attached by four screws to the steering 9
column assembly. 12 13
It receives and displays the tractor functions and
11 10
supplies information required by the operator to use
the tractor, via indicator lights and display tables
(Fig. 9).
1 2
Parts list
(1) DOT MATRIX screen 10 15
(2) Right-hand control display
(3) Tachometer 5 20
(4) DOT MATRIX control keypad
(5) Coolant temperature gauge
(6) Fuel gauge 0
RPM x 100
25
(7) Control indicator lights for functions in use 7 8
(8) Failure control and ParkLock indicator lights 3
(9) Failure control indicator lights A A B
(10) Right-hand direction indicator light
(11) Left-hand direction indicator light AUTO
st AUTO
(12) Direction indicator light for the 1 trailer KPH
540
(13) Direction indicator light for the 2nd trailer 750 MPH
1000 RPM
(14) Headlights indicator light 1 5 6 2

(15) Speed parameters display selector switch on 14
right-hand control screen.
15
MA-11-06045A-MF
Fig. 9
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Indicator light units

Control indicator lights for functions in use
((A) Fig. 10)
1 2
10 15
5 20
RPM x 100
A 0 25
A
A B
. Sv 1 .
AUTO
Sv 2 .
540 KPH
750 MPH
. 1000 RPM
MA-11-06046A
Fig. 10
Green and orange control indicator lights display and

monitor the functioning of the equipment.
Front PTO (not used)
Front axle suspension (not used)
Transmission oil filter clogging

(15 microns)
4WD front axle
Differential lock
Rear PTO
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Failure control and ParkLock indicator lights

((B) Fig. 11)
1 2
10 15
5 20
RPM x 100
0 25 B
A
A B
. Sv 1 .
AUTO
Sv 2 .
540 KPH
750 MPH
. 1000 RPM
MA-11-06047A
Fig. 11
Red indicator lights signal problems of varying impor-

tance; they come on when the ignition is switched on Grid Heater (not used)
and usually turn off when the engine has started.
Intake air temperature indicator light

CAUTION: If they light up when the engine is
running normally, stop the engine at once and
investigate the cause of the problem. Air filter clogging
Transmission oil and auxiliary hydraulics oil

temperature
Auxiliary hydraulics oil filter clogging
ParkLock and emergency handbrake
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Failure control indicator lights ((C) Fig. 12)
C
1 2
10 15
5 20
RPM x 100
0 25
A
A B
. Sv 1 .
AUTO
Sv 2 .
540 KPH
750 MPH
. 1000 RPM
MA-11-06048A
Fig. 12
Trailer brake pressure (if fitted)
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Brake master cylinder supply circuit - 18 bar

pressure
Transmission high pressure (480 bar)
Alternator charge
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
Left-hand control screen (Fig. 13)

This control screen allows the different parameter
displays to be monitored: 6 7
A
(1) Forward / neutral / reverse and ParkLock liquid A B
crystal display. 1 2
(2) Reverse shuttle sensitivity (1, 2, 3 or 4).
(3) Selected symbol display: rear PTO, engine speed, 5
ground speed and engine hours (these parame-
ters can all be selected by pressing the switch (9) 8
located on the instrument panel).
(4) Digital display: rear PTO speed, engine speed, 3
ground speed, daily engine hours and total engine 540 KPH
hours (only the daily engine hours can be reset by
750 MPH
pressing the switch (9) for 5 seconds).
1000 4 RPM
(5) Power take-off automation.
(6) 4WD front axle automation control.
(7) A/B stored engine speed status.
(8) Hare / Tortoise range engagement indicator 9
lights.
(9) Parameter display selector switch.
MA-11-06067A-MF-CH
Fig. 13
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
DOT MATRIX screen

The DOT MATRIX screen is initialised at tractor
start-up. The DOT MATRIX keyboard to the right of the
steering column must be used to access the different
menus, and the instructions given in the following
table must be followed.

Displays the filling level of the auxiliary oil tank
HYDR OIL (0-100%):
- 100%: tank full.
Ignition before engine start - 50%: warning threshold.
(ignition key on +ACC position) When the auxiliary oil tank level drops to < 50%,
95 % it is automatically displayed every 4 minutes
(press ESC to return to the main screen).
MA-05-04291A If sensor problem, ERROR is displayed instead of
the filling level.
1055 800
Start-up screen
AUTO
3.2 Sv 1 35.0 Starting the tractor
Displays the restart speeds, the SV1 and SV2
speeds, engine supervisor, PTO, pedal mode,
Sv 2 3.2 eco or lever mode.
0.2
MA-05-04014A
1430 1160 Work screen

0 RPM To display from the start-up screen Displays memorised engine speeds, PTO speed,
actual wheel slip rate, lever mode, pedal mode
0% (power or eco), self-propelled mode and SV1 and
SV2 speeds.
Sv 1 2,6
MA-05-04292A
To display from the previous screen Reverse shuttle sensitivity

Allows to adjust the response time when shifting
4 To increase or decrease the value direction of travel

The delay begins when the reverse shuttle lever
is activated. If the delay is authorised, declutch-
Delay No ing takes place 5 seconds after the lever is
-
MA-05-04032A
+ OK
travel
Allows a delay (5 seconds) to be
authorised or not when reversing direction of pulled. If not authorised, declutching takes place
as soon as the lever is activated.
MODE To display from the previous screen

Pedal mode sensitivity screen
+ 4 Used to adjust acceleration (+) and deceleration
To increase or decrease the value
- 2 (-) sensitivity in pedal mode operation.
- +
MA-05-04293A
¤ H
D C C 2 - D e s c r ip t io n
(l) T
To display from the previous screen Fuel used screen
0 10 Indicates fuel consumed:
0: Quantity of fuel consumed since last reset.
T 500 OK
Press 5 seconds to reset
T: total fuel consumed. This value cannot be
ok 5s 0 0 modified or reset
MA-05-04024A
To display from the previous screen
SLIP OK
Press to enter the settings menu. The symbol
appears
Off Wheel slip screen (optional)
To set the required wheel slip per- Enables the max. allowable slip to be defined and
0% centage value displays the current slip setting.
Max 22%
Allows to exit the settings screen
MA-05-04029A
ESC
Joystick setting menu (1/2) (if Datatronic

100 Press to enter the menus 3 not installed)
OK This menu allows to adjust the flow rate values of
100 % 100 To select one of the displayed flow rate values each spool valve controlled by the Joystick. If the
Joystick is locked (padlock displayed on screen)
100 OFF or timing
press the blue armrest ON/OFF button near the
To modify displayed flow rate values PTO control.
MA-05-04268A
When timing is selected, it is possible to dis-

100 play the type of timing (value or infinite)
Joystick setting menu (2/2) (if Datatronic
To adjust the timing value 3 not installed)
84 % 100 This menu allows to activate or deactivate timing,
and can be adjusted from 0 to 60 seconds or to
100 ON Allows to exit the settings screen and infinite mode.
60 ESC validate settings
MA-05-04269A
Headland 2 screen (if Datatronic 3 not

installed)
To display from the previous screen This menu allows to adjust the engine speed
when changing linkage status (work or transport).
EEM-EHR OK
Allows to activate the mode or validate the val- The operating conditions are:
- ON mode
ues
OF - power shuttle lever out of neutral
Used to shift from one line to another - tractor moving.
+ 9s A - When the linkage transport mode is selected,
engine speed B is activated after the preset
+ 0s B Allows to set the seconds value of the
time.
MA-05-04270A displayed time
- When the linkage working mode is selected,
engine speed A is activated after the preset
time.
EEM-SV To display from the previous screen

Headland 1 screen
SV1 A ON To activate or deactivate one of the
This menu is used to vary the engine speed dur-
ing activation of SV1 and SV2 memorised ground
SV2 B ON two functions speeds.
A B
MA-05-04294A
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
CLUTCH To display from the previous screen

ON Clutch coupler screen
Displays whether the clutch coupler fonction is
Press 5 seconds to switch from ON to OFF
OK on or off.
0 k 5 s off
while pressing down the clutch pedal
MA-05-04030A

Displays the filling level of the auxiliary oil tank
HYDR OIL (0-100%):
- 100%: tank full.
To display from the previous screen - 50%: warning threshold.
When the auxiliary oil tank level drops to < 50%,
95 % it is automatically displayed every 4 minutes
(press ESC to return to the main screen).
MA-05-04291A If sensor problem, ERROR is displayed instead of
the filling level.
Linkage and spool valves menu

SPEED +
To display from the previous screen This menu allows to give priority to the auxiliary
spool valves over the linkage, and vice versa.
To modify displayed linkage and spool Maximum linkage value: 100
100 / 0 % valve flow rate values Minimum spool valve value 0
Minimum linkage value: 20
- + Maximum spool valve value: 80
MA-05-04267A
ERROR
To display from the previous screen Error code screen
Displays all tractor error codes. Each error code is
Num displayed for 4 seconds in a loop
MA-05-04222A
Brightness screen
To increase or decrease the value Setting screen brightness
-
MA-05-04021A
+
Contrast screen
To increase or decrease the value Setting screen contrast
-
MA-05-04020A
+
¤ H
DCC2 - Description
C . Allocation of DCC2 pins

1 2
The DCC2 is fitted with two connectors (Fig. 14):
10 15
- a 68-pin connector to which the instrument panel
5 20
harness is connected,
- a 7-pin connector to which the DOT MATRIX control 0
RPM x 100
25
panel harness is connected. A

EEM-EHR A B
The pin allocation is set out in the following tables. OF 85°C

95°C
100°C
+ 9s A 110°C
540
60°C KPH
750 MPH
+ 0s B 1000 RPM
1 23
45
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24
46 68
Fig. 14
Description of 68-pin connector MA-11-06043A
Pin Description Signal

1 Calculator power supply +12 V AC (Ignition key On)
2 Not used
3 Vistronic power supply 12 V output
4 CAB12 Clutch pedal potentiometer 0-5V input
5 Not used
6 5 V output
7 CAB78 Engine underspeed supervisor 0-5V input
8 Ground output
9 Not used
10 0-5V input
11 Ground output
12 39 Fuel gauge 0-12V input
13 15 Top-of-clutch (TOC) pedal switch normally open TOC NO 12V input
14 Not used
15 Not used
16 CAN High
17 CAB86 Front power take off switch (if fitted) 12V input
18 TR27 Radar 0-12 V square signal input
19 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch normally open BOC NO 12V input
BOC1
20 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch normally closed BOC NC 12V input
21 Wired but not used
22 65 Buzzer 12V output to buzzer
¤ H
DCC2 - Description

23 Battery ground (-)
24 CAB3 Main light switch 12V input (backlighting)
25 Headlights 12V input
26 Left-hand direction indicator 12V input
27 Right-hand direction indicator 12V input
28 1st trailer direction indicator 12V input
29 2nd trailer direction indicator 12V input
30 CAB59 PTO automation switch Ground / open circuit input
31 CAB20 Trailed implement status switch (if fitted) 12V input
32 AC10 Headland switch 12V input
34 Not used
35 Not used
36 24 Air filter clogging switch Ground / open circuit input
37 Not used
38 Not used
39 CAN Low
40 5 V output
41 CAB19 Left-hand FNR lever potentiometer 0-5V input
42 Ground output
43 Not used
44 AC11 Armrest lever potentiometer 0-5V input
45 Not used
46 SV1 encoder - Pin 3 12V input
CAB79
CAB80
50 Not used
51 Not used
52 CAB31 Speed parameter display selector switch 12V input
53 AC7 SV1 switch 12V input
54 AC8 SV2 switch 12V input
55 TR26 Auxiliary hydraulics oil filter clogging switch 12V input
56 Not used
57 Left-hand FNR lever neutral switch normally closed Neutral NC 12V input
CAB19
58 Left-hand FNR lever neutral switch normally open Neutral NO 12V input
59 CAB77 Lever / pedal mode switch Ground / open circuit input
¤ H
DCC2 - Description

61 TR35 Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge 0-5V input
62 Vistronic rotational frequency sensor (signal) Frequency input
63 ENG21 Pneumatic trailer brake pressure indicator light (if fitted) 12V input
64 Not used
65 Not used
66 Vistronic rotational frequency sensor supply 5 V output
67 TR25 Auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature sensor 0-12V input
68 +12V battery supply
Description of 7-pin connector
Pin Description
1 DCC2 5V supply
2 “ESC” key
3 "OK" key
4 Right scroll key
5 Left scroll key
6 Down scroll key
7 Up scroll key
¤ H
DCC2 (DynaVT) – Programming and setting parameters
GUF211 - DCC2 (DynaVT) – Programming and setting

parameters
CONTENTS
A . Setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
¤ H
¤ H
A . Setting parameters
Important: If the DCC2 is new, its parameters must
be set before it can be programmed.
Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation.

The engine must be stopped.
Parameter setting is necessary:
- when the former DCC2 unit has been replaced by a
new one,
- when improvements to one or more functions have
been made through parameter setting,
Click on the “Tools” icon and then on “DCC2 label”.
Wintest
AUTO4 label
Programming AUTO4
List of AUTO4 - DCC2 error codes
DCC2 label
Table of DCC2 constants
Programming DCC2
Programming DATA3
AUTO5 - linkage label
Programming AUTO5
Table of AUTO5 constants
DCC2 : 4.01 CLIM : 20.05
AUTO 4 : 1.06 JOY : 3.6 EHRC : 1.9 DATA : D040911

MA-11-01104A
¤ H
DCC2 Label Code parameters
Code AA Code B Code C Code D Code E Code F Code G Code H Code I Code J Code K
C0 0 0 2 3 0 2 0 5 0 0
AA = BA - > 6460 6465 LS

AA = BB - > 6470 6475 6480 LS
AA = BC - > 6485 NORMAL DUTY TFLS PARKLOCK
AA = BD - > 6485 6490 HEAVY DUTY TFLS PARKLOCK
AA = BE - > 6490 6495 HEAVY DUTY E TFLS PARKLOCK
AA = BF - > 6485 NORMAL DUTY LS PARKLOCK
AA = C0 - > 6485 6490 HEAVY DUTY LS PARKLOCK
AA = C1 - > 6490 6495 HEAVY DUTY E LS PARKLOCK
OK
MA-11-01129A
The tractor label code can be modified either by:

- moving the mouse cursor directly into the relevant
box and entering the appropriate code (it is also
possible to navigate between codes by pressing the
“tabulation” key on the keyboard),
- clicking on the arrow under the code concerned; you
can then scroll down the scroll bar and double-click
on the desired parameter.
Confirm the code by clicking on “OK”.
¤ H
The DCC2 parameter code is displayed on a label stuck

on the rear of the fuse box cover. This code has 7 digits
and corresponds to the 6 parameters whose meaning M142028 2601
is shown below. 100121
1022215
M142028 = Tractor serial number
2601 = linkage parameter code
100121= Autotronic 4 parameter code
1022215 = DCC2 parameter code
M142028 2601
100121
1022215
MA-11-01126A
Parameter code AA D E G H I
Example of parameter 10 2 2 2 1 5
setting
Code AA = 10 = 7480
Code B = = Inactive
Code C = = Inactive
Code D = 2 = Avec electronic injection
Code E = 2 = Ground speed limited to 40 kph
Code F = = Inactive
Code G = 2 = Metric unit
Code H = 1 = With radar
Code I = 5 = MF 6400 / 7400 / 8400
Code J = = Inactive
Code K = = Inactive
¤ H
Models with Status of 2 CAN

Details Code AA
Autotronic 4 loop switches (*)
Rear axle: HA 110 ON 06
7465
7475
up to serial n° M183044 ON 03
7480
from serial n° M183045 ON 10
7485 - ON 11
7490 - ON 12
7495 - ON 13
8450 - ON 20
8460 - ON 21
8470 - ON 22
8480 - ON 23
Identifying the rear axle, 2 possible methods:

• Lift rams diameter Fig. 2
- HA 110: 2 rams with Ø 40 mm rod
- HA 130: 1 ram with a Ø 40 mm rod and a second
ram with a Ø 36 mm rod
• Width of final drive unit spacer Fig. 1
MA-11-01122A
Fig. 2
HA110
HA130
37 mm
65 mm
MA-11-01320A Fig. 1
¤ H
CODE B CODE C CODE D

Inactive Inactive Electronic injection (a)
0 = Without (mechanical injection)
1 = With + without Boost
2 = With Boost
18=With Boost and Vistronic MF7480
34=With Boost and Vistronic MF7485/90/95
66=With Boost and Vistronic MF8450/8460
82=With Boost and Vistronic MF8450/8480
CODE E CODE F CODE G

Maximum speed (b) Inactive Unit type
1 = 30 kph 0 = US
2 = 40 kph 2 = Metric
3 = 33 kph
5 = 50 kph (c)
CODE H CODE I CODE J

Radar Factory code Inactive
0 = Without 5 = MF 6400 / 7400 / 8400
1 = With
CODE K
Inactive
(a) Vistronic introduced: (*) Positioning of the 2 CAN loop configuration

MF7480 from N285074 switches at the back of DCC2:
MF7485/90/95 from N295045 ON: Looping is carried out in the DCC2
All MF8400 tractors are fitted with Vistronic
(b) Limit set according to regulations in force in the

country
(c) Not valid on MF8400 series tractors
¤ H
- Another screen allows you to display the constants

entered during parameter setting and stored after
calibration.
- Click on the “Tools” icon and on “Table of DCC2
constants”.
Wintest
AUTO4 label
Programming AUTO4
DCC2 label
Programming DCC2
Programming DATA3
Programming AUTO5
DCC2 : 4.01 CLIM : 20.05

MA-11-01104A
¤ H
DCC parameters
Front PTO = not installed
tempo1 ratio = 600
tempo2 ratio = 900
Max. speed = 42
Trans. response = no choice
tempo3 ratio = 1600
tempo4 ratio = 3200
Reverse shuttle type = no choice
Electronic injection (EEM) = with + Boost
Minimum
Maximum
The left-hand column defines the parameter.

The right-hand column gives the constant of the
parameter or the value stored during calibration.
¤ H
B . Programming
Important: If the DCC2 is new, its parameters must
be set before it can be programmed.
- Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation.

The engine must be stopped.
- Programming of the DCC2 is necessary:
- when the former DCC2 unit has been replaced by
a new one,
- when a new program becomes available to
improve the product,
- Click on the “Tools” icon and then on “Programming

DCC2” icon.
Wintest
AUTO4 label
Programming AUTO4
DCC2 label
Table ofDCC2 constants
Programming DCC2
Programming DATA3
Programming AUTO5
DCC2 : 4.01 CLIM : 20.05

MA-11-01104A
¤ H
Programming DCC2
Existing version: 03.02

New version: 03.03
Do you want to reprogram?
- Click:
“OK” to carry out programming
to cancel programming
- A gauge indicates the progression of the program-

ming.
Programming in progress...
¤ H
During programming, several error messages may be

displayed.
Error
Engine speed > 500 rpm,

Stop the engine
Message:
- Impossible to open hex file!!
- Impossible to enter in Programming mode!!
- Erase error!!
- Downloading problem!!
- Impossible to exit Programming mode!!
- Impossible to determine the DCC2 type!!
Correction method:
- Depending on the type of message, try to follow the
requested indications.
- Cut the ignition and turn it back on.
- Check the CAN BOX interface connections with the
16-pin diagnostics connector.
- The DCC2 is faulty.
- If necessary, reinstall the Wintest software on your
PC.
NOTA: If the DCC2 programming procedure stops

unexpectedly, disconnect then connect the calculator
battery power supply (either using the battery circuit
breaker, or by disconnecting the F51 fuse). This
enables you to resume programming.
¤ H
DCC2 (DynaVT) - Error codes
GUF213 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Error codes
CONTENTS
A . Reading error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . List of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Analysing error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
¤ H
¤ H
A . Reading error codes

The DCC2 and Autotronic 4 have a self-diagnostic
mode; they continuously monitor their functions and
generate an error code if a fault occurs:
- the reading of error codes can be carried out in 2
ways:
- by direct reading of the error code on the DCC2,
- by direct reading of the error code using Wintest.
DCC2 and Autotronic 4 error codes can be stored:

- the DCC2 can store up to 16 error codes
- the Autotronic 4 can store up to 20 codes.
Depending on the severity of the error code, the

tractor can switch to Neutral Calculator (C.N.), which
restricts the tractor to limp home mode until the fault
is repaired.
¤ H
Reading codes on the DCC2
The user is informed when there is a possible fault by

an error code displayed on the DOT MATRIX screen of
the DCC2.
If several faults occur simultaneously, the corre-

ERROR
sponding error codes are displayed one after the other
for approximately 4 seconds each.
To delete the error code, press the Escape (ESC) key

on the DOT MATRIX control keyboard; this cancels the
display (unless there is a major fault) but does not
CODE D121
delete it from the DCC2 or Autotronic 4 memory.
MA-11-01160A
Fig. 1
Reading error codes with Wintest
Wintest allows all error codes stored by the DCC2 and Autotronic 4 to be displayed and cleared.
Click on the “Tools” icon and on "List of AUTO4 - DCC2 error codes".
Wintest
AUTO4 label
Programming AUTO4
DCC2 label
Programming DCC2
DCC2 : 4.01 CLIM : 20.05

MA-11-01104A
¤ H
AUTO4 Error: 41.07 x 00126

DCC2 Error: 154 x 00002
CLEAR
MA-11-01134A
- It allows all stored error codes and their number of

occurrences to be displayed.
For example: DCC2 error 154 has appeared 2 times.
- By clicking on “CLEAR”, all error codes are deleted
(DCC2 and AUTOTRONIC 4).
NOTE: when reading error codes in Wintest, they

appear at the same time on the DOT MATRIX even if
they are no longer active.
¤ H
B . List of error codes
Num. Components concerned Description

Alternator regulator voltage too high
D121 Alternator
(filtered battery signal)
Alternator regulator voltage too low (filtered
D122 Alternator
battery signal)
D127 Fuel gauge Electrical signal too high
D128 Fuel gauge Electrical signal too low
Alternator regulator voltage too high (non
D129 Alternator
filtered battery signal)
Alternator regulator voltage too low (non
D130 Alternator
filtered battery signal)
D131 CAB78 Engine underspeed supervisor potentiometer Electrical signal too high
D132 CAB78 Engine underspeed supervisor potentiometer Electrical signal too low
D133 CAB44 Throttle pedal potentiometer Electrical signal too high
D134 CAB44 Throttle pedal potentiometer Electrical signal too low
Left-hand lever potentiometer - PowerShuttle
D135 CAB19 Electrical signal too high - C.N.
control
Left-hand lever potentiometer - PowerShuttle
D136 CAB19 Electrical signal too low - C.N.
control
D137 AC11 Armrest lever potentiometer Electrical signal too high
D138 AC11 Armrest lever potentiometer Electrical signal too low
D139 CAB12 Clutch pedal progressivity sensor Electrical signal too high
D140 CAB12 Clutch pedal progressivity sensor Electrical signal too low
D141 TR23 Engine speed sensor Engine speed signal not at maximum speed
Note: displayed alternately with Autotronic 4 error code 4144
D142 15 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal switch Short circuit to + 12V AC
D143 BOC1 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch Short circuit to + 12V AC - C.N.
D148 CAB1 DCC2 instrument panel Attempt to reprogram with engine running
D149 CAN network (CAN Bus) CAN network deactivated (CAN Bus off)
D150 CAN network (CAN Bus) CAN message lost
D151 Tractor ground speed monitoring Tractor speed too high
D152 CAB1 DCC2 instrument panel Engine service hourmeter error
D153 CAB1 DCC2 instrument panel Parameter table error
CAN communications from Autotronic 4 to
D154 CAN network (CAN Bus)
DCC2 - C.N. Special failed
D155 CAB1 DCC2 instrument panel Incorrect tractor code selected
¤ H
Num. Components concerned Description

D156 15 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal switch TOC stuck open
D157 TR23 Engine speed sensor No electrical signal
NOTE: displayed alternately with Autotronic 4 error code 4144
D158 AC11 Armrest lever potentiometer Armrest lever calibration error
Left-hand lever neutral switch - PowerShuttle Error at neutral switch in Neutral - C.N.
D159 CAB19
control position
Left-hand lever neutral switch - PowerShuttle Error at Neutral switch outside Neutral -
D160 CAB19
control C.N. position
D197 TR25 Auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature sensor Electrical signal too high
D198 TR25 Auxiliary hydraulics oil temperature sensor Electrical signal too low
¤ H
D130 error code

C . Analysing error codes
Battery voltage too low (non filtered battery signal)
- Possible cause: The filtered battery supply voltage at
D121 error code terminal 68 of the DCC2 is below 11V.
Alternator regulator voltage too high (filtered battery - Tests: Measure the voltage at terminal 68 of the
signal) DCC2. If it is low, check whether the alternator
output is low or whether there is an open circuit or
- Possible causes: The filtered battery supply voltage short circuit in the wiring harness.
at terminal 68 of the DCC2 is above 15.5 V. The alter-
nator is over charging.
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal 68 and the D131 error code
power output of the alternator. Electrical signal from engine underspeed supervisor
potentiometer too high
D122 error code - Possible causes: The potentiometer signal line
between terminal 2 of the potentiometer and
Alternator regulator voltage too low (filtered battery terminal 7 of the DCC2 is at >5 V or the reference
signal) ground line between terminal 8 of the DCC2 and
- Possible cause: The filtered battery supply voltage at terminal 3 of the potentiometer is in open circuit.
terminal 68 of the DCC2 is below 11V. - Tests: Test the signal line between terminal 2 of the
- Tests: Measure the voltage at terminal 68 of the potentiometer and terminal 7 of the DCC2 to detect
DCC2. If it is low, check whether the alternator any short circuit to 12 V. Test the ground line
output is low or whether there is an open circuit or between terminal 8 of the DCC2 and terminal 3 of
short circuit in the wiring harness. the potentiometer to detect any short circuit.
D127 error code D132 error code

Fuel gauge electrical signal too high Electrical signal from engine underspeed supervisor
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal 12 of potentiometer too low
the DCC2 and the fuel gauge is open or the return - Possible causes: The reference voltage line
circuit to ground is open. between terminal 6 of the DCC2 and terminal 1 of
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal 12 of the the potentiometer is in open circuit, and the potenti-
DCC2 and the fuel gauge to detect any open circuit ometer signal line between terminal 2 of the poten-
and check the wiring between the fuel gauge and tiometer and terminal 7 of the DCC2 is in open
the ground to detect any open circuit. Check if the circuit or short circuit to ground.
gauge is faulty. - Tests: Test the line between terminal 6 of the DCC2
and terminal 1 of the potentiometer to detect any
short circuit. Test the line between terminal 2 of the
D128 error code
potentiometer and terminal 7 of the DCC2 to detect
Fuel gauge electrical signal too low any open circuit or short circuit to ground.
- Possible cause: The circuit from terminal 12 of the
DCC2 is short circuit to ground.
D133 error code
- Tests: Check the wire from terminal 12 of the DCC2
to detect any short circuit to ground. Check if the Electrical signal from throttle pedal potentiometer too
gauge is faulty. high
- Possible causes: The potentiometer signal line
D129 error code terminal 10 of the DCC2 is at >5 V or the reference
Battery voltage too high (non filtered battery signal) ground line between terminal 11 of the DCC2 and
- Possible causes: The filtered battery supply voltage terminal 1 of the potentiometer is in open circuit.
at terminal 68 of the DCC2 is above 15.5 V. The alter- - Tests: Test the signal line between terminal 3 of the
nator is over charging. potentiometer and terminal 10 of the DCC2 to
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal 68 and the detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test the ground line
power output of the alternator. between terminal 11 of the DCC2 and terminal 1 of
the potentiometer to detect any short circuit.
¤ H

Electrical signal from throttle pedal potentiometer too Electrical signal from armrest lever potentiometer too
low high
- Possible causes: The 12 V supply line at terminal 2 - Possible causes: The potentiometer signal line
of the potentiometer is in open circuit, the potenti- between terminal 3 of the potentiometer and
ometer signal line between terminal 3 of the poten- terminal 44 of the DCC2 is at >5 V or the ground line
tiometer and terminal 10 of the DCC2 is in open at terminal 1 of the potentiometer is in open circuit.
circuit or short circuit at ground. - Tests: Test the signal line between terminal 3 of the
- Tests: Test the supply line at terminal 2 of the poten- potentiometer and terminal 44 of the DCC2 to
tiometer to detect any open circuit. Test the line detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test the ground line
between terminal 3 of the potentiometer and at terminal 1 of the potentiometer to detect any
terminal 10 of the DCC2 to detect any open circuit short circuit.
or short circuit to ground.
D138 error code

D135 error code - C.N. Electrical signal from armrest lever potentiometer too
Electrical signal from left-hand lever potentiometer - low
PowerShuttle control too high - Possible causes: The 12 V supply line at terminal 2
- Possible causes: The potentiometer signal line of the potentiometer is in open circuit, the potenti-
between terminal 2 of the potentiometer and ometer signal line between terminal 3 of the poten-
terminal 41 of the DCC2 is at >5 V or the reference tiometer and terminal 44 of the DCC2 is in open
ground line between terminal 42 of the DCC2, and circuit or short circuit at ground.
terminal 3 of the potentiometer is in open circuit or - Tests: Test the supply line at terminal 2 of the poten-
one of the internal “reed” switches is faulty. tiometer to detect any open circuit. Test the line
- Tests: Test the signal line between terminal 2 of the between terminal 3 of the potentiometer and
potentiometer and terminal 41 of the DCC2 to terminal 44 of the DCC2 to detect any open circuit
detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test the ground line or short circuit to ground.
between terminal 42 of the DCC2 and terminal 3 of
the potentiometer to detect any short circuit. Check
the voltage of the signal line in all lever positions, D139 error code
and change the lever if there is a problem. Electrical signal from clutch pedal progressivity sensor
too high
- Possible causes: The potentiometer signal line
D136 error code - C.N.
Electrical signal from left-hand lever potentiometer - terminal 4 of the DCC2 is at >5 V or the ground line
PowerShuttle control too low at terminal 1 of the potentiometer is in open circuit.
- Possible causes : The reference voltage line - Tests: Test the signal line between terminal 3 of the
between terminal 40 of the DCC2 and terminal 1 of potentiometer and terminal 4 of the DCC2 to detect
the potentiometer is in open circuit, and the potenti- any short circuit to 12 V. Test the ground line at
ometer signal line between terminal 2 of the poten- terminal 1 of the potentiometer to detect any short
tiometer, and terminal 41 of the DCC2 is in open circuit.
circuit or short circuit to ground, or one of the
internal "reed" switches is faulty.
- Tests: Test the line between terminal 40 of the
DCC2 and terminal 1 of the potentiometer to detect
any short circuit. Test the line between terminal 2 of
the potentiometer and terminal 41 of the DCC2 to
detect any open circuit or short circuit to ground.
Check the voltage of the signal line in all lever posi-
tions, and change the lever if there is a problem.
¤ H

Electrical signal from clutch pedal progressivity sensor Attempt to reprogram with engine running
too low - Possible cause: An attempt has been made to load
- Possible causes: The 12 V supply line at terminal 2 a new software programme in the DCC2 while the
of the potentiometer is in open circuit, the potenti- engine was running.
ometer signal line between terminal 3 of the poten- - Tests: To carry out reprogramming, the ignition key
tiometer and terminal 4 of the DCC2 is in open switch must be on but the engine must be stopped.
circuit or short circuit at ground. NOTE: This is an additional safety as Wintest system
- Tests: Test the supply line at terminal 2 of the poten- normally does not allow reprogramming with engine
tiometer to detect any open circuit. Test the line running.
terminal 4 of the DCC2 to detect any open circuit or
short circuit to ground. D149 error code
CAN network deactivated
D141 error code - Possible causes: Error at the two CAN network
wires which link the systems or error in the hard-
Engine speed signal not at maximum speed ware program of the DCC2 or the Autotronic 4.
- Possible cause: The DCC2 detects that the - Tests: Check the continuity of the two CAN wires;
Autotronic 4 is transmitting via CAN an unrealistic CAN High connecting terminal 16 of the DCC2 to
engine speed value. terminal 27 of the Autotronic 4, and CAN Low
- Tests: Check if the engine speed sensor is discon- connecting terminal 39 of the DCC2 to terminal 26
nected. of the Autotronic 4. If the CAN network functions
NOTE 1: when this error occurs, the DCC2 positions correctly, replace the DCC2 and/or Autotronic 4.
the tachometer pointer at the maximum speed of
2500 rpm.
D150 error code
NOTA 2: The D141 error code is displayed alternately
with Autotronic 4 error code 4144. CAN message lost
- Possible causes: Error at the two CAN network
wires which link the systems or error in the hard-
D142 error code ware program of the DCC2 or the Autotronic 4.
Top-of-Clutch pedal switch (TOC) short circuit to + 12 V AC - Tests: Check the continuity of the two CAN wires;
- Possible causes: Input line at terminal 13 of the CAN High connecting terminal 16 of the DCC2 to
DCC2 is short circuit to 12 V or TOC switch is defec- terminal 27 of the Autotronic 4, and CAN Low
tive or wrongly adjusted. connecting terminal 39 of the DCC2 to terminal 26
- Tests: Check the input line at terminal 13 to detect of the Autotronic 4. If the CAN network functions
any short circuit to 12 V. Check whether the TOC correctly, replace the DCC2 and/or Autotronic 4.
switch is incorrectly adjusted or defective.
D151 error code
D143 error code - C.N. Tractor speed too high
Bottom-of-Clutch pedal switch (BOC) short circuit to - Possible cause: The DCC2 detects that the
+12 V AC Autotronic 4 is transmitting via CAN a ground speed
- Possible causes: Input line at terminal 19 of the value higher than 55 kph after operating the tractor
DCC2 is short circuit to 12 V or BOC switch is defec- in free-wheel mode.
tive or wrongly adjusted. - Tests: Do not operate the tractor in free-wheel
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal 19 of the mode, because this can damage the transmission.
DCC2 to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Check
whether the BOC switch is incorrectly adjusted or
defective.
¤ H

Engine service hourmeter error Top-of-clutch pedal switch (TOC) stuck open
- Possible causes: The engine service hours are - Possible causes: Open circuit on the 12 V line at the
stored in 3 different places. If one of the values switch, or incorrect mechanical adjustment of the
differs from the other two, these two values will be switch/pedal, or faulty switch, or clutch pedal
copied to replace the wrong value. If ever all 3 loca- pressed down for too long without touching BOC.
tions have different values then there is no majority - Tests: Check for 12V at red wire to TOC switch. If
and the true engine hours are lost. To clear this there is no voltage, check for open circuit in the
error, turn the key to OFF position, then to ON again. supply line to TOC switch. Check mechanical adjust-
ment. Check the switch. Press down fully to touch
the BOC.
D153 error code
Parameter table error
- Possible causes: An error occurred in saving a D157 error code
parameter to the DCC2. The system will clear the No electrical signal from engine speed sensor
error after one or two ignition cycles, but the param- - Possible causes: The electronic injection control unit
eter may not have been saved and the default (ECM or ECU) transmits an engine oil pressure
parameters will be used. signal via the CAN to the DCC2, which does not
- Tests: Check the "DCct" parameters (see Level 2 detect the engine speed signal transmitted by the
Calibration). Autotronic 4. The absence of this signal is caused by
a fault in the sensor or in the Autotronic 4 sensor
signal circuit.
D154 error code - C.N. Special - Tests: Check the sensor resistance and the conti-
CAN communications from Autotronic 4 to DCC2 - nuity of the circuit between terminal 2 of the sensor
C.N. Special failed and terminal 12 of the Autotronic 4.
- Possible causes: Open circuit or short circuit in the NOTE: The D157 error code is displayed alternately
two CAN network wires connecting the DCC2 and with Autotronic 4 error code 4144.
Autotronic 4. The Autotronic 4 no longer receives
permanent 12 V supply.
- Tests: Check the connection of the two CAN wires; D158 error code
CAN high connecting terminal 16 of the DCC2 to Armrest lever potentiometer calibration error
terminal 27 of the Autotronic 4, and CAN low - Possible causes: The lever has been calibrated incor-
connecting terminal 39 of the DCC2 to terminal 26 rectly. The initial calibration values have changed
of the Autotronic 4. Check the supply line at terminal following a problem on the potentiometer.
28 of the Autotronic 4. - Tests: Re-calibrate the lever (see Level 2 Calibra-
NOTE: Computer Neutral Special: If the D154 error tion). If the fault remains, check the potentiometer
code is displayed on the DCC2 but the transmission and its harness.
does not transfer directly to neutral, the tractor can
continue to run as long as the clutch pedal is not fully
pressed down (BOC switch activated) or the Power-
Shuttle lever is not in neutral position (neutral switch
activated).
D155 error code

Incorrect tractor code selected
- Tests: Enter the correct parameter AA code
¤ H
D159 error code - C.N. D198 error code

Error at the neutral switch of the PowerShuttle lever in Electrical signal from auxiliary hydraulics oil tempera-
Neutral position ture sensor too low
- Possible causes: Neutral switch error in Power- - Possible cause: The circuit from terminal 67 of the
Shuttle lever. The error comes from the two DCC2 is short circuit to ground.
contacts of the Neutral switch which are both open - Tests: Check the wire from terminal 67 of the DCC2
or closed when in fact one should be open and the to detect any short circuit to ground. Check if the
other closed when the lever is in the Neutral posi- sensor is faulty.
tion.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the
shuttle lever switches in Wintest when changing the
lever position.
If Wintest does not correspond with the lever posi-
tions, check that the switches are not stuck, and
check the Neutral switch harness from terminals 4
and 6 of the lever connector to terminals 57 and 58
of the DCC2 for an open circuit or short circuit.
Replace the switch.
D160 error code - C.N.

Error at the Neutral switch of the PowerShuttle lever
outside Neutral position
- Possible causes: Neutral switch error in left-hand
lever. The error comes from the two contacts of the
Neutral switch which are both open or closed when
in fact one should be open and the other closed
when the lever is in the Forward or Reverse posi-
tion.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the
shuttle lever switches in Wintest when changing the
lever position.
If Wintest does not correspond with the lever posi-
tions, check that the switches are not stuck, and
check the Neutral switch harness from terminals 4
and 6 of the lever connector to terminals 57 and 58
of the DCC2 for an open circuit or short circuit.
Replace the switch.
D197 error code

Electrical signal from auxiliary hydraulics oil tempera-
ture sensor too high
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal 67 of
the DCC2 and the sensor is open or the return circuit
to ground is open.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal 67 of the
DCC2 and the terminal 1 of the sensor to detect any
open circuit and check the wiring between terminal
2 of the sensor and the ground to detect any open
circuit. Check if the sensor is faulty.
¤ H
DCC2 (DynaVT) - Calibrations, constants and adjustments
GUF214 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Calibrations, constants and

adjustments
CONTENTS
A . Calibrating the ground speed (level 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Calibrating the throttle pedal potentiometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Input at level 2 - CAL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Input at level 3 - CAL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
E . Diagnostic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
F . Adjusting the manoeuvring pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
¤ H
¤ H
A . Calibrating the ground speed

(level 0)
This calibration allows improved precision of ground
speed depending on: KPH
- different tyre sizes available,

- radar (if fitted).
1. Mark out a 100 meter (400 ft) course according to

the unit selected, on a firm surface.
2. Press and hold down the display selector switch
for 15 seconds.
Remark: the daily hourmeter resets after 5
seconds.
MA-11-01340A
3. "CAL" will appear on the display Fig. 1.
4. Drive the tractor forwards at normal work speed. Fig. 1
5. Press the display selector switch when crossing
the start point of the 100 metre (400 ft) course.
6. "run" will appear on the display Fig. 2.
7. Press the display selector switch when crossing
the end point of the course.
8. Press the display selector switch; the constant
ground speed (design) measured during calibration KPH
is displayed.
9. Press the display selector switch again; the actual
constant ground speed (radar) measured during
calibration is displayed on tractors fitted with radar.
10. Press the display selector switch a final time to
return the instrument panel to normal operating
mode.
NOTE: The tractor must always be moving before

starting the measured course; otherwise calibration is MA-11-01341A
incorrect.
Fig. 2
¤ H
B . Calibrating the throttle pedal

potentiometer
A
The calibration of the throttle pedal potentiometer
must be carried out each time that one of the following
elements is replaced or modified:
- Throttle potentiometer
- DCC2
1
1. Start the engine. Apply the handbrake.
2. Set the PowerShuttle lever to neutral
3. The power take-off must be disengaged. RPM
MA-11-01131A
Fig. 3
Calibration
The calibration is carried out in two successive steps
so as to determine the minimum and maximum engine
speeds in relation to the pedal.
4. Pedal fully released, minimum engine speed.
5. Press and hold down the differential lock switch
for 5 seconds.
6. The symbol (1, Fig. 3) is displayed for approxi-
mately 2 seconds indicating the end of the first
calibration phase. Release the differential lock
switch.
7. Pedal fully depressed, maximum engine speed.
8. Press and hold down the differential lock switch
for 5 seconds.
9. The symbol (1, Fig. 3) is displayed for approxi-
mately 2 seconds indicating the end of the second
calibration phase. Release the differential lock
switch.
¤ H
C . Input at level 2 - CAL 2

To select CAL 2:
1. Switch on the ignition key (do not start the engine).
2. Engage and release the clutch pedal in order to
delete the “TC” “DC” display from the screen on
2
the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
3. Within the next five seconds, simultaneously press
keys ⇑ and ⇒ on the DOT MATRIX control
DCct
keyboard.
The screen Fig. 1 appears, with 5 available functions 0DC TC
TCct
displayed in icon or written form:
- Calibrating the armrest lever

MA-11-01161A
- “DCct”: Display DCC2 constants Fig. 1

- “0DC”: Clear error codes stored in DCC2
- “0TC”: Clear error codes stored in TC
(Autotronic 4)
- “TCct”: Display TC constants (Autotronic 4)
The selected function is displayed in reverse video.

4. Select the required function using the buttons ⇐
and ⇒ of the DOT MATRIX control keyboard, then
press “OK”.
¤ H
Calibrating the armrest lever

The calibration of the armrest lever must be carried out
each time that one of the following elements is
replaced or modified:
- Armrest lever potentiometer
- DCC2
2
Select the icon Fig. 1; press on “OK” and the screen
Fig. 2 is displayed:
0 526
1. “0” is displayed.
2. Do not touch the lever: leave in neutral. <620
>480
Press “OK” within 5 seconds of the buzzer
sounding.
3. “+” is displayed.
MA-11-01162A
4. Move the lever forward until it stops (1st stop, and
above all not end of travel) and hold in this position.
Fig. 2
sounding.
5. “-” is displayed.
6. Move the lever backwards to 1st stop and hold in
this position.
sounding.
7. The calibration is completed, the normal screen is
displayed.
8. Switch off the ignition key for at least 5
seconds to validate calibration.
NOTE: If “ERROR” is displayed, repeat the procedure,

making sure to respect the time of action and the lever
position.
¤ H
Display DCC constants

Select “DCct” Fig. 3 and the screen Fig. 4 appears.
Select the following and preceding pages (Fig. 4, Fig. 5

and Fig. 6) with the keys ⇐ and ⇒.
Press “ESC” to return to the previous mode.
2
Screen Code Parameter
DCct
Tract code
Tester code
Tractor Code AA
Wintest user code
0DC TC
Interfac
Features
Interface
Specifications
TCct
MA-11-01163A
Radar const Radar constant

Fig. 3
Eng spd pro Maximum engine speed for
maximum speed regulation
Units Units:
0= US Tract Code 3
2= Metric
Tester Code 927
Max eng rpm Maximum engine speed
Interfac 4419
Min eng rpm Minimum engine speed
Clutch max Maximum clutch value
Features 4371
Clutch mini Minimum clutch value
Radar Const 0
R lever CAL0 Stored value at neutral of right-hand Eng Spd Pro 240
lever Units 2
R lever CAL+ Stored value at + of right-hand lever Max Eng RPM 235
R lever CAL- Stored value at - of right-hand lever MA-11-01164A
Acceler Max Maximum accelerator stored value

Fig. 4
Acceler Min Minimum accelerator stored value
Front PTO Front PTO control
Max speed Maximum allowed speed
Elec engine Electronic injection:
equivalent to label code D
Min Eng RPM 80
Trans regul - Clutch Max 680
Joystickcvt - Clutch Min 334
RLever Cal0 556
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise RLever Cal+ 794
parameter, calibration or characteristic; for this reason
they cannot be considered as default values or used to RLever Cal- 280
draw comparisons. Acceler Max 894
Acceler Min 90
MA-11-01165A
Fig. 5
¤ H
Front PTO 0
Max Speed 40
Elec Engine 2
Trans Regul 1
JoystickCVT 0
0
0
0
MA-11-01166A
Fig. 6
¤ H
Clear error codes stored in DCC2
2
Select “DC” Fig. 7 and the screen Fig. 8 appears.
DCct
0DC TC
TCct
MA-11-01169A
Fig. 7
When the screen is displayed, click on " OK ": the error

codes are cleared.
2
PRESS OK
MA-11-01170A
Fig. 8
Clear error codes stored in TC

(Autotronic 4)
Select “TC” Fig. 9 and the screen Fig. 10 appears.
2
DCct
0DC TC
TCct
MA-11-01167A
Fig. 9
¤ H
When the screen is displayed, click on " OK ": the error

codes are cleared.
2
PRESS OK
MA-11-01170A
Fig. 10
Display TC constants (Autotronic 4)

Select “TCct” Fig. 11.
Function unavailable: it is not possible to read the

Autotronic 4 constants.
2
DCct
0DC TC
TCct
MA-11-01171A
Fig. 11
¤ H
D . Input at level 3 - CAL 3

In level 3, the parameters can be modified.
To select CAL 3:
1. Switch on the ignition key (do not start the engine).
2. Engage and release the clutch pedal in order to
3
delete the “TC” “DC” display from the screen on
the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
3. Within the next five seconds, simultaneously press
keys ⇐ and ⇒ on the DOT MATRIX control
keyboard.
The screen Fig. 1 is displayed:
DC Const
4. Press “OK” to display Fig. 2
Select the following and preceding pages (Fig. 2, Fig. 3
et Fig. 4) with the keys ⇐ and ⇒.
MA-11-01172A
Fig. 1
NOTE: Some parameters cannot be modified
¤ H
Modify the required parameters using the buttons ⇐,

⇑, ⇒, ⇓ and “OK” on the DOT MATRIX control
keyboard.
Tract Code 3
Screen Code Parameter
Tester Code 927
Tract code Tractor Code AA Interfac 419
Tester code Wintest user code Features 371
Interfac Interface Radar Const 0
Features Specifications Eng Spd Pro 240
Radar const Radar constant Units 2
Eng spd pro Maximum engine speed for Max Eng RPM 235
maximum speed regulation MA-11-01173A
Units Units:
0= US Fig. 2
2= Metric
Max eng rpm Maximum engine speed
Min eng rpm Minimum engine speed
Clutch max Maximum clutch value Min Eng RPM 80
Clutch mini Minimum clutch value Clutch Max 680
R lever CAL0 Stored value at neutral of right-hand Clutch Min 334
lever
R lever CAL+ Stored value at + of right-hand lever
RLever Cal0 556
R lever CAL- Stored value at - of right-hand lever
RLever Cal+ 794
Acceler Max Maximum accelerator stored value
RLever Cal- 280
Acceler Min Minimum accelerator stored value Acceler Max 894
Front PTO Front PTO control Acceler Min 90
MA-11-01174A
Elec engine Electronic injection: Fig. 3
equivalent to label code D
Trans regul -
Joystickcvt -
Front PTO 0
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise Max Speed 42
parameter, calibration or characteristic; for this reason Elec Engine 2
they cannot be considered as default values or used to
draw comparisons. Trans Regul 1
JoystickCVT 0
0
0
0
MA-11-01175A
Fig. 4
¤ H
E . Diagnostic mode
DIAGNOSTIC
The diagnostic mode is used to test and monitor the
electronic functions of the tractor. DATA DC BIN
The diagnostic menu may be entered at any time DC ANA DC ERR
using the following procedure:
Press the key ⇑ until the menu displaying the various
DC LED DC GAUGE
diagnostics functions appears Fig. 1: TC BIN TC ANA
- DATA: DCC2 system data TC EV TC ERR
- DC BIN: DCC2 digital input data (switches)
- DC ANA: DCC2 analog input data
EC BIN EC ANA
- DC ERR: Stored DCC2 error codes
- DC LED: DCC2 indicator lights check MA-11-01176A
- DC GAUGE: DCC2 gauges check

- TC BIN: TC digital input data (Autotronic 4) Fig. 1
- TC ANA: TC analog input and frequency data
(Autotronic 4)
- TC EV: TC solenoid valves supply (Autotronic 4)
- TC ERR: Error codes stored in TC (Autotronic 4)
- EC BIN: DCC2 digital input data for electronic injec-
tion Engine Temp 74
- EC ANA: DCC2 analog input data for electronic injec- Trans Temp 42
tion
The selected function is displayed in reverse video.
Clutch Pos 100
Engine OilP 458
Select the required function using the buttons ⇐, ⇑, Fuel Level 8
⇒ and ⇓ of the DOT MATRIX control keyboard, then Radar Speed 0
press “OK”.
Tempo Nerv 1
Max Speed 33
MA-11-01177A
Fig. 2
DATA: DCC2 system data
Screen Code Diagnostic function

Engine temp Engine temperature Battery Fil 103
Trans temp Transmission temperature Alarm Pulse 0
Clutch pos Clutch pedal travel Alarm Bits 0
Engine oilP Engine oil pressure Engine Sup 10
Fuel level Remaining fuel value Theo EngSpd 800
Radar speed Radar speed Engine Load 100
Tempo new -
Right Lever 2
Left lever 4
MA-11-01178A
Fig. 3
¤ H
Screen Code Diagnostic function

Battery fil Filtered battery voltage Accelerator 0
Alarm pulse - Set Ratio 0
Alarm bits - Act Ratio 0
Engine sup Underspeed supervisor Shu Dec Inc 1000
Theo eng spd Engine design speed
Speed Incr 192
Engine load Engine load
Status Levr 1
Right-hand lever Armrest lever
SV l/2 0
Left-hand lever Steering wheel lever
Hyd Temp 189
Accelerator Throttle pedal value
MA-11-01179A
Set Ratio Required transmission ratio
Act ratio Current transmission ratio Fig. 4
Shu dec inc 100= Reverse shuttle
10= deceleration
1= acceleration
Speed incr Acceleration value Radar Freq 0
Status lever - Radar Speed 0
SV 1/2 0= no preselected speed
Radar Filt 0
1= SV1
2= SV2 Trans Speed 0
Hyd temp Hydraulics temperature Trans SpRec 0
Radar freq Radar frequency between 0 and ComputerNeu 1
273 0
Radar speed Radar speed
0
Radar filt Filtered radar speed
MA-11-01180A
Trans speed Design speed

Fig. 5
Trans sprec Recalculated design speed
ComputerNeu -
Engine temp Engine temperature
Air In Temp
Engine Temp 74
Speed Dem
Visco Speed
Air In Temp 17
Visco State
Speed Dem 399
Duty Cycle
Visco Speed 0
Pid Out Visco State 0
Duty Cycle 98
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise Pid Out 0
they cannot be considered as default values or used to 0
draw comparisons. MA-11-01319A
Fig. 6
¤ H
DC BIN: DCC2 digital input data (switches)
Screen
Diagnostic function
DIAGNOSTIC
Code
DATA DC BIN
SV1E1 / E2 SV1 encoder
DC ANA DC ERR
SV2E1 / E2 SV2 encoder
DC LED DC GAUGE
BocNc Bottom-of-Clutch pedal switch (BOC)
normally closed (NC) TC BIN TC ANA
BocNo Bottom-of-Clutch pedal switch (BOC) TC EV TC ERR
normally open (NO)
EC BIN EC ANA
Dig6 -
Park Parking brake and ParkLock
MA-11-01181A
P ESC ESC (Escape) key

Fig. 7
P OK OK key
P↓ Move down arrow key
P↑ Move up arrow key
P→ Move right arrow key

Sv1E1 0 Sv1E2 0
P← Move left arrow key
Sv2E1 0 Sv2E2 0
HBeam Road lights BocNc 0 BocNo 1
Light Dipped lights
Dig6 0 Park 1
LINNc Steering wheel lever Neutral switch
normally closed (NC)
P Esc 0 P Ok 0
LINNo Steering wheel lever Neutral switch P 0 P 0
normally open (NO) P 0 P 0
FrSOn Suspended front axle ON HBeam 0 Light 1
FrSOf Suspended front axle OFF MA-11-01182A
Toc Top-of-Clutch switch (TOC)

Fig. 8
TMain -
SV1 SV1 switch
SV2 SV2 switch
Hyd F Hydraulic filter
LINNc 0 LINNo 1
Hyd P Hydraulic pressure
FrSOn 0 FrSOf 1
Air F Air filter
Toc 0 TMain 0
Brk P Brake pressure
Sv1 0 Sv2 0
PtoAu Automatic PTO
Set In
Hyd F 0 Hyd P 0
Implm High position for trailed implement if
Air F 1 Brk P 0
switch input PtoAu 1 Set In 1
Headl - Implm 0 Headl 0
MA-11-01183A
Fig. 9
¤ H
DC ANA: DCC2 analog input data
Screen Code Diagnostic function DIAGNOSTIC

Clutch Sens Clutch DATA DC BIN
Right lever Armrest lever DC ANA DC ERR
Engine supv Underspeed supervisor DC LED DC GAUGE
Accelerator Accelerator TC BIN TC ANA
Left lever Steering wheel lever TC EV TC ERR
Battery Dir Battery voltage
EC BIN EC ANA
9.5 Volts Supply to sensors provided by DCC2
battery fil Filtered battery voltage
MA-11-01186A
Analog1 Spa -
Fig. 10
Analog2 Spa -
Fuel Sensor Fuel level
Engine Temp Engine temperature
Oil Pressur Engine oil pressure
NTC Input -
Clutch Sens 699
Hy Oil Temp Hydraulic oil temperature
Right Lever 539
Air Temp Air temperature Engine Supv 163
Accelerator 80
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise Left Lever 38
they cannot be considered as default values or used to Battery Dir 369
draw comparisons. 9.5 Volts 995
Battery Fil 347
MA-11-01187A
Fig. 11
Analog1 Spa 930

Analog2 Spa 943
Fuel Sensor 283
Engine Temp 939
Oil Pressur 899
NTC Input 874
Hy Oil Temp 773
Air Temp 29
MA-11-01188A
Fig. 12
¤ H
DC ERR: Stored DCC2 error codes

The error codes are displayed with their occurrences
Fig. 14.
DIAGNOSTIC
DATA DC BIN
DC ANA DC ERR
DC LED DC GAUGE
TC BIN TC ANA
TC EV TC ERR
EC BIN EC ANA
MA-11-01184A
Fig. 13
E 156 13 E 0 0
E 155 1 E 0 0
E 136 5 E 0 0
E 0 0 E 0 0
E 0 0 E 0 0
E 0 0 E 0 0
E 0 0 E 0 0
E 0 0 E 0 0
MA-11-01185A
Fig. 14
¤ H
DC LED: DCC2 indicator lights check

In ON position, all LEDs are lit (excluding headlight and
direction indicator lights) Fig. 17
DIAGNOSTIC
DATA DC BIN
DC ANA DC ERR
DC LED DC GAUGE
TC BIN TC ANA
TC EV TC ERR
EC BIN EC ANA
MA-11-01189A
Fig. 15
LED
/
On/Off
MA-11-01190A
Fig. 16
1 2
10 15
5 20
RPM x 100
0 25
MA-11-01210A
Fig. 17
¤ H
DC GAUGE: DCC2 gauges check

The three DCC2 gauges (tachometer, coolant temper-
ature and fuel tank) can be forced to low, intermediate
and high position. DIAGNOSTIC
DATA DC BIN
DC ANA DC ERR
DC LED DC GAUGE
TC BIN TC ANA
TC EV TC ERR
EC BIN EC ANA
MA-11-01191A
Fig. 18
Gauges
/
MA-11-01192A
Fig. 19
1 2
10 15
5 20
RPM x 100
0 25
Gauges
A B
/ 540
750
1000
KPH
MPH
RPM
MA-11-01209A
Fig. 20
¤ H
TC BIN: TC digital input data (Autotronic 4)
Screen
Diagnostic function
DIAGNOSTIC
Code
DATA DC BIN
HTemp Auxiliary hydraulic oil temperature
DC ANA DC ERR
RShaf Summing shaft speed
DC LED DC GAUGE
VrRef Transmission control unit
TC BIN TC ANA
Crown Bevel gear design speed
Pfa 4WD switch
TC EV TC ERR
Diff Differential lock switch
EC BIN EC ANA
RPtoC Front PTO rotation
MA-11-01198A
F Pto -
RPtoF PTO ON/OFF switch on fender Fig. 21
Range Hare / Tortoise range selector switch
L Brk Left-hand brake switch
R brk Right-hand brake switch
Pto n PTO neutral switch HTemp 0 RShaf 0
Pto54 540 rpm PTO speed selector switch VrRef 0 Crown 0
Pto75 750 rpm PTO speed selector switch Pfa 2 Diff 2
Pto10 1000 rpm PTO speed selector switch RPtoC 2 F Pto 3
Ignit +12V APC (Ignition key ON) RPtoF 2 Range 2
SusOn Suspended front axle switch ON L Brk 2 R Brk 2
Park Parking brake switch
Pto N 2 Pto54 2
SusOf Suspended front axle switch OFF
Pto75 2 Pto10 2
MA-11-01199A
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise
parameter, calibration or characteristic; for this reason Fig. 22
draw comparisons.
Ignit 0 Park 0
SusOn 2 SusOf 2
MA-11-01200A
Fig. 23
¤ H
TC ANA: TC analog input and frequency

data (Autotronic 4)
DIAGNOSTIC
Screen Code Diagnostic function DATA DC BIN
Engine Spd1 Engine speed sensor DC ANA DC ERR
Engine Spd 1 Engine speed sensor
DC LED DC GAUGE
FrontPto Spd Front PTO speed
TC BIN TC ANA
RPtoShaf spd PTO shaft speed
TC EV TC ERR
RPtoClu Spd PTO clutch speed
EC BIN EC ANA
HydShaf Spd Summing shaft speed
Crown spd Bevel gear design speed
MA-11-01193A
HiPressure High pressure (transmission circuit)
Range Pos Range position Fig. 24
FrAxle Sens -
Trans Temp Transmission temperature
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise Engine Spd1 840
they cannot be considered as default values or used to Engine Spd1 840
draw comparisons. FrontPto Spd 0
RPtoShaf Spd 0
RPtoClu Spd 0
HydShaf Spd 0
Crown spd 0
HiPressure 10
MA-11-01194A
Fig. 25
Range Pos 49
FrAxle Sens 0
Trans Temp 170
245
MA-11-01195A
Fig. 26
¤ H
TC EV: TC solenoid valves supply

(Autotronic 4)
DIAGNOSTIC
Screen
Diagnostic function DATA DC BIN
Code
RPto PTO solenoid valve
DC ANA DC ERR
FPto Front PTO solenoid valve
DC LED DC GAUGE
V540 540 rpm PTO speed solenoid valve TC BIN TC ANA
V750 750 rpm PTO speed solenoid valve TC EV TC ERR
V1000 1000 rpm PTO speed solenoid valve EC BIN EC ANA
Neutr Coupler function solenoid valve
30kph Solenoid valve limiting speed to 30 kph MA-11-01196A
Prior - Fig. 27
Rang1 Tortoise range solenoid valve
Rang2 Hare range solenoid valve
Diffl Differential lock solenoid valve
Pfa 4 WD solenoid valve RPto 0 FPto 0
AcOunt Transmission control unit V540 0 V750 0
REMINDER: Values are usually calculated from a precise
V1000 0 Neutr 0
parameter, calibration or characteristic; for this reason 30kph 0 Prior 0
draw comparisons.
Rang1 0 Rang2 0
Diffl 0 Pfa 0
AcOut 1
MA-11-01197A
Fig. 28
¤ H
TC ERR: Error codes stored in TC

(Autotronic 4)
DIAGNOSTIC
DATA DC BIN
DC ANA DC ERR
DC LED DC GAUGE
TC BIN TC ANA
TC EV TC ERR
EC BIN EC ANA
MA-11-01201A
Fig. 29
E5153 E0000
E4108 E0000
E6101 E0000
E6143 E0000
E6110 E0000
E0000 E0000
E0000 E0000
E0000 E0000
MA-11-01202A
Fig. 30
¤ H
EC BIN: DCC2 digital input data for elec- EC ANA: DCC2 analog input data for elec-
tronic injection tronic injection
DIAGNOSTIC DIAGNOSTIC
DATA DC BIN DATA DC BIN
DC ANA DC ERR DC ANA DC ERR
DC LED DC GAUGE DC LED DC GAUGE
TC BIN TC ANA TC BIN TC ANA
TC EV TC ERR TC EV TC ERR
EC BIN EC ANA EC BIN EC ANA
MA-11-01205A MA-11-01203A
Fig. 31 Fig. 33
Switch A 0 Droop Curv 5

Switch B 0 Torque Curv 1
Switch + 0 Engine Temp 120
Switch - 0 Fuel Cons 20
Hours 128 Air Inlet 79
Oil Pressur 78
Engine Load 73
Torque Ref 590
MA-11-01206A MA-11-01204A
Fig. 32 Fig. 34
Screen Screen Code Diagnostic function

Diagnostic function
Code
Droop Curv Regulation slope: always 5%
Switch A A memorised speed activation switch
Torque Curv Torque curve
Switch B B memorised speed activation switch
Engine Temp Engine temperature
+ Switch + switch for memorised speeds
Fuel Cons Fuel consumption
adjustment
Air Inlet Vacuum gauge
- Switch - switch for memorised speeds
adjustment Oil Pressur Engine oil pressure
Hours Total engine hours stored by engine Engine Load Engine load
electronic calculator Torque Ref Reference torque
¤ H
F . Adjusting the manoeuvring pedal

Manoeuvring pedal assembly (Fig. 37)
(2) Bottom of clutch switch (BOC)
(3) Starter safety switch
(4) Pedal pressed adjustment screw
(5) Pedal released stop adjustment screw
(6) Top of pedal switch
(7) Progressivity potentiometer
- The manoeuvring pedal can be used when manoeu-

vring in very tight spaces or when hitching an imple-
ment.
- It is not necessary to use this pedal to reverse direc-
tion.
- The position of the manoeuvring pedal is transmitted Fig. 35
to the DCC2 by the sensors.
Adjusting BOC
- Tighten to provide a clearance of 0.3 to 1mm
between the switch body and the holder (Section
C-C.
- Tighten the lock nut to a torque of 6 - 9 Nm.
Adjusting the potentiometer and switch

- Fit the potentiometer into its housing.
- Tighten the screws in order to reach the centre of
the ports (Fig. 35).
- Fit the plastic fork and tighten the screws with
Loctite 241 or equivalent (Fig. 36).
- Adjust the released pedal stop adjustment screw (5)
to provide a clearance of 6mm (view B).
- Fit and tighten the top of pedal switch (6) to a torque Fig. 36
of 18 to 30 Nm.
- With the pedal released (top), allow 0.5 to 0.7 mm
clearance between the switch body and screw head
(4) (view A).
¤ H
A B
6 4 5
J = 0,5 / 0,7 mm
18 - 30 Nm
2 7 6
J = 6 mm
4
C A
D
3
C 5
B
E
Loctite 241
8 Nm
C-C E-E
2 3
6 - 9 Nm
J = 0,3/1,00 mm J = 0,5 mm
MA-11-01132A
Fig. 37
¤ H
DCC2 (DynaVT) - Electrical diagrams
GUF215 - DCC2 (DynaVT) - Electrical diagrams
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Electrical diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
¤ H
¤ H
In general, the components or connectors are named

A . General in order to indicate the corresponding elements of the
tractor:
Description AC## Armrest
The harnesses fitted on the tractor allow data to be BAF## Fuse box
exchanged and power to be supplied to the electrical CA## Automatic air conditioning
and electronic systems. CAB## Cab
The tractor is fitted with 3 different types of power ENG## Engine
supply:
FA## Suspended front axle
• +12V Battery (Permanent)
L## Linkage - ParkLock (HA)
• +12V APC (Ignition key ON)
LIG## Lighting
• +12V ACC (Accessories)
R## Linkage and roof
Most harnesses have a maximum of six different wire
ROOF##Roof
colours:
TR## Transmission
- Black: Ground
V# Electrohydraulic spool valve
- Brown: +12V Permanent
X# Round battery cable terminal on fuse box
- Red: +12V APC (Ignition key ON) and Accessories
- White: Information
- Yellow: CAN High
- Green: CAN Low
The CAN network wires (yellow and green) are
twisted together.
- Components with only one connector are identified

by the connector name:
CAB83 - Suspended front axle switch (Fig. 1). CAB83
- Harnesses performing the same funtions have the OFF ON
same colour on the diagram (Fig. 1):

• FAI03 - Dynashift console harness (green)
• FAI48 - DynaVT console harness (green) 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAB83
- All wires can be identified by the pins of the outgoing 7 4 5 6
and incoming connectors of the harness:

R
S2.1/CAB83.2
CAB37 CAB37
CAB37.6/CAB83.1: The wire connects pin 6 of the
7
6
5
8
CAB37 connector to pin 1 of the CAB83 connector FAI 03 FAI 48 1 1

11 10 9
4
2 2
3
- The detail of pins allocation for each connector is

2
3 3
12
1
4 4
shown on the harness side S2
CAB37.6/CAB83.1 B
5
6
5
6
CAB37.7/CAB83.3 B 7 7
- The wire colour is indicated: CAB37.6/CAB83.1 B,
R
8 8
9 9
the wire is white
BAF12.2/S2.1
10 10
11 11
List of colours: 12 12
- N: Black Fig. 1
MA-10-01000A
- M: Brown
- R: Red
- B: White
- J: Yellow
- V: Green
- The splices inside the harnesses are indicated by a
dot and the letter S (S2).
¤ H
Layout
5 Deutsch connectors (31-way) are connected to the
cab:
- 2 on the front panel Fig. 2)
- 3 at the bottom rear right-hand side of the cab ENG1
(Fig. 3).
Fig. 2:
ENG2
All these connectors belong to the engine harness.
ENG2 is dedicated to information concerning the elec-
tronic injection.
Fig. 3:
Always in the following order (regardless of tractor
configuration and options), from left to right: MA-10-01003A
L14 Linkage harness junction Fig. 2

CAB50 Transmission harness junction
LIG1 Lighting harness junction
L14 CAB50 LIG1 +12V MA-10-01002A

Fig. 3
BAF12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
The fuses and relays of the electrical or electronic 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
board (Fig. 4) are indicated by a black mark on their

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
BAF10
locations on the fuse box (2). 1

2
F9- 15A 3
+APC 4
1 5
6
X2 7
8
F48 - 7.5A 9
10
+12V 11
1
12
13
X4 14
15
18
17
16
16
15
17
F48
14
13
18
12
11
10
9
8
7
5
6
2
4
3
2
MA-10-01001A
2 F9 Fig. 4
¤ H
B . Electrical diagrams
Electrical power supply .............................................. 7
Radar and DOT MATRIX keyboard - tractor with EHRC
linkage calculator........................................................ 9
DOT MATRIX keyboard - tractor with Autotronic 5
linkage calculator...................................................... 11
Radar - tractor with Autotronic 5 linkage calculator.. 13
Vistronic ................................................................... 15
Auxiliary hydraulics dipstick...................................... 17
CAN network - Perkins engine ................................. 19
CAN network - SisuDiesel engine with EHRC linkage
calculator .................................................................. 21
CAN network - SisuDiesel engine with Autotronic 5
linkage calculator...................................................... 23
¤ H
Harness parts list

FAI 01 Engine harness
FAI 02 Instrument panel harness
FAI 03 Console harness
FAI 06 Transmission harness
FAI 48 DynaVT console harness

CAB16 DOT MATRIX control keyboard
CAB31 Display change control knob
ENG33 Vistronic
TR27 Radar
TR35 Auxiliary hydraulics oil gauge
2 Fuse box
Colour reminder
N: Black
M: Brown
R: Red
B: White
J: Yellow
V: Green
¤ H
Electrical power supply
31
68 46
45 24
23 1
CAB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CAB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
FAI 02
BAF9.3/CAB1.1 R BAF7.8/CAB1.68 M
CAB28
CAB28.1/CAB1.23 N
1
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 8
10 6 4 2
F51-15A
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF9 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BAF7
F4-10A
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1 3 5 7 9
+12V AP. CONTACT 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 16 2 4 6 8 10
F4- 10A
X2
F51 - 15A
+12V BATTERIE 1
X4
MA-11-01326A
2 2
¤ H
Harness parts list

FAI 128Linkage with Dual Control harness
FAI 130DynaVT transmission harness

ENG33 Vistronic
TR27 Radar
2 Fuse box
Colour reminder
N: Black
M: Brown
R: Red
B: White
J: Yellow
V: Green
¤ H
Radar and DOT MATRIX keyboard - tractor with EHRC linkage calculator
TR1
1
ENG1
2
CAB1
CAB1 1
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
TR27
9 0 TR27
3
10
1 4
TR27.1/TR1.1 N
12 2 5 1
13 ENG10.6/TR27.2 B
14
15
3
FAI 01 6
16 5 8
17 CAB1.18/S20.1 B S20 6 9
7 10
19
20
21
8 11 FAI 06
22 12 12
23 0
24
26 2
27 S20.1/ENG1.23 B ENG1.23/ENG10.6 B
28
3
29 4
30 5
TR
7
8
FAI 02 9
0
39
31 31 CAB50 1 5 6
40
41
1
CAB50
43
44
45
46
47
48
1 2
50
51 FAI 04 FAI 31
CAB51.1/S2.1 R S2 CAB50.15/S2.1 R
53
10 15 54
5
55
20
56
57
RPM x 100
0 25 58
60
61
62
63
64
1 2 3 5
65
67
68
CAB15 1 2 CAB31
FAI 03 FAI 48
1 2
S5.1/CAB31.1 R S5
B
CAB15.3/CAB16.7
CAB15.5/CAB16.3
CAB15.6/CAB16.5
CAB15.7/CAB16.4
BAF12.1/CAB51.1 R
CAB1.52/CAB31.2 B
FAI 02 2
BAF12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F4- 10A
10
9
8 X2
7 F22 - 10A
12 11 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
BAF8.5/S +APC
F22
BAF8
F4
CAB16
2 MA-11-01228A
¤ H
Harness parts list


ENG33 Vistronic
TR27 Radar
2 Fuse box
Colour reminder
N: Black
M: Brown
R: Red
B: White
J: Yellow
V: Green
¤ H
DOT MATRIX keyboard - tractor with Autotronic 5 linkage calculator
CAB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F22
20
21
22
23
CAB31
CAB01 24
25
26
27
28
29
30
46
24
1
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40 2 1 CAB31
41 1 2
42
R
43
44
S5.1/CAB31.1
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
CAB1.52/CAB31.2 B 9 7 5 3 1 10
53 10 8 6 4 2 9
54 8
55
56 7 F22 - 10A X2
57 6
58 S5 BAF8.5/S5.1 R
59
5 1 +APC
4
68
23
45
60
61 3
62
63
FAI02 2
64 1
65
66
67
BAF8
68
MA-10-06045A
CAB15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
5 6 7
CAB16
4
CAB15.1/CAB16.1 B
1 2 3
1
CAB15.4/CAB16.2 B
2
CAB15.5/CAB16.3 B
3
CAB15.7/CAB16.4 B
4
CAB15.6/CAB16.5 B
5
CAB15.2/CAB16.6 B
6
CAB15.3/CAB16.7 B
7
8 CAB16
9
6 5 4 3 2 1 10
7 8 9 10 11 12 11
12
¤ H
Harness parts list


ENG33 Vistronic
TR27 Radar
2 Fuse box
Colour reminder
N: Black
M: Brown
R: Red
B: White
J: Yellow
V: Green
¤ H
Radar - tractor with Autotronic 5 linkage calculator
CAB01
1 1
2 2
3
4
3
4
CAB01
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
S24 CAB1.18/S24.1 B
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
TR31 1 31 20 32 32
20 31
30 8 21
21 8 30 ENG1 19 9
33 33
9 19
10 2 18
29
18
7
2
3
10
22
34 34
22 3 7 29 31 31 17 1 11 35 35
11 1 17
28 6 4 23
23 4 6 28 30 30 16 5 12 36 36
12 5 16
13 15 29 29 27
15
14
13
24 37 37
24 14 27
28
FAI06
26
25 26 28 25
38 38
27 27 39 39
26 26 40 40
ENG10 25 25 41 41
24 24 42 42
1 1 ENG1.23/ENG10.6 B S24.1/ENG1.23 B
45
23
68
23 23 43 43
2 2 22 22 44 44
TR27 3 3 21 21 45 45
4 4 20
TR27.1/TR31.1 N ENG10.5/S1.1 R S7.1/ENG10.5 R S7 20 46 46
1 5 5
TR27.2/ENG10.6 B 19 19 47 47
2 6 6 18
TR27 3
S1.1/TR27.3 R S1
7 7 17
18
17
48
49
48
49
4 8 8 16 16 50 50
9 9
10 10 FAI01 15
14
15 FAI02 51 51
14 52 52
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 11 6 5 4 3 2 1
13 13 53 53
12 11 10 9 8 7 12 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 12 54 54
4 3 2 1 11 11 55 55
ENG10
10 10 56 56
9 9 57 57
ENG1.8/S7.1 R BAF7.7/ENG1.8 B
8 8 58 58
7 7

Manual Reparatie Massey Ferguson-8400

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual Reparatie Massey Ferguson-8400

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Massey Ferguson 8400

Workshop service manual

07 - Power take off

12 - Cab and equipment

AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France September 2005

September 2005 AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France

Massey Ferguson 8400 Contents - i

Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 8400

A . Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

G . Retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 01A01.1

01A01.2 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b

Tractor safety features may be impaired if non-genuine

The issue number is indicated at the bottom of the page.

Repairs and replacements

Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 01A01.3

Automated power yes

Front power take-off no

Rear axle Couplers decompression

Model HA 200 Electronics

Drive units Epicyclic Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 4

Wheel shaft Ø 110 Instrument panel DCC2

Reduction ratio 8.25 Linkage calculator Auto5

Brake discs per trumpet 6 Draft sensors 2

Type Interchangeable shaft

Number of clutch discs 6

Power take-off brake mechanical

01A01.4 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b

8460model Front power take-off no

Model AG 210 (750/522): 15.75

ISO power (Kw) 173 Type fixed

Trademark SISU EEM Rotational direction anti-clockwise

Type 74 ETA Number of clutch discs 6

Number of cylinders / 6 / 7.4 Fender (4WD) optional

Type Interchangeable shaft

Number of clutch discs 6

Power take-off brake mechanical

Automated power yes

Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 01A01.5

8470model Front power take-off no

Model AG 280 (760/521): 16.8

ISO power (Kw) 191 Type fixed

Trademark SISU EEM Rotational direction anti-clockwise

Type 84ETA Number of clutch discs 6

Number of cylinders / 6 / 8.4 Fender (4WD) optional

Type Interchangeable shaft

Number of clutch discs 6

Power take-off brake mechanical

Automated power yes

01A01.6 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b

8480model Front power take-off no

Model AG 280 (760/521): 16.8

ISO power (Kw) 213 Type fixed

Trademark SISU EEM Rotational direction anti-clockwise

Type 84 ETA Number of clutch discs 6

Number of cylinders / 6 / 8.4 Fender (4WD) optional

Type Interchangeable shaft

Number of clutch discs 6

Power take-off brake mechanical

Automated power yes

Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b 01A01.7

Range Forward Reverse

01A01.8 Massey Ferguson 8400 - Issue 1.b